(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Bulletin of the New York Mathematical Society"

Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http : //books . google . com/| 





I 



-» V ^ 



h^\' 




M^w \onK 



AJATnEMATlCAL SOCIETY: 



Of MAI'MiniAI'Ct Al. Si-IfcXciE. 



^ ' " i. .NO, I. 



BULLETIN OF THE 



NEW YORK 



MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY. 



A Historical and Critical Review 
OF Mathematical Science. 



EDITED BT 

Thomas S. Fiske and Harold Jacoby 

GOMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION. 



VOL. I. 

October 1891 to July 1892. 



NEW YORK: 

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 

41 East 49th Street. 

1892. 



PreM of J. J. Little A Co. 
Afltor Place, New York 



t - 

z 



w 



• •!• ••;•••• • 

•• '•• •^^ ••• ••• • • ^ 0^ ^0^ fw — ^ 

• •*••*••*•••••••• ^ o 3) 1 -iD 



• •• «••••• ••••••• •• •. •••••• -,••• •• • •••• 

• •• • ••••! • •••;• • • • .• • ••!• • • • •• 

• •• •••••*.• ••/••••• r« »••,•••• • • 

• • •• ••• • *•* •• •• •• *•* •••* •• •••••••( 

• • «•« «•• •••• •• • ^ • • 

' 0* %• ••••••.•• • 



-•• • ••• •" • •' • ••' 



PREFACE. 

In presenting this^ the first volame of the Bulletin of 
THE New York Mathematical Society, the editors feel 
that they should express their deep sense of the obligation 
under which the encouragement and active assistance of the 
members of the Society have placed them. The interest which 
the Journal has excited, both in this country and abroad, 
shows how real is the need of a historical and critical journal, 
devoted to mathematical science, and published in the Eng- 
lish language. It is to be hoped that in the future the Bul- 
letin may be able to extend its work, and ever the more 
adequately occupy the field which it is its aim to cover. 



LIST OF PUBLISHED PAPERS 

BEAD BBFOBE THE NEW YOBK MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY, 
TOGETHEB WITH PLACE OF PUBLICATION. 

B0CHEB9 Maxime. Gollineation as a Mode of Motion. Bul- 
letin of the New York Mathematical Society, toI. i., 
pp. 225-231, July, 1892. 

Ekgleb, Edmund A. A Geometrical Construction for Find- 
ing the Foci of the Sections of a Cone of BeToIution. 
Transactions of the Academy of Science of St. Louis, 
vol. VI., pp. 49-65, April, 1892. 

Fisee, Thomas S. Weierstrass's Elliptic Integral. Annals 
of Mathematics, vol. vi., pp. 7-11, June, 1891. 
On the Doubly Infinite R^ucts. Bulletin of the New 
York Mathematical Society, vol. i., pp. 61-66, Dec, 
1891. 

Jacobt, Harold. On the Determination of Azimuth by 
Elongations of Polaris. Monthly Notices of the Royal 
Astronomical Society, jpp. 106-113, Dec., l691. 

Macfablakb, Alexander. On Exact Analvsis as the Basis 
of Language. Bulletin of the New York Mathemati- 
cal Society, vol. i., pp. 189-193, May, 1892. 

McOlintock, ifimory. On the Algebraic Proof of a Certain 
Series. American Journal of Mathematics, vol. xiv., 
pp. 67-71, Oct., 1891. 

On Independent Definitions of the Functions log x 
and ^. American Journal of Mathematics, vol. xiv., 
pp. 72-86, Oct., 1891. 

Mebbiman, Mansfield. Final Formulas for the Solution of 
Quartic Equations. Bulletin of the New York Mathe- 
matical Society, vol. i., pp. 20S-205, June, 1892. 

Pupisr, M. I. On a Peculiar Family of Complex Harmonics. 
Transactions of the American Institute of Electrical 
Engineers, vol. viii., pp. 579-585, Dec, 1891. 

Steinmetz, Charles P. Multivdent and Univalent Involu- 
tory Correspondences in a Plane Determined by a Net 
of Curves of the n-ih. Order. American Journal of 
Mathematics, vol. xiv., pp. 39-66, Oct., 1891. 
On the Curves which are Self-reciprocal in a Linear 
Kul-system, and their Configurations in Space. Amer- 
ican Journal of Mathematics, vol. xiv., pp. 161-186, 
April, 1892. 

Stbinoham, Irving. A Classification of Logarithmic Sys- 
tems. American Journal of Mathematics, vol. xiv., 
pp. 187-194, April, 1892. 



BULLETIl^ OF THE 



NEW YORK MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY 



OCTONART NUMERATION, 

BY PROP. W. WObLSBT JOHNSON. 

The comparatively small progress toward universal accept- 
ance made by the metric system seems to bo dne not alto- 
gether to aversion to a change of units, but also to a sort of 
irrepressible conflict between the decimal and binary systems 
of subdivision. 

Before the introduction of decimal fractions, about 1585, 
no connection would be felt to exist between the established 
scale of numeration and the method of subdividing physical 
units, and it would probably never occur to any one to sub- 
divide a unit into tenths. The natural method is to bisect 
again and again. The mechanic prefers to divide the inch 
into halves, quarters, eighths, and sixteenths. The retailer 
of dry goods, whose unit is the yard, divides it into halves, 
quarters, and eighths, totally ignoring the inch. The mar- 
iner not only divides the horizontal angular space in which 
his course is laid down into quarters, thus recognizing the 
right angle as the natural unit,* but divides the space be- 
tween the cardinal points of the compass into halves, quarters, 
and eighths. Where decimal money has been introduced 
quarters are insisted on in spite of their inconsistency with 
tne decimal system. We are compelled to coin quarter dol- 
lars, and prices are very commonly c[uoted in eighths and even 
sixteenths of a dollar. Great Britain is compelled to coin 
eighths of a pound sterling, though half a crown contains a 
fraction of a shilling. The French divide the litre into 
quarters. The broker expresses prices in halves, quarters, 
and eighths of one per cent. 

This irrepressible conflict would, of course, never have 

* The uncompromising advocate of the metric sjrstem will not content 
himself with the centesimal division of the degree, but insists upon the 
centesimal division of the quadrant, although it is difficult to see now the 
latter could possess any advantage in the way of facilitating numerical 
computations. But why do they not go further and advocate the centesi- 
mal division of the whole circumference ? 



2 OCTONARY NUMERATION. 

existed, but all would have been harmouy, if the radix of our 
system of numeration had been a power of two. Mr. Alfred 
S. Taylor published in 1887 a very interesting pamphlet on 
"Octonary Numeration/' being a paper read before the 
American Philosophical Society. After an extended review 
of the question, with many interesting historical notes, he 
argues in favor of the octonary system, and then proceeds to 
** develop the scale of notation thus selected, and to derive 
from it an ideal system of weights and measures/' 

This is not the place to consider the merits of a system 
of weights and measures ; we propose therefore to consider 
only the theoretical merits of the octonary system. We regret 
that in his ingenious paper Mr. Taylor has caused his system 
to wear an outlandish look by employing new names, not only 
for his units of weights and measures, out also for the num- 
bers from one to eight, and even new characters for the seven 
digits. We see no necessity for changing the characters or 
the names of the digits, although it would bo necessary, in 
order to avoid the use of an old name in a new meaning, to 
replace the suffix -ty by a new one to denote the second place 
fwhich Mr. Taylor, havingchanged the names of the digits, 
aid not find necessary). Wo might use the suffix -ate — thus 
the octonary 40 would be read, jourate, that is, four eights ; 
66 would bo Teadfivate-six, that is five eights and six. 

The only advantage of a large radix, qud large, over a 
smaller one is in diminishing the number of figi^^es reauired 
on the average to express a given number. The number of 
figures is inversely as the logarithm of the radix ; and, in 
passing from the mdix ten to the radix eight, it increases only 
in the ratio of 10 : 9. The ratio increases rapidly for smaller 
radices, until for the binary system it becomes 10 : 3, as com- 
pared with the denary, and 3 : 1 as compared with the octonary 
system. To set against this we have, m favor of the smaller 
rJftdix, the simplicity due to dispensing with superfluous char- 
acters ; but of far more importance is the simplifying of the 
multiplication table. For example, the octonary multiplica- 
tion table stands thus : 



1 


2 


3 


4 


6 


6 


7 


2 


4 


6 


10 


12 


14 


16 


3 


6 


11 


14 


17 


22 


25 


4 


10 


14 


20 


24 


30 


34 


5 


12 


17 


24 


31 


30 


43 


6 


14 


22 


30 


36 


44 


52 


7 


16 


25 


34 


43 


52 


61 



In. comparing the labor with which this table could be 
committed to memory with that required by the denary 



OCTONABY NUMERATION'. 8 

table^ it would seem fair to disregard in both cases not only 
the line and column corresponding to 1 (although our Ger- 
man friends insist upon ein mal eins), but also those cor- 
responding to 2 and to half the radix, on account of their 
simplicity. Thus the difficulty would be about as 6^ to 4* ; 
indeed, it seems safe to say that the difficulty experienced by 
children in acquiring the multiplication table, and that of 
older people in retaining it in a condition fresh enough to 
be used without an effort of thought, would be reduced more 
than one-half even by this slight decrease in the magnitude 
of the radix. 

For a further decrease of radix, the difficulty of the mul- 
tiplication table decreases rapidly : for the binary system no 
multiplication table exists, but even for the radix four the 
difficulty has practically disappeared. 

But this advantage of a very small radix is, as mentioned 
above, attended by a rapid increase in the number of figures 
required to express a given number ; and the inconvenience 
arising from this source has, we think, been frequently under- 
estimated. Binary arithmetic, in which the characters 1 and 
alone are used, has even been proposed by some enthusiasts 
as a substitute for logarithmic computation. Mr. Taylor, in 
commenting upon this system, after mentioning the absence 
of tables to be committed to and retained in the memory, 
says: ** Every form of calculation would be resolved into 
simple numeration and notation. In fact, calculation as an 
effort of mathematical thought might be said to be entirely 
dispensed with, and the labor of the brain to be all trans- 
ferred to the eye and hand. A perfect familiarity with the 
notation of the scale, and with the simple rales of position, 
would enable the operator to determine in every case by mere 
inspection, whether the next figure should be a 1 or a 0. It 
follows that the only errors possible in such a work would 
be the merely clerical ones of the eye or hand; ♦ * * 
and it may well be doubted whether, in all important and 
lengthy calculations, the binary system would not be found 
to afford a real economy of labor, instead of an increase as 
has been generally supposed. '' 

Now it is to be remarked that the number of figures used 
in calculation would increase at a rate much greater than 
that of the number of figures used in expressing results. For 
example, in performing a multiplication in the binaiy nota- 
tion, the number of figures to be written down (after making 
due allowance for the greater proportion saved by the occur- 
rence of ciphers in the multiplier) would bo about five times, 
instead of three times, the number occurring in the same 
operation performed in the octonary notation. 

Again^ whenever the columns to be added are of consider- 



4 OCTONABY KUMEBATION. 

able length their summation, though executed by mere count- 
ing and the determination of the numbers " to carry/* would 
require fixed attention, and inyolve liability to error ; so 
much so, that the words we have itah'cized in the quotation 
appear hardly iustified. The numbers to carry would be 
inconveniently large, especially if mentally expressed in the 
binary system. Indeed, counting in this system would 
obyiously be very much more liable to error than in the 
denary (or in the octonary) system, which gives highly dis- 
tinctive names to all such numbers as have to be carried in 
the mind in the course of calculation. 

The same objection exists, though to a less degree, to the 
(quaternary system, so that the labor of accurate calculation 
in this system, although perhaps less than in the denary sys- 
tem, would probably exceed that which would be required in 
the octonary s;^stem. 

The conclusion appears to be inevitable that, considering 
only the two features which depend upon the mere size of 
the radix, ten is decidedly too large and four too small a 
radix, so that the ideal radix in this respect is about six 
or eight. 

Passing now to the intrinsic character of the ra(}ix, it is 
desirable that the radix should be divisible by simple factors. 
Thus it is universally admitted that an uneven radix would 
be quite out of the question. It is indispensable for a multi- 
tude of purposes that even the least instructed persons should 
be familiar with the distinction between even and uneven 
numbers, and able to recognize at a glance to which class a 
given number belongs. It was formerly the custom to extol 
twelve as an ideal radix, because of its divisibility by two, 
three, four, and six. Divisibility by three, although incom- 
parably less important than divisibility by two, would no 
doubt be a great convenience, much more so than divisi- 
bility by five ; but it is doubtful whether much weight 
should be given to divisibility of the first power of the 
radix by four, so long as wo do not adopt a purely binary 
system (that is, two or a power of two for radix). We 
ought rather to consider only the prime factors of the radix, 
so that six would possess all the advantages of twelve, and 
since on the other score twelve is far too largo a radix, six 
would be far preferable to it. (The number oi figures used 
to express a given number would for six exceed that for 
twelve only in the ratio 7:5, and would exceed that for ten 
onlv in the ratio 9:7.) 

Against this advantage of divisibility by different i>rime 
factors we have to set the advantages of a purely binary 
system. Theoretical considerations here point in the same 
direction as the practical ones rehearsed in the first part of 



OOTONARY KUMBRATION. 5 

this paper. Owing to the unique character of the number two, 
it mast be admitted that the expression of a given number 
in powers of two gives a better notion of its intrinsic character 
than expression in powers of any other number. Accordingly 
the binary system has always been regarded as theoretically 
the ideal system, although for practical purposes the great 
number of figures used in expressing numbers is an msu- 
perable objection. Now it is to be noticed that if the radix 
IS a power of two, we have virtually all the advantages of the 
binary system. For example, if we have a number expressed 
in the octonary system, we have only to substitute for the 
characters 0, 1, 2, .... 7 their binary equivalents 000, 001, 
010, 111 to obtain the number in the binaiy system. 

The digital expression of a number in the octonary system 
would be much more suggestive of its intrinsic nature than 
expression in any non-binary system, for the highest power 
of two contained as a factor m a number is its most important 
characteristic. Again the distinction between numbers of the 
form ^n + 1 and those of the form 4;i + 3 is of great import- 
ance in the theory of numbers, and in the octonary system it 
would be obvious at a glance to which of these classes a given 
uneven number belongs. So also with the distinction between 
** evenly even '* and ** unevenly even " numbers. It is inter- 
esting also to note that the square of every uneven number 
would end in 1, the preceding figures expressing a triangular 
number. Thus the uneven squares in octonary notation are 
1, 11, 31, 61, 121.... 

We have seen above that, if divisibility by another prime 
factor besides two bo regarded as the paramount desideratum, 
six would be preferable to ten as a radix. But the tests of 
divisibility by small divisors (such as the familiar one for nine 
or three) would always to a great extent serve the same purpose 
as the divisibility of the radix. These tests depend upon the 
lowest value of n for which r" — 1 or r" + 1 (r being the radix) 
is divisible by the divisor in question ; and they consist in 
reducing the given number to one of n places which will 
give the same remainder when divided by the given divisor. 
This is done in the firat case by the addition of periods of n 
figures each, beginning with the units ; and in the second 
case, by the addition oi periods of 2n figures, followed by sub- 
traction of the second period of n figures from the first. For 
example, with the radix ten we can test for each of the divi- 
sors seven, eleven, and thirteen, which are factors of 10* + 1, 
by reducing to six places by addition of periods of six, and 
then to three places by subtraction of the figures represent- 
ing thousands from the first or unit period of three figures. 

Let us see how the matter would stand in the octonaiy sys- 
tem. For seven we should add all the digits^ and for mne 



6 TEACHING OF QEOMETRY IN GERMAN SCHOOLS. 

(and therefore for three) we should add by periods of two. 
Again since 8' + 1 = 6 x 13, wo should test for five and 
thirteen (or oneate-five) by reducing to four figures by addi- 
tion, and then to two figures by subtraction. Among small 
primes, eleven is the least adapted to the octonary system, 
but for this divisor we might convert the given number to the 
binary system, then reduce to ten figures by addition, and to 
five by subtraction (since 2* + 1 = 3 x 11), and finally recon- 
vert into an octonary number of two digits. 

As there is no doubt that onr ancestors originated the deci- 
mal system by counting on their fingers, we must, in view of 
the merits of the octonary system, feel profound regret that 
they should have perversely counted their thumbs, although 
nature had differentiated them from the fingers sufiScieutly, 
she might have thought, to save the race from this error. 



THE TEACHING OF ELEMENTARY GEOMETRY 

IN GERMAN SCHOOLS. 

Inhalt und Methode des planimetriachen Unterrichts. Eine 
verglcichende Planimetrie. Voo Dr. Heinrich Schotten. Leip- 
zig, B. G. Teubner, 1890. 8vo, pp. iv. + 870. 

Whoever has followed the efforts of the Association for 
the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching in England in 
the course of the last ten years will have been struck by the 
slowness of the progress made and the paucity of the practical 
results attained. In Germany there exists no such society ; 
but a powerful agitation for the reform of geometrical teacn- 
ing has been in progress there for at least sixty years, ard 
with particular force during the last two decades. And yet, 
even from Germany, with its well developed and highly 
centralized system of education, comes the complaint that 
progress is slow and much remains to bo done. 

Recent statistics have shown, in particular, that the most 
widely used text-books are far from being the best. Thus, 
while Hubert Miiller^s Geometry, which may be regarded as 
the best representative of the ** modern school, '' reached its 
•third edition in 1889, after a lapse of fifteen years from its 
first appearance, Kambly^s very inferior text-book, whose 
faults and mistakes have frequently been exposed and com- 
plained of, appeared in 1884 in its 74th edition. 

This book of Kambly's easily leads in the list of text-books 
used in various schools ; it is adopted in 217 schools, the 
next in order being another rather inferior book^ by Koppe, 



TBACHIKQ OF GEOMETRY IN GERMAN SCHOOLS. 7 

introduced in 51 schools ; then follow Mehler's, nsed in 44, 
Beidt's in 29, etc., while there are 55 mathematical text- 
hooks used in bat one school each. Similar statistics for onr 
American schools would be both interesting and instructive. 

Still the signs of improvement are not wanting. Some 
very good text-books of geometry have been published in 
recent years and are making, though slowly, their way to 
the front; preparatory CpropsBdeutic '') courses in 'in- 
tuitive '' geometry in connection with geometrical drawing 
have been introduced in many schools, and are generally 
recommended by the school boards ; excellent classified and 
graded collections of problems have appeared and are in 
actual use ; and, above all, the whole subject of the improve- 
ment of geometrical teaching has been ventilated and dis- 
cussed with great thoroughness and completeness. 

In this last respect the work done by Honmann's Zeitschrift^ 
cannot be estimated too highly, 'fhe volumes of this jour- 
nal, specially devoted to the discussion of scientific instruc- 
tion in the secondary schools, are replete with material for 
the study of this question, the editor himself being one of 
the principal contributors. It is to be hoped that the Bul- 
letin of the New York Mathematical Society may, in the 
course of time, perform a similar service towards the improve- 
ment of mathematical instruction in this country. 

On the other hand, the custom of many German schools 
of publishing scientific and educational essays in connection 
with the school calendar {^^Programm^') has given a wel- 
come opportunity to many experienced teachers to express 
their ideas on the subject and to propose improvements. 

The material that has grown up in this way is somewhat 
bewildering in extent, and, moreover, not very readv of access 
to American students. A full set of Hoffmann's ieitnchrift 
is probably to be found in but very few libraries in this coun- 
try; many of the older ^^Frogrdmme" are hard to obtain; 
and of the legion of German text-books of geometry that 
have appeared during the present century only a very small 
number, of course, have found their way into American 
libraries. 

The attempt made by Dr. Schotten to sum up the results 
of the various efforts of reform in geometrical teaching in 
the secondary schools and to give a critical survey of the 
literature of this subject, will therefore be welcomed by all 
interested in elementary geometrical instruction. 

The title of Dr. Schotten's work is perhaps somewhat mis- 
leading, as it does not indicate that his study is confined 

♦ J. C. V. Hoffmann's Zeitachrift f^r rruUhemcUiaclien und naturuns- 
senschaftlichen Unterrichi, published by Teubner, Leipzig. 



8 TEACHING OF GEOMBTBY IK GEBMAlSr SCHOOLS. 

entirely to German books and papers. Nor is there any 
indication on the title-page that the present yolume is only a 
first instalment of the work ; a second yolume is announced 
in the preface and on the last page of the book, but even this 
would not seem to exhaust the subject. 

There is no table of contents, and no general index, a 
serious defect in a work of this kind, which may perhaps be 
remedied in the second volume. The book is of course made 
up in a large measure of quotations, interspersed with critical 
remarks by the author ; unfortunately, tne arrangement is 
far from convenient, and in some instances very awkward. 
In general, however, the author has well accomplished his 
exceedingly laborious task. He shows a thorougn acquaint- 
ance with the literature of his subject, as well as good judg- 
ment and discrimination in making nse of it. 

In an introductory essay. Dr. Schotten briefly states his 
views on what is desirable m the way of reform. He sustains 
these views, which are not over radical, not so much by argu- 
ment as by a large array of quotations from various sources. 
They may therefore be taken to fairly represent the better 
thought of the day on the subject, at least in Germany. 

It may be of interest to give a short account of these fun- 
damental principles in teaching geometry which have found 
the approval of so large a body of experienced and well- 
trained teachers. 

The study of mathematics in the Oymnasium should begin 
with geometry (in Tertia, i. e., in the fourth and fifth years 
of the whole nine-year course), being followed by algebra in 
Secunda (also two years), while the lust two years {Prima) 
are reserved for trigonometry and a thorough review of the 
whole course. There is no urgent demand for increasing the 
exte^it of* mathematical instruction ; but what is taught should 
be taught well, that is, with thoroughness and accuracy. The 
object of mathematical teaching in the Gymnasium is not to 
form mathematicians, but to improve the mind, not only by 
training in logical thinking, but oy accustoming the student 
to precision of language in writing and speaking, by awaken- 
ing his self-activity through the solution of problems, and in 
the case of geometry in particular, by forming and practising 
the power oi mental intuition {^^Anschauuna'*). 

These objects, however, cannot be attained by the so-called 
Euclidean method of teaching geometry. While Euclid's 
arrangement of the propositions has long been abandoned in 
German text-books, his synthetic method of proof is still 
retained in many books. Here reform is most peremptory. 

The *^ genetic " method should pervade the whole course ; 
that is to say, the student should be led up in a natural way 
to each proposition, so as to see clearly its connection with 



TEACHIli^O OF OEOMETBY IK OEBHAK SCHOOLS. 9 

what precedes, and finally conceiye of ifc, not as a single 
artificial experiment in reasoning, but as an essential member 
of an organic whole. 

The proof of a proposition should be obtained by what the 
Grermans call the "heuristic*' method, i.e., by the process 
that would naturally be adopted by any one trying to jind the 
proof himself anew. A "synthetic reconstruction of the 
proof may finally be added in some cases. 

Frequent reyiews are of course required to keep the student 
constantly aliye to the conyiction that he is studying a well-^ 
connected system, and not a mass of detached single tacts. 

The introduction of some of the ideas of modern projectiye 
geometry (symmetry, dualism, theory of rows and pencils, 
correspondences, etc.) will be found a great help in building 
up a natural system of geometry. But whereyer used, these 
ideas must be closely interwoyen with the whole system ; it is 
decidedly objectionable to merely put these matters into an 
appendix at the end of the book us is sometimes done. 

There is howeyer a fundamental diflBculty in introducing 
the ideas of projectiye geometry into elementary teachings 
It lies in the fact that the circle is the only curyeS line con- 
sidered in ordinary elementary geometry, while in modern 
geometry the circle appears as a yery special case of a conic 
section.* This circumstance will indicate how far we may 
go in applying the methods of modem geometry to an ele- 
mentary course, provided the study of the conic sections 
be excluded. 

Let us now turn to the main body of Dr. Schotten's 
work. It is divided into five chapters : (1) Space, (2) Geom- 
etry, (3) The Space-Forms (solid, surface, line, point), (4) 
The Plane, (5) The Straight Line. In a second yolume the 
author promises to treat in a similar way of (1) Direction 
and Distance; position of points, lines, and circles in their 
mutual relations ; metrical relations ; (2) The Axiom of 
Parallel Lines (Eucl. XI.); (3) The Angle; (4) Auxiliary 
Geometrical Ideas, such as equality, motion, dimension, con- 
cept, definition, proof, explanation, postulate, theorem, 
axiom, form, magnitude, position, figure, locus, symmetry, 
etc. ; (5) Method. 

The author prefaces each chapter by a brief statement of 
his own views, and then follow quotations from all those text- 
books or other works that express any original ideas on the 
subject of the chapter. Comments by the author on these 
quotations are usually giyen in foot-notes. But it must be 

♦ See 0. Rausenbheoer. Elementargeometrie dea Punktes, der Oera- 
den und der Ebene, systemaliach und kritisch hehandeU. Leipzig, 
Teubner, 1887, pp. 2-8. 



10 TEACHING OF OEOMETBT IK GEBMAK SCHOOLS. 

said that the whole is not sufficiently well digested, and it 
requires some labor (which the aathor might have spared the 
reader) to get at the final results. 

It will not be necessary to pass in review here the manifold 
and widely different views of the fundamental conceptions of 
geometry collated in Dr, Schotten's book. 

The tendency in Germany seems to be at present to escape 
as far as possible the hidden dangers that await the teacher 
at the very threshold of geometry in the definitions of such 
ideas as space, geometry, the point, the plane, etc., by two 
means : (1) by requiring a preparatory course in geometrical 
drawing in which the student shoald become thoroughly 
familiar, in a practical way, with the fundamental geomet- 
rical ideas ; (2) by a strict adherence to Pascal's rules. 

As these rules do not seem to be as widely known as thev 
deserve to be,* they are here transcribed in full from Pascal s 
essay, ^^ DeVesprit giomiirique.''\ 

Bules for definitions. — " 1. N'entreprendre de dfefinir au- 
cune des choses tellement connues d'elles-m^mes, qu'on n'ait 
point de termes plus clairs pour les explicnuer. 2. jS^'omettre 
qucun des termes un pen obscurs ou equivoques, sans defini- 
tion. 3. N'employer dans la definition des termes que des 
mots parfaitement connns, ou d^jd. expliqu6s." 

Eules for axioms. — "1. N'omettre aucun des principes 
n6cessaires sans avoir demand^ si on I'accorde, quelque clair 
et evident qu*il puisse etre. 2. Ne demander, en axiomes, 
que des choses parfaitement ^videntes d'elles-m6nies.*' 

Bules for demonstrations. — '* 1. N*entreprendre de demon- 
trer aucune des choses qui sont tellement 6videntes d'elles- 
m^mes qu'on n'ait rien de plus clair pour les prouver. 2. 
Prouver toutes les propositions un pen obscures, et n'em- 
ployer d leur preuve que des axiomes tr^s-6vidents, ou des 
propositions deid accord^es ou demontrees. 3. Substituer 
toujours mentalement les definitions k la place des definis, 
pour ne pas se tromper par Fequivoque des termes que les 
definitions ont restremts.' 

Thus, conformably to Pascal's first rule on definitions, we 
find that some of the best German text-books do not try at all 
to define what is space, or what is a point, or even what is a 
straight line. 

Strange as it may appear to some teachers, these text- 
books do not begin with several pages of definitions to be 
committed to memory, followed by a page of axioms again to 
be committed to memory. Nor are the demonstrations made 

* Dr. Schotten, while quoting them somewhat inaccurately in trans- 
lation, says that he does not know in what work of Pascars they occur, 
t Pascal, Penaies, ed. Havet, Paris, Delagrave, 1888, pp. 655-566. 



TEACHING OF GEOMETRY IIST GEBMi^T SCHOOLS. 11 

to cover exactly a whole page when they can be expressed in a 
line. Some oi these authors, although well acquainted with 
synthetic, and even with non-Euclidean geometry, do not at all 
aohor the use of the expressions " direction '* and " distance.^* 
Indeed, Dr. Schotten regards these two ideas as intuitivelj 
given in the mind and as so simple as not to require defini- 
tion ; he therefore bases the definition of the straight line 
on these two ideas, or rather recommends to elucidate the 
intuitive idea of the straight line possessed by any well- 
balanced mind by means of the still simpler ideas of direction 
and distance. 

It is interesting to compare these views deduced by Dr. 
Schotten mainly with regard to their pedagogical value, and 
as a result of practical experience in teaching, with the con- 
clusions arrived at by Prof. G. Peano* from a purely scientific 
1)oint of view and based on the principles of mathematical 
ogic. 

A more philosophical discussion of the foundations of geom- 
etry is reserved in the German schools to the review course 
in the Prima of the Oymnasium, Then only will the student 
be able to appreciate to a certain degree the niceties involved 
in a careful treatment of the fundamental definitions and 
axioms of geometry. 

It is to oe hoped that Dr. Schotten will continue his studies 
in German ** comparative planimetry," and that his second 
volume will not be deferred ad calendas grcBcas. It would 
also seem desirable that somebody should give us a similar 
account of what has been done in other countries in the same 
direction, in particular in England, France, and Italy. 

In conclusion, the following two text-books might be men- 
tioned, out of a large number of others, as giving a fair idea 
of the reform movement in Germany : 

Hubert Miller, Leitfaden der ehenen Geometrie, Leipzig, 
Teubner, 1889 ; 

Henrici and Treutlein, Lehrhnch der Elementar-Oeo- 
metrie, ib., 1881. 

For the more scientific study of the questions involved, the 
reader is referred to the following works, in which ample 
bibliographical references will be found : 

Otto Rausenberger, Die Elementargeometrie des Punk- 
teSy der Geraden und der Ebene, Leipzig, Teubner, 1887. 

Bekno Erdmann, Die Axiome der Geometrie, Leipzig, 
1877. 

ScHMiTZ - DuMONT, Die mathematischen Elemente der 
Erkenntnistheorie, Berlin, 1878. 

«See Riviita di MaUmatica, ed. by Peano, Turin, vol. I. (1891). 
pp. 24-25. 



12 PICARD'S DEMONSTRATIOlSr. 

J. C. Becker^ Ahhandlungen aus dem Grenzgehieie der 
Mathematik und Philosophie. Zurich, 1870. 

Alexander Ziwet. 

Akit Abbob, August 1, 1891. 



PICARD'S DEMONSTRATION OP THE GENERAL 
THEOREM TIPON THE EXISTENCE OP 
INTEGRALS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL 
EQUATIONS. 

TRANSLATED BT DR. THOMAS S. FISKE. 

The cardinal proposition in the theory of algebraic equa- 
tionsy that every such equation has a root, holds a place in 
mathematical theory no more important than the correspond- 
ing proposition in the theory or differential equations, that 
every differential equation defines a function expressible by 
means of a convergent series. This proposition was originally 
established by Cauchy, and was introduced, with a somewhat 
simplified demonstration, by Briot and Bouquet in their trea- 
tise on doubly periodic functions.* A new demonstration 
remarkable for its simplicity and brevity has been published 
by M. Emile Picard in the Bulletin de la SociiU MatMmatique 
ae France for March,f and reproduced on account of its strik- 
ing character in the Nouvelles Annales des Mathimatiques for 
May. This demonstration requires no auxiliary propositions, 
and depends upon no preceding part of the theory, except the 
simple consideration, that any ordinary differential equation 
is equivalent to a set of simultaneous equations of the first 
order, t The following is a translation of Picard's demon- 
stration. 

1. Consider the system of n equations of the first order 

du . . V 

^ = /i (a;, 2*, v, . . . , w)y 

dv ^ , V 



dw . , . 



♦ Thiorie desfonetions cUiptiqueSj p. 825. 
Jordan,' Coutb d' analyse, vol. III., p. 87. 

! Bulletin de la Soeiiti MatfUmatique de France, Vol. XIX., p. 61. 
Jordan. Coun d^analysej vol. Hi., p. 4. 



picabd's demokstbatiok. 13 

in which the functions / are continuous real functions of the 
real quantities x, u, v, . . . , w in the neighborhood of x^, Uo, 
r„, . . . , Wo, and have determinate values as long as x, u, v, 
. . . , w remain within the respective intervals 

{x, — a, a:. + a), 
{Uo — hy u. 4- h)y 
(v. — J, V, + h), 
■> 

a and h denoting two positive magnitudes. 

Suppose that n positive quantities A, B, , . . , L can be 
determined in such a manner that 

I / (x, u\ v', . . . , w') - f (x, u, V, . . . y w) \ ^ 

<A\u'—u \+B\v'—v\ + . . . -hLlw'—w], 

in which | a \ denotes as usual the absolute value of a, and 
X, u, V, . . . , w are contained in the indicated intervals. 
This will evidently be the case when the functions/ have 
finite partial derivatives with respect to w, v, . . . , w. 

Starting with these very general hypotheses we will demon- 
strate that there exist functions u, Vy , , . , to of x, continue 
ous in the neighborhood of x^, satisfying the given differential 
equations, and reducing, for x = x^y respectively to Uo, v„ 



> . n w„ 



9 »*'»• 



2. We proceed by successive approximations. Taking first 
the system 

du^ ^ , ^ 



dwx ^ I V 

d^^f- (^* ^«> ^., • • • J ^^J> 



we obtain by quadratures the functions w„ v,, . . . , Wx^ 
determining them in such a manner that they take for x^ the 
values Ucy v„, , . , y w^ Forming then the equations 

dut . f V 

^- =/i {Xy w„ v,, . . . , Wx)y 



dwt ^ f \ 

= fn (Xy Ui, r„ . . . , w?i). 



< 



dx 



14 PICJLKD's D£XOS3imjLD03C 

we determiDe m^ r^ . . . . tr^hT the coodinon tliat tlicT take 
U/r z, the Talaei v^ r^ . . . . r^ respccdrclT. We oonthme 
tbii proeeai indefiDiteh-^ :he fsnctio:^ b^ r^ . . . , r. being 
coDoecud vith the preceding u^^^ r.^^. . . . , r.^ bj tbe 



and, for z^=^ x^ Mtiffring the equations 

«. = w^ r. = r^ . . . , r. = r^ 

We will now prove that when m increases indefinitely, v^ 
9., . . . 9 tr» /«na toward limits which represent the integrals 
sought provided that z remains enfficientfy near z^ 

Let If be the maximnm almoin te Talae of the functions/ 
when tbe Tariables apon which they depend remain between 
tbe indicated limits. Denote by p a quantity at most equal to 
a. If now z remains in the interral 

(x. — p, X. -r p), 
we hare 

I Wi — tt. I < Mp, . . . , I f^i — IT. I < Jfp. 

Hence, provided Jfp < i, the quantities tit, r^ ... , Wi 
remain within the desired limits, and it is evident that the 
same is true of all the other sets of values u, v, . . . , w. 
Denoting by d a quantity at most equal to p, suppose that x 
remains m the interval 

(ar. — 6, X. + 6), 
and write 

«• — w»_i, = U„, . . , , w^ — w^i = W„, ; 
we have, placing m = 2, 3, . . . , «, 
dIL 



dz 



= /l {X, U^xy . . . , Wm-l) — /l (iC, tt«_j, . . . , «?m-2). 



dW 



(/X 



picabd's demonstration. 15 

Since 

\U^\ <M6, ...,\W^\<Md, 

the preceding equations, for m = 2, show that | Z7i | , | F2 1 , 
. . . , I ITa I are less than 

(-4 + 5+ ... +L)M6\ 

Continuing step by step it may be shown that | Z7, | , . . . , 
I fT. I are less than 

Md{A +B -h ... + L)^-' 6^\ 

Now since 

u^y and also r«^ . . . w^y will tend toward finite limits if 

{A + B -{• . . . + L)6<1. 

This condition will be fnlfilled by making 6 suflBciently small. 
We see then that w^, v., . . . , w^ tend toward determinate 
limits, w, v, . . . , w, which are continuous functions of x in 
the interval 

(Xo -S,Xo-\- 6)y 
6 being the smallest of the three quantities 

b 1 



^' M' A +B'\- . .. + L' 

and that w, v, . . . , w are represented by series which coii- 
verge after the manner of a aecreasing geometrical progres- 
sion. 
Moreover we have 

w« = /i {Xy w^i, . . . , w^^) dx + u., 

and, since w«, v., . . . , w„ differ from their limits as little 
as we please, whatever the value of x in the indicated inter- 
val, when m is sufficiently great, we have in the limit 

u = \ fi {Xy u, V, . . . y w) dx -{- w„ 



\ 



16 OALCUL D£S PBOBABILITES. 

Hence 

^ =/x (a:, UyV, . . . , w). 

Similar results hold for the other functions. TTie functions 
u, V, ... y to are consequently the functions sought. 



CALCUL DES PROBABILITifiS. Par J. Bertkand, de 
TAcad^mie Fran9aise^ Secretaire perp6tnel de l'Acad6mie 
des Sciences. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1889. 8vo., LVii 
+ 332 pp. 

There is possibly no branch of mathematics at once so 
interesting, so bewildering, and of so great practical impor- 
tance as the theory of probability. Its history reveals both 
the wonders that can be accomplished and the bounds that 
cannot be transcended by mathematical science. It is the 
link between rigid deduction and the vast field of inductive 
science. A complete theory of probability would be a com- 
plete theory of tne formation of belief. It is certainly a pity 
then, that, to quote M. Bertrand, ^^one cannot well under- 
stand the calculus of probabilities without having read La 
Place's work," and that " one cannot read La Placets work 
without having prepared himself for it by the most profound 
mathematical studies/' 

Though not otherwise is thorough knowledge to be sained, 
yet an exceedingly useful amount of knowledge is to be had 
without such effort. In fact, M. Bertrand's forty odd pages 
of preface on **The Laws of Chance" give an insight into 
the theory without the use of so much as a single ^gebraio 
symbol. 

Listen to this reductio ad dbsurdum of Bernoulli's theory 
of moral expectation : 

" Mf I win,' says poor Peter, proposing a game of cards to 
Paul, 'you must pay three francs for my dinner.' * Meal for 
meal,' replies Paul, *you should pay twenty francs in case 
you lose, for that is the price of my supper.' *If I lose 
twenty francs,' cries Peter, frightened out oi his wits, *I can- 
not dine to-morrow: without coming to that you might lose 
a thousand ; put them up a^inst my twenty. According to 
Daniel Bernoulli, you will still have the advantage.'" 

Even more complete is the upsetting of Condorcet's calcula- 
tion as to the prooability of the sun's rising. 

"Paul would wager that the sun rises to-morrow. The 
theory fixes the stakes. Paul shall receive a franc if the sun 
rises and will give a million if it fails to do so. Peter accepts 



OALOUL DES PBOBABIUTES. 17 

the wager. Each morning he loses his franc and pays it. As 
the sun rises from morning to morning his cnance daily 
diminishes. Paal conscientioasly increases his stake ; Peter 
as conscientioasly pays his franc. The obligations remain 
eoaitable. The bettors travel throngh twenty conntriesfrom 
West to Eafit. Peter always loses ; he pnrsues his fortune 
however and takes Paul to the North ; they cross the arctio 
circle ; the sun stays a month below the horizon ; Paul 
loses 30 millions and thinks the order of nature overturned/' 

Even La Place does not escape M. Bertrand's pleasant 
raillery, and M. Quetelet has his ideal average man dismissed 
as follows : 

'* In the bodv of the average man the Belgian author places 
an average soul. . . . The typical man would be without 
passions and without vices, neither foolish nor wise, neither 
Ignorant nor learned, forever dozing : this is the mean 
between sleeping and waking ; answeiing neither yes nor no ; 
mediocre in evervthing. After having eaten for 38 years the 
average ration oi a healthjr soldier, he would die, not of old 
age, but of some average sickness that statistics would reveal 
to him." 

But I must hasten on to the main body of the work : suffice 
it to say that in these few introductory pages is packed this 
variety of topics : 

The Petersburg paradox, D'Alembert and Bernoulli's dis- 
pute as to the benefits of inoculation for small-pox, Ber- 
noulli's theorem, the ruin of players, inverse probabilities ; 
Poisson's law of large numbers, the application of the theory 
of probabilitj to statistics, the theory of errors of observation, 
thejprobabihty of decisions. 

Having seen so much done without any algebra at all, we 
are prepared to accept M. Bertrand's statement, as to the 
entire work, that " very few pages could embarrass a reader 
familiar with the elements of mathematics." 

Scarce an integration sign, never a generating function, 
really it is charmingly simple and direct : and everywhere 
illuminated too by the common sense and mother wit that 
are so conspicuous];^ displayed in the preface. 

It is characteristic of the method of treatment that all 
lurking dangers, all insidious snares, are carefully pointed out 
by means of numerous concrete examples. 

A good instance of this, though merely one of half a dozen 
bearing upon the same point, is the following problem to 
show the absurdity of trying to reckon probabilities when 
the favorable and possible cases are each infinite in number. 

In a circle a chord is drawn at random. What is the 
probability that it shall be longer than the side of the in- 
scribed equilateral triangle ? 



18 GALCUL D£S PBOBABIUTES. 

You might say : The probability is unchanged by fixing 
one end of the chord. The probability that it shall be long 
enough is then merely the probability that it does not lie 
without the &ngle made by the two chords of 120^ meeting 
at the point. This probability is ^. 

Or, you might say : The direction matters not, provided the 
chord IS not too far from the centre, viz., not more than half 
the radius of the circle. The probability is J. 

Yet again : To choose a chord at random is to choose its 
middle point. In order that the chord shall be long enough 
its middle point must not be without a circle concentric witb^ 
and of hall the radius of, the given circle. This gives the 
probability J. 

Similarly, in a chapter on total and compound probabilities, 
are a number of problems showing how essential it is, in com- 
puting the probability of a compound event, that the proba- 
oility to be given to the second composing event shall be that 
which it has when the first event is known to have happened. 

Even Clerk Maxwell has violated this principle in ootaining 
the formula 

<p (x) -Ge- *•*• 

in which x is the a;-component of the velocity of a molecule of 
gas and q)(x) its probability. He assumed that the x, y, and 
z eomponents had independent probabilities. That they are 
not independent is plain enough from this : if ^ is the maxi- 
mum velocity of a molecule, the movement is parallel to the 
fl:.axis, and y and z are nothing. 

In the chapter on expectation the consideration of the 
Petersburg paradox gives an opportunity to again ridicule 
Daniel Bernoulli's moral expectation. I quote a few pas- 
sages : 

**You play, that is the hypothesis. Are you foolish or 
wise to do so ? The question is not put.'' 

** Peter, whose whole fortune is 100,000 francs, wishes a 
chance to gain 100 millions. * Nothing is easier,' coolly replies 
the geometer whom he consults. * If the game is equitable 
you will have 999 chances in a thousand of losing your 100,000 
francs.' " 

" The theory of moral expectation has become classic, never 
was the word more exactly nsed : it has been studied, it has 
been commented upon, it has been developed in works justly 
famous. Its success stops there, no one ever has made or ever 
can make any use of it." 

Two chapters are devoted to James Bernoulli's famous 
theorem that no possible event can be so improbable but that 
there is as great a chance as you please of its happening some 
time or other, if only you wait long enough. 



OALCUL DES PBOBABILITES. 19 

Three disfcinct demonstratioDS are riven, of which the first 
is the most straightforward and complete. I give a sketch : 

The probabilities of two contrary events being p and q, the 
most probable combination in /a trials is that in which the first 
event happens ^p times and the second /i q times. By Ster- 
ling's theorem its probability is 



1 / V^TCpipq ; 
and the probability that it happens /jp ± h times is 

e-^^/^PQ / ^/27rp^pq. 

Approximately true for small values of A, it does to take 
this formnla trae for large and even infinite values^ because 
then both the true values and those given by the formula are 
so small as to be negligible ; e. g. : 

Putting fji = 1000, A = 100, « = g = 4, we get for the 
corresponding probability 

e-^V2 I VlOOO n = 0.000 000 000 520 06. 

By a simple artifice, we substitute for (1), giving the prob- 
ability of an error A, the formula 

for the probability of an error between % and z + dz. 
To test this formula, notice that the sum of all possible 

Erobabilities is certainty and that we should have and do 
X 



lave 



J — 00 



Other such tests can be given. 

The probability then that an error shall be smaller than a is 



2 6-^dt^ &{a /2pipq). 



If a has a determinate value, however large, the proba- 
bility that it shall not be surpassed approaches zero as pi is 
increased* without limit, which proves Bernoulli's theorem. 

The relative error grows smaller and smaller as the absolute 
error ctows larger and larger. 

To nx the meaning of this, consider how many times a coin 
would need to be tossed in order that the probability of ob- 



20 CALCUL DBS PBOBABILITES. 

tainiDg heads at least a million *more times than tails shall 
exceed 0.01. We get, putting /^ for the required number, 

0.99 = (1 000 000 ^/% / V^u) = (1.83) 

and thence 

}A = 597 211 millions. 

Not only when the probability of an event is known can the 
number of its happenings in a given number of trials be pre- 
dicted almost with certainty, but when the probability is un- 
known, Bernoulli's theorem can be used inversely to find it. 
The ratio of the number of happenings of an event to the 
number of trials certainly approaches this unknown proba- 
bility as the number of trials is increased. 

Nevertheless, two conditions are necessary : the probability 
must not change during the trials, and it must have a deter- 
minate value. 

**The King of Siam is forty years old, what is the proba- 
bility that he shall live ten years ? It is different for us than 
for those who have asked his doctor, different for the doctor 
than for those who have received his confidences ; very differ- 
ent indeed for the conspirators who have taken steps to stran- 
gle him to-morrow.'* 

In a word, Bernoulli's theorem applies to ohjectivey not to 
subjective, probability. 

An immediate consequence of the theorem is the inevit- 
able ruin of any gambler who plays long enough at a fair 
game. But the number of games before ruin occurs may be 
enormous. Thus, in tossing coins at one franc a toss it re- 
quires 624 000 tossings to insure a probability of 0.9 that one 
player or the other shall lose 100 francs. Truly a courageous 
gambler would hardly be frightened at such a prospect. 

If in this very game either party had started in with only 
a franc and was to receive a franc a game so long as he 
played without losing it, his mathematical expectation would 
be mfinite. 

Let us return to the inverse use of Bernoulli's theorem. 
Consider this problem : 

An urn contains pi balls, some white, some black, in an 
unknown proportion, k drawings are made, the ball being 
replaced after each drawing. There are bbtaincd m white 
and n black balls. What is the most probable composition of 
the urn ? 

Before the trial is made, all sorts of hypotheses are possible 
as to the composition of the urn. Suppose all compositions 
are equally probable. It follows that the probable ratio of 
whit-e to black balls is m : n ; and, that there should be a 
deviation e from this ratio, the probability is 



CALCUL DES PBOBABILIT^S. 21 

where G is independent of €. 

The hypothesis that all compositions are o ©nor i equally 
prohahle is rarely realized. Suppose that the Balls were put 
into the um by lot with a probability i for each color. 

We then get for the probable proportion of white balls 

(/i + 2m)/2 (/i + m + n), 

which lies between i and m/im + n). 

If /i is very large this will approach i, no matter what 
the numbers m and n are ; if, on the contrary, it is m and 
m + n that are large, the fraction is very near to m/{m + »), 
no matter what /i is. 

The probability of causes is always thus affected by a priori 
probabilities. 

To what is commonly known as the theory of least squares 
three chapters are devoted. In fact, a fourth chapter, on 
'^ Errors in the Position of a Point," is really an extension of 
Oauss's law of errors. 

Verv interesting is the criticism of Gauss's reasoning. 

To begin with, can it be strictly maintained that the prob- 
ability of an error J is (p{^) ? 

" Docs it not depend upon the quantity measured ? " 

*^ If you take a weight, if you measure an angle, is there 
not a greater chance of a correct estimate if the weight is an 
exact number of milligrams, if the angle contains an exact 
number of seconds, than if it is necessary to add a fraction ? 
If this fraction, not given by the instrument, is exactly i, 
is there not a less chance of error in evaluating it than if it is 
0.27?" 

There is a case where the postulate is rigorously demon- 
stratable, but the conclusion is nevertheless only approximate. 
Suppose, in fact, that the quantity to bo measured is the pro- 
portion of white balls in an urn ot unknown composition. 

Of pi balls drawn, m are white. 

The fraction m//i is a measure of the ratio sought. The 
measure is the more precise as the number of balls drawn is 
greater. The operation repeated n times gives the n success- 
ive measures. 

7W,///, m^/^y . . . , m,/;/. 

The most probable value of the ratio deduced from the 
drawings is 

2 m/n/j^ = 2 {m//^)/n, 

the arithmetical mean of n equally trustworthy measures. 
Now, if in )u drawings from an urn we get nt white balls, 



22 CALCUL PES PBOBABIUTBS. 

the probability that the ratio of white to the whole number 
of balls shall be m//< is indeed approxinuUely 

which is of the form 

and precisely what (xaoss's law would give; but if the law 
were rigorous the formula should be exact. 

The nypothesis that the arithmetical mean of several quan- 
tities is tde most probable value leads to inconsistencies. It 
requires, for example, that the most probable value of the 
square of the quantity sh^ be the arithmetical mean of the 
squares. Nor can the objection be avoided by making a dis- 
tinction between measures directly observed and those result- 
inff from calculation. A mechanic could easily attach to* a 
balance a needle to indicate the square or the logarithm of 
a weight. 

The same objection applies to expressing the probability of 
an error as a function of the error alone. 

The problem is proposed, " If (Jauss had adopted, instead 
of the mean, another mode of combination of the measures, 
what law of errors would he have deduced ? " 

The problem is not solved, but it is shown that if 

J [Ziy ar,, • • • ^ ^u) 

is the most probable value of a quantity of which Xi, ic,, . . . , a:, 
are measurements, then, in oraer that the probability of an 
error shall be a function of the error, /must be the arith- 
metical mean of the x's increased by some function of their dif- 
ferences. In other words, it must be such that if all the x'b 
are increased each by or, it shall also be increased by a. 

In spite, however, of all theoretical obJ3ctions to Gauss's 
law, constantly accumulating experience completely justifies 
its adoption. As to the arithmetical mean, Ferrero has shown 
(see Charles S. Peirce's review in Am. Journ. Math, I., 59) 
that all functions of the measurements that it would not be 
absurd to take for the most probable value of the quantity 
measured, will, if the measurements are good, agree in their 
results ; while, of course, if the measurements are bad, no 
treatment can be expected to give good results. 

It is gratifying to find these careful definitions of precision 
and weight. 

"The precision of one measure is said to be a times that 
of another measure when the probability that an error is 
contained between z and z -{' dz for the one is the same as 



GALCUL DES PROBABILIT^S. S8 

that it shall be contained between az and a {z -^ dz) for the 
other/' 

'^ The weight of one obserration is said to be /? times that 
of another, when the consequences that can be deduced as to 
the value of a magnitude measured by an observation in the 
first system are equivalent to those that can be deduced from 
/S observations in the second system, all giving the same 
result/* 

" If /? is a fraction m/n, it is necessary that m concordant 
observations of the first system can be replaced by n concor- 
dant observations of the second/' 

'^ The system of observations that gives to the error s the 
probability 

has k for its precision and i" for its weight, if we take for 
units of precision and weight those of one observation in the 
system for which the probaoility of an error z is proportional 
to^«\'' 

M. Bertrand argues at some length for the rejection of 
doubtful observations. He gives no criterion, however, as 
Peirce has done, to determine when they shall be rejected. 
This is left to the judgment of the computer, with the caution 
that the number of retained observations must be large. 
The probable value of the square of an error smaller than \, 
when those larger than \ have been rejected, is 

1 e (kX) - 2k\e-^'^yV^ 



2nk' [0 (k\)Y 

As for Gauss's attempt, in his last memoirs, to break away 
from all hypotheses of a law of errors in establishing the 
method of least squares, it is shown that neglecting the 
squares and powers of the errors is equivalent to assuming 
the exponential law. 

The equating of the probable value of a function to it^ 
true value is not unobjectionable. The following example 
shows this. 

Five angles ?i. If, i,, l^, ?«, have been measured. The geo- 
metrical conditions require 

h + li — k = 0, 

?, + i, - /, = 0. 
It is fonnd, however, that 



24 CALCUL DES PROBABILIT^S. 

Designating the errors really committed by Cj, «„ €„ e^y «,, 
we have : 

^4 "f' ^1 — 6% ^ /*ij 

Ci + ^, — ^, = Af. 

No matter what the multipliers A„ A„ ^, may be, the tri- 
nomial 

is known. 

This tiinomial is a homogeneous function of the second 
degree in the errors ; and calling wt the probable value of 
the square of one of the errors, that of the product of two 
of them being nothing, we shall find for the probable value 
of the trinomial, calculated before the measures are taken, 

Equating this to the true value gives 

m* = (A A" + A A' + A AAf)/(3A, + 3A, + A,), 

an infinite number of different values for m*. 

This does not furnish, however, the most serious reason 
why the chances of error cannot be precisely evaluated. 

" It is supposed, a priori, that all the measurements of a 
system arc equally precise ; it is impossible in the vast ma- 

i'ority of cases to believe in such equality : it is from lack of 
mowing reasons for preference that the results are accepted 
as equivalent. But, known or unknown, these reasons, if they 
exist, must have an influence upon the error really committed 
and of which it is pretended to give the probability." 

" After having, with immense labor, discussed the transit 
of Venus observations of 17C1, Encke found for the parallax 
of the sun 8". 49 with a probable error 0".06. He could 
therefore bet 300000 to one that the error would not reach 
0".42. Nevertheless, astronomers have just accepted the 
parallax 8". 91 corresponding exactly to the error 0".42." 

^' We can simply affirm, and this is the important point, 
that if the sum of the squares of the corrections are small, 
there is great likelihood that the observations have been well 
made.'' 

The extension of Gauss's law to errors in the situation of a 
point gives for the most probable position of a point the centre 
of gravity of the observed positions supposed equally weighted. 

Restricting ourselves to a variation m two coordinates, ** the 
probability that an error shall be comprised between u and 
u-^-du for X and between v and v + e/v for y is 



OALOUL DES PBOBABIUT^S. 25 

Points of equal probability are upon the same ellipse having 
for its equation 

u and V designating the differences between the coordinates 
of the point considered and the true position, the common 
centre of all the similar ellipses whose dimensions are pro- 
portional to ^H. 

A comparison is made between the theory and the results 
of firing 1000 shots at a target. 

The law has been partially guessed by Galton in his Dis- 
cussion on the Data of Stature, and more fully worked out 
by Mr. Hamilton Dickson. (See Natural Inheritance, p. 100 
et seq.) 

It seems a pity that in the chapter on the laws of statistics 
some slight reference at least should not have been made to 
Galton's investigations.* 

A point liable to be overlooked in applying the laws of 
probskbility to statistics is well stated. 

** There are plenty of ways of consulting chance that will 
give the same mean without giving the same probabilities of 
error. Instead of drawing balls from an urn of a given com- 
position, we could draw in order from many urns of various 
compositions. The average results would be the same as for 
drawings from an urn of average composition^ the chances of 
error would not be.*' 

** If, to take an extreme case, instead of drawing 10,000 
times from an urn containing one white and one black ball, 
we draw alternately from two urns, one Containing a white 
the other a black ball, we shall certainly get white 5000 
times, the error will be nothing. '* 

To represent tables of mortality, the substitution of several 
urns for a single one, seems, a priori, verv plausible. Among 
individuals of the same age it is impossible not to find classes 
in which the chances of life are unequal." 

The book ends very pleasantly with a chapter on the 
misapplications of the theory of probabilities to judicial 
decisions. 

Apropos of this matter, does not the great probability that 
attaches to the results of concurrent indepenaent judgments 
furnish the strongest possible argument for cultivating 
independence, for ridding ourselves of the systematic errors 
imposed by education and fashion, by part^ and sect ? 

I have very inadequately sketched this most admirable 
introduction to the science of probability : the life and vigor 
of the original cannot bo reproduced in a brief review. 

Elleby W. Davis. 

Columbia, August 14, 1891. 



26 THE NUMBEB-SYSTEM OF ALGEBRA. 



THE NUMBER-SYSTEM OF ALGEBRA, Treated Theo- 
retieally and Historically. By Professor H. B. Fine. 
Boston and New York ; Leach, Shewell & Sanborn, 
1891. 8vo, pp. IX. + 131. 

At the present time we frequently find mathematical re- 
searches preceded by an historical account of the cjuestion 
under discussion : and this is but another proof of the increas- 
ing importance of the study of mathematical history. On 
the other hand, it is necessary that the history of any branch 
of the science form part of such books as are intended for 
students. For pedagogic reasons the historical part of a trea- 
tise ought to be placed at the end of the volume, or at least at 
the ends of the various chapters. 

Mr. Fine's recent book takes its place among the not very 
numerous works combining a systematic treatment w^ith an 
historical account. It may be regarded as an introduction to 
the theory of functions of one variable. In this short re- 
view I shall only refer to the historical part of the work, 
which occupies the latter part of the book (pp. 79-131). The 
author begins by noticing the symbols and systems of numer- 
ation, and then passes to the history of fractions and irrational 
quantity among the Ancients. He then summarizes the prog- 
ress of algebra, from the earliest times down to Descartes, 
and finishes with the development of the fundamental notions 
of algebra, from Newton to Weierstrass and G. Cantor. For 
the ancient history, that of the Middle Ages and down to 
1000, Mr. Fine has chiefly followed the well-known works of 
Moritz Cantor and Hankel. For modem history he has gen- 
erally had recourse to original sources. 

One or two improbable or inexact statements may be no- 
ticed. For instance, Regiomontanus is mentioned as tiie 
author of the Algorithrmis Demonstratus (1534).* Again, 
the year 1030 is given as the date of the introduction of the 
sign -r, and it is said to have been first used by Pell.f These 
inaccuracies are, however, of slight importance, and Mr. 
Fine's book will doubtless be found of much assistance to 
students of mathematics. G, Enestrom. 

Stockholm. 

Translated from Bibliotheca Mathematica, 1891, No. 2, 
vrith additions from the author, by Habold Jacoby. 

* There exists a copy of this work, antedating the birth of Regiomon- 
tanus» and attributea to Jordanus Nemorarius. 

fThe sign is really due to Rahm, and the "date is 1650. Compare 
Beman, Bm. Math., 1887, p. 96. 



WEST AFRICAN LONGITUDES. 27 



WEST AFRICAN LONGITUDES. 

Telegraphic Determinations of Longitudes on the West Coast 
of Africa, From observations by Commander T. F. PuL- 
LEN, R N., and W. H. Finlay, Esq., M. A, F. R. A. S., 
made and reduced under the direction of David Gill, 
Esq., F. R. S., Her Majesty's Astronomer at the Cape of 
Good Hope. London, Hydrographic Department, Ad- 
miralty, 1891 ; pp. 82. 

In this volume are recorded the last observations of the late 
Commander Pullen, who lost his life from malarial fever con- 
tracted while making night observations at Bonny, on the 
West African coast. The results have been worked out under 
the supervision of Dr. Gill, and the book contains not a few 
suggestions and remarks of interest to astronomers. The 
instrument employed was an altazimuth by Troughton and 
Simms, having a 14-inch vertical circle, read by four micro- 
scopes. This was selected as the most appropriate instrument 
available for the purpose ; for it was decided to determine time 
by altitudes, after a careful consideration of the relative merits 
of meridian observations, and those in the vertical of the pole 
star. Dr. Gill expresses a very favorable opinion of the latter 
method, which has so long been strongly advocated by Dollen 
of Pulcova. It was abandoned chiefly because there is no 
bright star near the Southern pole. 

The results afterwards proved the wisdom of not depending 
on meridian transits : indeed, the conditions of the climate on 
the West African coast are so unfavorable that there would be 
an excessive loss of time if meridian observations only were em- 
ployed. Throughout all the observations with the altazimuth 
a mean time chronometer was used, without a chronograph. 

Before the commencement of the campaign, the two observ- 
ers, Pullen and Finlay, met at the Royal Observatory, Cape 
Town, and their relative personal equations were carefully 
determined by simple but accurate methods. As a result of 
these determinations, the correction + 0'.085 was afterwards 
applied to the differences of longitude obtained for the various 
stations. The time observations with the altazimuth were 
made with *' circle right " and ^^ circle left,'' and pairs of stars 
were taken at nearly equal altitudes near the Eastern and 
Western prime verticals. The mean from any such pair was 
then regarded as a complete time determiuation; and in this 
way the results came out very satisfactorih'. The time determi- 
nations at the Cape were made by Mr. Finlay with the large 
meridian circle : and in the exchange of signals Thomson dead- 
beat galvanometers were used with success. 



28 SOUTH AMERICAN LONGITXTDBS, 

Several interesting remarks, due to Dr. Gill, occur in the 
book. The method of carrying chronometers (much afiFected 
by navy quartermasters) by means of a strap passed through 
the handles and over the top, is condemned. Indeed, it is 
possible to stop a chronometer, temporarily, when so carried, 
oy a peculiar twist of the arm. Dr. Gill recommends holding 
the chronometer with both hands in front of the bodv, the 
elbows being pressed against the sides. The spring of the 
arms is then a ^at safeguard. 

In another place, having called attention to the very high 
accuracy attained by Commander PuUen after comparatively 
little practice. Dr. Gill refers to an interesting remark of 
Professor Winuecke's to the effect that ^^ the best training for 
an astronomical observer is a long course of accurate work on 
land with the sextant." ; 

The ordinary method of circummeridian altitudes was used 
in measuring the latitudes of the stations. Stars were ob- 
served both Siorth and South of the zenith, and certain sys- 
tematic differences in the resulting latitudes are explained as 
the result of a looseness of the web-frame in the tube. The 
experience gained is summarized (p. 48) for the benefit of 
future observers with the portable altazimuth, and any one 
would do well to consult Dr. Gill's remarks before beginning 
work with this somewhat difficult instrument. 

The positions of the various astronomical stations are care- 
fully described, and the bearings of many surrounding per- 
manent objects are set down. The places of the stars used 
are almost all taken from the Ephemerides and the Cape 
Catalogue. The volume concludes with several appendices 
containing various details and examples of observations and 
reductions. Harold Jacoby. 

Columbia College, New York ; 1891, September. 



SOUTH AMERICAN LONGITUDES. 

Telegraphic Determination of Longitudes in Mexico, Central 
America, the West Indies, and on the North Coast of 
South America, with the Latitudes of the Several 
Stations, By Lieutenants J. A. NoRRis and Charles 
Laird, U. S. N., published by order of Commodore P. 
M. Ramsay, U. S. N., Chief of Bureau of Navigation, 
Navy Department. Washington, Government Printing 
Office, 1891 ; pp. 189. 

The above volume contains the results of longitude deter- 
minations executed by order of the U. S. Navy Department 



SOUTH AMBRICAK LOKGirTDES. 29 

in the years 1888, 1889, and 1890. As will be seen from the 
title, the observations have been made in very unfavorable 
locations, so far as the comfort and health of the observers 
were concerned. It is therefore an evidenco of great endur- 
ance and skill that so much was accomplished during the 
short time many of the stations were occupied. We read 
how one of the observing parties was compelled to proceed 
with its entire observing equipment, including instruments, 
a hundred miles in canoes up the Goatzacoalcos River, poling 
against the current. And afterwards another hundred miles 
by mule-train through the '^ tangled intricacies of a tropical 
forest." This trip took fourteen days. 

But we must here occupy ourselves chiefly with the methods 
and results of the expedition, from a scientific point of view. 
Eleven longitude stations were occupied altogether, and the 
careful way in which the observation spots have been de- 
scribed, and referred by exact measurements to local per- 
manent landmarks, is very much to be commended (pp. 16- 
19). When possible, the sites occupied by previous observers 
were again used. The instruments employed were two pris- 
matic transits made in 1874, by Stackpole of New York, for 
the Transit of Venus Commission. Six break-circuit chronom- 
eters and two chronographs were used. The values of the 
instrumental constants were very carefully determined in the 
field, and afterwards verified at Washington. Whenever it 
was found possible the exchange of longitude signals was 
made automatically, the distant observer's clock recording on 
the local chronograph. When this could not be done, in con- 
sequence of the weak current through long cable lines, a 
mirror galvanometer was used at each end. This was found 
to work quite satisfactorily. The mirror galvanometers were 
set up in the cable offices, and the sending and receiving times 
of the signals were recorded chronographically by the observer 
at each end of the line. For this purpose wires were run 
from the cable offices to the observing huts or tents, which 
were usually quite close. 

No allowance was made for personal equation, as circum- 
stances would not allow of any adequate determination of 
that quantity. In the reductions, the method of least 
squares was used throughout the longitude work. The obser- 
vations were first preliminarily reduced, and normal equations 
were then formed for the determination of the minute correc- 
tions required by the preliminary values of the instrumental 
constants. The polar stars were weighted for declination, but 
it is not stated what formula was used in assigning the 
weights. The adopted clock-corrections, however, are not 
those derived from the least square solution, but the means 
of the results from the separate time-stars, the latter being 



30 NOTES. 

again reduced \nth the azimuth and collimation constants 
derived from the least square adjustment. The polar stars 
were excluded in this last process. The adopted values of 
the clock-correction, however, are always very nearly equal to 
those obtained from the least square reduction, the greatest 
difference being 0*.035. (Vera Cruz, 1889, January 17 ; 
p. 69.) 

The latitude work was all done by Talcott's method, the 
star- places being derived from the American Bphemeris, the 
Jahrbuch, and the Catalogues of Newcomb, Safford, the 
Coast Survey, and Greenwich Observatory. 

The volume contains excellent maps showing the surround- 
ings of the various astronomical stations, and closes with an 
appendix giving the results of the many valuable magnetic 
observations made by the members of the Expedition. 

Harold Jacoby. 

CoLUMBU College, New York ; 1891, Septemb&r. 



NOTES. 



The oflScers of Section A at the Washington Meeting of the 
American Association for the Advancement of Science were : 
Vice-President, E. W. Hyde of Cincinnati ; Secretary, F. H. 
Bigelow of Washington. The following papers were read : 
The evolution of algebra, by E. W. Hyde ; On a digest of 
the literature of the mathematical sciences, by Alex. S. 
Christie ; Latitude of the Sayre Observatory, by C. L. Doo- 
little ; The secular variation of terrestrial latitudes, by George 
C. Comstock ; Groups of stars, binary and multiple, Dy G. W. 
Hollcy ; Description of the great spectroscope and spectro- 
graph constructed for the Halsted Observatory, Princeton, 
5f. J., and Note on some recent photographs of the reversal 
of the hydrogen lines of solar prominences, oy J. A. Brashear ; 
Standardizing pliotographic films without the use of a stand- 
ard light, by Frank H. Bigelow ; On a modified form of 
zenith telescope for determining standard declinations, and 
On the application of the ^^ photochronograph '' to the auto- 
matic record of stellar occultations, particularly dark-limb 
emersions, by David P. Todd ; Principles of the algebra of 
physics, by A. Macfarlane ; The zodiacal light as related to 
terrestrial temperature variation, by 0. T. Sherman ; On the 
long-period terms in the motion of Hyperion, by Ormond 
Stone ; Exhibition and description of a new scientific instru- 
ment, the aurora-inclinometer, by Frank H. Bigelow ; The 
tabulation of light-curves : description, explanation, and illus- 
tration of a new method, and Stellar fluctuations: distinguished 



KOTES. 31 

from variable stars : investigation of their frequency, by Henry 
M. Parkhurst ; On certain space and surface integrals, by 
Thomas S. Fiske ; The fundamental law of electroma^netism^ 
by J. Loudon ; Method of controlling a driving clock, by 
F. P. Leavenworth ; On the bitangential of the quintic, by 
Wm. E. Heal ; Parallax of a Leonis, bv Jefferson E. Kershner. 
The officers elected for the Rochester Meeting are : Vice-Pres- 
ident, J. R Eastman of Washington ; Secretary, W. Upton 
of Providence. 

The first volume of a work entitled '' Synopsis der Hoheren 
Mathematik/' by the Rev. J. 6. H^en, Director of the Ob- 
servatory of Georgetown College, Washington, D. C, has 
appeared from the press of Felix L. Dames, Berlin. Its 400 
pages treat of Arithmetical and Algebraic Analysis. The 
contents are as follows : Part I., Theory of Numbers. — Part 
IL, Theory of Complex Quantities. — Part III., Theory of 
Combinations. — Part IV., Theory of Series. — Part V., Theory 
of Infinite Products and Factorials. — Part VI., Theory of 
Continued Fractions. — Part VII., Theory of Finite Differ- 
ences. — Part VIIL, Theory of Functions. — Part IX., Theory 
of Determinants. — Part X., Theory of Invariants. — Part XL, 
Theory of Groups. — Part XII., Theory of Equations. The 
subject of the second volume will be Analytical and Synthetic 
Geometry. The entire work is to be contained in four 
volumes, which are promised at the rate of one a year. 

The deaths of a number of distinguished mathematicians 
have occurred since the beginning of the present calendar 
year. Among them may be recorded John Casey, died Jan- 
uary 3 ; Sophie Kowalevski, February 10 ; Maximilien Marie, 
May 8; Wilhelm Matzka, June 9; and Wilhelm Eduard Weber, 
June 23. On another occasion we hope to give the readers of 
the Bulletin some account of their work and lives. 

T. s. F. 

We learn from Hoffmann's Zeitschrift * that on the 5th and 
6th of October a meeting will be held at Braunschweig, Ger- 
many, for the purpose of organizing an " association for the 
improvement of the teaching of mathematics and the natural 
sciences.'* At a preliminary meeting held at Jena, September 
28 and 29, 1890, f and attended by about 90 teachers from all 
parts of Germany, the desirability of such an organization was 
discussed and fully established, and a provisional constitution 

* ZeUachrift fUr den maihematischen und naiurwisaenschaftlichen 
Unterrtcht. vol. 22 (1891), pp. 816-318 and pp. 397-39S. 
ti6., vol 21 (1890), pp. 561-674 and pp. 611-632. 



32 NOTES. 

was drawn tip. The association is evidently intended to 
represent mainly the teachers employed in the Gymnasium 
and liealschule, although there is, of course, no class-restrio* 
tion of membership, anybody interested in the object of the 
society being invited to "join, and university professors in par- 
ticular. The term " natural sciences " is understood to em- 
brace physics, chemistry, mineralogy, botany, zoology, and 
geography. 

The formation of this association is a si^ificant fact in 
connection with the general movement for tne reform of the 
so called higlier schools that has been going on in Germany 
for many vears. The sensation created by the Emperor^ 
opening address to the committee called to consider the reform 
of the higher schools was somewhat abated by the rather con- 
servative final report made by this committee. But the 
strength of the popular movement is not broken by any 
means. It is the avowed object of the new association to pro- 
mote and strengthen the teaching of the exact sciences in the 
schools of Germany. The activity of the society is to bear 
mainly on the following points : 

(1) The improvement and more ample use of scientific 
apparatus and other mechanical aids to instruction (the very 
general term " LehrmitUl'^ may be interpreted to include 
also text- books). 

(2) The better preparation of teachers for their calling, by 
the establishment of special courses and "seminaries for 
elementary teachers at the universities, lectures on the teach- 
ing of elementary mathematics, etc. 

(3) The application of the recent advances in science and 
the arts to elementary instruction in the exact sciences. 

A full account of this years meeting will probably be pub- 
lished in Hoffmann's Zeitschrift. A. z. 

Professor W. H. Echols, Jr., recently Director of the 
Missouri School of Mines, has been called to a chair at the 
University of Virginia. 

Professor M. A\ . Harrington, for a number of years Pro- 
fessor of Astronomy at the University of Michigan, is now 
Chief of the Weather Bureau in the Department of Agricul- 
ture at Washington, D. C. 

Professor A. 8. Hathaway has resigned his post at Cornell, 
to become Professor of Mathematics at the Rose Polytechnic 
Institute. 

Professor A. L. Baker, of the Stevens School, Hoboken, 
N. J., has accepted a call to the University of Rochester. 

Professors A. S. Hardy, of Dartmouth, and Fabian Frank- 
lin, of Johns Hopkins, have gone abroad to remain during 
the present academic year. T. s. F. 



-, u.lr«. Ilv >l' II 



lUILLETIN 

NHW YORK 
M A'lH I'lMATrCA^L SOCIETY. 



VOL. I. No. 2. 






MACMILLAN & GO'S 

lATHEMATlCAL TEXT-BOOKS.' 



uxinilHtf ml*HiUiiiM»>» •••■i«|ti» ••"m 1 



.', VWAItr'^ ?f:.llD OEOMETr'V. 



t4AC«4(LLAN «. CO . 



OATALOOUE OF THE ASTBONOMISCHE GESELLSCHAFT. 33 

CATALOGUE OF THE ASTRONOMISCHE 

GESELLSCHAFT. 

Catalog der Astronomischen OeselUchaft. Erste Abtheilung. 

GatalcM; der Sterne bis zur neunten GWSsse zwischen 80° ndrdlicher 
nnd 2^8tkdlicher DeclinatioD fQr das Acquinoctium 1875. Drittes 
St&ck, Zone + 65° bis + 70°, beobdchtet auf der Stebn waste 
CHRisnANiA. Viertes StQck, Zone + 55° bis + 65°, beobachtet auf 
den Stebnwabten Uelsinofors und Gotha. Vierzehntes StQck, 
Zone + 1° bis + 5°, beobachtet auf der Stebnwa&te Albany. 
Leipzig, 1890. 8 toIs., 4to. 

AsTBOKOMERS frequently need the positions of so-called 
fixed stars. They are wanted when a clock is to be regulated 
to true sidereal or true mean time ; when^ again^ the astronomer 
is on his travels and desires to fix his latitude and longitude^ 
and the direction on the earth of his meridian ; or when he 
is observing some planet's or comet's course^ and wishes to 
settle the various ri^ht ascensions and declinations it occupies 
from day to day and hour to hour, in order from them to cal- 
culate its orbit, predict its future course, and test the law of 
gravitation. 

Thus accurate star places are the basis in one sense of all 
astronomy of position ; but they have an interest of their own 
which is more prominent now than it ever has been, and is 
yearly increasing. 

For no star is absolutely fixed ; and the small motions of 
the stars which have been long detected are slowly accumu- 
lating their effects, and giving evidence that will in time 
throw much light on the structure of the universe. 

The star which has by some been called the *' runaway" 
(Groombridge 1830) moves over half a degree, as seen from 
the earth, in about two centuries and a half; so that a sharp- 
sighted observer in a dry mountain region (where the air is 
transparent enough) could readily detect its motion with the 
naked eye in about a life-time. Other stars move so slowly, 
in appearance, that a hundred years of the closest telescopic 
observation are necessary to detect any slight deviation from 
their former position. The constellations exhibit to the eye 
substantially the same appearance from century to century ; 
it is only in very small details that they seem to alter during 
fifty years. 

The study of these trifling motions (as they seem to us) is 
extremely fascinating to those who have undertaken it ; and 
a vast amount of human effort has been spent in the acquisi- 
tion of this form of knowledge. 

^ The Alexandrine Greeks did something in mapping and 
listing the stars, by such simple devices as they possessed ; 

8 



34 CATALOGUE OF THE ASTBONOXISCHB OESELLSCHAFT. 

the Tartar prince XJlugh Beigb had an observatory at Samar- 
cand devoted to the same object; Tycho Brahe the Dane 
and Hevelius of Dantzic added to the stock of ^ood obser- 
vations of star-places ; but the earliest work which is now of 
mnch scientific valne was done at Greenwich by the English 
Astronomers Boyd. Flamsteed, who labored in the latter 
part of the seventeenth, and Bradley, who held his office near 
the middle of the eighteenth century, were eminent in their 
time; and Bradley especiallv did more to make precise obser- 
vations than any one who nad preceded him. With instru- 
ments of clumsy build, and inferior in power to those which 
are now carriea from place to place over our Far West to fix 
a basis for our maps, he succeeded in putting this branch of 
astronomy upon a solid foundation. It was not till quite 
lately, however, that his observations were made fully avail- 
able ; for Bessel, whose immortal Fundamenta Astronomim 
appeared in 1818, reduced only a part of them, and the results 
which he obtained lacked the minute accuracy which is now 
needful and possible. With all these drawbacks BesseVs 
study of a part only of Bradley's work gave the science a pro- 
di^ous impulse. 

Since Bradley's time the art of observation has progressed 
very greatly. He was hampered by the intractable qualities 
of matter ; his telescopes were small and unachromatic, his 
divisions roughly made, his means of reading them crude ; 
but his capacity for practical astronomy unrivalled ; incam- 
parahilis Bessel calls him. 

The instrument-makers Graham and Bird were succeeded 
in England by Ramsden and Troughton ; in Germany by 
Beichcnbach and the eldest Rcpsold. The opticians who 
made single lenses were distanced by Dollond with the achro- 
matic object-glass, which Fraunhofer improved and nearly 
perfected. The telescope-tubes became shorter, retaining the 
same power; object-glasses of greater and greater aperture 
became practicaole with moderate dimensions in the ma- 
chinery. The micrometer-microscope was used both in di- 
viding and reading off divisions, so that a circle of 10 inches 
in diameter is now as good as or better than a quadrant of 8 
feet radius ; and the spirit-level of a few inches in length is 
far more accurate and trustworthy than the plumb-line run- 
ning through two stories of a house. In fact the mechanical 
construction of astronomical instruments has become a time 
fine art. 

Astronomical observation of the first order now requires a 
subtle psychological analysis ; the human brain ana body 
have become tools for the mind to investigate and employ ; 
just as we search into the minute errors of division which 
the finest workmen leave in our instruments — errors thought 



CATALOGUE OF THE ASTBOKOHISCHE GESELLSCHAFT. 35 

too large if a line is misplaced by a twenty-thousandth of an 
inch — 80 must we' inquire most scrupulously and carefully 
into the possibility that our senses may lead us astray when 
we are under the completest strain of attention. 

After 1790 efforts were made, in several directions, to cata- 
logue the stars. Piazzi at Palermo, and Bradley's successors 
at Greenwich, spent most of their labors upon the brighter 
stars ; those, some ten thousand in number, which are visible 
to the naked eye, or approach such visibility. Lalande at 
Paris undertook the gigantic task of observing all that his 
telescopes would reach. Fortunately for him, he had but 
small mstruments. He succeeded m observing over forty 
thousand. Bessel, after completing his reduction of Bradley 
in 1818, obtained in 1819 a meridian circle capable of dealing 
with all ninth-magnitude stars not below or too near his 
horizon ; and did all that was in one man's power towards 
cataloguing the stars, nearly 150,000 in number, which come 
into this category. He confined himself to less than one-half 
the sphere, or about two-thirds of his range of visibility, and 
took as many stars into his catalogue as he could observe. 
His scholar, Argelandcr, was at first his assistant at Kdnigs- 
berg ; but was promoted to the observatory at Abd in Finland, 
afterwards removed to Helsingfors, and after excellent ser- 
vice there in another direction went to Bonn on the Rhine 
about 1840. There he extended BesseFs Zones in substan- 
tially Bessel's way to the neighborhood of the North pole 
(the immediate vicinity of this point had already been sur- 
veyed by Schwerd at Speyer), and afterwards from the south- 
ern point reached at Konigsberg towards the southern 
horizon. This work has since been continued by our emi- 
nent countryman Gould to the South pole, on a truly 
gigantic scale, and with a still greater approach to complete- 
ness. 

But in 1852 Argelander took a new departure. Up to this 
time astronomers had generally used their instruments of 
observation in searching for the stars. They are somewhat 
ill-adapted to this purpose. They bear high powers, and 
their fields are small, and illuminated, so as to make visible 
the spider-lines on which the bisections are made. All these 
circumstances cause the loss of many stars which are missed 
in the process of sweeping. So Lalande, with a small meri- 
dian instrument, picked up many stars afterwards overlooked 
by Bessel and Argelander ; while they found many which 
Ijalaude ought 'to have been able to see. Nay more : Arge- 
lander had spent his leisure at Bonn, while his observatory 
was in building, before he had even a temporary shed for his 
transit instrument, in making a catalogue of naked-eye stars. 
In this there were some 40 of the fifth and sixth magnitude, 



36 CATALOGUE OP THE ASTRONOMISCHE GESELLSCHAFT. 

which had never been seen through any telescope, so far as 
records indicated. 

His new plan was to make a working list of stars to the 
ninth magnitude inclusive, by a survey of the heavens (the 
celebrated Bonner Durchmusterung), to include stars to 
the tenth. In this survey no special pains were taken to set 
accurate places ; the aim simplv was to locate every such star 
nearly enough to identify it and map it somewhat roughly on 
a chart. A small telescope of three inches aperture was used 
with a field lighted only by the stars themselves, and a painted 
scale visible in this manner to replace the fine spider-lines of 
the more accurate instruments. With this apparatus a star 
could be roughly observed every four seconds, with a student- 
assistant to watch the clock-timing of passage ; while in the 
whole work the number of stars averaged seven or eight to 
the minute. 

This observation was done twice for every part of the 
Northern hemisphere, and down to 2° south of the equator, 
between the years 1852 and 1859; and gave a catalogue of 
324,198 stars, accurate enough to find them. Later Arge- 
lander's assistant, Schoenfeld, who did a great share of the 
actual work, extended it to the parallel of 23° south: leaving 
the continuation to the South pole to be effected by Dr. Gifl 
at the Cape of Good Hope. 

From this greatest of all star catalogues in size the stars 
whose magnitude was 9.0 or brighter were selected for more 
deliberate and precise observation. There were more than 
100,000 of them ; and the observations have been now almost 
entirely completed. 

The work was accomplished according to a plan formulated 
by Argelander in 1868. It was to be done, as Lalande, Bes- 
sel, and Argelander himself had previously worked, in zones 
bounded by parallels of declination. The rule was made that 
each star was to be twice observed, and with more pains and 
less hurry than had been possible in the previous zone obser- 
vations. Thus the whole labor was beyond the powers of 
one astronomer, and it was divided among a number. The 
first year or two saw beginnings in Helsingfors (Finland), 
where Krueger, another collaborator and son-in-law of Arge- 
lander, labored ; in Kazan and Dorpat (Russia), in Christiania 
i Norway), in several German observatories, at Cambridge in 
Snglana, Chicago, and Cambridge in Massachusetts. Vari- 
ous circumstances interrupted, the Chicago fire and conse- 
quent financial ruin of the establishment, and the call upon 
some astronomers in Europe for service thought more prac- 
tical. The final arrangement of zones has been as fol- 
lows : 



CATALOGUE OF THE A8TB0N0MISCHE GESELLSCHAFT. 37 

80°to 75°, Kazan. 

75 to 70, Dorpat. 

70 to 65, Chnstiania. 

65 to 55, Helsingfors and Ootha. 

55 to 50, Cambridge^ Mass. 

60 to 40, Bonn. 

40 to 35, Lund, Sweden. 

35 to 30, Leyden. 

30 to 25, Cambridge, England. 

25 to 15, Berlin. 

15 to 5, Leipsic. 

5 to 1, Albany. 

1 to — 2, Nicolaief . 

The space around the North pole had been, meanwhile, 
again surveyed in the most thorough manner by Carrington 
and others, so that the limits here given covered the necessity 
in the Northern hemisphere. German observatories have 
done nearly half the work, the remainder being divided in 
somewhat unequal proportions between Russia, America, 
Scandinavia, England, and Holland. The great Russian 
observatory of Pulkova furnished the indispensable funda- 
mental catalogue. Of course with equal breadth the polar 
zones are the smaller; thus of the three catalogues already 
published, Chnstiania (5° wide) contains 3,949 stars, Hel- 
singfors riO° wide) 14,680, and Albany (only 4° wide) 8,241. 
This makes, in less than one-fifth of the Northern hemis- 
phere, or one-tenth of the whole heavens, a erand total of 
26,870 ; but some hundreds of these may be duplicates (be- 
tween Helsingfors and Christiania), as the zones are made to 
overlap at the edges. 

The limits of the present article are too narrow to enter 
into the technical details of the observations and reductions. 
The admirable introduction by Professor Boss to the Albany 
zone (printed in English) can be referred to as the best ac- 
count of Argelandcr^s plan in our language ; the original 
instructions are given in the Vierteljahrschrift der Asirono- 
mischen Oesellschaff, Vol. II. The whole undertaking is in 
fact almost the original cause of the formation of the Society, 
which has since undertaken many other serious problems, and 
has become the leading astronomical society of the world. 
The results, reduced to 1875, are extremely accurate. Of 
course more time spent on every single observation would 
have rendered them still better ; but all indications show 
that, in the great majority of cases, each coordinate of a 
star's place whI be found accurate within a second of a great 
circle; so that if a star changes place but two or three sec- 
onds in a century, its motion can be detected before the year 



38 CATALOGUE OF THE ASTBONOHISCHE QESELLSCHAFl!. 

2000. And as all BesseVs and Lalande's stars^ however faint, 
have been reobserved, there is a vast mass of material now 
ready for the studv of proper motions. A few years now will 
see the printing or the row of stately volumes which will con- 
tain the results of several centuries (where all the work is 
combined as if done by one astronomer) of human labor. 

A continuation to the declination —23° is now in pro^ss 
in America, Algeria, and Austria ; Gould's great work, about 
the same time, defers the necessity of going farther, although 
it does not render it superfluous. Photography will doubtless 
be called in to make this problem easier; or, rather, the 
Southern zones will be included in the present photographic 
survey, and perhaps repeated later by the same method. 

The comparison of the three volumes mentioned at the 
head of this article is in many respects instructive. The 
astronomers were of different nations, employed widely vary- 
ing instruments, and in one respect a different method. Fearn- 
ley of Cliristiania, and Krueger of Helsingfors and Ootha 
were pupils of Argelander, and employed the old "eye and 
ear'* method (elaborated by the Greenwich astronomers of the 
last century). In this the transits of the stars across the 
meridian arc watched by the astronomer, who continually 
counts by the ear the beats of his clock. If this makes too 
little sound, he can reinforce it by an electro-magnet. He 
notes where the star is at the integral second (or half-second) 
before it passes the wire, and where at the second or half- 
second after ; and estimates the tenths by comparing a second 
or two afterwards what psychologists call the "traces" on his 
memory. The method is not always the most precise possi- 
ble, as it requires long training so to regulate the mental pro- 
cesses that uniform results shall bo obtained ; but in high 
declinations, where the stars appear to move much slower, it 
has certain advantages, and is always free of the annoyance 
that the sheets or tapes of the chronographic method must be 
read off. Argelander himself never used the more modem 
American method, which is, other things being equal, the 
more accurate, but is not always the one which produces 
equally accurate results with the least labor. 

The American is the telegraphic method. The star is seen 
approaching the wire, and the observer touches a telegraph 
key when he estimates that it has reached it. This instant 
is mechanically recorded on a chronograph. In one point 
this seems to be less accurate than the other ; a very faint 
star is usually misplaced by the fact that the observer lingers 
in his judgment that the phenomenon has taken place wnen 
the effect is hard to see ; so that the right ascensions of faint 
stars are too large when chronographically determined. 

The Albany zone was so observed. Professor Boss of course 



A PBOBLSM IN LEAST SQCJABES. 39 

determined how much each star was delayed in observation 
by this process ; nsin^ an ingenious method invented by Bessel 
of artificially diminishing the light of the stars as seen 
through the telescope without altering the character of the 
image^ and so found that his own mental processes delay his 
judgment by about a hundredth of a second per magnitude ; 
that is, he would observe a star of the eighth magnitude 
seven-hundredths of a second later than one of the first in the 
same place ; and so put it forward a second of arc and a small 
fraction in right ascension. 

On the other hand, the Albany observations of right ascen- 
sion are rather better, one b^ one, than those made at Hel- 
singfors. This was probably m part due to Krueger's anxiety 
about his declinations, which gave him more trouble, owing 
to the weakness of his instrument in that respect. Fearnley, 
on the other hand, had a zone so far north {66"^ to 70'') that 
with the old method he was able to equal the equality of Boss' 
work in right ascension with the new, while his employment 
of verniers instead of reading microscopes has somewhat 
impaired his declinations. 

But, all told, the uniformity of the three catalogues, due 
to the excellent plan formulated by Argelander, is more sensi- 
ble and far more important than the trifling discrepancies in 
execution. The plan is in fact the quintessence of modern 
practical astronomy in the subject witn which it deals. That 
It has been so warmly welcomed and so thoroughly executed 
by astronomers over the whole civilized globe is at once a 
proof of the excellence of their training and of the great 
advance which has been made in giving the human mind con- 
trol over its own processes and over material objects. 

Teuman Henry Safford. 



A PROBLEM IN LEAST SQUARES. 

BY PKOF. MANSFIELD MESSIMAN. 

To determine, by the method of least squares, the most prob- 
able values of a and b in the formula y = ax + b when the 
observed values of both y and z are liable to error, 

I. Let Xx and y„ x^ and y„ x^ and y, be n pairs of ob- 
served values of two variables known to be connected by the 
relation 

y z:z ax + b. 



40 A PBOPLEM IK LEAST 8QUASES. 

If the observed values of x were free from error, the mofit 
probable values of a and h would be deduced by the applica- 
tion of the common rules of the method of least squares. 
There would then be n observation equations of the form 

flx 4- 3 — y = 0, 

from which would result two normal equations 

[a;'] a + M J - [xy] = 0, 
[a:] a 4- »3 — [y] = 0, 

whose solution gives for a the value 

^ _ ^ [^y] - M [y] 

II. If however the observed values of y are free from error 
the formula should be written 

- y ^ = ; 

a^ a ' 

then by forming the normal equations and solving, there is 
found for a the value 

^ _ » [y'] - [y] ' 



n [xy] - [x] [yY 
which in general is quite different from that given in I. 

III. llow shall the most probable value of a be found when 
the observed values of both x and y are subject to error ? The 
following is the solution which I made in February, 1891, 
when considering the problem at the request of the Director 
of the Observatory of Harvard College : 

Let the weight of each observed value of y be unitv, and let 
the weight of each observed value of x be //. Then let ax and 
a, be computed by the formulas in I. and 11. The most prob- 
able value of a is then one of the roots of the equation 



«• + U,-««) a-g^O. 



IV. The demonstration of the last formula will be given in 
full in a paper which is to appear in the report of the U. S. 
Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1890. Here there is only space 
to illustrate its application by one or two numerical examples. 



A PBOBLEM IN LEAST SQUABES. 41 

When a has been computed the most probable value of h is 
directly found from 

n 

y. An interesting corollary is applicable to the case where 
a is known a prion and ax and a, are derived from obserra- 
tions. Then from III. the value of g is 

1-1 
a Ox 

VI. As an example of the application of III. and IV. let 
the following be simultaneous observations of two thermome- 
ters having the same exposure : 



No. 

y 

X 



1 23466789 

9° 10° 10° 11° 11° 11° 12° 12° 13° 

10° 10° 11° 10° 11° 12° 11° 12° 12° 



It is required to find the relation between the scales, or the 
values of a and b in the formula y = ao; + J, regarding the 
weights of the two series as equal. 

Here ^ = 1, ti = 9, M = 99, [x'\ = 99, [x"] = 1095, [y'l 
= 1101, \xy\ = 1095. These inserted in I. give a, = 1 and 
inserted in II. give a, = 2. Then from III. there results : 

«• + (1 - 2) a - 1 = 0. 

from which a = + 1.618 and a = — 0.618. The former of 
these is the value required (since it makes the sum of the 
squares of the residual errors a minimum, the latter making 
that sum a maximum). From IV. the value of b is now found 
to be -6.798. Thus, 

y = 1.618a; -6.798 

is the most probable relation resulting from the given observa- 
tions. The common rules of the method of least squares 
would give y = a; if observed values of x be taken without 
error and y = 2 x — 11 if observed values of y be without 
error. 

VII. As an illustration of the use of V. let the following 
be estimations of the magnitudes of stars by two observers : 



42 A NEW ITALIAN MATHEHATICAL JOURNAL. 

No. : 1 2 3 4 6 6 

y : 8° 9^ 10° 10° 10° 11° 
X : 9° 9° 11° 9° 10° 9° 

It is required to find the weight g^ it being known a priori 

22 
that a = 1. Here, from I. there is found a^ = s^, and from 

32 
IL fl, = Q^r ; then from V. there results 



22 



_ 22 - 32 _ 10 
^ ■" 22 - 29 ■" 7 ' 



or the weight of the first series of obserrations is to that of 
the second as 7 is to 10. 

VIII. If the equation between the variables be of a degree 
higher than the first, as 2;' = aw* + by values of a and h may 
be deduced by following the above method, regarding «* and 
w* as observed values corresponding to y and x. Since, how- 
ever, the real observed values are z and w I am not prepared 
to say that the results deduced for the parameters a and will 
be strictly the most probable ones according to the principles 
of the method of least squares. 

Lehigh Univebsity, October, 1891. 



A NEW ITALIAN MATHEMATICAL JOURNAL. 

Rivista di Mateniatica, diretta da G. Peano. Torino, Fratelli 
Bocca, 1891. 

Almost simultaneously with the Bulletin of the New York 
Mathematical Society, a new journal of a somewhat similar 
character has been founded in Italy. Like the Bulletin, the 
Rivista di Matematica is a monthly of at least sixteen pages 
8vo. According to the prospectus "its scope is essentially 
didactic, its principal object being the improvement of the 
methodsof teaching." The Rivista will contain "articlesand 
discussions concerning the fundamental principles of the sci- 
ence and also the history of mathematics." ** The review of 
text-books and all publications having reference to the teach- 
ing of mathematics will form an important feature.'' Ques- 
tions and inquiries about mathematical subjects sent to the 
editor will be either answered dii'ectly or published in the 



A KEW ITALIAN MATHEMATICAL JOUBNAL. 43 

journal. Articles intended for the journal may be written in 
any of the principal langaages and will be translated if neces- 
sary. Subscriptions (7 francs per annum) are to be sent to 
the publishers, Fratelli Bocca, Turin. 

The editor, Prof. Giuseppe Peano of the University of 
Turin, is well known through his original investigations in 
Mathematical Lo^c and in Orassmann's Oeometrical Calculus, 
as well as through his rigorous and elegant treatment of the 
Infinitesimal Calculus. His own contributions to the Rivista 
so far (the first number appeared in January, 1891) relate 
mainly to the fundamental logical principles of the science of 
mathematics. 

Among the longer articles by other contributors we find an 
interesting paper (pp. 42-66) by Professor Segre, of Turin, 
addressed to his students, in which he points out some of the 
distinctive features of modem mathematics and gives whole- 
some advice to the young mathematician who wishes to engage 
in original research. The author is evidently inspired by 
what may be called the modern Gottingen school (Riemann, 
Clebsch, and in particular Felix Klein), insisting as he does 
on the organic unity of the whole of mathematics, warning 
against excessive specialization, and recommending that the 
young mathematician should make it his object to bring to 
Dear as far as possible all branches of mathematical science on 
the particular subject of his investigation. It is curious to 
note that, in the opinion of Prof. Segre, there exists a very 
pronounced preference for the study of pure geometry, to the 
injury of analytical studies, among the younger generation of 
Italian mathematicians. Some remarks in this paper as to 
mathematical rigor and the use of hyperspace gave rise to an 
interesting discussion between the author and the editor (pp. 
66-69, and pp. 154-169). Other contributors are A. Favaro, 
G. M. Testi, E. Novarese, C. Burali-Forti, G. Vivanti, etc. 

Among the reviews, the very full account given by Gino 
Loria of R de Paolis' theory of geometrical groups * is most 
prominent (pp. 105-120). E. W. Hyde's Directional Calculus 
tinds a competent and appreciative critic in the editor (pp. 17- 
19). 

Alexander Ziwet. 

Ann Abbob, August 10, 1891. ^ 

* R. DE Paolis, Teoria dei gruppi geometrici e delle corrts^ondeme che 
8ipo88ono stabilire tra i loro elementi. Memorie della Societa Italiana 
delle IScienze delta dei XL., voL VII. series III. 



44 THE PHOTOCHBOKOORAPH. 



THE PHOTOCHRONOGRAPa 

Thephofochronograph, and its application to star transits. 
By J. G. Hagek, S. J., and G. A. Fasgis, S. J., Geoigetown College 
Obfiervatorj. Georgetown, D. C, 1891. 4to, pp. 86. 

The authors of the above publication are the first to lay 
before the astronomical world a solution^ or at least a partial 
solution, of the verjr important problem of meridian transit 
photo^phy. The instrument they have employed consists 
essentially of an electromagnetic shutter or '* occulting bar,** 
which can be attached to the eye-end of a transit instrument 
or meridian circle. The apparatus is so arranged that the 
current from a break-circuit clock moves the occulting bar 
every second in such a way that the image of a star in tran- 
sit is impressed for a moment upon a photographic plate 
mounted behind the bar. A line of *' star-dots '* can after- 
wards be developed upon the plate. In order to refer the 
dots to the collimation axis of the instrument, a glass reticle 
plate, ruled with one vertical reference line, is permanently 
fixed in the tube, directly in front of the sensitized surface, 
and in contact with it. After the star transit is over, it is 
easy to impress the line upon the sensitized plate, by allowing 
the light of a lantern to fall for a moment upon the object- 
glass of the telescope. While this is being done, the line of 
star dots is shielded from the light by the occulting bar, now 
permanently interposed between the dots and the light. This 
method of impressing the reference line upon the plate is ex- 
cellent, and is further improved by ruling the line with a 
break in the middle, so that none or the dots can possibly be 
" occulted " by the line itself. The plates are measured with 
a micrometric apparatus, by means of which it is easy to 
determine the instant of the passage of the star across the 
reference line. 

The process thus very briefly outlined is given by the 
authors with all possible detail ; even the preliminary appara- 
tus, subsequently discarded as imperfect, being carefully de- 
scribed. Other experimenters in the same field should there- 
fore be greatly aided by the present work. In this connection 
it is proper to refer to the earlier observations of L. M. 
Butherfurd, of New York, who successfully employed an 
arrangement essentially similar to the photochronograph 
many years ago.* In the collection deposited by Mr. Euther- 

*B. A. Gould, Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. iv., 
p. 175. 

L. M. RurnEBFURD, American Journal of Science and Arts, vol. iv,, 
Dec. , 1872. 



THE PHOTOCHBOKOORAPH. 45 

fnrd at Columbia GoUe^* are many negatiyies showing lines 
of star-dots, together with mierometric measures of the same. 

We shall now enter into a somewhat more careful examina- 
tion of some of the statements contained in the book^ taking 
them up in order. It is diflBcult to see why only one yerticai 
line has been used on the reticle plate. The authors refer to 
their reason for this (p. 12), but without anywhere definitely 
stating it. One would think the presence of several vertical 
lines would offer a valuable control of possible irregular ex- 
pansions of the film during development. Nor would there 
De any compensating disadvantage, for the admirable device 
of breaking the lines in the middle would prevent any inter- 
ference with the star-dots. The effect of irregular distortion 
of the film would not be eliminated by the method of meas- 
urement (p. 24). It is gratifying to find (p. 13) that no 
trouble was experienced from a jarring of the instrument by 
the reffular beats of the occulting bar. 

Probably the most important difficulty of the method is 
touched upon by the authors in speaking of collimation 
(p. 17). In fact, it may safely be said that the photographic 
transit instrument will not be applicable to the finest funda- 
mental work, until it becomes possible to determine the col- 
limation and level constants photographically ; without re- 
versal in the Y's, and without the use of the hanging level. 
In all the observations so far made, the collimation constant 
has been determined from reversals alone, and the hanging 
level has always been employed. A very interesting remark 
occurs (p. 18) in connection with personal equation. By 
watching the occulting bar through an eye-piece while a star 
is in transit, the existence and effect of the observer's per- 
sonal equation become very obvious. 

We now come to Part Ii. of the book, which treats of the 
reduction of the observations. This part is the work of 
J. G. Hagen, S.J. ; the first part, in which the instrument and 
methods are described, being by G. A. Fargis, S.J. The 
screw of the measuring micrometer has been examined for 
both periodic and progressive errors, according to the usual 
methods. The author very justly concludes that it is advis- 
able to determine the screw value separately from each plate, 
though errors due to an oblique mounting of the plate in the 
tube would not be eliminated thereby, as seems to be implied 
in the text (p. 22, c). The adopted method of measurement, 
by which the dots are taken in corresponding pairs at nearly 
equal distances on both sides of the central line, has much in 
its favor. With regard to the example of a series of transits 

* J. K. Rbbs, AnnaU of the New York Academy of Sciences, vol. vi, 
June^ 1891. 



44 SOMESChATTKE 09 HYCBASICS. 

(p, 34) it maj be i^d that the data are not safficient to draw 
Cfmcltimfma of a reir defioitire character, berond the fact 
that the method gires re$alt« of rerr satisfactory accuracy. 
The azimath constants for the evening (two in number) and 
the eoUimation constant hare been derired from the fifteen 
obserrations themselTea. Their ralnes are stated to be the 
^'most probable'' ones. If they have been obtained by a 
least-square redaction in which the clock-rate was ignore<fy it 
is not remarkable that the final residnals show no eridenoe of 
a clock-rate (p. 35). 

In Ci^inelusiony we ma^ accord to the authors of this book 
the credit of having invented and made public a photo- 
graphic method by which meridian transits may be observed 
witti high accuracy, and with a complete freedom from per- 
sonal equation, Ii there is a weak point,- it will be found in 
the determination of the instrumental constants. The many 
other important jmrposes for which the photochronograph is 
very well a<lapted we shall not touch upon in this place. 
Some of them have already been described in print, and 
many others will doubtless shortly come into prominence. 

Harold Jacoby. 

Columbia College, New York, 1891, October. 



NOMENCLATURE OF MECHANICS. 

IIY T. W. WRIGHT, PH.D. 

TiTE nomenclature of mechanics is in a somewhat confused 
condition. Tliero is some excuse for this because the science 
is one of the oldest, and at the same time one of the most 
propfrcHsivo, as it certainly is the most comprehensive. New 
tornm arc hoiiipf introduced, others are being suggested to 
take the ])luce of old ones ; but the naturally conservative 
cling to the old, and hence we have a duplication, and in 
Honjo (Mises a trii)lioation of names for the same thing. At 
the tliroshold wo are mot by a difficulty. How shall we define 
nuHjlianicH P Originally the science of machines, it is by some 
defined as the science of matter and motion. By others the 
term dynamics is ai)])lied to the science of matter and mo- 
tion, and the term mechanics is discarded. The tendency at 
pn^sont seems to be in the direction of the latter method. 
The science is founded on three principles or laws laid down 
by Newton. These laws were originally enunciated in Latin^ 
uiid the number of translations is very great. Here is a source 



NOMENCLAUUBE OF MECHANICS. 47 

of confnsion. With a new translation come in new terms or a 
change in the meaning of old ones. For example, Newton's 
first law is called by some the law of inertia. What is inertia ? 
Is it inertness, a mere negative property, or is it a property 
admitting of measurement, a Quantitative property ? When 
we come to the second law we nave the idea of mass promi- 
nently brought forward. Since the second law includes the 
first, why introduce the term inertia at all ? Is not mass 
suflBcient ? Call the first law the law of mass and the second 
the law of mass-acceleration. The reformers who drop inertia 
in the first law would have us call centre of gravity centre of 
mass, and moment of inertia moment of mass. The first of 
these changes, centre of mass for centre of gravity,, is well 
under way and will probably prevail. The change from mo- 
ment of inertia to moment of mass meets with less favor. In- 
deed, the new name seems as objectionable as the old, for the 
moment is not a simple moment, but a second moment. 

Next in importance to a proper translation of the laws of 
motion is the settlement of the question of how weight shall 
be defined. One school use it in the sense of mass ; another 
in the sense of force, it being the attractive force of the earth 
on mass ; while a third contend for its use in both senses. 
The question was debated by some of the ablest physicists in 
England two or three years ago but no definite conclusion 
was reached. This and' the relation 

W= mg 

form probably the center of greatest confusion in elementary 
mechanics. The perplexity of a beginner as to whether in a 
given problem he shall multiply or divide by g is extreme, 
and the mournful thing is that this is not owing to his own 
stupidity. The pit has been dug for him and is persistently 
kept open waiting for new victims. 

The nomenclature is deficient in several respects. We have 
no single term for the unit of velocity, the foot per second^ 
nor for the unit of acceleration, the foot per second per second; 
but must use these long phrases where a monosyllable ought 
to suffice. The most satisfactory suggestion I have seen is to 
use/.5. for unit velocity and/.5.5. for unit acceleration. Nor 
have we any name for the absolute unit of force in the British 
system. It is true that some recent writers use Prof. James 
Thomson's term the poundal for unit force. If we say 
poundal shall we say ouncal, tonal, etc.? Consistency would 
seem to force us to do so. The terms sound odd enough. Is 
the gain in simplicity in the dynamical formulas expressed in 
absolute units over that of the gravitation system a sufficient 
excuse for introducing terms that will probably never be used 



48 A TBEATISE OK UKEAB DIFFEBEKTIAL EQUATIOHS. 

outside of the lecture room ? What engineer would use foot- 
poundal for example ? The nomenclature is also redundant 
A single instance will suffice. Shall we say Tis-yiya, Hying 
f orce^ or kinetic energy ? AH three are used to denote the 
same thing to the mystification of the beginner. All three 
can be found in text books of recent date. To my mind 
there is no doubt but that kinetic energy is the propef term. 

Now, the confusion, deficiency, and redundancy being 
granted, what can be done ?* No one writer can do much to 
effect a change. But an association such as the New York 
Mathematiccil Society can do much. Expressions of opinion 
through the pages of this journal would probably lead to some 
more definite understanding than now exists. At least some 
of the more g:laring absurdities and contradictions of our pres- 
ent system might be abated. Besides, it might tend to curb 
the ambition of writers to introduce ill-considered terms such 
as " heaviness '^ or "centre of weight" for centre of gnmty 
and the like. 

Union Ck>LLEOB, 1891, October 10. 



A TBEATISE ON LINEAB DIPPEBENTIAL EQUA- 
TIONS. Vol. I. Equations with uniform coefficients. 
By Thomas Cbaig, Fh.D. New York ; John Wiley & 
Sons, 1889. Svo, pp. ix. + 516. 

The appearance of Fuchs's two memoirs in 1866 and 1868 
respectively, gave an impetus to research on linear differential 
equations which has resulted in the development of an enor- 
mous literature on the subject, consisting of articles and 
memoirs scattered through mathematical journals and the 
proceedings of learned societies. The systematization and 
presentation in a body of the principal methods and results 
developed in these isolated papers, is the work which has 
been undertaken by Professor Craig, and which has success- 
fully issued in the first volume of the most advanced treatise 
on pure mathematics ever published by an American author. 
Whilst the presentation of the subject as a whole must prove 
of advantage to those few mathematicians who have access to 
the memoirs whence it draws, upon the many to whom the 
original sources are not open it confers an inestimable boon. 
To the English-reading student further it manifests in his 
own language the substance of what is for the most part in 
the original in French or Gorman. Praise is due the author 
for the scrupulous care with which he credits every writer 



A TBBATISE ON LINEAB DIFFEBEKTIAL EQUATIONS. 49 

qnotedy and for the falness of his references^ which pye an 
added value to the volume. A glance at these references 
cannot fail to impress upon the reader a sense of the over- 
whelming influence which the continental element has had in 
shaping the development of modem differential equations. 
In lact^ an analysis shows that of the sixty-odd names quoted 
in the volume more than three-fourths divide themselves 
about equally between the French and Germans^ and of the 
remainder some eight majr be claimed by the English speak- 
ing peoples : so that if this showing in relation to the pop- 
ulations of the countries concerned could be fairly consid- 
ered as furnishing a criterion relative to the generality of 
interest manifested among the several peoples in the develop- 
ment of the subject, such interest in America and England 
as compared with that in France and Oermanjr might be 
averaged as 1 to 7. The dropping of the average in the com- 
parison, it may be frankly owned, would not advantage the 
showing of America. 

The reader in his progress through this treatise will con- 
stantly have to do with the modern theory of functions, and 
will meet with some simple applications oi the theory of sub- 
stitutions. Both of these departments, with their numerous 
applications and possibilities of further development, offer a 
field whose successful cultivation on the continent shows a 
productive power giving as yet no si^ of exhaustion. Pro- 
fessor Craig's book will have accomphshed a useful mission if 
it helps to awaken American students to a sense of the 
work that is being done in Europe, and, as a consequence, 
rouses them to a realization of what is being left undone in 
America. There seem, however, at present to be definite 
tendencies making for the elevation of mathematics in Amer- 
ica, and it may not perhaps be idle to indulge a hope that 
America will yet contribute in a fitting proportion to the de- 
velopment of the science. The preliminary knowledge of the 
theory of functions necessary to the reading of Jrrofessor 
Graig's book may be obtained from Hermite's Cours, To 
the student who desires an acquaintance with the theory of 
substitutions one can recommend Netto^s Substitutionen- 
theorie and Serret's Cours d'Alaebre Superieure, though so 
far as is necessary for understanding the applications of the 
latter theory in the volume under consideration, a very par- 
tial reading of its treatment in either of the works mentioned 
will prove sufficient, and, in fact, a few words of explanation 
from one familiar with the substitution notation would prob- 
ably suffice. The American student of mathematics who 
acquires a knowledge of these branches will in general do so 
by his own unaided efforts, for courses in them are offered by 
but a small number of our universities, and further, as re- 



60 A TREATISE ON LnTBAR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

gards nnassisted stnd^r^ it may aD fortunately be said that few 
of our colleges and universities give a course in mathematics 
whose discipline prepares a man for such study. The fault lies 
perhaps not so much with the higher institutions of learning 
as with the preparatory and hi^ schools, into whose hands 
our potential young mathematicians first fall, and which as a 
general rule allot to the study of algebm and geometry a 
time utterly inadequate to the laying of a basis on which the 
college can satisfactorily build. On tne other hand, almost all 
our college professors, among whom we find, of course, the 
great majority of our mathematicians, are overworked. Teach- 
mg absorbs the energy and spontaneity which should be spent 
upon private study and research. For the latter scanty allow- 
ance is made, except in a few of our larger universities, con- 
spicuous among which is that university in which the author 
01 our treatise is a teacher. The lack of stimulus and encour- 
agement due to the isolation in which the American mathe- 
matical professor has been wont to live, may (it is not an 
unreasonable anticipation) be remedied in some degree by the 
founding of a mathematical society of national scope with the 
publication of a bulletin. Thus may be fostered among 
American mathematicians a fellow interest in their science, 
to illustrate the advantages of which we might cite the sub- 
ject of the work before us, which has been developed since 
the publication of Fuchs^s memoirs, only by the cross-working 
of scores of European mathematicians. 

Before the appearance of these two memoirs the only general 
class of linear differential equations for which a solution had 
been found was that in which all the coeflBcients are constant, 
but with the application of the modern theory of functions a 
new field opened up. In this theory the critical points of 
a function i)lay an all-important role, and, as can be readily 
shown in the case of the equation which constitutes the 
theme of the volume under review, the critical points of the 
integrals of the equation are included among those of its co- 
eflBcients. This property evidently gives us some hold upon 
the integrals and is, when combined with the fact that the 
general integral is a linear function of the particular integrals, 
more fruitful of results than would readily be anticipated, re- 
sults of which but a few can here be hinted at. 

The work opens with a recapitulation of the genei'al proper- 
ties of linear differential equations, followed by an extended 
modem treatment of the equation with constant coeflBcients. 
It then takes up the theory of the differential equation 



A TBEATISE ON LIKEAB DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. 51 

where the coefficients jo,, />,,....,/?, are uniform functions of 
X, having only poles as critical points. Let y„ y,, y, de- 
note a system of fundamental integrals of (1). If now the im- 
aginary variable x make the circuit of a critical point in the 
plane, returning by any path to its point of departure, the 
coefficients, since they are uniform, will return into them- 
selves^ and the equation will be unaltered. Any integral of 
the original equation, then, necessarily remains such, and can 
at most have transformed into a linear function of the n 
fundamental integrals. It is now shown that among such 
transformed integrals, there will be at least one which will 
transform into itself multiplied by some constant s which is 
determined as the root of an equation of the nth degree in 8 
called in reference to the critical point in question, the char- 
acteristic equation for the system of fundamental integrals 

y,* y,» . . . . , y-. 

There will be as many such integrals as there are solutions 
to the characteristic equation ; and, in fact, corresponding 
to a A-multiple root s^ of this equation there will be a group 
of A. integrals w„ w„ . . . . , ux which, when the variable x 
completes the closed circuit, may respectively be shown to 
transform into 

• • . • • 

where the coefficients s are all constants, and the aggregate 
of such groups corresponding to the different roots of the 
characteristic equation will constitute a system of fundamental 
integrals of the differential equation. The theory is given for 
the point x = considered as the typical critical point, the 
reasoning for any other critical point a being obtained by sub- 
stituting (a;— fl) for x wherever it may appear in our formula?. 
The group of integrals given above are now shown to be of 
the following forms : 



(2) < 



U, = 3fi{ (p,^ 4- <p,, log x} 

u, = afi {^„ + ^„ log x 4- ^„ log'a;} 



ux = x^i {^x, + <?>Ajog a; + + ^^ log k-ix} 

where the ^'s are uniform in the region of our critical point 



52 A TREATISE ON LIJSTEAB DIFFEBENTIAL EQIJATIOKa 

2; = 0, and such that anyoDO of them can be expressed in 

terms of those whose second subscript is 1; 9>„, ^„ f 

<Paa differing from one another only by constant factors and 
imr^ being equal to log s ; we find that this group (2) may 
be replaced by a number of sub-groups possessing precisely 
the properties just enumerated^ and can further show that the 
transformation effected by a circuit of the critical point may 
be represented thus : 



S = 



y^> y.> "'I ^y»» «i(y, + yJ^ • • -^ «,(y* + y*-«) 
y\y y\y • • • ; ^^y\^ »Xy\ + y'i). • • •> «i(y.' + y.'-O 



the interpretation of this notation being that a certain system 
of n independent integrals of our equation represented by 

the symbols y., y, y i» • • -^i* • • '^^ ^^® \^ii, are by circuit 

of the critical point transformed into the expressions corre- 
sponding in position on the right, where «j, «„.... are solu- 
tions of the characteristic equation. The aggregate of trans- 
formations thus effected is indicated by the letter S and is 
called the substitution for the point in question. As pre- 
sented here it is said to be in its canonical form. There will 
be such a substitution corresponding to a single circuit of any 
critical point, to a multiple circuit of the same, or to a circuit 
including any combination of critical points, all substitutions, 
by the way, being reducible to successive applications of the 
substitutions for different individual points. 

The aggregate of all possible substitutions is defined as the 
group of the equation. In a later chapter the author by the 
aid of the canonical form just given goes into the investiga- 
tion of what are called function-groups, these being groups of 
functions which under all possible applications of a substitu- 
tion-^roup transform into one another. The integrals of our 
equation (1) evidently constitute such a group and include, it 
may be, smaller function-groups formed by the linear func- 
tions of linearly independent integrals less than n in number. 
With the consideration of these tne chapter just referred to 
concerns itself. 

. Reverting now to formulaB (2), if all the <p^B entering into 
any one of the integrals u contain only finite negative powers 
of Xy the integral is called regular in the region of the point 
a: = 0, and with proper choice of r can be written 

(3) i?^E aM 9?o + 9^1 log a; +....+ 9?k log*a; \ , 



A TBEATISE OK LINEAR DIFFEBEKTIAL EQUATIONS. 53 

where the ^« are uniform, and or'F becomes infinite for 

a; = in the same manner as a -\- fi log x + + 

^log^o;^ a. A--** heiDg constants. In order that equation 
(1) should have a system of linearly independent regular 
integrals in the region of the point a; = 0, it is shown to be 
necessary and sufficient that every coefficient pj shall have 
a; = as an ordinary point or a pole of multiplicity not greater 
than y. Denoting by w< the degree of x in the denominater 
of p,, the value of i for which w, + w - i = ^ is a maximum 
is called the characteristic index of equation (1), and by sub- 
stitution in the differential ^uantic F{y) of xp for y, we will 
find that xr-pP{xp) developed m ascending powers of x has as its 
first term 0{^p) ar^ where 0{p) is an integral function of p of 
de^e w — t = V. G^Tp) = is called the indicial equation j 
ana it may be snown tnat the number of linearly independent 
regular integrals of (1) is not greater than the degree of this 
equation. The conditions that it should be equal to this 
degree are also determined, and in particular its degree is 
observed to be equal to n when all the integrals are regular. 
The exponent r in (3), where F is supposed to be a regular 
integral, is given by the indicial equation ; and the coeffi- 
cients of the q>^s developed in positive powers of x are deter- 
mined by substitution of Fin the differential equation. 

An extended application of the general theory is made to 
differential equations of the second order, particularly to the 
equation which has all its integrals regular and possesses but 
three critical points. This equation is shown to be trans- 
formable to one in which the critical points are 0, 1, oo, an 
equation of which the hypergeometric series F(ay y5, y^ x) is 
an integral. A complete translation of Goursat's memoir on 
this equation is embodied in the work, filling some 150 pages. 
An exhaustive discussion is given of its twenty-four integrals, 
which divided into six groups of four each, are connected by 
some twenty linear relations between integrals selected from 
the six groups taken three at a time. The portions of the 
plane in which the several integrals have a meaning are also 
indicated. An investigation is made of the transformations 
admitted by the series when all three quantities a, fiy y, ^^ 
not arbitrary ; and an extended list of such transformations, 
with formulse derived therefrom, is given. The theory of 
irreducible equations is briefly touched upon ; as is also, at 
greater length, the theory of the decomposition of a linear 
differential equation into prime factors, with its application 
in the case of equations possessing regular integrals. 

In equation (1) we can by a simple transformation readily 
get rid of its second term ; and, as is shown in one of the 
later chapters of the book, by a transformation ^ = 9^ (^)> 
y = «'-* ^''^i) Uy where the form of z is dependent on a differen- 



54 NOTES. 

tial equation of second order, we may still further rid our- 
selves of its third term, the equation so reduced being said to 
be in its canonical form. There are also certain associate 
equations {91 — 2) in number, the solutions of each of which 
consist in a set of variables dependent upon the integrals of 
equation (1) and possessing relative to the transformation 
mentioned, the invariantive propertv of returning into them- 
selves multiplied by a power of z , among these equations 
being found the well-loiown equation of the n'** order on 
which depends the determination of an integrating factor 
for (1). 

The volume concludes with a short chapter on equations 
with uniform doubly-periodic coeflBcients, a subject which the 
author expresses his intention of resuming m his second 
volume. Supposing w and w' to be the periods of our coefiS- 
cients, by the substitution oix -^ w or x 4- w' for x, they will 
remain unaltered and the integrals will transform into linear 
functions of one another. By analogy the general theory 
already given suggests that the characteristic equations corre- 
spondm^ to these substitutions may give us constants s and s% 
by which the respective transformations multiply some in- 
tegral u. When the general integral happens to be uniform 
such proves to be the case, there being at least one integral u 
which by the substitutions x -[• w and x -^ w' for x respect- 
ively transforms into s u and s'u, and for the determination 
of such integrals, as also of the other integrals of the equation, 
methods are given. J. C. Fields. 



NOTES. 



At the meeting of the New York Mathematical Society 
held Saturday afternoon, October 3d, at half-past three 
o'clock, the Council announced that Professor Henry B. Fine 
had been appointed to fill the vacancy in their body. The 
following persons having been duly nominated, and being 
recommended by the Council, were elected to membership : 
Professor Thomas Craig, Johns Hopkins University ; Dr. A. 
V. Lane, Dallas, Texas; Professor L. A. Wait, Cornell Uni- 
versity ; Professor George Egbert Fisher, University of 
Pennsylvania ; Mr. William H. Metzler, Clark University ; 
Professor Ellen Hayes, Wellesley College ; Professor George 
A. Miller, Eureka College ; Mr. Charles Nelson Jones, Mil- 
waukee, Wisconsin ; Dr. J. Woodbridge Davis, New York ; 
Mr. Charles H. Eockwell, Tarrytown, N. Y. ; Professor J, 
Burkitt Webb, Stevens Institute of Technology. 



KOTES. 55 

Tho following original papers were read : The Determina- 
tion of Azimuth by Elongations of Polaris, by Mr. Harold 
Jacoby ; On Powers of Numbers whose Sum is the Same 
Power of Some Number, by Dr. Artemas Martin ; A Classi- 
fication of Logarithmic Systems, by Professor Irving String- 
ham. 

Professor Stringham's paper will be published in the 
American Journal of Mathematics, and Mr. Jacoby's has been 
communicated to the Royal Astronomical Society of London. 

T. 8. F. 

Ik the course of his paper mentioned above Dr. Martin 
presented the following very remarkable series of numbers re- 
cently found by him : 

4» + 5*4.6» + 7* + 9* + ir = 12* 
5* + 10* + ir + 16* + 19* + 29* = 30* 

12' + 13* + 15' + 16* + 17'+.... 

+ 23* + 25* + 27* + 28*+29*+. . . +35* = 50* 
l* + 2' + 4' + 5' + 6'4-7* + 9*4-12* + 13* 

+ 15* + 16' + 18* + 20' + 2r + 22« + 23» = 28* 

The paper will be published elsewhere in eztenso. 

Ik connection with Professor Merriman^s article, it may 
be of interest to note that Professor Wright, also a con- 
tributor to the present number, gives a different treatment of 
the same problem in his *^ Treatise on the Adjustment of 
Observations,^' p. 206. 

William Febrel, the eminent meteorologist, died on Friday, 
September 18, at Maywood, Wyandotte County, Kansas. He 
was bom in Bedford County, Pennsylvania, January 29, 1817. 
He studied at Franklin and Marshall College, and at Bethany 
College, being graduated from the latter in 1844. In 1857 he 
became an assistant in the office of the American Ephemeris 
and Nautical Almanac, and held that position for ten years. 
Thereafter, until 1882, he held a special appointment in the 
United States Coast Survey. In that year he was made assist- 
ant, with the rank of professor, in the Signal Service Bureau, 
where he remained until October, 1886, when he made his 
home in Kansas City, Missouri. He invented the maxima 
and minima tide predicting machine, which is now used 
by the Coast Survey in predicting the tides. Professor Ferrel 
received honorary elections to the Austrian, English, and 
German meteorological societies, and in 1868 was elected to 
membership in the National Academy of Sciences. Some of 
his principal works are '^ Motions of Fluids and Solids Selative 



56 KOTBS. 

to tho Earth's Surface," published in 1869 ; "DetenninatioM 
of the Moon's Mass from Tidal Obseryationfl,'' 1871; "Oonyeix- 
ing Series Expressing the Batio between the Diameter and tfi» 
Circumference of a Circle,'' 1871 ; " Tidal Eesearches," 1874 ; 
" Tides of Tahiti," 1874 ; " Meteorological Besearehes," in 
three parts, published consecutively, in 1875, 1878, and 1881 ; 
"Becent Advances iivMeteoroloCT," 1883, and "Temperature 
of the Atmosphere and the Earux's Surface," 1884. 

It is with regret that we learn of the death of qnr member, 
Asher Benton Evans. He died at Lockport, the'place of his 
late residence, September 24, 1891. He was an alamnus of 
Madison (now Colgate) University of the class of 1860. He 
was widely known as an educator, and had been a contributor 
to the Mathematical Monthly. 

The Cambridge University Press announces : Catalogue of 
Scientific Papers Compiled by the Royal Society of London, 
new series for the years 1874r-1883 ; The Collected Mathematical 
Papers of Arthur Cayley, Sc, i>., F. R. S., Sadlerian Pro- 
fessor of Mathematics in the University of Cambridge, Vol. 
*IV. ; A History of the Theory^of Elasticity and of the Strength 
of Materials, by the late I. Todhunter, F. B. S., edited and 
completed by Carl Pearson, Professor of Applied Mathematics, 
University College, London, Vol. II. 

The Clarendon Press promises : Mathematical Papers of the 
late Henry J. S. Smith, Savilian Professor of Geometry %n the 
University of Oxford, with portrait and memoir, 2 vols. ; A 
Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, by G. Clerk Maxwell, 
new edition. 

The October number of the American Journal of Mathe- 
matics begins the fourteenth volume. It contains as a 
frontispiece an excellent likeness of Professor Felix Klein of 
Gottingen. 

John Wiley & Sons have in preparation '^A New Element- 
ary Synthetic Geometry, Plane and Solid, especially adapted 
to high-school work, with numerous examples,*' by George 
Brace Halsted, Professor of Mathematics in the University of 
Texas. t. s. f. 

The Inland Press (The Begister Publishing Company, 
Ann Arbor, Mich.) has just issued : *' Practical astronomy,'* 
by W. W. Campbell, a short treatise mainly intended for the 
use of surveyors and civil engineers; also ''Logarithmic and 
other mathematical tables " (to five places), bv W. J. Hussey. 
The same house announces as in preparation iwo translations 



KOTES. 67 

from the Oerman : 0. Dziobek's '^Mathematical theories of 
planetary motions/* translated by Prof. M. W. Harrington ; 
and E. Netto's "Theory of snbstitutions and its applications 
to algebra/* translated by Dr. F. N. Cole. It is to be noticed 
that Dr. Netto has not only authorized the present transla- 
tion, bat has famished the translator with a lar^e amount of 
new material in the form of corrections and additions, so that 
some of the chapters of the original are almost entirely re- 
written, and the whole work will be considerably increased. 
The work will appear early in 1892. 

Professor M. W. Harrington having been appointed 
chief of the TJ. S. Weather Bureau, the astronomical observa- 
tory of the University of Michigan is temporarily in charge 
of the newly appointed instructor in astronomy, Mr. W. J. 
Hussey. The former instructor, Mr. W. W. Campbell, has 
accepted a position as assistant at the Lick Observatory, Mt. 
Hamilton, Gal. A. z. 

Professor Clarence A. Waldo, recently of the Rose 
Polytechnic Institute, is now at De Pauw University, Green- 
castle, Indiana. x. s. F. 



58 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

NEW PUBLICATIONS 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANN A CO., NEW YORK. 

Adleb (A.). Graphische AuflSsung der Gleichungen. Klagenfart 
1891. gr. 8. 26 pg. M. 1.00 

AiBY (G. B.) Popular Astronomy. A series of Lectnies delivered at 
Ipswich. 7. edition, revised by H. H. Turner. London 1891. 8. 
302 pg. cloth. M. 4.80 

Battebhann (H.). BeitrSge zur Bestimmung der Mondbewegang und 
der SonnenparaUaxe aus Beobachtungen von Stcmbedeckungen am 
sechsfHssigen Merz'schen Femrohr der Berliner Stemwarte, 1891. 
42 pp. M. 4.00 

Beobachtuvosesobbnisse der E5nigl. Stern warte zu Berlin. Heft V. 
Berlin 1891. gr. 4. 42 pg. Mk. 4.0O 

Beobachtungen, Astronomische. an der k. k. Stemwarte zu Prag in den 
Jahren 1885, 1886 und 1887, enthaltend Originalzeichnungen des 
Mondes. Herausgegeben von L. Weinek. Prag 1890. gr. 4 63 pg. 
m. 3 Tafcln in Lithographie und 4 Tafeln in Heliogravure. Mk. 15.00 

BouROET (J.). Tables de Logarithmes h 5 d^imales des hombres depuis 
1 jusqu'd 10000 et des ugnes trigouom^iriques de & 90 degrSs. 
Paris 1891. 8. M. 2.20 

Bbeubb (A. ). ITebersichtliche Darstellung der mathematischen Theorien 
Hber die Dispersion des Lichtes. Theil II. Anoinale Dispersion. 
Erfurt 1891. gr. 8. 64 pg. m. 1. Tafel. M. 2.00 

Brisse (Ch.). Cours de g^om^trie descriptive k I'usage des candidats k 
TEcole sp6ciale militaire. Gr. in-8. Gauthier-Villars. 7 fr. 

Busk (C. J.). Matematiske Opgaver, indeholdende Opgaver fra alminde- 
lig Forberedelseseksamen 1886-1801. m. fl. Odense 1891. 8. 48 
pg. M. 1.50 

Calinon ( A .). Introduction a la g^om^trie des espaces k trois dimensions. 
Gr. in-8. Berger-Levrault. 2 fr. 

Delphtn. L'Astronomie au Maroc. Paris 1891. 8. 29 pg. avec 3 
planches. Mk. 2.50 

Drincourt (E.). Traits de Physique. Paris 1891. 8. 770 pg. avec 
656 figures. Mk. 6.60 

Everett (J. D.). Illustrations of the C. G. S. System of Units ; with 
Tables of Physical Constants. 4th ed. Or. bvo, pp. 236. Mac- 
millan. 5s. 

Galilei (G.). Untcrsuchungen und mathematische Demonstrationen Uber 
zwei neue Wissenszweige, die Mechanik und die Fallgesetze betreff- 
end. (1638) Uebersetzt und herausgegeben von A. v. Oettingen. 
Theil III. fOnfter und sechster Tag. Leipzig 1891. 8. 66 pg. m. 
23 Figuren. Leinenb. Mk. 1.20 

Qa8c6(L. G.). Tablas de Logaritmos, Colo^ritmos y Antilo^ritmos 
de las Numeros naturales y trigonomdtncos, con los Logantmos de 
Gauss y de Mendoza. dispuestas de un modo nuevo. 3. edici6n. 
Valencia 1890. gr. in-8. 18 et 174 pg. M. 4.50 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 69 

Gat (Jtiles). Lectnres scientifiques. Extraits de mdmoires originaux et 
d'^tudes snr la scioDce et les savants. Physique et Chimie. In-16. 
Hachette. 4 fr. 50 

Gezbitektafxln for das Jahr 1892, herausgegeben vom Hydrographiscben 
Amte des Beichs-Marinen Amts. Berlin 1891. 227 pg. m. 14 
Tafeln. M. 1.60 

Hagvn (J. G.). Synoi^s der bdberen Matbematik. (In 4 B&nden.) 
Band I. AritnmeiiBche nnd algebraiscbe Analyse. Berlin 1891. 
gr. 4. ca. 400 pg. M. JJO.OO 

Harnack (A.). An Introduction to the Study of tbe Elements of tbe 
Differential and Integral Calculus. From tbe German. 8vo. 
Williams and Norgate. 10s. 6d. 

Jahkbuch Hber die Fortscbritte der Matbematik, be^rflndet von C. 
Obrtmann, berausgegeben unter Mitwirkung von P. Mttller u. A. 
Wangerin, von F. Lampe. Band XX ; Jabrg. 1888. Heft 8. Ber- 
lin 1891. gr. 8. pg. 75 u. 881—1362. M. 14.00 

Jahrbsbericht des Directors des E6n. Geodfttiscben Instituts fflr die 
Zeit von April 1889 bis April 1890. Berlin 1890. 8. 29 pg. M. 1.00 

KuppEL (A.). Earte des n5rdlicben Stembimmels. Frankfurt a. M. 
1891. 1 colorirte Earte in gr. fol. auf Leinwand mit Stftben. M. 8.2^ 

Laubent (H.). Traits d*analyse. Tome VII. Calcul integral. Appli- 
cations g!k)m^triques de la tb^orie des ^uatious diff^rentielles. In- 
8. Gautbier-Villars. 8 fr. 50 

Lib (S.). Vorlesungen Uber Differentialgleicbungen mit bekannten in- 
flnitesimalen Transformationen, bearbeitet und berausgegeben von 
G. ScbefTers. Leipzig 1891. gr. 8. 14 und 668 pg. M. 16.00 

Lucas (Edouard). Tb^rie des nombres. Tome I. Le Calcul des nombres 
entiers. Le Calcul des nombres rationnels. La Divisibility aritb- 
m6tique. Gr. in-8. Gautbier-Villars. 15 fr. 

Mascart (E.). Traits d*optique. Tome II. Gautbier-Villars. 24 fr. 

L^onvrage aara 8 volames. 

MHiLBB (T. H.). An Introduction to tbe Differential and tbe Integral 
Calculus. Cr. 8vo. pp. 92. Percival. 3s. 6d. 

MoucHBZ (E.). Rapport annuel sur IVtat de I'Observatoire de Paris 
pour I'ann^ 1890. Paris 1891. 4. 82 pg. M. 1.20 

Mt^ER (P. A.). Die Beobacbtungen der Horizon tal-Itensitftt des Erd- 
magnetismus im Observatorium zu Eatbarinenburg von 1841-1889. 
St. Petersburg 1891. gr. 4. 120 pages m. 1 Curventafel. Mk. 4.50 

OcAONE (Maurice d*). Nomo^pbie. Les Calculs usuels effectuds au 
moyen des abaques. Essai d'une tb^orie generale. Regies pratiques. 
Elxemples d*application. Gr. in-8. Gautbier-Villars. 3 fr. 50 

PiOABD (Emile). Traits d'analyse. Tome I. Gr. in-8. Gautbier-Vil- 
lars. 15 fr. 
Coara de la Faculty dea sciences. 

PiHL (0. A. L.). Tbe Stellar Cluster JfPersei micrometricaUy surveyed. 
Cbistiamal891. 4. 107 pg. witb 2 plates. M. 6.00 

B^OKD (A.). Exercises ^16mentaries de g6om6trie analytique a deux et 
h trois dimensions avec un expos^ des m^tbodes de resolution. Seconde 
partie. In-8. Gautbier-Villars. 7fr, 



60 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

Salmon (G.)- Traitc dc gdom^trie analytique ft trois dimensions. Oavrage 
traduit de Tanglais sur la 4" Edition par O. Chemin. In-8. Gauthier- 
Villars. 6 f r. 

SchbOder (E.). Vorlesungen Ubor die Algebra der Logik (ezakte Logik). 
(In2B&nden.) Band II. Abtheilungl. Leipzig 1891. gr. 8. pg. iSu. 
400, m. 30 Figoren. M. 12.G0 

SchVlleb (W. J.). Arithmetik nnd Algebra fUr hShere Schnlen iind 
Lehrerscminare, besonders zum Sel£tunterricht. In enester Ver- 
knQpfung mit der G«omctrie zur Versinnlichung der S^lbegrifle, 
Theorien, Operationcn, Lehrs&tzo ii. Aufldsung von Anfgaben syB- 
tematisch b^rbcitct. Leipzig 1891. 452 pp. 8mo. M. 4.00 

STEENnms (L.). Lccrboek der Naturkunde. Deel I : Meohanisch Qe- 
deelto. Schiedam 1891. gr. 8. 8 and 224 pg. m. 78 Figuren. Mk. 4.0O 

Stoffaes (I'abb^). Cours de math^matiques sop^rieures i I'nsace des 
candidats k la licence ds sciences physiqaes. In-8. Ganthier-\^llara. 

Sir. SO 

Tannsnbebo (W. de). Sur les Equations aux D^riv^ particlles da 
premier ordre a deux Variables ind^pendantoa qui admettcnt un 
groupe continu des transformations. Paris 1891. 4. 162 ps. at. 
figures. mL 7.00 

ToDHUNTEK (L). Plane Trigonometry. For the Use of Colleges and 
Schools. With numerous Examples. Revised by R. W. Hogg. Cr. 
8vo, pp. 406. Macmillan. (fo. 

yiDAL(B. S.). Lecciones de Algebra. 4 edici6n. TomoII. Madrid 1891. 
4. 43o pg. M. 8.S0 

Wolff (Ch.). Das Princip der reciproken Radien. Erlangen 1891. gr. 8. 
8 u. 39 pg. m. 2 Tafebi. 

WoLSTENHOLXE (Joseph). Mathematical Problems on the Subjects for 
the Cambridge Mathematical Tripos Examination. Part I. 8rd ed. 
Revised and Corrected. Cr. 8vo. pp. 510. Macmillan. 18s. 

WooLWTcn Mathematical Papers for Admission into the Royal Military 
Academy for the Years 1880-1890. Edit, by B. J. Brooksmith. Cr. 
8vo. Macmillan. Os. 



BULLETIN 



NEW YORK 



I ATH KM ATICAL SOCIETr. 






vol.. 1. .No. 3. 

Hl-i'KMBffB, UOl. 



.\B\r TOOK 



MACMILLAN <& GO'S 

MATHEMATICAL TEXT-BOOKS 



pt4li,LAf« *. CAi., PuuJiBhars, 1 12 f^-ourm A'< 



ON THE DOUBLY INFINITE PBODUCTS. 61 

ON THE DOUBLY INFINITE PBODUCTS.* 

BT DR. THOMAS 8. FISKE. 

The familiar siogly infinite products for tho sine and cosine, 
dae to Enler^t 

8ina; = .r(l-J.) (l - ^,) (l-^,)..., 
or in another form. 



Binx = X n \ 1 , 

-« L mTv J' 






cos X 



= Tiri-, ^1, 



were first generalized by Abel. By a brilliant stroke of genius 
he obtained for the elementary doubly periodic functions the 
remarkable expressions I 



X 

sn ti: = 



7777 fi ^— T-H 

|_ mco + mo? J 



en a; = 



nnTi -- , -^ T-Tvl 

nn[i -7 ^-^, rr-.T 



dntr = 



nn\i j^, — --,1 

r/ 77 fl - 7 rr ^-r-j -^— ,1 ' 



* Rtoim6 of a Lecture delivered before the Society at tho meeting of 
KoTember 7, 1890. 

t Introductio in Analysin Inflnitorum (1748), lib. I. cap. IX. 

t (Euvn8, Nout*eUe 6dition (1881), t. I., p. 848. 
Journal f&r die reine u, angewandte Math. (Cbelle), Bd. II., p. 
172. 



62 OK THE DOUBLY INFINITE PB0DTJCT8. 

in which m and m' are independent of each other and assume 
successively all integral values from — oo to + oo , the simul- 
taneous system m = fn' = alone being excluded in the nu- 
merator of the first fraction. Abel^ however^ did not make a 
complete and rigorous investigation as to the convergency of 
these products nor as to their identity with the functions of 
Jacobi. Cayley made the four doubly infinite products con- 
tained in the aoove expressions the starting pomfc of a series 
of investigations.* He found for them a complete theory, 
based in part upon a geometrical interpretation, and upon it 
he built up the whole theory of the elliptic functions. Al- 
most immediately afterwards, Eisenstein f discussed in a very 
elaborate manner, and by purely analytic methods, the general 
doubly infinite product 



77 7iri ^^- "I, 



and arrived at results which, when supplemented by the more 
recent theory of primary factors, due to Weier8trass,J have 
given to the subject a permanent and classical form. 

The path which the student naturally follows in the study 
of the periodic functions, leads him directly to the considera- 
tion of these products and, at the same time, indicates their 
paramount importance. A theorem of Jacobi § shows him that 
no more general periodic functions of a single variable are 
possible than the doubly periodic or elliptic functions. He 
learns that such functions are but the ratios of single valued 
functions of another class, the so-called theta-functions ; and 
these, it is soon seen, are nothing more or less than doubly 
infinite products. There is no doubt that the theory of the 
theta-functions of a single variable forms the natural intro- 
duction to that of the elliptic functions. 

Before taking up the general products, the limit of the 
single product \ 



"=^4t~^]* 



♦ Camh. Math. Joum., vol. IV., 1845, pp. 257-277. 
Jourfi. des Math. (Liouville^, t. X.. 1846, pp. 885-420. 
Collected Math, Papers, vol. I., nos. 24 and 26. 
f Maihemaiiache Abhandlungeny Berlin, 1847, pp. 213-334. 
Journal fUr die reine u. angewandte Math, (Crellb), Bd. XXXV., 
1847, pp. 153-247. 

X Aohandlungen der Kdnigl, Akad. der Wiaaenachaften zu Berlin wm 
Jahre 1876. 

Abhandlungen aua der Punetionenlehre, von Kaki^ Weiebstbass. 
BerUn, 1886, pp. 1-52. 
S Gesammette Werke, Bd. I., p. 262. 
I Cf . Hebmitb, Coura a la Surbonne, Quatrihne Sdition, p. 89. 



OK THB DOUBLY IKFIKITE PRODUCTS. 63 

when p and q both become infinitely great, should be con- 
sidered. It will be found to be iudeterminate. In fact^ if 
we l^i^ye in the limit 

a being a given constant^ then 

A similar resnlt holds for the infinite prodnct representing 
cos a;. 

In the investigations of Gayley corresponding results were 
developed in connection with the double products/ for ex- 
ample 

u = xnn\i ^— r-/l, 

by the introduction of an auxiliary geometrical construction. 
The periods oo and oo' being always assumed respectively real 
and ima^inary^ a pair of rectangular axes were drawn^ and cor- 
responding to every factor in the product a point was set down, 
the coefficient of the real period being the abscissa and that 
of the imaginary period the ordinate. The entire finite por- 
tion of the plane was thus covered with a series of pomts 
forming the vertices of a net-work of squares constructed on 
the linear unit. These points were all enclosed within a con- 
tour of infinite dimensions, the fprm of which depended upon 
the relations between the infinite limits of the products. 
The value of the product was shown to depend upon the 
form of the contour, and in Gayley's memoirs the bounding 
contour is regarded successively as a square, a circle, and an 
infinite horizontal ribbon, and an infinite vertical ribbon. 
By the application of logarithms one obtains 

1 d^ • 1 

log tt = - a; 22 , — - 22 



moj + fn'co' 2 {moo + m'co'y 



x' 



.... 



(mco + m'co'y 

taking the contour symmetrical with respect to the origin, 
t;he terms containing odd powers vanish, or 

qS 1 ' X* 1 

For another contour, similarly 



log W'= — ~ 1^2 7 ; T-TT, — -7-22". ; ;~7r4 — . . . 

^ t {moo + m' go') .4 (mo^+.mV) 



64 OK THE DOUBLY IKPINITB PEODITOTS. 

Hence 

the sums extending to the region enclosed between the two 
contours. All the terms except the first being infinitely 
small, we have 

where 

;? — i ss* ^ —iff ^^ ^^' 

from which is readily seen the relation between two difFerent 
systems of theta-fnnctions. The system of theta-functions 
corresponding to the infinite horizontal ribbon is identical 
with that given by Jacobi.* 
In Eisenstein's researches we have 

L ma + np + yj 
whence 

1 a^ 1 

log w = — a; 22 ; — r^-- ^ 22 



ma -^np +y 2 {ma -^ n/3 -i- y)* 



-t 22 



3 {7na-\-7iP -^-y) 



I • • • • 



The whole theory is thus dependent upon that of the very 
general series. 

22 , 

{ma -t np -h yY 

Eisenstein's elegant investigation as to the convergency of 
this series has been recognized as fundamental and has found 
its way into the text-books, f He deduced as the necessary 
condition for convergence 

It follows that in the expansion of log u the coeflBcients of all 
the powers of x except the first two, have fixed sums indepen- 

♦ Jacobi, Fundamenta Nova (1829), cap. 61, 
f Cf. JoRDAK, Coura d^AtuUyse, 1. 1., p. 165. 



OH" THE DOUBLY INFINITE PB0DTJ0T8. 66 

dent of the arrangement of their elements. Since howerer 
the first two coefficients may alter their values with a change 
in the arrangement of the factors of u, two functions which 
are related to each other in this way will he connected by an 
equation of the form 

One finds in Eisenstein's memoir a very elaborate investiga- 
tion as to the nature and value of the quantities p and q, and 
the results are applied to a general theory of the elliptic 
functions. In spite of the great interest of these further 
developments, it is unnecessary for our present purpose to 
enter into details upon them on account of the wonderful 
simplification brought about through Weierstrass's theory of 
primary factors.* 

This theory enables us to express anjr continuous function 
which does not become infinite for finite values of the vari- 
able in a factorized form. It shows us, however, that the 
simplest factors of such a transcendental function, should 
differ from the linear factors of a rational entire algebraic 
function, in that each should have an exponential associated 
with it. Thus we find, according to this theory, 



sin 2; 



-00 L wJ 



an expression from which every element of indetermination 
has been eliminated. Kow it is evident, after the investiga- 
tions of Eisenstein, that we can remove the indetermination 
from the product 

u = nn[i ^^773—1 

by introducing the exponential factor 

1 X* ' 



- ma + nfi + y^ i "" {ma + n^ + y)* 

The result may be exhibited as a product of the form 

r n ^ I ^ ^* 

L ma -i- n/3 + yj 

* Weiebstbass, loe. eU. 
Cf. also JonDAK, Coura d'Ancdyae, t. II., pp. 815-817. 



66 EABLT HISTORY OF THE POTENTIAL. 

This product conseqnentlj denotes a function of unique char- 
acter possessing all the essential properties of an ordinary 
theta-function. 

The special case given hy the formula * 

in which 

w = 2/107 + 2/i'(»', 

has been called by Weierstrass the signia-function iT{x), and 
is the basis of his beautiful theory of elliptic functions. 



EARLY HISTORY OF THE POTENTIAL. 

BT FBOF. A. 8. HATHAWAY. 

The object of the present article is to correct an error that 
occurs in Todhunter's " History of the Theories of Attraction *' 
(vol. IL, arts. 789^ 1007, and 1138)^ and that is repeated, 
doubtless on Todhunter's authority, in various encyclopaedias. 
This error consists in assigning to Laplace, instead of La- 
ffrange, the honor of the introduction of the Potential into 
dynamics, an honor that the EncyclopsBdia Britannica makes 
the basis of a eulogy to Laplace (art. Laplace) in the woi-ds : 
^* The researches of Laplace and Legendre on the subject of 
attractions derive additional interest and importance from 
having introduced two powerful engines of analysis for the 
treatment of physical problems, Laplace's Coefficients and 
the Potential function. The expressions for the attraction 
of an ellipsoid involved integrations which presented in- 
superable difficulties ; it was, therefore, with pardonable 
exultation that Laplace announced his discovery that the 
attracting force in any direction could be obtained by the 
direct process of differentiating a single function. He thereby 
translated the forces of nature into the language of analysis 
and laid the foundations of the mathematical sciences of heat, 
electricity, and magnetism.'^ 

The announcement here referred to was made by Laplace 

♦ BiERMANN, Theorie der analytischen Funetionen, Leipzig, 1887, 
p. 834. 

ScHWARz. Formeln und Lehrsdtze zum Otbrancht der eUipHtchen 
FunciioTien, GOttlDgen, 1885. 



EABLY HISTORY OF THE POTENTIAL. 67 

in the oonrse of a memoir by Legendre between 1783 and 
1785 : EneyclopsBdia Britannica ([art. Laplace), — **♦ * ♦ Le- 
gendre in a celebrated paper entitled Recherches aur Tattrao- 
turn des aphircHdes IwmogineSy printed in the tenth volume 
id th^ Divers Savans, 1783, **♦♦''; Todhunter, Hist. Th. 
Attr., vol. II., p. 20, " A very important memoir by Legendre 
is contained in the tenth volume of the MSmoires * * * prS- 
sentispar divers Savans ♦ * ♦ . The date of publication of 
the volume is 1785. The memoir, however, must have been 
communicated to the Academy at an earlier period ; for, in 
the treatise De la Figure des Planites, which was published in 
1784, Laplace refers to the researches of Legendre, which 
constitute the present memoir : see p. 96 of Laplace's 
treatise.'' 

Todhunter continues, in art. 789 : *^ In this memoir we 
meet for the first time the function V which we now call the 
Potential, and which denotes the sum of the elements of a 
body divided by their distances from a fixed point. The 
introduction of this function Legendre expressly assigns to 
Laplace. The following are the circumstances : 

A point is situated outside a solid of revolution. Le- 
gendre has to determine the attractions of the solid at the 
point, along the radius vector which joins the point to the 
centre of the solid, and at right angles to this direction. He 
has found a series for the former ; and he says the latter' 
might he determined by similar investigations ; then he adds : 
***** mais on y parvient Men plus facilement d Vaide 
d^un Thioreme que M, de la Place a Men voulu me communi- 
quer: void en quoi il consiste' 

Then follows the theorem, which is enunciated and im- 
mediately demonstrated. The theorem is that the attraction 

dV 
along the radius vector is — ^-, and the attraction at right 

dV 

angles to the radius vector is rs ; where r is the radius 

rdu^ 

vector and 6 the an^le which it makes with the axis of the 
solid : these attractions being estimated towards the centre, 
and the pole respectively." 

As Fis the notation used by Laplace in this announce- 
ment, it is plain, I think, where he found this method of 
differentiation to get the forces ; for that is the notation used 
by Lagrange in the last of several memoirs previous to 1783 
in which he made use of the Potential. On this account it 
may be well to notice this last memoir first : Theorie de la 
Lioration de la Lune. Mimoires de VAcademie royale des 
Sciences et Belles-Lettres de Berlin, Annie 1780. CEuvres, 
t. v., p. 5. 



68 EARLY HISTOBY OF THE FOTEHTIAL. 

"The memoir is divided into five sections. The first is 
desired for the exposition of a general analytical method for 
resolving all the problems of dynamics. This method^ which 
I employed in my first memoir on the libration of the moon^ 
has the singular advantage of requiring no construction and 
no geometrical or dynamical reasonings but onlv analytical 
operations subjected to a process that is simple and uni- 
form. ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 

Let 7«, m', m", ... be the masses of the bodies^ P, Qy J2, 
. . . the accelerative forces that attract the body m towards 
centres whose distances are /?, j, r, . . ., P', Q', R\ . . . the 
accelerative forces that attract the body m' towards centres 
whose distances are p', ^', r', ....*** * 

Taking into consideration the mutual disposition of the 
bodies, one will have several equations of condition among 
the variables x, y, z, etc. All these are expressed in terms 
of some one or more variables (p,tl?,. . . that are independent 
By substitution and differentiation, one will have the general 
ecfuation <^d(p + V^# + . . . = : thus i> = 0, !P'= 0, . . . , 
give as many equations as there are undetermined variables, 
by means of which these variables are determined. We shall 
show how to abridge the calculations necessary to reduce 
* * * * to functions of ^, ^', ....**♦♦ In regard 
to the terms Pdp -f Q6q + Ror + . . . . and similar terms^ 
we note that in the case of nature the forces P, Q, B, . . 
are ordinarily functions of the distances /?, j', r, • . . , so 
that the terms of which they consist are all integrable. This 
also furnishes a means of simplifying very much the calcula- 
tion of tliese terms ; for it is only necessary, in the first place, 
to integrate the quantity Pdp + QSq + B6r -f . . . m the 
ordinary way, and then differentiate it according to the char- 
acteristic 6, * * * * 

Put for abridgment 

T- 1 [^ dx^-^dy^-^dz^ dx'^ ^ dy'^ ^ dz' ^ ) . 

F= m [{P6p +Qdq-\-R6r-^ . .) -^ m' [{FSp' + Q'6q' 

+ R'Sr' + ..)+..., 

and suppose a:, y, z, x'y y', «',... expressed in terms of other 
variables <^, ^, . . . ; then substituting these values in T and 
V and differentiating according to the characteristic d, re- 
garding (p, tpi , dg)y dtp J . . ., as the corresponding vari- 
ables (a referring to the time) the above equation becomes 



BABLY HISTOBY OF TEE FOTENTIAIk 69 

wherein -s— denotes the coefficient of 6<p in the differential 

6T 
of T, and --rr- the coefficient of ddq) in the same differential, 

and so for the rest/' 

This investigation appears also in the MSchanigue Analy- 
ti^ue; but, as we shall see by another example^ Todhunter 
did not recognize that the Mechanigue Analyttque, like the 
MicJianique Cileste of Laplace, was largely a compilation from 
preceding memoirs. Theories of Attraction, vol. II., p. 153, 
art. 994 : **The first edition of a famous work by Lagrange, 
appeared in 1788 in one volume, entitled Michanique Anaty- 
hque. There is nothing in this edition which beara explicitly 
on onr subject. But on his page 474 Lagrange gives, in fact, 
an integral in the form of a series of the partial differential 
equation 

da' "^ db' "^ dc' "" ' 

and from this integral, as we shall see hereafter, Biot drew 
important inferences with respect to the attraction of a body/' 
The solution here referred to was given by Lagrange in 
1781 : (Euvres, t. IV., p. 695, TMorie du Mouvement des 
Fluides. 

The idea of differentiating in order to obtain the forces first 
appeared in Lagrange's memoir of 1763 : (Euvres, t. VI., p. 
6, Becker ches sur la Libration de la Lune, Prix de I Acaai- 
mie Royale des Sciences de Paris, t. IX., 1764. The kinetic 
energy is differentiated to obtain the accelerations, forming 
the first part of Lagrange's celebrated generalized equations 
of motion given first in complete form in 1780. The potential 
is used to obtain the forces for the first time by Lagi*ange in 
the memoir /Swr V Equation, Siculairedela Lune; VAcadimie 
Royale des Sciences de Paris, t. VII., 1773; Prix pour Fan- 
nie 1774 ; (Euvres, t. VI., p. 335. 

" If a point A attract another point B with any force what- 
ever F, and if J be the distance between the two bodies and 
d^ the increment of this distance in supposing that A attracts 

B an infinitely small space da, then — F-j- is that part of the 

force F which acts in the direction da ; and if one proposes 
to decompose this force in three mutually perpendicular direc- 



70 EARLY HISTOBT OF THE POTENTIAL. 

tions da, rf/?, dy, — ^j-zy — -^5^ *^ ^^^ remaining compo- 
nents. If F is proportional to -^y ^bich is the case of celes- 
tial attraction^ then 

and conseqnently, the three forces are represented by the 

coefficients of da, d/3, dy, in the differential of -^. In short, 

1 ^ 

it suffices to find the yalae of ^ ^^^ differentiate it by ordi- 
nary methods. 

If the }>oint B is attracted at the same time towards dif- 
ferent points A, A', A", . . , whose distances from B are 

Af Af' M" 
A, A', J", . . . , and if the attractions are ^i* -at%9 2^' • • • > 

it is plain that one has only to seek the yalue of the quantity 

M M' M'* 
'A"^'Z^ + -j7, + . . • 

and to differentiate it as a function of a, /3, y, when the co- 
efficients of da, dfi, dy, in this differential immediately give 
the forces sought. 

In general, if the point B is attracted by a body of any 
figure whatever, whose mass is M, then^ considermg each 
element, dM, of the body as an attracting point, it is only 

necessary to find the sum of all the quantities --t-, found by 

making the quantities that relate to the positiou of dM vary 
and regarding a, /?, y as constant ; then, denoting this sum 
by ^2, and making it vary as to the quantities a, fi, y, that 

relate to the position of B, one has -r— , -r-^r, -^— for the three 

^ da dfi dy 

forces in the directions da, dft, dy, to which the total attrao* 

tive force of the bodv Mon B reduces/' Lagrange then goes 

on to apply this method to his discussion of the moon. 

In October, 1777, Lagrange read a paper that is devoted 
wholly to the potential and its applications to the dynamics of 
a system of bodies : Remarques ginerales sur le Mouvement de 
plusieurs corps qui s'attirent mutuellement en raison inverse 
aes carris des distances. L Academic royale des Sciences et 
Belles- Lettres de Berlin, annSe 1777. (Euvres, t. IV., p. 402. 

*' Let M, M', M", . . , be the masses of bodies which com- 



BA.BLT HISTOBT OF THB FOTEITTIAL. 7X 

pose a given system, x, y, z the rectangalar coordinates of the 
body Jfin space, x', y', x' those of the body M', and so on. 
Put 

_ MM' 

^- ^{x-xj + (y-y')'+ {z-t'Y 

MM" 

■•' V (a; - X")' + (y - y")* + (2 - z")' 

M'M" 

■•■ V {x' - xy + (y' - y")' + («' - z"y + •"' 

and let -^ , . . . , ^-^, . . . denote, as usual, the coefficients 

of dx, , . . , dx', • . . in the differential of £1, regarded as a 

function of 2;, . . . , 2;', . . . . 

^ , 1 dD, 1 d£l 1 dXl • ., . .^i_ , . 1 

One has -^ j-^, 17. -j-, -77 —r-, for the forces with which 
M dx M dy M dz 

the body Jf is attracted by the other bodies M'y M"y in the 
directions of the coordinates Xy y, z, and so on. It is easy to 
be convinced of this by performing the indicated differentia- 
tion : for that will ^ve tne same expressions as the decomposi- 
tion of the forces that act upon each body in virtue of the 
attraction of each of the other bodies, supposed proportional 
to the mass divided by the square of the distance. This man- 
ner of representing the forces is, as one sees, extremely con- 
venient, both for Its simplicity and for its generality; and it 
has the farther advantage that one distinguishes by it, clearly, 
the terms due to the different attractions of the bodies, for 
each of the attractions gives in the quantity £1 a term consist- 
ing of the product of the masses of the two bodies divided by 
their distance apart. '^ 

Lagrange goes on to give the equations of motion 



^d'x dn ^d^y dn .^d'z 



_ dn 

dt' '^ dx' ^ dt^"^ dy' ^ df '^ dz' ' " ' 

multiplies them by dXy dy, dz, . , . , adds and integrates, find- 
ing the equation of conservation of energy, 

+ J if -j •^. {•+...+ constant 



72 EABLY HISTOBY OF THE FOTENTIAi:.. 

Since D, does not change when the aHK>ordinates change 
by equal increments, he finds 

dfl dn dn _ 

dx dx* di" ■ ' "" 

with similar equations in the y- and iiP-coordinates. 
Substituting 



d£l 



^d^x d£l __ ^d^y d£l ^d^% 



dz dp ' dy de' dz df 

and using 

he has 

(TX ^ (PF ^ d^Z ^ 

=: — — = 

In words, the centre of gravity moves uniformly in a 
straight line. The equations of motion are then shown to be 
unchanged when the centre of cavity is taken as the origin. 

Since £1 does not change to tne first order in a when * 

dy __dy' _ _ dz ^ dz' _^ _ 

z z y y 

Lagrange concludes that 

/ dn dn\ ( ,dn ,dn\ . 

[^^-'diJ-^VW'-d^'J'^-^^ 

with similar results for the axes of y, z. 

Substituting the accelerations for the forces according to 
the equations of motion, and integrating, he finds the equa- 
tion of conservation of areas 

^ydz-zdy ^ ^, y'dz' - z'dy' ^ ^ ^ . ^eonstant; 
dt dt 

9 

and so on. 

The article closes as follows : 

** These theorems upon the movement of the centre of 
gravity have already been given in part by D'Alembert ; but 
the manner in which I have demonstrated them is new, and. 



EABLY HI8T0BY OF THE POTENTIAL. 73 

it appears to me^ merits the attention of geometers by the 
utility with which it can be used. One perceives by the same 
principles that these theorems will be eoually true if the bod- 
ies act upon each other by forces mutually proportional to any 
function whatever of the distance ; for, calling /(a;) the force 
of attraction at the distance x, and putting 

Fix) = j/{x) dx, 
one has only to change the value of £1 above into 
/2 = - MM' jP( v/ (a; - a?') '^ + (y - y') " + (« - «T) 

- MM'F(^^ (x-ixf') • + {y-y"y + (« - z") •) - . • • > 

to easily obtain the same results.'^ 

The next memoir in which Lagrange uses the potential is 
that of 1780, already referred to, in which he completes his 
generalized equations of motion, and uses the notation Ffor 
the potential, which Lai)lace adopts. 

Todhunter was not without warning of these facts, for he 
says, vol. II., p. 221 : ''I must cite another sentence from 
Blot's memoir ; he says on page 208, after introducing the 
function F, 

Jf. Lagrange a dimontri que les coefficients diffSrentiels 

dV dV dV 
da' dh' dc' 

pris nSgativement expriment les attractions exercSes par le 
sphSrolde sur ce mime point, paralUlement aux trois axes rec- 
tangulaires, M. Laplace a fait voir ensuite que la fonction 
V est assujetie d VSquation cliff irentielle partielle 

d'V d'V erF_ 
da' "^ db' '^ d(^ " 

I do not know on what authority the above expressions for 
component attractions are assigned to Lagrange ; to me thev 
appear due to Laplace : see art. 789, and also pages 70 an^ 
133 of Laplace^s Figure des Plandtes/' 

Todhunter attempts a defense, vol. II., p. 160 : ^'La- 
grange now proceeds to consider the attraction of the ellip- 
soid on an external particle. He introduces what we call the 
potential function, and denotes it by F. If /, g, h, denote 
the coordinates of the attracted particle, the attractions in the 

corresponding directions are "37 > "T" > -^ • Lagrange does 



74 EABLY HISTOBY OF THE POTBHTIAL. 

not claim these expressions for himself ; and we know that they 
are really due to Laplace : see art. 789." 

The arfi^nmeut is equally good if it he made to refer to 
Laplace's ni*8t announcement^ given in art. 789, with " Laplace " 
and '^Lagrange" interchanged. Moreover, Lagrange had 
claimed these expressions in the Berlin memoir of 1777, twenty 
years previous to the memoir Todhunter is describing. 

Todhunter knew that Laplace constantly embodied the 
work of others in his own witnout credit (see preface vol. L) ; 
and he cites a breach of etiquette towards Legendre in, these 
very memoirs in the matter of Legendre's CoeflScients, vol. 
IL, p. 43: 

" We will first reproduce a note bearing on the history of 
the subject which occurs at the beginning of the menioir. 
* ♦ ♦^ * Legendre says : 

^ La proposition qui fait Vobjet de ce mimoiref itant di* 
montree d*vne maniere oeaucoup plus savante et plus giniraU 
dans un mimoire que M. de la Place a dSjA publii dans le 
volume de 1782, je dois faire observer que la date de man 
mSmoire est anterieure, et que la proposition qui paroU icif 
telle qti'elle a Sti Me en juin et juillet 1784, a donnS lieu i 
M, de la Place, d^approfondir cette mature^ et Wen prSsenter 
aux OeomHreSy une theorie complite.'^' 

This refers to Laplace's memoir Figure des Planites, con- 
tained in the Paris MSmoires for 1782, published in 1785, and 
is the one of which Todhunter says (p. 56) ** in this article 
we have for the first time the partial differential equation 
with respect to the coordinates of the attracted particle which 
the potential V must satisfy : it is expressed by means of 
polar coordinates," etc. 

Nor did Todhunter neglect foreign memoirs alone, bearing 
on his subject ; for if he had read the valuable Report on. 
Dynamics by Cayley, Brit. Ass. Rep,, 1862, p. 184, he would 
have found the potential function properly credited to 
Lagrange, with a reference to the memoir, 8ur P Equation 
Seculaire de la Lurie, of 1773. 

In conclusion I ought to say that a sentence in Sir William 

Thomson's Baltimore lectures (1884), led me to investigate 

this subject, Lectures, p. 112 : '*I took the liberty of asking 

Professor Ball two days ago wliether he had a name for this 

symbol pr'; and he has mentioned to me nabla^ a humorous 

suggestion of Maxwell's. It is the name of an Egyptian harp 

which was of that shape. I do not know that it is a bad 

name for it. Laplacian I do not like for several reasons both 

historical and phonetical.'' 

Robe Polytechnic iNSTrruTB, 
Teiie Haute ; 1891, October 22. 



THE THEORY OF UOHT. 7ff 



THE THEORY OF LIGHT. 
The Theory of Light By Thomas Preston, M. A., Lectnrer 

in Mathematics and Mathematical Physics, University College, Dub- 
lin. London and New York, Macmillan & Co., 1890. Svo. 

XIntil within a very few years it has been a matter of con- 
siderable difficulty for American students interested in higher 
theoretical optics to pursue this study with advantage, for 
want of access to the ori^nal memoirs and the absence of anv 
adequate presentation of their contents in any of the Amen- 
can text-books. For the students of the English universi- 
ties, Air}''8 Undulatory Theory of Optics and Loyd's Wave 
Theory of Light have been the chief English helps until 
the publishing of Glazebrook's admirable rhjrsical Optics. 
It has been a ^at pity that the clear and beautiful presenta- 
tion of the subject given by President Barnard in 1862, and 
printed in the Smithsonian Report for that year, was not long 
since published in separate book form, as it would be to-day 
one of the very best books on the subject were it printed in a 
form accessible to college students having a fair command of 
elementary mathematics. I have been greatly surprised to find 
it so little known even amoug American students who have 
made a special study of the higher optics in European uni- 
versities. Besides the English books referred to above, the 
admirable report of Professor Stokes on Double Refraction in 
the British Association Report for 1862, and the equally ad- 
mirable later one on Optical Theories by Glazebrookip 1866, 
together with such books as Beer's Introduction to Higher 
Optics, Knochenhauer's Undulatory Theory of Light, Lord 
Bayleigh's articles in the EncyclopsBdia Britannica and the 
Philosophical Magazine, Verdet's Lemons d'Optique Phy- 
sique, Poincar6, Briot, Sir William Thomson, and Pro* 
fessor Tait have heretofore supplied the special advanced 
student with most of his needs. It has been very desirable, 
however, that a treatise should be written for English-speak- 
ing students, similar to those which Yerdet and Poincar6 
have written for the French, dealing both with profound 
theory and experimental facts. This seems to have been 
done oy Professor Preston of Dublin. 

The work in some respects resembles Verdet^s Optique 
Physique. It begins, however, from a more elementary basis, 
ana includes the more recent work of Lord Rayleigh and Pro- 
fessors Rowland and Hertz. In this latter respect as well as 
in some others, it is better than Glazebrook's Physical Op- 
tics. It lacks the splendid bibliography of Veraet, and is 
on tSie whole much more elemontaiy* . . _ 



76 



THE THEOBT OF LIGHT. 



It begins with the simplest principles of wave motion, 
treated both with and without mathematics* The difference 
between wave and group Telocity is explained at the end of 
chap. II. after the manner of Lord Bayleigh's Sound. Hnygenff'B 

!)rincipal and secondary waves are well explained^ and Stokes's 
aw of the intensity of the light at any point of a secondary 
wave is giyen together with a reference to his celebratea 
paper on the Dynamical Theory of Diffraction, 1849« At 
the end of chap. lY.^ explaining reflection upon the waye 
theory^ we haye this admirable remark: ^^In dealing with 
problems in the reflection of li^ht we may therefore consider 
the light propagated in rays if tt facilitates the solution. Tlei 
toe must carefully bear in mind that rays have no physical 
existence, for it is waves that are propagated and not rays.'* 
(The italics are ours.) In chap. Y., in discussing the energy 
equation y the density of the ether is referred to as 'Hhat 
property of it which corresponds to the density of ordinary 
matter^ and by which it possesses energy when in motion. 
We have here a hint of ether inertia that may be due to other 
causes than mere mass^ e. g. rotatory inertia. The chapter on 
determination of refractive indices^ gives a very full account 
of the usual methods^ with references to the original memoirs. 
The section on gases is particularly good. 

Chap. IX. is on diffraction, ana it is at this point that the 
really mathematical part of the book may be said to begin. 
The treatment is clear and thorough, and nothing is slurred 
over that can possibly help a student to a competent under- 
standing of the subject, although the treatment sometimes 
seems a little too concise. So vast is the ground covered, 
however, that this seems almost a necessity. 

This is the onlv book so far as we know which gives a pretty 
full discussion of the theory and use of Bowland's concave 

Sfratings and an account of" the new determination of wave 
engths by Rowland and Bell. 

The entire treatment of diffraction is very full and satisfac* 
tory, although the remarkable results of Lord Bayleigh and 
Professor llichelson on the distribution of the fight from 
sources other than points are not given. Comu^s graphical 
methods of dealing with diffraction problems however are 
quite fully given. The recent applications of these researches 
of Bayleigh and Michelson to spectroscopy could hardly have 
had a place in the book, which has been out of press for more 
than a year. 

An admirable but brief presentation of the views of Mac* 
CuUagh and Neumann on the relation of the plane of vibra* 
tion to the plane of polarization in polarized lights is given^ 
together with the different suppositions involved as to the 
changes of density and rigidity of the ether in crystals ou 



THE THEOEY OF LIGHT. 77 

which diverse views on this point are founded. One might 
wish that some of these more purely physical or dynamical 
questions had been discussed at greater length. Keference 
is however made to the admirable report of Glazebrook on 
optical theories in the British Association Report for 1885. 
The papers of Sir William Thomson, Willard Gibbs, Kette- 
ler, and Glazebrook, in the Philosophical Magazine, American 
Journal of Science, and Wiedemann's Annalen, since that 
time, however, are particalarly important, especially the ex- 
traordinary speculation of Sir William Thomson on a *Ma- 
bile '' ether and Willard Gibbs' able discussion of the same. 
The notion of a medium capable of transmitting transverse 
vibrations in virtue of a quasi-rigidity imparted to it by 
motion, especially rotatory motion, is evidently becoming 
more and more important and Sir William Thomson, al- 
though apparently still an adherent of the elastic solid 
theory, has himself shown how the rotation of the plane of 
polarization in a magnetic field can be explained by the 
assumption of such an ether. In the last chapter (AXI.) 
the author of this treatise has given a sketch, clear and as 
simple as the nature of the subject will allow, of the present 
state of the electro-magnetic theory of light and the experi- 
mental researches of Dr. Hertz on electro-magnetic waves. 
Oliver Heaviside has done so much work in this direqtion that 
it seems as if some mention might have been made of it. So 
also Professor Rowland. 

The whole treatment of the subject of polarized light is full 
and satisfactory, while, on the whole, also very concise. 

There are a large number of examples added to each chap- 
ter. These are well selected and the sources indicated from 
whence they are derived. The advanced student has thus 
pointed out to him what authorities on each part of the sub- 
ect may be best for him to consult. One of the very best 
eatnres of the book, in our opinion, is the impression it 
leaves on one's mind of its being, above all, an able, clear, and 
accurate presentation of the subject as it was left by Fresnel 
— the Newton of the uudulatory theory of liffht. As Fresnel 
left it, so, except that Maxwell and Lorenz have shown that 
the vibrations are probably electro- magnetic in character, it 
essentially is to-day. Questions as to the ultimate structure 
and constitution of the ether are related to the undulatory 
theory of light, just as questions as to the mechanism of 
gravitation are to the theory of gravitation, as ordinarily 
treated. The ordinary mathematical theory and its confirma- 
tion by observation and experiment, rest intact, no matter 
what may prove to be the physical mechanism by which their 
results are brought about. The famous Baltimore lectures 
of Sir William Thomson^ the British Association reports 



78 NOTES. 

(1862 and 1885) of Stokes and Olazebrook, and the later 
papers allnded to before^ are the natural sources of informa- 
tion for those who wish to ^o into these matters. 

For advanced students m colleges and all who wish to 
acquire a thorough knowledge of the existing state of the 
undulatory theory of lights we recommend this admirable 
treatise. The type and illustrations are aLso models of clear- 
ness and elegance and reflect credit upon the publishers as 
well as the author. JoHBT E. Daties. 

UNiYERsmr OF Wisconsin, 
MadiaoD, October 12, 1891. 



NOTES. 



A REGULAE meeting of the New Yoek Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afternoon, November 7, at half- 
past three o'clock, the vice-president in the chair. The fol- 
lowing persons having been auly nominated, and beinj? recom- 
mended by the Council, were elected to membership: Professor 
Simon Newcorab, Navy Department and Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity ; Dr. Oskar Bolza, Clark University ; Mr. Charles 
Riborg Mann, Columbia College ; Professor Ludovic Estes^ 
University of North Dakota ; Mr. Herbert Armistead Sayre, 
Montgomery, Alabama; Professor James Harrington Boyd, 
Macalester College ; Dr. Asaph Hall, Jr., U. S. Naval Obser- 
vatory ; Dr. Percy F. Smith, Yale University ; Mr. Edwin 
H. Lock wood, i ale University ; Professor Kobert Judson 
Aley, Indiana University ; Professor Joseph V. Collins, 
Miami University ; Dr. Charles II. Chapman, Johns Hop- 
kins University; Professor Albert Munroe Sawin, Univer- 
sity of Wyoming ; Mr. Frank Oilman, Lowell, Massachu- 
setts ; Professor Henry Parker Manning, Brown University ; 
Mr. Charles S. Peirce, Milford, Pennsylvania. 

Mr. Charles P. Steinmetz read an original paper entitled 
" On the curves which are self -reciprocal in a linear nul-sys- 
tem, and their configurations in space. '^ 

Dr. Edward L. Stabler made some remarks upon the 
theory of errors which are equally probable between given 
limits. 

The nul'System in space, which formed the subject of Mr. 
Steinmetz's paper, is a one-to-one correspondence between 
points and planes such that any point lies in its conjugate 
plane, and conversely. A linear nul-system is one in which 
all the planes conjugate to the points of any straight line 



NOTES. 79 

ifitersecfc one another in a second straight line^ so that there 
exists a one-to-one correspondence between the lines in space. 

T. s. F. 

The 64th meeting of the OeseUschaft deutscker Natur- 
/orscher und Arzte (a German association corresponding to 
the American Association for the Advancement of Science) 
was held this year at Halle a. S., September 21 to 25. If 
the list of papers announced in advance as to be read in the 
different sections can be taken as an indication of what was 
actually done, it appears that the section for mathematics 
and astronomy is by far the strongest of all sections, not only 
numerically — 25 papers, the next in order being the sec- 
tion of physics with 13 papers, then the section for instru- 
ments of precision {InstrumentenJcunde) with 8" papers, etc. 
— ^but in particular considering the weight of the names repre- 
sented, it is worthy of notice that astronomy has hardly any 
share in this programme, the subjects belonging almost ex- 
clusively to pure higher mathematics. The association has 
a special section (only recently organized) for elementary 
mathematics and natural sciences and the allied educational 
questions. Professor Georg Cantor, of the University of 
Halle, was president of the section of mathematics and 
astronomy ; Dr. H. Wiener, of the same university, was 

secretary. 

The following is a list of the papers announced to be read 
in this section : 

L. Kronecker of Berlin, Opening address ; K. Neumann 
of Leipzig, On a question in electrodynamics ; L. Koenigs- 
berger of Heidelberg, On the theory of systems of partial 
differential eauations ; F. Klein of GSttingen, Account of 
recent English investigations in mechanics ; F. Me^er of 
Clausthal, Review of the present state of the theory of invari- 
ants ; M. Noether of Erlaugen, The fundamental proposition 
on the intersection of three surfaces ; Rohn of Dresden, On 
rational twisted quartics ; E. Papperitz of Dresden, The gen- 
ei'al system of the mathematical sciences ; Worpitzky of Ber- 
lin, On the axioms of geometry ; H. Wiener of Halle, On 
the foundations and the system of geometry; F. Kraft of 
Zurich, The meaning and value of Grassmann's Ausdeh- 
nungslehre for the whole domain of mathematics and me- 
chanics ; V. Eberhard of Konigsberg, Elements of a syste- 
matic exposition of the forms of polyhedra ; F. Miiller of 
Berlin, On literary enterprises adapted to facilitate the study 
of mathematics ; A. Pringsheim of Munich (subject not 
announced); Finsterwalder of Munich, The images in diop- 
tric systems of larger aperture and larger field of vision ; W. 
Dyck" of Munich (subject not announced); H. Schubert of 



80 NOTES. 

Hamburg, On a question in cnumerafcive (abzdhUnde) geom- 
etry ; M. Simon of Strasburg, On a question in absolute 
geometry ; G. Beuschle of Stuttgart, A fundamental system 
of identities of the algebraic runctions ; R. Mehmke of 
Darmstadt, Description of mechanisms for the mechanical 
solution of equations ; Hilbert of Konigsberg, On complete 
{voile) systems of invariants ; Stackel, Wangerin, G. Cantor, 
of Halle (subjects not announced). 
A more detailed account of the meeting maybe given later. 

On October 23 the Mathematical Society of the XTniver- 
sity of Michigan held its first meeting this falL Professor 
F. C. Wagner read a paper on the mathematical principles of 
thermodynamics. The society was founded in November, 
1890, and has held seven meetings in the course of the last 
academic year. Professor W. W. Beman is president ; Dr. 
F. N. Cole is secretary. A. z. 

At the meeting of the National Academy of Sciences 
held at Columbia College, November 10 to 12, the following 
papers of a mathematical nature were read : Certain new 
methods and results in optics, by Professor Charles S. Hast- 
ings ; New pendulum apparatus, by Professor T. C. Menden- 
hidl ; Astronomical metnods of determining the curvature of 
space, by Professor C. S. Peirce ; Variation of latitude, by 
Professor S. C. Chandler; Color system, by Professor 0. N. 
Eood ; Reduction of Rutherfurd's photogra])hs, by Professor 
J. K. Rees ; Measurement of Jupiter^s satellites by interfer- 
ence, by Professor A. A. Micbelson. 

Professor Hastings's paper contained some new and very 
simple demonstrations of optical formulae already known, as 
well as certain important formulae altogether new, including 
a general expression for magnifying power applicable to both 
telescopes and microscopes. Professor Peirce presented astro- 
nomical evidence tending to show that space possesses a nega- 
tive curvature, and called attention to various methods of con- 
ducting an investigation of this property of space. Professor 
Chandler exhibited curves showing that the recently discovered 
variation of latitude could be made to explain certain hith- 
erto unaccountable discordances in older observations. His 
paper was followed by considerable discussion among the 
astronomers present ; Professors Young, E. C. Pickering, C. 
S. Peirce, Abbe, and Dr. Gould taking part. The chief gues- 
tion debated was whether the variation has a terrestrial or 
celestial origin. The investigations are being published in 
the Astronomical Journal, Professor Michelson described his 
recent measurements of Jupiter's satellites at the Lick Obser- 
vatory^ and thought that we may hope to measure the angular 



NOTES. 81 

diameters of some of the brighter stars^ if they be as great as 
the hundredth part of a second of arc. His paper was perhaps 
the most important one of the session. In it was presented a 
new method of measuring the angular diameters of luminous 
discs by means of the interference phenomena produced by 
them. The experiments made at the Lick Observatory have 
been described in the Pvhlications of the Astronomical /Society 
of the Pacific. The 12-inch telescope was used, but a telescope 
is by no means indispensable for these observations, the chief 
requisite being a very favorable condition of atmosphere. It 
is to be hoped that these very promising researches will be 
continued. h. j. 

The series of lectures given last winter at Johns Hopkins 
University to teachers and those intending to become teachers 
was so successful that a similar series is to be given this 
winter. Among the lectures promised we note one on the 
teaching of mathematics by Professor Simon Newcomb. 

La Nature announces the death of !^douard Lucas, Professor 
of Mathematics at the Lyc6e Saint-Louis. His death was due 
to injuries received from a mishap at Marseilles during the 
meeting of the French Association for the Advancement of 
Science, at which he presided over the section of mathematics. 
He was the author of many papers, but was most widely 
known through his RScrSations Mathimatiques. The second 
volume of his more recent work Theorie des Nombres is still 
in press. 

In an article entitled " Twelve versus Ten,*' which appears 
in the November number of the Educational Review, Pro- 
fessor W.B. Smith strongly advocates duodenary numeration. 

John Wiley & Sons have in preparation a new work on 
**The Theory of Errors and Method of Least Squares, '* by 
Professor W. Woolsey Johnson. t. s. f. 



82 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

NEW PUBLICATIONS 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANN A CO., NEW TOBK. 

BOBEK (K. J.). Lehrbuch der Ausgleichungsrechnnng nach der Methode 
der kleinsten Quadrate. Bearbeitet nach System Kleyer. Stuttgart 
1891. gr. 8. 7 u. 176 pg. m. 17 Figuren. M. 5 

BouB (E.). Cours de M^caniaue et Machines profess^ & I'Ecole Poljtech- 
nique. Public par Phillips aveo la collaboration de Collignon et 
Kretz. 2ed. (En 3 vol.) Vol. II : Statiqueet'travaildes forces dans 
les machines 6 T^tat de mouvement uniforme. Paris 1891. 8. 8 et 
242 pg. avec atlas de 8 planches in-4. M. 5.20 

liouBDON. Elements d'Algebre. 17. Edition, rerae et annot^ par E. 
Prouhet Paris 1891. 8. 13 et 656 pg. M. 6.80 

BuscnE (E.). GrundzQge einer rechnenden Geometrie der Lage. Theil 
IL Bergedorf 1891. 4. 19 pg. M. 1.50 

Caset (J.). Treatise on Spherical Trigonometry and its application to 
Geodesy and Astronomy, with numerous examples. Lonaon 1891. 8. 
w. figures, cloth. M. 5.80 

Catalogue de TObservatoire de Paris. — Positions observe des ]6toiles 
1837—1881. Tome II. (6 h fi 12 h.) Paris 1891. gr. in-4. M. 84 

DuHEU (P.). Le9ons sur I'Electricit^ ct le Magn^tisme. (En S toI.) 
Tome I: Les corps conducteurs d T^tat permanent. Paris 1891. gr. 
in 8. 8 et 560 pg. av. figures. M. 13.20 

EiSEXLOHR (A.). Ein mathematisches Handbuch der alten Aegyptcr 
(Papyrus Rhind des British Museum), Ubersetzt u. erklftrt. 2. 
Ausgabe (ohne Tafeln). Leipzig 1891. gr. 4, 2 u. 278 pg, 

M. 12.00 

Fenn (R. J.). Algebraic Factors. 12mo, pp. 32. Robertson. Is. 6d. 

Fischer (W.). Erweiterung des Satzes von der Sichel des Archimedes 
und Verbindun^ desselben mit dem Satze von den MSndchen des 
Hippokratcs ; Schwerpunkte, Rotationskorper. Kempen 18i/l. 4. 
26 pg. M. 1.50 

FoEESTER (W.) und Lchmann (P.). Die unverfinderlichen Tafeln des 
astronomischen und chronologischen Theils des kOn. preussischen 
Normalkalenders. Noue Ausgabe. Berlin 1891. gr. 8. 5 u. 133 
pg. M. 4.00 

Fhantz (R.). Ueber die Bewegung eines materiel len Punktes auf Rota- 
tionsflachen. Magdeburg 1891. 4. 20 pg. mit 4 Tafeln. M. 1.80 

Franz (J.). Die jahrliche Parallaxe d. Stems Oeltzen 11677, bestimmt 
m. dem KQnigsberger Hcliometer. fol. 15 pp. KSnigsberg (Grftfe & 
Unzer). $—.85 

Georgetown College Observatory, J. G. Ilagen Director. — The Photo- 
chronograph and its anplication to Star Transits, by G.* A. Fargis 
and J. G. Ilagen. Washington 1891. 4. 86 pg. with 2 plates. 

M. 4.00 

Grassmann (R.). Die Ausdehnungslehre oder die Wissenschaft von den 
extensiven GrOssen in stronger Formel-Entwicklung. Stettin 1891. 
gr. 8. 9 u. 182 pg. M. 2.25 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 83 

Gratsuus (H.). VieiBtellige LogarithmeDtafeln. Berb'n 1891. 12. 
24 pg. M. 0.50 

HiLFSTAFELN und die biflherigen Schrift«n der KSn. Stemwarte Bogen- 
haosen bei MtLncheii. 2 Abhandlungen. Mtlnchen 1^91. gr. 4. 24 
u. 21 pg. M. 8.00 

HuEBKER (E.). Ueber die Umformangunendlicher Reihen und Prodacte 
mit Beziehung aaf elJiptische FunctioneD. KCnigsberg 1891. 4. 
41 pg. M. 1.50 

IssLiN (J. J.). Die Gmndlaeen der Geometrie, ohne spczielle Grundbe- 
griffe u. Grandsfttze m. Einschlnss e. vollstftDd. Darstellg. der reinen 
Sphfirik einheitlieh dargestellt. 4. Bern. K. J. Wyss. $2 

KoFLEB (V.). Die relativen GrSssen der reellen ebenen Gkometrie. Meran 
1891. 8. 22 pg. m. 2 Tafeln. M. 1.50 

Kruoer (R.). Lehrbuch des Rechnens mit imaginftren und complexen 
Zahlen. Stuttgart 1891. gr. 8. 8 u. 166 pg. m. 88 Figuren. M. 5. 

EcLLRicH (E.). Zur Geschichte des Mathematischen DreikSrperprob- 
lems. Halle 1891. 8. 68 pg. M. 1.80 

Lehmakh (K.). Die Lage der Brennpunkte bei Linsen. Steglitz 1890. 
4. 11 pg. M. 1.00 

Lbrch (F.). Ueber Dreiecke, welche einem Kegelschnitt nmsehrieben 
und einem anderen eingesohrieben sind. Brislau 1891. 8. 89 pg. 

M. 1.20 

LioowsKi (W.). Saramlung fQnfstelliger logarithmischer, trigonome- 
triscberund nautiscber Tafeln nebst Erklarungen und Formeln der 
Astronomie. 2. Auflage. Kieil891. 8. M. 6.00 

LmiNowsKi (J.). Nowa podstawa geometrii. (Nouveaux fondements 
de la G^metrie.) Warszawa 1891 . 8. 16 et 188 pg. M. 6.00 

Lucas (E^. R^rgations math^matiques. 2. ^ition. (En 2 volumes.) 
Vol. 1 : Les Travers^es, les Fonts, les Labyrinthes, les Reinos, le 
Solitaire, la Numeration, le Baguenaudier, le Taquin. Paris 1891. 
12. 24 et 255 pg. av. figures. M. 5.50 

Marie (M.). R^lisation et usage des Formes imaginaires en G^m^trie. 
Paris 1891. 8. aveo nombreuses figures. M. 8.20 

Mater (E.). Grundzilge der praktischen Geometrie. 2. umgearbeitete 
u. vermehrte Auftage. wien 1888. gr. 8. m. 5 Tafeln u. 178 
Holzschnitten. — Bisner nicht im Handel. M. 8.00 

Mendizabal Tamborbbl (J. dc). Tables des Logarithmes k huit d^i- 
males des nombres 1 k 125000 et des fonctions goniom^triques, sinus, 
tangentes etc. Paris 1891. fol. 

M^RAT (Ch.). Th^rie anal^^tique du Logarithme N^p^rien et de la fonc- 
tion exponentielle. Paris 7891. 4. M. 2.20 

MoLEVBBOEK (P.). Theorie der Qnatemionen, Leiden 1891. 8. 12 u. 
284 pg. M. 7 

NiBMOLLBR (F.). Anwendung <ler linearen Ausdehnungslehre von Grass- 
mann auf die Theorie der Determinanten. OsnabrQek 1891. 8. 22 
pg. M. 1.20 

Padelleti (D.). Lezioni dl Mecconica razionala dcttate nella R. Uni- 
versity di NapolL 6. ed. 2 vol. Napoli 1889-90. 4. 662 e 75'> pg. 
0. figure. M. 26.80 



84 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

PAiATna (F.). SapK una Traiformnzione delle Figure tlello Bpuio ft 
qusttra liimcnsioni fcmdatn. H)|im tins corriapondcimi nnivoca dei 
puuti real) ed inimBginari di R, coi punlj reeJl di R^. Falmi llj91. 8. 
::0 pg. M. 1.80 

PiLATiM (F.). Sopra i Trinncoli Format! coi lati dell' Buigimmo di 
Pascal, i quali possono rimirsi ad un punto. PolmilWi. 8. 10 
pg. M. 1.B0 

Pfkh, (L. Graf v.). Kometische Stremungon auf der Erdoberfllche u. 
daa Gesctz der Analogie im Wfjtgcbuude. Berlin, F, DQmmler'B 
Verl. $2.Ba 

Baschi (L ). G«>inetriB analitica alk Coordinate (Cartcoiane pioiettiTO 
euc). rarma IBUl. 8. iJ4u pg. 

a dc la Theoris gjnfraie des Fooctiont. Pull 

u. a.ao 

RovcBi (E.) ct CoMBEBOUSSE (C. de). Traits dp Qfomitrle. «. MfHcw. 
revue ct augment^. l>iirt[a U ; Qeomctrie drn I'eapace. Paris 18B1. 
e. lOtt G;i pj;. av. figuiva. H. 7.B0 

ScaiJLbR (\V. F,). Ivehrbuch der unbestimmten Gleichnngen deal. 
Grades I Dinphnnlische Gleichungen). Ncbst den AhhaDdinnnn dM 
llBchel de Mbziriw! in franzJIsiNchcm Originale u. deutsoher ijebsr- 
eetzuDg. Rcorbeitct zum 'I'heil noch System Klejrer. Bach I. Stutt- 
gart 189 1. gr. 8. 8u. 176 pg. M. 4.80 



Sxrrn (Cti.). Elementary treatise on Solid Qeometrj. 8 ed. LondiHi 
1801. a 15 a. 342 pg. w. flgiires. cloth. H. 18.00 

Stahpfer (S.1. IiOgBrithmisch-trigonomelrisehe Tafeln. nebst vencbie- 
dfncn andcrcn iiDtzlichen Tufclii und Fornielp und ciner Anwriauns, 
niit Ililfe dersvlben logarithmische Kcchnungcn auszutDhrcD. 14. 
Aufl. WienlSfll. gr. a. 24 u. 122 pg. gcbunden. M. S.40 

Stewart (S. T,). I'Ibob und Solid Geometry. New Tork 1891. 8. 10 
a. 400 pg. w. riguTOs. half leatber. ' M. 4.00 

Vkuv (P. yy.). On the distribution of the Moon's Heat and iO variation 
with the Pbasi!. Published by the Utrvcht Society of Arts and 
Sciences. The Hague 18SI. 4. 45pg. w. It plates. Pmc-essar. 

M. S.OO 
ig a tabid of 

_._ ,, _ _ numben " 

the stundard of Itowland's photographic map of thcwlar Hpeelni , 

a. tablL-» of errata a, additions to the Index. Manchester 1691 . 8. 
:)Opg. H. !.70 

WiLLiAMBOS (H.). An Rlementary Treatise on the Integral Calculus. Bth 
ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. 8vo. pp. 478. liongman's. 10s. Bd. 

WnoKsiir (11,1. Knnonv I>o)!urytm6w,wj-d, S. Uickstein. WaizsairalSOO. 
8. 3U l<g. mit 6 Tufeln. M. 8.80 

Zech IP.). Aufgal>en aus dcr thforetiscben Mechanik, nebst AuflSsun- 
geu. S. Auflaire. utitcr Milwirkung von C. Cninz, Stuttgart 1891. 
gr. 8. 8 u. an j)g. m. ITS FiguroD, M. 4.80 



CONTENTS. 



Ui" IMil.lv liiliiKi. IV.Iwl. llv p. I.i...»4. ■^, 
}few PutiliGuiiDUi 



Anieliw IMI Uwarllwi (baiild be aadnsBQii to llx- 

U Kui iWL Sttet-t, ?(bw Totb n\j^ 



ON LISTS OF OOYABIANTS. 85 

ON LISTS OF COVARIANTS. 

BT DB. BMOBT MCCLINTOCK. 

I USE the term coTariants to inclndc invariants, and I write 
particalarly concerning lists of covariants (^roundforms) of 
the binary quintic and sextic, those of qnantics of lower de- 
gree being few and well known. When the weight of a 
covariant is spoken of in this article, it must bo understood 
to mean the weight of its first term or '^ source/' The symbol 
5. will denote that coyariant of the quintic whose weight is n, 
and 6« that covariant of the sextic whose weight is m. Thus, 
for example, 5, and 6, represent the hessians (weight 2) of the 
quintic and sextic respectively. The only case oi ambiguity 
18 C,p for which weight there are two covariants : one of these 
may be denoted by 6,.., the other by 6,5*. 

The table printed on the next page exhibits the terminology 
of different writers. Professor Cavley's* superb collection of 
the covariants of the quintic, in whictif each is designated by 
a letter of the alphabet, is arranged, as will be observed, first 
according to the degree in the coefficients, and secondly ac- 
cording to the order in the variables. Thus 5^, of the first 
degree, is called A, and 5, and 5^, of the second degree, come 
next ; but 5. being of order 2 while 5, is of order 0, the letter 
B is assigned to 5^, and so on. The small italics contained in 
the column headed by the name of Dr. Salmon f are the sym- 
bols used in a table at the end of his work, illustrative of 
transvection, and denote the scmin variants which form the 
sources of covariants of the quintic and of higher quantics as 
well. The letters a, g, h, i, j, Jcy are therefore used by him 
a)so for the sextic, together with /, m, n, q^ representing 
respectively 6., 6,^, G„, 6 . Clebsch t and Gonian § differ but 
slightly in their nomenclature. Faa de Bruno | designates 
invariants by the letter 1, with subscripts indicating degree, 
and other covariants by the letter C, with subscripts indicat- 
ing order and degree. The column headed by the name of 
Professor Sylvester contains his table IT of germs for the 
quintic, each source having its distinguishing germ, i. e., the 
coefficient in it of the highest power of the final coefficient of 
the quintic. Thus, the quintic being 

• Mathematical Papers, II, 273-309 ; Cambridge. 1889. 
+ Modern Higher Algebra, 4th Edition. 

Ji Theorie der Bindren Algebraisehen Formen, Leipzig, 1872. 
) Invariantentheorie, herausgcgcben von Eerschcnsteincr, Leipzig, 
7. 

I ThSarie des Formes Binaires, Turin, 1876. 
1 American Journal of Mathematics, V, 89. 



86 



ON LISTS OF OOYXRIAKTS. 



COVARIANTS OF THE QUINTIC. 



Weiffht. 


Deg- Order. 


A 


Salmon. 


CUitch. 


Gordan. 


Fadde 
Bruno. 


SybMiter, 


6. 


1-6 


U, a 


f 


f 

• 


a 


6. 


2-6 


C 


H,h 


H 


9* 


c„ 


ic) 


6. 


3-9 


F 


9 


T 


/ 


t'... 


id) 


5, 


2-2 


B 


Six 


• 

i 


• 


^« 


(e) 


6. 


3-5 


E 


k 






c„ 


ay 


6. 


3-3 


D 


T,j 


• 


• 

J 


c.. 


(«') 


6, 


4-6 


I 




► 




c« 


a(c)f 


6. 


4-4 


H 


e 






c,.. 


W 


6. 


5-7 


L 








0,.. 


ic)V 


6.. 


4-0 





J 


A 


A 


/, 


ar 


6.. 


5-3 


K 








c^. 


Sa{e')/-2{e)ie)f 


5.. 


5-1 


J 


a 


a 


a 


c.,. 


a{c)r 


5., 


6-4 


N 








c,.. 


a{d)r 


5„ 


6-2 


M 


r 


T 


T 


o,„ 


(cyr 


5.. 


7-5 


P 








c.„ 


(c){d)r 


5„ 


7-1 







/? 


/? 


<?.„ 


a\c)f' 


5,. 


8-2 


R 


5 


5 


5 


c,.. 


<c)T 


5.. 


8-0 


Q 


K 


B 


B 


/, 


{c){d]f' 


5„ 


9-3 


s 








0,.. 


(c)T 


5„ 


11-1 


T 




Y 


r 


^1.11 


icYidr 


5„ 


12-0 


U 


L 


C 


c 


I„ 


{cyjf' 


5.. 


13-1 


V 


• 


d 


6 


c..,. 


{cYie-r 


5» 


18-0 

* 


w 


R,I 


R 


R 


/.. 


a(c)r 



OK LISTS OP C0VABIAKT8. 87 

the germ of any covariant is the coeflScient of the highest 
I)Ower of/ appearing in its source. In the column in qnes- 
tion. 



\c\ = oo — i', 

f) = a^d - UU + 2*', 
[e\ = fl« — A3)d + 3c', 
[6^) = ace - aef + 2fcd — c' — J'e,* 
J = a'ef + 4ac' + 4rfJ* - 3JV - 6o5c?rf. 



This germ-theory of Professor Sylvester will doubtless lead 
in fnture to important results. We may even now make 
some practical use of it as an aid in reducing coyariants to 
their simplest forms. 

The collection of covariants of the quintic lately made by 
Professor Oayley from his past publications is not likely to 
be superseded lor many years. It appears in that great 
series of volumes, not yet complete, which will endure as the 
noblest monument of their illustrious author. It gives each 
covariant in the fullest detail, with all the terms arranged in 
the most complete order, and with the numerical coefficients 
verified, in every instance, as perfectly as that mode of veri- 
fication can accomplish it, by calculations printed at the foot 
of the columns. The covanants as published are free from 
any inaccuracy which I have been able to discover,! with the 
single exception of the one (5 J called I. In this the third 
and fifth columns should each be multiplied throughout by 
6, and in the second column dbcf — 10 should read a(?e — 10. 
Yet, perfect as this collection is, it does not profess to give, 
and in fact does not always give, each covariant in its simplest 
form. An instance in point may be seen as the result of an 
examination of the germs. The germ of Fas printed is the co- 
efficient of/ ',namely, in Professor Sylvester's notation, a(cY{d). 
If we suppose that note has been taken, as in our column 
headed "Sylvester," of the germs of the preceding co- 
variants tabulated by Professor Cayley, we see that the 
germ of Fis the prodfuct of the respective germs of J and Q. 
In fact, the addition of 2 JQ to F as printea would simplify it 




Yet it does not follow necessarily that the simplest ground- 



* Printed erroneously (u2* in the paper cited. The germ of 630 is also 
printed incorrectly. 

\ As regards the quintic. The last column of is, Ko. 9 of the quartio, 
is incorrect. 



88 



0!!^ LISTS OF COYABIAITEB. 



form may not have a compound germ. The case of 6, ^ is on 
instance to the contrary. 

The synoptical tables of Clebsch and Qordan do not g^ve 
the covariautc^ but merely symbolic expressions indicating 
how the CO variants may be compated. Let no one, however, 
undertake to compute covariants as directed by the symbolic 
analysis. The expressions resulting from the application of 
the Glebsch-Oordan formul® are often highly complicated. 
For instance, their formula for the covanant of weight 15 
gives the complicated function S6BK + 7E0 — 252^, and 
that for weight 21 gives 252^+29 OiT— 6950, where ^ means 
a form of 5 which I think simpler than P as tabulated, and 
tff means a lorm of 5 in some respects simpler than 8. Yet 
of course these complicated expressions are true covariants, of 
the right weights, degrees, and orders. I mention them 
merely to illustrate the necessity, for those engaged in com- 
puting and tabulating covariants, of a simple method. 

I am unable to prove that the method which I prefer will 
in every case produce the simplest form of covanant, and it 
will not apply to all covariants, but I have not yet known it 
to fail when applied, and so I ^ve it for what it may be worth. 
If we call by the name of '^ simple transvection that foml 
of transvection {Ueberschiebung) in which one of the two 
covariants concerned is the quantic itself, my plan is to pro- 
duce any desired covariant, when possible, by simple trans- 
vection from the nearest available covariant of lower wei^ht^ 
Simple transvection increases the degree by 1 and the weight 
(in the case of the quintic) by from 1 to 5, and it cannot be 
performed when the desired increase of weight exceeds the 
order of the covariant operated upon. Observing these limi- 
tations, it is not difficult to pick out a succession of available 
operations, for instance for the quintic, by referring to the 
table of weights, degrees, and orders of possible independent 
covariants. Representing by [n] the operation of simple 
transvection which is to increase the weight by n, we shall 
have, successively. 



21 5, = 5„ 



1 
4 
1 
4 
1 
2 
1 
5 



5, — 5„ 
5. = 5.. 

5, — 5^ 

5. = 5„ 
5. = 5.» 
5. = 5„ 

5, — "id* 



[31 5, = 5,., 
4] 5. = 5 
1 
3 
1 
'4 
4 
5 



m 






Although, as I have said, I cannot nrove that simple trans- 
vection, applied to the nearest, will always produce the 



ON LISTS OF COYABIAKTS. 89 

simplest possible result, it seems not unreasonable that this 
should be the case, since the oj)erand is {presumably in the 
simplest form, and the operation is of the simplest character. 
The operation just indicated for producing 5, yields an ex- 
pression simpler than H, that for 5,. an expression simpler 
than P, that for 5,^, an expression simpler than 8* ; the 
others produce the corresponding covanants tabulated by 
Professor Gayley, which are therefore, in all probability, the 
simplest attamaole forms. 

Another principle appears to be even more imiK>rtant than 
that of simple transvection from the nearest. It is that if for 
anjr auantic a ^oundform is wanted for any degree-weight for 
whicn one exists for a lower quantic, the same ^'source'' 
should be employed. This principle enables us to use for 6„ 
6„ 6^, 6^, 6,, 6„ 6j„ and 6„, the sources of corresponding 
degree-weight for the quintic. Yet for some reason unknown 
to me this principle appears uniformly to be disregarded in 
the formation of 6,,. Even the "germ-table for the sextic'' 
of Professor Sylvester assigns for 6,, a less simple form than 
5,,. That it is less simple may be seen from an examination 
of the numerical coefficients : 
6,. byFaAde Bruno's table,t ±186, ±330, ±549, ±330, ±186 

6„from5.„ ±142, ±168, ±263, ±168, ±142 

In fact, Fa4 de Bruno's 6,, is really 2 • 6. . 6, — 3 • 6,.. 

Tables for the sextic are needed, as complete, correct, and 
well printed as those of Professor Cayley for the quintic. If 
anjr member of the Society, undeterred by the great labor 
which the task will involve, will undertake to compute such 
a set of tables for the sextic, to be published, say, in the 
American Journal of Matliematica, I shall be glad to con- 
tribute towards it my own compntatious of the first seventeen 
of the twenty-six groundforms, complete, with those of the 
simple forms of 5„ 5 , and 5,^ already mentioned, which 
might usefully be published with the sextic tables. The 
utility of such printed tables consists largely in their availa- 
bility for reference in case of need, and for this purpose they 
should be published, not singly or in small numbers as com- 
puted from time to time, but in masses. It is for this reason 
that I have not thought of publishing the computations just 
mentioned. I have made them, indeed, not intending publi- 
cation, but in order to verify to the greatest extent my idea 
that the easiest way to find the simplest forms is, wherever 
practicable, to apply simple transvection as already explained. 

t Corrected. As Professor Sylvester points out {loc. cit.\ the tables 
printed by Fa& de Bmno, useful as they are, contain many errors. The 
last column of this 6i o table is nearly all wrong, and only one colamn of 
the five is quite right. 



90 OK LISTS OP OOYABIANTS. 

« 

Gonfining my attention to this question of simplicity, I have 
not even made search among mathematical jonmals to see 
what has already been done towards the computation of the 
more difficult coyariants of the sextic, bnt will do so at the 
instance of any member of the Society willing to undertake 
the work of completing the series, who may not himself have 
access to a large library. 

The class of cases to which I have referred as unsuitable 
for the application of simple transvection are those in which 
there is no groundform near enough upon which to operate. 
For instance, to produce by simple transvection the invariant 
6j,, of the sixth degree in the coefficients, we should need as 
a basis of operation a covariant of degree 5 whose weight 
should not be less than 12, and whose weight and order com- 
bined should exceed 17. The only groundforms of degree 
6, are, however, 6„ and C , the former of order 4, the latter 
of order 2, and neither of them can be used to produce 6„. 
It is of course possible in such cases to apply simple transyec- 
tionto a complex coyariant — as, for instance, to 6^. 6^, of order 
(), for producing 6,^ — ^but that will not usually produce the 
best results, and it is doubtless preferable to employ trans- 
vection (no longer "simple") of groundforms other than 
the quantic itself, in accordance with the recommendations 
of the text-books. Of the four text-books already cited 
which supply formulsd for computing the groundforms of the 
quintic and sextic, the formulae collected by Salmon are 
apparently the best. So far as my observation has gone, the 
application of Salmon^s formulsB has given simple resalts in 
most cases. Among the exceptions to this remark are 5,,, 

After once applying simple transvection to produce 6,„ 
for which weight there are two groundforms of the same 
degree in the coefficients and order in the variables, we can- 
not again employ satisfactorily the rule of the nearest for 
producing the other form. Thus, [Ij 6,^ gives 6,,^, and we 
cannot again use [1] 6„ for producing 6y^ ; nor can we prof- 
itably use [2] 6,„ perhaps because it is not only not so 
"near" as [l] 6,^, but even not so "near" as any combina- 
tion of [2] 6,, and [1] 6,,. In this case the usual symbolic 
formulaX-Jacobian of 6. and 6, — is the best for practical 
application.* 

The nine groundforms of the sextic which remain to be 
computed or collected (if in simplest form) from other pub- 
lications — 6,3, for instance, is well known — are, as to weight, 
degree, and order, as follows, the weight being denoted by 
the subscript : 6,„ 6, ; 6,., 7, 4 ; 6„, 7, 2 ; 6„, 8, 2 ; 6,^ 

* I have DOt tested [4] 6|,. 



OK LI8XS OV OOVABIANTS. 



91 



9, 4 ; 6,^ 10, 2 ; 6,„ 10, ; 6,^ 12, 2 ; 6„, 15, 0. Of these 
nine, five may be deriTed by simple transvection, viz., [4j 
6.. = 6.., [5] 6.. = 6„. [3] 6,. = 6 [2] 6.. = 6.., [4] 6 = ft„. 
I nave wntten m two places 6„ for 6^^ or 6^^, not known 
which is to be preferred, a matter to be settled in either case 
most easily by compating a few terms npon each basis. The 
three of nigher weights, to which simple transvection will 
not apply, may probably be deriyed most simply by means of 
the formalsd giyen by Salmon. 

To illustrate the process of simple transyection^ which, 
althongh sufficiently implied, is not nsnally illustrated in the 
books, 1 giye [4] 6^ = 6^ in detail in the form of a table : 



OPKBAITD. 


MUI^TIPLISBS. 


6«. 


For (1). 


For (2). 


For (8). 


ae — 4W + 3c* 
%af — ebe + ^d 
an — 9ce + Sd* 
2bg —ecf-\- Me 
eg Mf-\- 3e* 


-^2 
e 

— d 
c 

— b 
a 


/ 

— e 

d 

— e 
b 


-7-2 

9 

-f 
e 

d 

c 



1 ) = acg—Sadf-h 2<w'— ^ V 4- Sbcf— bde-^c^e^ 2cd? ) 

2) = ^cg—Sbdf-h9be* + 9cY—l7cde-hadg + Sd*—aef [ 6. 
[3 ) = aeg—dbdg 4- 2c*g —af-^- Sbef—cdf—Sce* + 2(f e ) 

The multipliers in this instance are extremely simple. The 
coefficient of a is always 1, as in this case, but in general 
those of the other multipliers are other integers. The rule 
which I find best for determining the integers forming the 
coefficients of the multipliers for simple transvection is given 
in another paper, as a special case of a broader rule for trans- 
vection in general. The paper in question, '* On the Com- 
putation of Covariants by Transvection,'' to be read before the 
Society on January 2, 1892, will be printed elsewhere, the 

Eages of the Bulletin being intended rather for critical and 
istorical notes than for original inyestigations. 



92 A FBBKCH ANALYTIOAL GEOHETBT. 



A FRENCH ANALYTICAL GEOMETEY. 
Lefons de Oiomitrie Analytiqxie. Par MM. Briot et Bouquet. 

BeTue et annoUe par M. Appell. professeur & 1a Faoalt^ des 
Sciences. Paris, Ch. Delagrave, 1890. 8vo, pp. iii. + 722. 

This popular French text-book reached its fourteenth 
edition in 1890. At that time^ as we learn from the preface, 
changes in the programmes of the schools and improved 
methods of teaching had made a revision of the book advis- 
able. This pieoe of work was done by M. Appell, a mathema- 
tician, whose name is as familiar to American students as to 
Frenchmen. The bare list of the articles in the book which 
he has touched covers a page and a half, and it is safe enongh 
to say that *' nihil quoa tetigit non ornavit" A treatise of 
this Kind is of course more interesting to teachers of element- 
ary mathematics than to any one else ; to them even a slight 
account of a school book which has achieved great and lasting 
popularity in a nation where pure mathematics has flourished 
80 splendidly and so long^ can not fail to prove interesting by 
virtue of its subject. 

The book opens with a concise notice of the different sys- 
tems of plane coordinates, beginning with rectilinear co- 
ordinates in general and the particular case of rectangular 
axes ; then passing rapidly over polar and bi-polar systems, 
and finally giving a notion of coordinates in general. These 
notions are all simple enough when presented in the trans- 
parent style of the authors ; in fact plane coordinates are so 
much simpler than cuitcs drawn on a sphere that it is a 
wonder that school books on geography should not give an 
account of them before taking up the subject of latitude and 
longitude which almost always proves difficult to young 
pupils. The writer was once explaining rectangular co- 
orainates at a teachers' institute wnen one of the members 
rose and thanked him for inventing them ; he had been try- 
ing to teach latitude and longitude without anv of the pre- 
liminary ideas necessary to an understanding of the matter. 
At the close of the first chapter we read, *' The representation 
of figures by equations is the basis of analytic geometry ; it 
allows us to apply the processes of algebra to the stuay of 
figures. In analytic geometry we are concerned with three 
fundamental questions : when a figure is defined geometri- 
cally, to find its equation ; reciprocally, when the equation is 
given, to construct the figure ; finally, to study the relations 
which exist between the geometrical properties of the figures 
and the analytical properties of the equations." 

Chapter II. takes up the first problem ; various loci, in- 



JL FBENCH ANALTTICAL OEOHETBT. 93 

dnding nearly all the simple onrres whose names are famil- 
iar, are defined geometrically and their equations written 
down directly, as a mere statement of the definition in the 
language of algebra. The curves are drawn and sufiSciently 
de8cril]Ked« In this way the student not only gets a notion 
of what a locus is, but, what is far from easy, he comes to 
see how an equation, so different in its nature and belonging 
to quite anotner realm of thought, can represent a geometric^ 
figure, and to look upon equations in x and y as orief state- 
ments of the truths of geometry. The mind is put in a con- 
dition to understand why the manipulation of an equation 
may lead to new facts. Without some such preparation it 
can hardly be very profitable to try to prove geometrical 
theorems with equations ; there can be nothing in the 
student's mind corresponding to them, and a gulf which he can 
not bridge will exist between the proof and the conclusion. 
That the radius of a circle has a constant length is expressed 
algebraically by the equation 

that the sum of the distances of any point on the ellipse 
from the foci is constant, bv 

tt 4- 1; = 2a, 

and so on ; the polar equations from their simplicity being 
first written down. The chapter closes with a list of exercises 
of which this is a specimen : ^^ To construct the curve whose 
equation in bi-polar coordinates is uv=^ a'; the distance be- 
tween the poles being 2a." Of course this lemniscate would 
be constructed by drawing circles with their centers at the 
poles. The student has been told previously how to find 
points on the ellipse in the same way. The problems are 
mostly too difficult for a beginner. 

Chapter III. treats of the fundamental idea of homogeneity. 
A function/ (a, i, c, . . .), we are told, is homogeneous and 
of degree m when / (ia, hhy . . .) = A*/ (a, ^, . . .) ; the 
sum, difference, product or quotient of any two homogeneous 
functions is liomogeneous ; and the same is true of any 

Eower, root or transcendental function of / (a, {, t?, . . .) ; 
ut the transcendental function must be of degree 0. Thus 

sin (—5 — Ti) is homogeneous, while sin (a + V^^) ^® °^^- 

All this is sufficiently clear, and what follows shows its vital 
importance at the threshold of analytic geometry. 

'•When we seek the relations which exist between the 
lengths of the various lines A^ By 0, ... of a figure, we 
imagine these lines referred to a unit of length which is 



94 A. FBBirCH AKALTTIOAL eSOlOXBT. 



nsaally not spocifiod and remains qnite arbitnuy.'' Henoe 
the reuflonin^ which leads to a relation among the lengths of 
these lines is independent of any particular unit, and the 
relation must subsist whateyer be the unit Jn particular it 
subsists if the unit be divided by h^ that is if the number 
expressing each length is multiplied by I;; henoe the relation 
is nomogenoousy or at any rate, if not, then it must break up 
into several relations which are each homogeneous. An 
apparent exception occurs when some line of the figure is 
taken as the unit of length, but the exception is explained 
and the homogeneity reestablished. '^ The equations which 
the theorems of elementary geometry lead to directly, are 
homogeneous. . . . The principle of homogeneity can be 
used at every step to verify the algebraic tnmsformations 
which have been effected.'' 

The above is a too brief account of a part of this yenr 
elementary and most interesting chapter. No part of it is 
difllcult even for a youDg student, while it opens up to him a 
lino of tlioucrlit which he must follow throughout his scientific 
studios in wliatever direction he turns. This is the kind of 
work which makes mathematicians and scientists, while the 
Htufleiit whoso analytic geometry consists only in manipulating 
a few o(|uati()tis of which the meaning is but dimly seen, finds 
it a barren and useless subject. 

Homo considerations follow, still of the simplest kind, 
which lead to the conclusion that ''all rational expressions, 
and all irrational expressions containing only square roots, can 
bo cc)nHtru(;to(l by moans of a limited number of right lines 
and (rirolcH." It is added, but not proved, that no others can. 
A littlo reading of this character would turn the attention of 
a goodly nuUibiT of bright young men who are still at work 
upon Honio of the impossible problems of antiquity, to subjects 
more worthy of their abilities. 

Hook II. ojKins the study of the right line and circle. The 
trcjatment of these loci is similar to that in our familiar text 
books and is limited to the needs of beginners. The next 
(diapter troats of geometric loci in general. In Book I. the 
equations of many loci were obtained simply by writing dovm 
the definition in the lanj^ua^e of algebra ; here we obtain the 
equations of loci by eliminating one or more variable param- 
eters. The coordinates of a point may be explicitly given as 
functions of the parameter a, but more usually they are only 
implicitly given in two equations 

(1) /, (^,y,a) = o, 

(2) /, {X, y, a) = 0. 
Each value of a gives a pair of curves intersecting in a point 



A FBEKCH AKALYTICAL GEOXBTBY. 95 

of the loooB, and *^ the equation of the locus is obtained by 
eliminating the parameter a between the equations (1) and (2). ' 
Why this should give the equation of the locus is a difficult 
thing for students to see ; but it is less difficult when properly 
stated. The result is not a single equation in z and y, but a 
pair of equations 

(3) / {x, y, a) = 0, 

(4) F {X, y) = 0. 

which are equivalent to (1) and f2^. Any system of values of 
Xf y, a, which satisfies (1) and (2) must satisfy (3) and (4) ; 
hence equation (4) is satisfied by the coordinates of every 
point on the locus. Conversely, every system of values of x, 
y, a which satisfies (3) and (4) must satisfy (1) and (2) ; it 
loUows that (4) is the equation of the locus. " 

The teacher who reads this book will be everywhere de- 
lighted by the careful way in which the raw edges of thought 
are hemmed down ; no loose threads are left to ravel out 
and destroy the fabric. It can hardly be doubted that this 
brave honesty in their elementary school books has much to 
do with that precision of thought and clearness of expression 
which makes the works of French mathematicians a perpet- 
ual refreshment to the reader. It would be an inquiry worth 
making, whether students in hi^h schools and normal schools 
who never intend to enter college do not get more benefit 
from the study of geometry than any others. With them it 
is not merely a thing to be crammed for an entrance exam- 
ination, but a subject to be studied for its educational value. 
It seems especially disastrous to make analytic geometry, a 
subject where the preliminary notions are so delicate and 
beautiful, a thing to be asked questions about when entering 
college ; inasmuch as the amount of knowledge required can 
at best be but small, and will almost certainly be acquired 
under conditions likely to blight future results. 

The remainder of the book, while deeply interesting, is 
more advanced ; and it is not the purpose of this sketcn to 
do more than call attention to those parts whose study may 
possibly be useful to teachers of classes which are beginning 
the subject. 

C. H. Chapman. 

Jomrs HoPKnrs UMivKBsrrT, December 14, 1891. 



96 ANNUAL KEVrVSQ OF GERMAN MATHEXATIGIAN8. 



THE ANNUAL MEETING OP GERMAN MATHE- 
MATICIANS. 

Through the courtesy of the secretary^ Dr. H. Wiener, of 
the Uniyersity of Halle^ who kindly sent ns adyance sheets of 
the Proceedings, we are now enabled to giye a more detailed 
account of the papers read before the section for mathematics 
and astronomy of the German Naturforscher- Versammlunff 
held at Halle, September 21 to 25, 1891. The meetings of this 
section constitute at the same time the annual meeting of the 
German Mathematical Union (Deutsche Mathemafiker- Verei" 
nigung). The section had seyen meetings; the total number 
of members registered as present was 70. 

1. The first paper read was a report by Prof. Felix Klein, 
of Gdttingen, On recent Enalish investigations in mechanics. 
The following abstract of tnis paper is translated from the 
ProceedifMs. 

^* The distinguishing characteristic of the English work in 
mechanics in comparison with that of continental writers lies 
in its being based on a thorough jgrasp of physical reality and 
in the resulting graphical lucidity (durchgdngige Anschau- 
lichkeit) of the inyestigations. For this yery reason the Eng- 
lish work in mechanics proyes particularly interesting and 
instructiye to the mathematician accustomed to a purely 
abstract train of reasoning. The usual lack of that method- 
ical treatment and mathematical rigor which the continental 
mathematician is wont to expect cannot be regarded as a 
serious objection ; in fact, it adds to the interest. 

Among the matters of detail discussed by the speaker, his 
remarks on the history of the discoyery of Hamilton's method 
of integrating the equations of dynamics may be of general 
interest. The matter seems to be entirely unknown, although 
Hamilton distinctly states the facts at yarious places in his 
writings, in particular in his first paper on systems of rays 
(1824). At the time when Hamilton beean writing, the 
emission theory was still preyalent so that the determination 
of a ray of light passing through any non- homogeneous (but 
isotropic) medium was considered as a special case of the ordi- 
nary mechanical problem as to the motion of a material parti- 
cle. It may be noticed in passing that the distinction between 
this special case and th^ general problem is not an essential 
one : by proceeding to higher spaces, any mechanical problem 
may be reduced to the determination of a ray of light trayers- 
ing a properly selected medium. Now Hamilton's discovery, 
according to which the integration of the differential equations 
of dynamics is made to depend upon the integration of a certain 



AKKUAL MEETIlirQ OF QEBMAK XATHEXATICIANS. 97 

partial differential equation of the first order, was simply the 
result of the fact that Hamilton, following the CTeat move- 
ment just then taking place in physics, undertook to derive, 
from the point of view of the nndulatory theory, the results 
in geometrical optics already known in the form of the cor- 
puscalar theory. Hamilton's method for integrating the dif- 
ferential equations of dynamics is, primarily, nothing but the 
general analytical expression for the relation between ray and 
wave, a distinction which in its physical form was well known 
at the time. Considered in this new light it is readily under- 
stood why Hamilton gave to his investigations that unneces- 
sarily specialized form in which he published them and which 
was removed only later by Jacobi. In his investigations on 
systems of rays Hamilton had originally in view certain 
entirely practical questions relating to the construction of 
optical instruments. This is the reason why he operates 
throughout with waves of light issuing from single points. 
The i^eal meaning of Jacobi's generalization is that any other 
waves of light may be used to determine a ray. The general 
wave is constructed in optics from the special waves by means 
of the so-called principle of Huygens. This construction is 
an exact eouivalent to the analytical process bjr which we 
ascend in tne theory of partial differential equations of the 
first order from any * complete ' solution to the ' general ' 
solution." 

2. The paper of Mr. Papperitz, of Dresden, On the system 
of the mathematical sciences, it is announced, will be pub- 
lished elsewhere. 

3. Mr. Max Simon, of Strassburg, read a paper On the 
axiom of parallels. 

4. Mr. Franz Meter, of Clausthal, presented an elaborate 
report On the progress of the projective theory of invariants 
during the last twentv-Jive years, which will probably be pub- 
lished in extenso by the German Mathematical Union. 

5. Mr. FiNSTERWALDER, of Munich, read a paper On the 
images of dioptric systems of somstohat large aperture and 
field which is published in the Transactions of the Bavarian 
Academy of Sciences {Abhandlungen, Class II, Vol. 17, 
Abth. 3, pp. 517-588). 

6. Mr. KOHN, of Dresden, spoke On rational twisted guar- 
tics, illustrating his remarks with the aid of models. 

7. Dr. H. Wiener, of Halle, read a paper On the foundations 
and the systematic development of geometry. The following 
abstract is ^ven in the Proceedings, 

** To be rigorous we may demand that the proof of a mathe- 
matical proposition should make use of those assumptions 
only on which the proposition really depends. The simplest 
ooDceivable assumptions are the existence of certain objects 



98 AiSfKUAL XBBTIKO OF OEBXAK XATHEMATICIAITB. 

and the possibility of certain operations by which said objects 
may be connected. If it be possible^ without further assnmp- 
tionsy to connect such objects and operations so as to produce 
propositions, these propositions will form a self-suataininp 
\in sich begrUndet) domain of science. Such, for instance, is 
algebra. 

In geometry it is of interest to go back to the simplest 
objects and operationB, since starting from these it is pos- 
sible to build up an abstract science which will be independ- 
ent of the axioms of geometry while its propositions run 
parallel to those of geometry. 

The projective geometry of the plane ofFers an example. 
Let the objects he points and lines, the operations those of 
joining and cutting, and let obiects as well as operations be 
restricted to a finite number. Throwing off the geometrical 
dress we shall have elements of two kinds and two kinds of 
operations such that the connection of any two elements of 
the same kind produces an element of the other kind. The 

feometrical propositions obtained on these assumptions (apart 
rom combinatory propositions inyoMng the number of ele- 
ments) are closing propositions (Schliessungssdize), if this 
term be taken to mean propositions about certain lines and 
points such that every one of the lines contains at least three 
of the points and every one of the points lies at least on three 
of the lines. Such are for instance : (1) Desargues's theorem 
of perspective triangles, and (2) Pascal s hexagram theorem 
applied to two lines. 

The proof of such propositions cannot be obtained from the 
given objects and operations ; in other words, this domain of 
geometry is not self-sustaining. If however the proof for any 
one sucn proposition (or for several) be taken from some 
other domain, then, by its repeated application a closed do- 
main of plane geometry may be obtamed. Thus, proving 
Desargues's theorem by means of solid geometry, we obtain 
the domain embracing all propositions usually derived by 
means ot geometrical addition of vectors or points. The at- 
tempts at deriving proposition (2) above from (1) have not 
been successful. Another possibility would be its derivation 
bv projection from a space of three or more dimensions, or 
else (which is easily done) by introducing the idea of con- 
tinuity. These two ^* closing propositions/^ however, are 
sufficient to prove, without further considerations of con- 
tinuity or infinite processes, the fundamental proposition of 
projective aeometryy and thus to develop the whole domain of 
linear projective plane geometry. 

Similarly it is possible to build up a solid geometry resting 
on the point, line, and plane as fundamental elements, or ol^ 
jects. JBut in this case we obtain a self-sustaining domain. 



AKKUAL MBBTINO OF OEBMAN ICATHEMATICIANS. 99 

These considerations can be extended to higher spaces. It 
will however be more important to descend from the plane to 
the geometry of the line. The onl^ element we here have is 
the point ; there can be neither joining nor cutting. It thns 
becomes necessary to borrow an operation from another do- 
main ; as snch we may nse constructions executed in the 
plane but concerning only points lying on our line^ especially 
constructions of projective, involutory, and harmonic groups 
of points. It appears that the construction of harmonic 
groups is sufficient as the following proposition can be proved : 
If in a line two pairs of points of an involution^ or three pairs 
of corresponding points of a projective system be given, it is 
possible to construct the corresponding point to any other given 
point by a finite number of constructions of harmonic points. 
Other domains are obtained by introducing other assump- 
tions. Thus the geometry of order presupposes the pi^oposi- 
tion that on a closed line four points can be divided in a defi- 
nite way into two pairs that separate each other. Still other 
domains depend on the assumption of the continuity of the 
elements, which may be either the analytical continuity of 
the method of limits, or the geometrical continuity that nnds 
its expression in the necessary meeting of points moving in a 
certain way in a line.'* 

8. Mr. ScHUBEBT, of Hamburg, read a paper On the enu- 
merative geometry of p-dmensional spaces of the first and 
second degrees, 

9. Mr. Eberhabd, of Konigsberg : Elements of the theory 
of forms of polyhedra. An elaborate work by tne author on 
tnis subject has just been published {Zur Morphologic der 
Folyedery Leipzig, Teubner, 1891). 

10. Mr. BoLTZMANN, of Munich : On some points in Max- 
welVs tJieory of electricity ; will be published in the Fro- 
ceedings of the section for physics. 

11. Mr. Hensel, of Berlin : On the fundamental problem 
of the theory of algebraic functions ; see the same author's 
paper in the Journal fUr MathematiJc, vol. 108, p. 142. 

12. Mr. Felix MtJLLEB, of Berlin : On literary enter- 
prises adapted to facilitate the study of mathematics. The 
speaker pointed out the desirability oi an introduction to the 
bibliography of mathematics ; complained of the want of 
subject-indexes in the most prominent mathematical journals ; 
gave an account of the progress of recent bibliographical 
works ; and expressed a regret that the continuation to Pog- 
gendorf's Dictionary of Authors has not yet appeared. He 
also laid before the Section a plan for a new Mathematical 
Dictionary for which he has been collecting the material for 
the last 20 years ; it contains about 4000 mathematical terms 
and over 1200 names. 



100 ANNUAL MEETING OF GERMAN MATHEMATICIANS. 

13. Mr. Dyck, of Munich : On the forms of the systems 
of curves defined by a differential equation of the first order^ 
%n particular on trie arrangement of the curves of principal 
tangents to an algebraic surface; will be published elsewhere. 

14. Mr. David Uilbebt, of Konigsberg : On full systems 
of invariants. 

" Let c/,, e/., . . . , t7,-i be integral rational invariants of a 
binary ground-form of the «th order, of the degrees Vj, v„ 
. . . v,_„ respectively,' in the coefficients of the ground-form ; 
and let these invariants be so selected thab all other integral 
rational invariants of the ground-form are integral algebraic 
functions of those n— 2 invariants. Then the intenul rational 
invariants of the ground-form form the integral functions of 
a body (K6rper)of algebraic functions ; let ^ be the degree 
of this body. Then the following formula can be shown to 
hold: 



\ V. . . . v..r 2. nllW (l/\2 / 



+ . . . 



for even n, 



,-:^i(i)--a)(i-r- 

G « - 1) \ 



for odd w. 



15. Mr. ScHOENFLiES, of Gottingen : On Configurations 
that can he derived from given space-elements by the operations 
of cutting and joining alone. Kef erring to Dr. Wiener's paper 
(7) the speaker showed that prop. (2) (PascaPs hexagram 
applied to two lines) cannot be derived by the operations of 
joining and cutting alone. 

16. Mr. Minkowski, of Bonn : On the geometry of num- 
bers. The author ^ves the name numher-frame (Zahlen- 
gitter) to the totality of all those points of space whose 
rectangular coordinates are three integral numbers and con- 
siders certain solids and their relation to the frame. The 
two most important cases are as follows. (1) Solids having 
the origin of coordinates as centre and bounded by a surface 
that appears at no point concave from without. For such 

solids it can be shown that if the volume be ^2' the solid 

must contain other points of the frame besides the origin. 
(2) Solids containing the origin and bounded by a surface 
which as seen from tne origin shows no double point. If the 



NOTES. 101 

volume of such a solid be ^ 1 +oi+«7 + 77+ . . . , it is 

always possible to indicate deformations of the solid for which 
the volume remains constant, the origin remains fixed and all 
straight lines of the solid remain straight while all points of 
the frame excepting the origin are found outside the solid 
after deformation. 

17. Mr. Peitz Kotter, of Berlin : On the problem of rota- 
tion treated by Mrs. Kovalevsky. The paper develops some- 
what farther the formulae given by Mrs. Kovalevsky in the 
12th volume of the Acta Mathematica for a certain integrable 
case of the problem of rotation of a heavy body about a fixed 
point. 

18. Mr. PiLiTZ, of Jena : A question in the theory of num- 
bers. After an introductory discussion of the necessity for a 
new calculus, or at least of a new way of conceiving of the 
combination of elements in the problems of the theory of 
numbers and the theory of functions, the speaker gave a 
proof of the proposition announced by Riemann as probably 
true : that the complex 0-points of the function C (s) all have 
i as their real part. 

19. Mr. F. Stackel, of Halle : On the bending of curved 
surfaces under certain conditions. 

20. Mr. A. Wangkrin, of Halle : On the development of 
surfaces of rotation with constant negative curvature on each 
other, 

21. Mr. WiLTHEiss, of Halle : On some differential equa- 
tions of the theta functions of two variables. 

22. Mr. 6. Cantor, of Halle : On an elementary questio7i 
in the theory of manifoldnesses. 

23. Mr. GoRDAN, of Erlangen : Remarks on a proposition 
of Mr. Hubert. 

Alexander Ziwet. 



NOTES. 



A regular meeting of the New York Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afternoon, December 5, at half- 

Sast three o'clock, the president in the chair. Mr. Wiley, 
[r. Snook, and Dr. Pupin were appointed a committee to 
report at the annual meeting, on December 30, nominations 
for the oflBcers and other members of tlie council for the cal- 
endar year 1892. 

Dr. "Pupin read an original paper entitled " On a peculiar 
family of complex harmonics, in which he deduced several 



102 NOTKS. 

useful properties of certain complex harmonic curves, explain- 
ing briefly their application to polyphasal and continuous 
current generators. Mr. Steinmetz and Dr. Webster made 
remarks upon the physical side of the paper. Mr. Steinmetz 
said that he had actually obtained in experiments with 
dynamos, curves which very closely resembled those given in 
Dr. Pupin's paper. T. s. f. 

The following courses of lectures, extending through the 
first half year, are being delivered at Clark University, Wor- 
cester, Mass. : 

By Professor Story : (1) Enumerative geometry and the 
theory of coloring maps ; (2) Historic development of arith- 
metic and algebra. 

By Dr. Bolza : (1) Klein's icosahedron theory; (2) Definite 
integrals and calculus of variations. 

By Dr. Taber : Modern higher algebra. 

By Dr. White : (1) Theta-f unctions of three and four vari- 
ables ; (2) Modem synthetic geometry and higher plane 
curves. 

By Mr. de Perrott : Application of analysis and group 
theory to the theory of numbers. 

By Professor Michelson : Optical theories. 

By Dr. Webster : Dynamics. 

At the weekly mathematical conferences conducted by Pro- 
fessor Story, non-euclidean geometry has been the subject of 
systematic discussion, tojrether with less extended considera- 
tion of topics of interest from other departments of mathe- 
matics. At a recent meeting the new Amsler's planimeter 
which has been added to the mathematical apparatus of the 
University was exhibited and its theory explained by Professor 
Story. Careful measurements on known areas give results 
accurate to within one- twentieth of one per cent. 

J. W. A. Y. 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 103 

NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANN & CO., NEW YORK. 

Annuaire de I'Observatoire municipal de Montsouris pour Tan 1891. 
In-16. Gauthier-Villars. 2 fr. 

Bach (C). Die Masohincnelemente. Ihre Berechnung und Construction 
mit Rttcksicht auf die neueren Versuche. 2., neubearbeitete Auflage. 
Lieferung 4. Stuttsart 1891. Lex. 8. pg. 42 u. 1-81(5 m. 11 
Tafeln u. 204 Abbildungen. M. 12 

Bryans (Q. H.) and Edmundson (T. VV.). Intermediate Science Mixed 
Mathematics Papers, 1»77-91. (Univ. Cor. Coll. Tutorial Series.) 
Cr. 8vo. Clive. 2s. 6dr 

Ohave y Castilla (J.V Ensayo de una nueva Teoria de la Proporcion- 
alidad de las Lfneas rectas. Madrid 1891. . 4. 91 pg. av. 3 
planches. M. 2.60 

Christiansen (C). Laerebog i Pysik. Band I (2 Hefte). Heft 1. 
KjQbenhavn 1891. 8. M. 4.50 

Cooke (T.). On the Adjustment and Testing of Telescopic Objectives. 
York 1891. 8. M. 5.50 

CzuDER (E.). Theorie der Beolmchtungsfehler. Leipzig 1891. gr. 8. 
12 u. 418 pg. m. 7 Holzschnitten. M. 8 

D6RH0LT (K.). Die Enveloppe der Axen der einem Dreieck einge^hrie- 
benen I^arabeln. Rbeine 1891. 4. 38 pg. mit 1 Tafel. M. 1.50 

Eder (J. M.». Die photographischen Objective, ihre Eigenschaften und 
PrQfung. Halle 1891. gr. 8. 273 pp. mit 3 Tafeln und 197 Holz- 
schnitten. M. 6 

Flammarion (C). I j' Astronomic et ses Fondateurs. Copemic et la 
d^ouverte du systdme du monde. Paris 1891. 12. 253 pg. av. 
figures. 1 fr. 

Flammarion (C). Qu*est-ee que le ciel ? In-16 avec 64 grav. Flam- 
marion. 75 cent. 

FouRTiER (H.). L'Astrophotographie. Paris 1891. 8. 20 pg. M. 1.50 

Galilei (G.). Opere, ristampate fedelmente sopra la Edizione Nazionale 
con approvazione del Ministero della puolica Istruzione. (In 2i> 
volumi.) Volume II. Pirenzo 1890. 8. 613 pg. c. tavole. M. 5 

Gore (J. E.). Star Groups; a Student's Guide to the Constellations. 
Ijondon, 1891. small 4. w. 30 maps, cloth. M. 5.;i0 

Gore (J. H.). Geodesy. London 1891. 12. 220 pg. w. figures, cloth. 

M. 5.30 

Grassmann (R.). Die Zahlenlehro odor Arithmetik, der niedere Zweig 
der Analyse. Erster Zweig der Formenlchre oder Matheraatik. 
Stettin 1891. gr. 8. 12 u. 242 pg M. 4 

GuiLHAUMON (J. B.). Elements de Navigation et de Calcul Nautique. 
Precedes de Notions d' Astronomic. 2 volumes (I. Astronomic et 
Navigation. II. Types de Calculs Nautiques.) Paris 1891. 8. 

M. 10 



104 liEW PUBLICATIONS. 

GuiUiEMiN (A.). Electricity and Magnetism. Trans, from the Frenoh. 
Revised and Edited by Silvanus P. Thomson. With 600 lllusts. 
Koy. 8vo. pp. 998. Macmillan. 81s. 6d. 

(Iexchie (E. J.). Elementary Treatise on Mensuration, containing 
numerous solutions and examples. 2. edition. London 1891. b. 
12 a. 224 pg. cloth. M.'8.80 

Janren (W.). Die Krciselbewegung. Untorsuchung der Rotation von 
Kurpcrn welche in einem Punkte oder gar nicht unteratUtzt sind. 
Berlin 1891. gr. ». 54 pg. m. Abbildungen. M. 1.80 

KiRcnHOFF (G.). Vorlesungcn Qber matbematische Physik. Band III. 
Elektricitat und Magnetism us, herausgegeben von M. Planck. Leip- 
zig 1891. gr. 8. 10 u. 228 pg. m. IG Holzschnitten. M. 8 

Landk^ {C. L.). Ali^bralsche Hoofdstukken ter uidbreiding van de 
Leerboeken over de elementairc Analyse. Utrecht 1891. gr. 8. 13 a. 
286 pg. M. 5.80 

Lanolet (S. p.). The new Astronomy. New edition. Boston 1891. 
8. w. illustrations, cloth. M. 15 



Latorre (E. £.). Tablas do Equivalencias apucadas a la medicion do 

5 



distancias y superficies por el dUcolo. Maidrid 1891. 8. 186 pg. 



Marzocchi (G. ). II Solu i; rUniverso : Appunti di Astronomia e Gcologia. 
Bologna 1891. 8. 100 pg. c. 4 tavolc. M. 

Neumayer (G.). Atlas des Erdmagnetismus. Gotha 1891. 5 colorirte 
Karten in qu. fol. m. 20 pg. Text. Leinenband. M.. 7.60 

Parkkk (.).). Elementary Thcrmodynamies. Cr. 8vo, pp. 406. Cam- 
bridge Warehouse. Os. 

Petzold (W.). Leitfmlen fttr don Unterricht in der astronomischen 
Geographic. 2^^' Aufl. Bielefeld 1891. S. 117 pp. rait 54 Abbil- 
dungen. M. 1.50 

Rajola-I'escarin'i (L.). Lezioni di GtK)metria solida. Napoli 1891. 12. 
185 pg. c. 2 tavole. M. 2.50 

SchGnfliess (A.). Krvstallsysteme und Krystallstructur. Jjeipzig 1891. 
gr. 8. 12. u. 638 pg. mit 78 Holzschnitten. M. 12. 

Stai (J. S.). De la nature de la lumiere solaire. Bruxelles 1891. 4. 
47 pg. M. 2.40 

VoLKMANN (P.). Vorlesungen ilber die Theoric dos Lichtes. Untcr 
RQcksicht auf die clastischc u. die clektromagnetischc Anschauung. 
Leipzig 1801. gr. 8. 15 u. 432 pg. m. 47 Holzschnitten. M. 11.20 

VVeyer (G. D. E.). Einfllhrung in die neuere construirende G^metrie. 
Leipzig 1891. gr. 8. 68 pp. M. 1.20 

Woodward (C. J.). Book E: or. Arithmetical Physics. Part 2a: Mag- 
netism and Electricity, f Elementary and Advanced Stages.) 3dc£, 
containinir several Now Ijejssons, entitled *• Qualitative Exercises on 
fiines of Korce." Cr. 8vo, pp. 100. (Cornish) Birmingham. Simp- 
kin. 2s. 



KLEIN'S MODULAR FUNCTIOlirS. 105 



KLEIN'S MODULAR FUNCTIONS. 
Felix Klein, Vorhsungen uber die Tfieorie der elliptischen 

MbdtUfunctionen, auscearbeitet und verrollst&ndigt von Dr. Robert 
Fricke. Erbter Band. Grundlegung der Tbeorie. Leipzig, Teub- 
ner, 1890. 8vo, pp. xix + 764. 

The mathematical public is under great obligation to Pro- 
fessor Klein's former pupil. Dr. Robert Fricke, for his able pres- 
entation of the theory of the modular functions. His clearness 
of treatment and skillful grouping of the many intricate feat- 
ures of the subject have rendered this theory now thoroughly 
accessible. Beside the work of arrangement, in itself a labor 
of no small magnitude. Dr. Fricke has contributed many of the 
intermediate steps necessary to the symmetry and complete- 
ness of the subiect. His task has been performed through- 
out with a highly creditable degree of conscientiousness and 
ability. 

The theory of the modular functions and the allied branches 
has been one of the chief series of investigations to which Pro- 
fessor Klein has devoted himself in the period of some twentj 
years over which his scientific activity now extends. It is 
characteristic of these investigations that they are not in- 
cluded as a subordinate part in any of the great mathematical 
theories heretofore commonly so recognized. Their distinc- 
tive tendency is in the direction of the combination and unifi- 
cation of the latter into a broader method of research. This 
idea has been developed by Klein to an extent and with an 
elaboration which have long since entitled it to recognition as 
an independent, and in the highest degree productive mathe- 
matical point of view. In the present paper some attempt 
is made to sketch the general outlines of the new method, so 
far as it concerns the modular functions, and to illustrate it 
more definitely by the consideration of some of the more 
important details. 

Historically, Klein^s work has developed accurately along 
the lines of a thoroughly predigested plan, the bolder features 
of which arc already sharply defined in his earliest publica- 
tions.* On this ground, then, a brief semi-biographical, semi- 
scientific sketch of his career may properly find place here. 
It is to be observed that this sketch makes no pretension to 
completeness. It confines itself mainly on the scientific side 
to the development of the theory of the regular bodies and 
of the modular functions. 

Klein's first productive activity dates from his relation to 

* Cf. the preface to the ** Ikoaaeder,^* and the Eintrittaprogramm 
mentioned on the following page. 



106 KLEIN'S MODULAR PUKOTIONS. 

Jalins Plucker^ as the latter's assistant in physics at Bonn. 
On Plucker's death the preparation of the second Tolame of 
his posthumous work on line geometry* was entrusted to 
Klein, who was then at the age of nineteiBn. The first volnme 
was edited by Clebsch. Haying completed this task, and 
having taken the doctor's degree at Bonn, Klein studied in 
Berlin and in Paris until the outbreak of the Franco-German 
war, which compelled his return to Germany. Soon after- 
ward he was appointed Privat-Docent at Gottingen, where 
Clebsch was approaching the close of his brilliant career. In 
1872 he was called to the ordinarius professorship of mathe- 
matics at Erlangen. His Bintrittsprogramm \ prepared on 
the occasion of assuming this chair is certainly a most re* 
markable production for a young man of twenty-three, con- 
taining, as it does, not merely a foreshadowing, out actnally 
a systematic program, conceiyed with perfect maturity and 
denniteness, of the scientific work to which he has since 
deyoted himself. It is with the theory of operations that he 
is here concerned ; not the formal theory of operations in 
themselyes, but entirely with reference to the content to which 
the operations are conceived to be applied, in particular 
when this content is a geometrical configuration. Two such 
theories were already in existence : the theory of invariants 
and covariants, which deals with the effect of the entire system 
of linear transformations of two or more homogeneous varia- 
bles, and the theory of substitutions, in which the operations 
are the permutations of a finite system of elements. These 
two theories can be regarded as extreme types, between which 
an infinite series of others can be inserted. A definite com- 
plex of these intermediate types has furnished the field to 
which Klein^s labors have thus far mainly been devoted. The 
Fintrittsprogramm appears as a preliminary survey of the 
general aoctrine of operations, with reference to geometrical 
configurations. It involves not only the discontinuous opera- 
tions, within which Klein's specific work has been included, 
but also the continuous systems, which belong with differential 
equations, and the theory of which has been mainly devel- 
oped by his friend and fellow-student. Professor Sophus Lie. 

In iJrlangen Klein formed the acquaintance of Uordan, to 
whose personal friendship and scientific cooperation a high 
tribute is paid in the ppeface to the IJcosaeder. It was here 
and at Munich, to which city Klein was called in 1875, that 

* Nexie Oeometrie des Iiauine8,gefffilndet at^f die BetracMung der getru 
den Linie ale RaumeUment, von Dr. Julius PlUokeb. Leipzig, Teubner, 
1869. 

f Vergleichende Betraehtungen fiber neuere geometrisehe Foreehungen. 
von Dr. Felix Klein, o. 6 Professor der Matnematik an der Universitftt 
Erlangen. 



KLEIN'S MODULAR PUNCTIOKS. 107 

the theory of the icosahedron and the other regular bodies 
was i^radaally developed in a series of papers in the Mather 
matiBche Annalen, of which Klein had become an editor in 
1873. It may be noted that nearly all of his writings are 
pablished in this journal^ which is, indeed, distihctiyely the 
organ of the school of which its editor is the leader. 

In 1881 Klein was called from Mnnich to Leipzig, where 
he remained nntil 1886, when he was appointed to the chair 
in Oottingen, vacated by the death of Enneper, which he 
still holds. At Munich he numbered among his students 
Hurwitz, Bohn, and Dyck, all of whom have made a name 
among mathematicians. In Leipzig the first American stn- 
dents were admitted to his Seminar, Messrs. Irving String- 
ham and Henry B. Fine, now professors of mathematics at 
the University of California and at Princeton, the precursors 
of a numerous throng, amon^ whom the writer had the good 
fortune to be included. During the stay in Leipzig negotia- 
tions were at one time pending toward inviting Klem to 
Sylvester's vacated chair at Johns Hopkins. Various consid- 
erations, relating mainly to his health, never very robust, led 
him to decide in favor of remaining in Germany. A circum- 
stance which must have contributed greatly to his decision 
was the fact that he had already gathered about him a band 
of talented and mature young mathematicians the direction 
of whose vigorous development was a most gratifying task*. 
Among the members of his Seminar in 1884-5 were Pick 
now at Prague, Holder now at Gottingen, Study at Marburg, 
and Pricke the editor of the Modulfunctionen. 

The mana^ment of the Seminar has always been excep- 
tionally efficient, even among the German models. It is 
Klein's custom to distribute among his students certain por- 
tions of the broader field in which he himself is engaged, to be 
investigated thoroughly under his personal guidance and to 
be presented in final shape at one of the weekljr meeting. 
An appointment to this work means the closest scientific m- 
timacjr with Klein, a daily or even more freouent conference, 
in which the student receives generously tne benefit of the 
scholar^s broad experience and fertility of resource, and is 
spurred and urged on with unrelenting energy to the full 
measure of his powers. When the several papers have been 
presented, the result is a symmetric theory to which each 
investigation has contributed its part. Each member of 
the Seminar profits by the others' points of view. It is a 
united attack from many sides on the same field. In this 
way a strong community of interest is maintained in the 
Seminar, in addition to the pleasure afforded by genuine 
creative work. 

The theory of the icosahedron appeared in book form in 



108 KLEIK'S MOBULAB FUlfOTIOIfS. 

1884 * The inyesti^tionB inclnded under this title trayerse a 
definite^ self-liraited field, identified on the one hand with the 
^oaj)8 of rotations of the regular bodies and the correspond- 
ing nnite groups of linear transformations of a complex yari- 
able, and on the other with the theory of the algebraic equa- 
tions of the first fiye degrees and certain other special types. 
The close relation of the subject to the theory of the modular 
functions is also so far touched upon as to indicate the direc- 
tion of the more extended theory which has culminated in 
Dr. Pricke's book. Prom the point of yiew of this relation 
the Ikosaeder appears as a first step in the systematic treat- 
ment of the modular functions, for which it is also to serye as 
a model. In the meantime Klein's lectures were forecasting 
the coming theory, already dcyeloped in many of its features 
in articles in the An7ialen. Beginning with the general 
theory of functions, he treated in successiye semesters the 
elliptic functions, the elliptic modular functions, the new 
geometry, the hyperelliptic functions of deficiency 2, and the 
Pliicker line geometry. Of these lectures the first three, to- 
gether with the later lectures on algebra at Odttingen, relate 
fergely to the present theory, while the others were to a con- 
siderable extent preliminary to the theoiy of the general equa- 
tions of the sixth and seyenth degrees. 

In all these inyestigations it is again the theory of opera- 
tions that furnishes the guiding principle and the general 
outline of the subject, fiat the field of research being onoe 
mapped out, it is characteristic of Klein to bring to bear on 
it every instrument that modern mathematics can provide. 
The theory of functions, invariants and covariants, differ- 
ential equations, modem geometry, in short every method is 
put under requisition and made to render its contribution to 
the symmetry of the result. No advantageous point of view 
is neglected, and not until the subject is traversed in every 
direction, and until its external and internal relations are 
clearly pictured to the mind, is the investigation to be re- 
garded as complete. Por example the Ikosaeder discusses in 
successive chapters the rotations of the regular bodies, the 
corresponding groups of linear transformations and their in- 
variants, the actual solution of the problem by the aid of a 
class of differential equations, the algebraic phases of the 
subject, based on the theory of substitutions, the general posi- 
tion of the theory in reference to other correlated fields, its 
historical development, the coordinated geometrical problems, 
etc. The same plan obtains in the lectures and the Seminar. 

* F. Klein, Vorlesungen aber das Ikosaeder und die Aufldsung der 
Oleichunoen vom fUnften Grade, Leipzig, Teubner, 1884. 
English translation by G. C. MoaRios. London, TrQbner, 1888. 



kleiht'b hobulab funotioks. 109 

The value to the stndent of this breadth of treatment is sim- 
ply inestimable. No one can study long under Klein without 
obtaining an intelligent comprehension of most of the ffreat 
tendencies in mathematics. This is at present particularly 
desirable in view of the extreme degree of specialization whicn 
has come to prevail among mathematicians. Of all the great 
services which Klein has rendered to mathematics, there is 
none more valuable than his successful unification of its here- 
tofore rapidly diver^ng branches. Lately he has turned his 
attention to mechanics, in which new fiela, under the applica- 
tion of the same principle, we have every reason to expect 
from him another series of brilliant results. 

Turning to the Modulfunciionen, one cannot but admire 
the simplicity and perfect proportion with which Dr. Pricke 
has developed the subject. So far as possible, everything is 
traced from first principles. The network of interwoven 
theories is constructed with a painstaking elaboration of 
details and a rare ^enicQity of method. A clearer and more 
scholarly presentation than that before us could hardly be 
imagined. 

The work divides into three principal investigations : (I.) 
the theory of the modular functions in the narrower sense as 
a specific class of elliptic transcendents ; (II.) the formal defi- 
nition of the general problem, as based on the doctrine of 
groups of operations ; (III.) the union of these two methods 
and the further development of the subject in connection with 
a class of Eiemann's surfaces. 

We turn our attention for the present to the second division 
of the subject. The operations with which we have to deal 
belong to that fertile field of modern mathematics, the linear 
transformations. The characteristic system on which the 
theory of the modular functions turns is composed of all the 
linear transformations of a complex variable 

(1) ,' = ei±^, 

or, in homogeneous form, of the binary linear transforma- 
tions 



(2) 



z\=: az^ + /3z^, 



for which the constants a, /3, y, 6 are real integers, subject 
to the further condition that 

a6 — /3y =4-1. 



110 ELEIK'S HODULAB FUKCnONS. 

The equations (1) and (2), and other similar types^ must be 
regarded throughout^ as already indicated^ as denning opera- 
tions ; namely, the operation of passing in each ease irom the 
initial values z to the transformed values z'. Bestricting our- 
selves for the present to the general linear transformations of a 

single complex variable, z' = --^, if the values of z are 

o ^ * yz + 6* 

represented in the ordinary manner by points in the complex 

plane, the transformation is to be conceived as carrying every 

f^oint z to the corresponding position z'. The result of the 
ransformation is therefore to effect a rearrangement of the 
position of the points of the plane, and this geometric con- 
ception, to be presently more fully developed, not only serves 
to picture the corresponding analytic formula, but may often 
witn great advantage entirely replace it. 

cfz + /S 
If now any transformation z' = ^ is followed by a 

a z' + 6 

second z" = -^ j^, the relation of the points z" to the 

y,z 4- cJ, 

original points z is directly defined by the equation 



(OS ^n __ '\yz-\-dJ 

^ {a^a 4- /3,y)z + a,/3 +^^6 _ a^z -f /?, 
{y,a + d^y)z -f y,fi + 8^6 y,z + tf/ 

which is again linear. The combination, or *' product,*' of 
two linear transformations of a complex variable is therefore 
itself a linear transformation of a complex variable. The 
total system of these transformations accordingly forms a 
** group/' this name being applied to any system of opera- 
tions of whatever kind such that the product of any two of 
them is itself an operation of the system. If, furthermore, 
we confine our consideration to those transformations for 
which a, fiy v, 6 are real integers, this more limited system 
is clearly still a group, which in reference to the including 
general group just considered is designated as a " subgroup " 
of the latter. Again wo obtain a subgroup of this subgroup 
by selecting from the latter all those operations for which the 
determinant aS — /3y = +1. For, on referring to (3), we 
have at once for the product of any two of these operations 

(4) a/, - ^,y, = {a a + ^^y) {y^fi -f 6,6) 
-{a^ft^-^Mr.oc + c^,;^) = {a,6, - ft,y,)(a6 - fty) = +1. 



kleik's hodulab fckgtionb. Ill 

Bj way of contrast we may obserre that those transformations 
with real integral coefficients for which 

ad — /5y = — 1 

do not form a group, since the product of any two of them 
has for its determinant (— 1) (— 1) = + 1. If however we 
combine the two systems ad — /Sy = ± 1, the result is again 
a group. 

The ^roup composed of the transformations (1) or (2) is 
called simply the modular group, and is denoted by F. The 
two forms (1) and (2) are distinguished as the non-homoge- 
neous and the homogeneous groups F respectively. We note 
that under the condition ad — /3y = + 1, a simultaneous 
change of sign of all the coefficients is admissible, but that 
the coefficients cannot otherwise be multiplied by a common 
factor. The change of sign is of no effect on tne form (1), 
but alters the form (2). It appears therefore that the opera- 
tions of (2) are precisely twice as numerous as those of (1). 

The modular group has itself a great variety of subgroups, 
and it is precisely the theory of these subgroups which deter- 
mines the formal character of the entire theory of the modu- 
lar functions. The problem of establishing all these sub- 
groups presents extreme difficulties and is not yet solved. 
Much is to be hoped, however, from the powerful general 
method of attacking the subject, devised by Klein and based 
on the theory of Kiemann s surfaces.* The known sub- 
groups are, with a few elementary exceptions, the " congru- 
ence groups/' and their theory is exhaustively developed in 
the Modulfunctionen, These groups are aefined by the 
additional condition that 

(5) a=6=±l, /3 = y = 0, (mod. w), 

where n is any integer. f Under this condition we have, 
referring again to (3), 

a,fi + fi^6^y,a + 6,y = 0, (mod. n), 

from which the group character is verified. In the case of 
the non-homogeneous transformations it is plainly sufficient 
to employ only the upper algebraic sign of ± 1. It is also a 
fact of great interest that those substitutions of the homoge- 

* Modulfunctionen, II., 5. 

t More correctly, this is the definition of the Haupteongruemgruppen, 
For other cases rf. Modulfunctumen, II., 7, § 6. 



118 klbik's KODUJCJLB FUVOnOHB. 

neoQB congmence group for which the tipper sign holds form 
a subgroup of the latter, which therefore agrees operation 
for operation with the non-homogeueous group. 

Of the various characteristics of a ^up its order, ue. the 
number of operations which it contains, is of prime impor- 
tance. In the present case both the modular group and the 
congruence subgroups are of infinite order, and the ^u^rtion 
theirefore presents itself here in a modified form, vtx. it re- 
quires the determination of the ratio of the oider of the 
entire group to that of the respective subgroups. This ratio 
is termed the '' index '^ of the subgroup and for the modular 
n is denoted by /i (n), the corresponding sub^up being 
designated by /^(n). The value of the function // (fi) is 
deducible from purelv arithmetical considerations, if we 
define as congruent (mod. n) all those transformations for 
which either of the relations hold 

(6) a' = - a, ?' = -1 /?,>' = 1! ^, (J'= 1 (J, (°^^- «)• 

the value of /i (n) is equal to the number of incongruent 
(mod. n) systems of solutions of 

ad-^ /3y= -hi. 
If n is a prime number/?, it is readily found that 

For a compound n = g^/i • q^*"* • g/> . . . the calculation is 
more complicated. The result is found to be* 

") '•W = t(i-^)('4-)('-,7)- 

Leaving the specific theory of the modular group at this 
point for the moment, we have next to consider the position 
of the present investigations relatively to the general theory 
of linear transformation.! If we regard n elements z^, z^, 
... Zn ss coordinates in an (n — l)--dimensional space or 
maiiifoldness, the projective ^eometiy of this space is iden- 
tical on the formal side with tne theory of the general group 
of linear transformations 

* Moduffuneiionen, II., 7, § 4. 
t Of' ikoioeder, Chap. V. 



kleik's mobulab functions. 113 

(8) z\ = a,, «, 4 a„ z, 4- . . . + a„ «„ 



«', = a,j z^ + a^^z^ + , ., + Unu ««. 



It is a principal problem of this theory to determine the 
full system of invariant, covariant, and other concomitant 
forms belonging to any configuration of the space^ defined by 
any given set oi equations 

/, (z„ 2„ ... zjS = 0, 

Jt \^i» ^«» • • • ^«/ ^^ ^y 

• • y 

J* \^i> ^s» • • • ^«) ^^ "• 

Prominence is also giyen to the determination of the iden- 
tities which may exist among these concomitants. The 
theory of the subgroups of the general group of transfor- 
mations is, however, not usually considered. 

On the other hand, the theory of substitutions deals with 
the permutations (substitutions) of n given elements z^, z,, 
. . . z^. Such a substitution is commonly and most conven- 
iently written in the cycle notation 

{Z, Zi, Zg , , ,) {ZaZfi Zy ...)... 

the effect of the substitution being precisely to permute the 
elements of each parenthesis cyclically. Written, however, in 
theform ^ 

(where the subscripts t„ i„ ... t, are identical, apart from 
their order, with 1, 2, ... n), the substitution is obviously 
interpretable as a collineation of an {n — l)-dimensional 
space. Prom this point of view, we may regard the theory of 
substitutions as a special field within a general projective 
geometry ; in other words, the groups of substitutions of n 
elements may be considered as subgroups of the general group 
of linear transformations of n coordinates. An important 
characteristic of the substitution ^oups is the fact that they 
are all of finite order, the latter being, in fact, always a divisor 
of n ! On the other hand, every substitution group, like the 
general linear group, possesses a system of invariants. These 
are the "functions belonging to the group," i.e. such 
rational integral functions of the n elements as are unchanged 
in value by all and by only the substitutions of the group. 
The invariants belonging to any substitution group G are all 
8 



114 KLEIN'S MODULAB FUKGTIOKS. 

rational integral functions of any arbitrary one among them, 
with coefficients which are symmetrical in the n elements z. 
Every such group possesses, therefore, only a single indepen- 
dent invariant. 

Again suppose JJ to be anj subgroup of with an invari- 
ant ^. If all the substitutions of are applied to tp, the 
latter will take a series of values ^, (= tp), ^„ ^,, ... ^*, their 
number k being the (always integral) ratio of the order of O 
to that of ff. To every one of tnese values belongs a group 
of the same order as H and similar to H. These k groups are 
the '^conjugates" of JJwith respect to G. In special cases 
they may all coincide ; ff is then a " self -con jugate *' group 
{ausgezeichnete Untergruppe), and every f/> is a rational func- 
tion of every other. A case of especial importance is that for 
which H reduces to the identical operation alone, ff is then 
obviously self-conjugate, since it is the only group of order 1. 
In the general case, if we apply the substitution of 6 to the k 
values ^', the effect is simply a permutation of these values. 
In the particular case where H = 1 we have then on the one 
hand a group of substitutions of the 0's of the same order as 
0, and on the other, as an algebraic equivalent, an equal 
number of rational processes by which the ^'s proceed from 
one another. These processes also form a group. By a 
proper choice of ip, it happens in certain cases tnat these 
rational relations become linear. The group 0, which origi- 
nally represented a system of collineations in an {n — i)- 
dimensional space, appears then under a new form as identi- 
fied with an equal group of linear transformations in the 
complex plane. Such a reduction in the dimension (as it 
may be called) of the group is obviously a step of the greatest 
importance. In the Ifcosaeder and the Modulfunctionen this 
problem is reversed, the groups being taken at the start in 
their reduced form.* 

Within the general theory of groups of linear transformations 
the projective geometry and the theory of substitutions appear 
as special cases, which possess the advantage of historical 
precedence and a correspondingly high degree of elaboration. 
To these Klein has now added in the AfodulfuncHonen a 
third system of certainly comparable interest and importance. 
There still remain an unlimited number of other special types 
which will undoubtedly in the future furnish one of the most 
fertile fields of mathematical research. The general problem 
has hardly yet been touched upon. In systematic form it 
requires the determination of all the binary, then the ternary, 
quaternary, and higher groups. In each dimension the groups 
of finite order naturally attract immediate attention. The 

* Cf. Ikosaeder, I., 4, §§ 8-4, and I., 5, § 5 ; also Math, Ann, XV. 



Klein's modulab FUKcriONa 116 

researches of Poincarg, Jordan^ and Klein have shown that 
the namber of finite groups is surprisingly small, and this field 
is accordingly narrowly limited. The problem of the finite 
binary groups is completely solved in the Ikosaeder. Of the 
finite ternary groups which are not reducible to binary forms, 
one of order 432 belong with the theory of the points of 
inflection of the plane cuoic, and has been repeatedly discussed 
from this point of view. Another of order 168 is treated in 
the Modulfunctionen,* The Borchardt quaternary group 
belongs with the theory of the general equations of the sixth 
and seventh degrees, as the icosahedron group does with that 
of the fifth degree, f On the other hand, of the infinite binary 
groups, which naturally succeed the finite cases, the simplest 
instance is precisely the present modular group. 

Beturning to the modular group in particular, we can now, 
from analog with the theory of substitutions, state briefly the 
nature of the problem involved. It requires the determination 
of all the subgroups of the modular group and of the corre- 
sponding invariants, together with the systematic examination 
of the functional relations between their invariants, particu- 
larly when these relations are algebraic. An important dis- 
tinction from the theory of substitutions lies in the fact that, 
as the groups under consideration are for the most part of 
infinite order, their invariants are no longer rational, but 
belong to the family of integral transcendental functions with 
linear transformations into themselves. It must also be noted 
here that the homogeneous groups here considered have in 
every case not one invariant, but three, which are then con- 
nected by an identity, precisely as in the Tkosaeder. In regard 
to the entire theory we observe further that from Klein's 

Eoint of view it is not to be regarded as an isolated subject, 
ut is to be connected as closely as possible with other 
mathematical fields. It is to be examined from every possible 
side, and, in particular, it is to be made tangible by the aid of 
geometric representation. 

At the outstart the theory of the elliptic functions is put 
under requisition. To obtain the invariant of the modular 
^roup the direct construction is not necessary. Such an 
invariant is already at hand. It is known that the periods of 
the elliptic integral of the first species, which we write 
throughout in the Weierstrass form 



J a/42* 



dz 



^^'-gj^-g! 



♦ Modulfanctionent III., 7. 

f Klein, Math, Ann. XXVIII., Zur Theorie der aUgemeinen Oleieh- 
wigen aechtUn und Hebenien Ghrades. 



116 KLBIH*8 XODULAB FmSTCrtlOVB. 

are all linear combinations of two among them, o^^ and 09^ 

Asain 09, and 09. can be expressed in the same way in terms 
01 a?', and g/, n and only if ord — /3y = ± 1. Accordingly 
all the systems 

famish primitiye period pairs. If we consider the ratio of 
snch a pair, all such ratios are expressed in terms of any one 
of them by 

oaf = — ^ f ad - >5;V = ± 1, GO = —», (»= — ! ), 

yao + o \ "^^ a?, car J 

On the other hand, we haye at once in the three inyariants 
a^y g^y and the discriminant A ^g^ — 27flr," of the binary 
biquadratic form 4«j*«, — gji^z^ — gj^^ the three invariants of 
the homogeneous modular group, wnue the absolute inyariant 

•T" = ^ is the invariant of the non-homogeneous gronp. The 

Eeriods a?,, a?, and their ratio oo are also invariants of the 
iquadratic form, the latter being like J an absolute invari- 
ant. In i*eference to the modular CToup these quantities are 
again invariants belonging to the identical subgroup. Their 
calculation from cr,, g^ and from J respectively are already 
furnished by the theory of the elliptic functions. Of the con- 
gruence subgroups (5) an invariant is also directly known in 
the case of modulus 2. This is the anharmonic ratio \ of the 
roots of the biquadratic form, or for the homogeneous CTOup 
the three finite roots «j, «„ «, (where, in agreement with the 
generfd principle above stated, ^^ 4- g, + e, = 0). Under the 
operation of the modular group A assumes the six familiar 
values 

A, J, 1-A, ^ ^-^ 1 



which furnish again a linear group. The latter is in fact a 
dihedron group. The six values of A are connected with J 
by the equation 

JiJ-l :1 = 

4(r - A + !)• : (A + iy{\ - 2)'(2A - I)': 27A'(A - l)'. 



kleik's modulab fungtioks. 117 

To obtain a comprehenBion of functional relations which in 
the present state ox udyancement can be regarded as in any 
way satisfactory, recourse must be had to Riemann's surfaces. 
Perhaps no more brilliant exemplification of the Talue of this 

gometric instrument exists than the theory of the modular 
notions, as Klein has created it.* Beginning with the 
period ratio oo, regarded as a function of J, we suppose the 
values of co to be laid off in one complex plane ana those of 
/in another. Since howeyer to every value of /correspond 
an infinite number of primitive period pairs, and consequently 
an infinite number of values of a?, we must, in order to secure 
a one to one correspondence between the go and the / points, 
suppose the /plane to consist of an infinite number of leaves 
which are connected in cycles about certain junctions ( Ver" 
zweigungspunkte). In the present case, as in the Ikosaeder, 
these junctions are three in number and lie at / = 0, / = 1, 
and / = 00. The leaves are joined at these points in cycles 
of three, two, and an infinite number respectively. If now 
we suppose the /point to pass along the upper side of the 
real axis from — oo to 4- oo, the corresponding co points de- 
scribe in every case three circular arcs bounding a curvilinear 
triangle. To every upper half leaf of the / plane corresponds 
the interior of one of these triangles, in the sense that if the 
CO point takes successively every position in such a triangle, 
the corresponding / point will take successively every position 
in an upper half leaf. The co triangles then produced fill 
just half of the upper half leaf of the co plane. Between 
them lie an infinite number of empty spaces, of the same tri- 
angular form, and these new triangles correspond to the lower 
hafi leaves of the / plane. The triangles become infinitely 
small and are crowded infinitely close together as we approach 
the real axis, which is in fact a "natural boundary" beyond 
which the function (jo{J) cannot be extended. 

An immediate connection presents itself here with the 
theory of the modular group, f The effect of the latter on 
the systems of triangles is obviously merely to interchange 
the two sets corresponding to upper and lower half leaves each 
among themselves. Given any one of the triangles we can 
obtain every other belonging to the same system by applying 
to the former all the modular operations. We observe that 
it is only those operations 

, aco 4- /3 

^ = r-5 

yco 4- o 

for which a6 — /3y = +1 that are here admissible ; those 
* Cf, ModiUfuncHonen, II. \ IbU., II., 2. 



118 KLEIN'S MODULAB FUNCTIOKS. 

for which nrtf — /?^ = — 1 simplv convert the npper half leaf 
of the GJ plane into the similarly divided lower half leaf. 
This again a^ees with the fact that the product of two of the 
latter operations belongs not to these bat to the modular 
group. 

Having now obtained a means of generating all the triangles 
of either system from a single one among them^ the question 
naturally presents itself how the one system can be ootained 
from the other. We have seen that the real axis of the J 
plane corresponds to the circular arcs bounding an a? triangle. 

By a linear transformation oo' = ^ we can convert any 

circle in the oo plane, for example, one of the sides of the a> 
triande into the real oo axis. The function co'{J) has then 
an infinite series of real values corresponding to real values of 
J, Consequently conjugate imaginary values of J correspond 
to conjugate imaginary values of co'{J). The co' triangle 
corresponding to the lower J half leaf is therefore the reflec- 
tion of that corresponding to the upper J half leaf on the a? 
real axis. Retransforming now to the original oa triangle, 
the reflection becomes the operation of inversion on the corre- 
sponding circular boundary; i.e. given the one triangle, if we 
construct the inverse of every point within it with respect to 
one of its sides we have a triangle of the second ^stem. In 
fact every triangle of the co plane can be obtained from any 
one by a series of such reflections on bounding lines. 

The preceding considerations furnish an entirely new point 
of departure for the present and for a more general theory. 
We may suppose any triangle bounded by circular arcs to be 
a priori given, as corresponding to a half plane of the com- 
panion Riemann's surface, the analytic connection of the two 
variables being for the present purpose left out of immediate 
consideration. From the given triangle we then construct all 
possible others by the operation of reflection. In order that 
these may just fill the complex plane without overlapping, the 
angles of the given triangle must all be submultiples oi 27t : 

— , — , — . Three cases are distinguished according as 

%n In %K < ^ . 1 1 1 < ^ 
- -f - 4- -=-27r, i,e. — + - -f — — 1. 
y, v^ V, > K, V, r, > 

In the case 1 ^4- > 1 only a small number of systems 

1^ 1^ V 

of integral values v ^ v„ v, are possible. These lead to Wi^ finite 
linear groups. Tne number of triangles is in this case also 
finite, and they cover the entire plane. On the other hand, if 



KLEIK*S MODULAB FUNCTIOITS. 119 

— H +• — <lan infinite number of solations are possible. 

The three circular boundaries of the given triangle have in 
this case a common real orthogonal circle. This circle is 
moreover the orthogonal circle of every triangle of the system. 
The latter all lie within this circle and are crowded more and 
more closely together as they approach the circumference. 
In the case of the modular group the circumference is exactly 
the real axis. This group is distinguished among other 
types by the criterion that v^ = 2, v, = 3, v, = oo. The 
remaining case, where the sum of the three angles of the tri- 
angle is %ny leads to the theory of the periods of the elliptic 
function.* 

Turning now to the subgroups of the modular group, we 
observe that these too have in each case a '^ fundamental 
domain" (Fundamenial-Bereich), This is composed of a 
system of the co triangles equal in number to the index of the 

froup. This fundamental region, like the double oo triangle, 
as tne property that from its points every other point in the 
complex plane can be obtained by the operations of the cor- 
responding subgroup, and that it is the smallest region which 
has this property. Every co triangle can be converted by the 
subgroup into one and only one tnangle of the fundamental 
region. If now we suppose every co triangle to be represented 
by its '^eauivalenf triangle in the fundamental region, the 
effect of all the operations of the modular group is simply to 
permute these representative triangles among themselves. 
These permutations again form a group, the group C?^(n).t 
In accordance with the entire tendency of the subject, the 
question at once presents itself whether quantities refeiTed to 
tne several triangles of the fundamental region can be found 
such that the group (?^(n) transforms them linearly. This 
is actually the case, and in fact for n = 2, 3, 4, 5 the corre- 
sponding linear groups are identical with the dihedron group 
of order 6, the tetrahedron, the octahedron, and the icosahe- 
dron groups respectively. 

For these cases, which exhaust the possibility of binary 
groups, the "deficiency" of the fundamental region is 0. 
For the next important case w = 7, the deficiency is 3 and 
the corresponding linear group is ternary. It is in fact the 

g'oup repeatedly treated by Klein in connection with the 
ordan plane curve of the fourth order J 

* Cf, throughout Ikoaaeder, L, 5 and Moduifunctioneiiy I., 8. 

{Modtilfunctionen, II., 4, §6, 
/Wd., UI., 7. 



120 PBBTURBATIONS OP THB POUB INKER PLANETS. 

With this brief and imperfect aeconDt we must now regret- 
fully leave the subject, consoling ourselves with the reflection 
that Dr. Fricke's book contains in itself that which will most 
certainly attract deserved attention to this most beautiful of 
E^lein's creations. 

P. N. OOLB. 
Ann Abbor, Decemiber 30, 1891. 



PERTURBATIONS OP THE POUR INNER PLANETS. 

Periodic Perturbations of the Longitudes and Radii Vectores 
of the Four Inner Planets of the First Order as to the 
jofasses. Computed under the direction of Simon New- 
GOMB. Washington, Navy Department, 1891 ; 4to, pp. 
180. 

This work forms the concluding part of volume III. of a 
series of astronomical researches, published under the general 
title, '^Astronomical Paper Sy prepared for the use of the 
American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac." 

During the past twelve years, one of the principal works 
which has been in progress at the office of the Nautical Al- 
manac is that of collecting and discussing data for new tables 
of the planets. The most recent existing tables, which are 
now used in all European Ephemerides, are those of Leverrier, 
the construction of which was the greatest work ever under- 
taken by that celebrated astronomer. The first tables pub- 
lished, those of the Sun, were issued in 1858 ; those of Uranus 
and Neptune appeared about 18 years later. The whole work 
probably took about 25 years in preparation and publication. 
Yet the number of observations on which the tables Were 
actually based was only a few hundred in the case of each planet, 
about 500 being used for Venus, 800 for Mars, and probably 
yet fewer in the cases of the other planets. The results were 
not completely discussed, and, in consequence, different data 
were employed in different tables, making it extremely difficult 
for future astronomers to derive the results of comparing them 
with future observations. None except those of the Sun and 
Mercury, which were the first issued, have shown a satisfactory 
agreement with subsequent observations. The error in the 
geocentric place of Venus at the time of the recent transit was 
surprisingly great, amounting to no less than nine seconds in 
longitude. 

The actual number of observations now available for each 
of the principal planets is several thousand. The recent ones 



PBBTUBBATIONS OF THB FOUfi IKNE& PLAKETSi 121 

«ie of <)onrse better than those ayailable thirty years ago. It 
therefore seemed desirable to undertake the construction of 
tables founded on ^1 these observations which could be of 
value, and on uniform values of the masses of the planets and 
pther 'elements. 

As it was necessary to determine the masses from the peri- 
odic perturbations, the first requisite was a determination of 
the coefficients of these perturbations which should be beyond 
doubt Although Leverrier's computations of these coeffi- 
cients were carried out more fully than those of any of his 
predecessors, some doubts of their entire accuracy hod been 
expressed. In such intricate computations, which necessarily 
proceed by successive approximations, and can never pretend 
to mathematical rigor, the possibility of sensible quantities 
being omitted can be avoided only by independent computa- 
tions by different investigators using different methods. The 
present paper is entirely devoted to the computation of these 
coefficients. The adopted developments are so radically dif- 
ferent from those of Leverrier that there can be no source of 
error common to the two. The agreement throughout may 
be called perfect, when compared with the probable error of 
the best observations. Bare^ does a discrepancy amount to 
the hundredth of a second of arc. 

The principal point in which the development differed from 
that of Leverrier is, that the eccentric anomaly is used, in 
the beginning, as the independent variable. In this way the 
series are made, in the first place, more rapidly convergent, 
and it is thus more easy to be sure of including all sensible 
terms. The use of this method requires, however, that the 
eccentric anomalies be changed to mean anomalies by the 
Besselian transformation. It was supposed that this trans- 
formation was one which could be effected with ease and 
rapidity. But in practice it proved so laborious that it is now 
doubtful whether the terms saved in the development will 
compensate for the labor of applying it, 

A more radical change from Leverrier's method is, that 
the perturbations are computed by direct integration of the 
differential equations of motion, instead of employing the 
method of variation of elements. Notwithstanding the theo- 
retical elegance of the latter method as developed by Lagrange, 
it becomes excessively prolix when we attempt to compute 
the periodic perturbations bv it But when the equations are 
directly integrated, the coeMcients admit of being found with 
great facility, when once the development of two derivatives 
of the perturbative function in terms of the mean anomalies 
is effected. Altogether the method is a combination of the 
purely numerical process of development employed by Hansen, 
and tne purely analytic one employed by Leverrier. 



122 PBBTUBBATIOKS OF THE FOUR IKKEB PLAJfTEBlS. 

It is still a question whether the adopted method was acta- 
ally the shortest, and whether mnch lahor wonld not haye 
been saved by employing the purely numerical development 
from the beginning. 

The volume of wnich the above paper forms a part is wholly 
devoted to the developments of celestial mecnanics. The 
opening paper is the development of the perfcurbative funo- 
tioD in smes and co-sines of multiples of the eccentric anom- 
aly which was employed in computinj; the perturbations. 

This is followed by a determination of the inequalities of 
the Moon's motion dne to the 6rare of the Earth,^ prepared 
by O. W. Hill. This is the most elaborate determination of 
these difficult inequalities that has ever been made, no less 
than 165 terms in the Moon's lonritude, and yet more in the 
latitude, being computed. Nearly half the computed terms 
are, however, entirely insensible, even in the fourth place of 
decimals of seconds. 

The third paper is on the motion of Hyperion, the seventh 
satellite of Datum. In it is developed the theory of the 
curious relation between the mean motions of Hyperion and 
Titan, which H. Struve has since extended to one or more of 
the inner satellites. 

This is followed by another paper by Mr. Hill, bein^ a 
conipntation of certain lunar inequalities due to the action 
of Jupiter. The inequality in question was first discovered 
empirically from observations, and was traced by Mr. Neison 
to a sort of evection due to the action of Jupiter. Mr. Hill's 
coefficient is, however, onlj[ 0".90, while observations gave 
1".50. Probably the theory is more nearly correct, as the un- 
certainty of observations of the Moon is much greater than in 
the case of other heavenly bodies, and it is difficult to sepa- 
rate the effects of an inequality of this kind from those of 
numerous other causes affecting the observations. 

It is now expected that the tables of the four inner planets 
which are founded on the theories developed in the Astro- 
nomical Papers, and on the great mass of observations made 
since 1750, will be ready for the press in a little more than 
two years, S. N. 



HATHEHATIOAL PB0BLBH8. 1^ 



MATHEMATICAL PROBLEMS. 

Solution of Questions in the Theory of Probability and Aver- 
agt$. Appendix IL to Maihematicai Questions and oolutions from 
the Educational Times, Vol. LV. By Profeesor G. B. Zebr, M.A. 

This pamphlet of fifty-six pages contains solutions of more 
than forty problems in geometrical probability and mean 
valaes and of some other mteresting mathematical problems. 
The soWer was also the proposer of most of the problems. 
His solations show skill and perseyerance in eyaluating many 
complicated definite multiple integrals. 

Seyeral problems relate to mean yalues of magnitudes deter- 
mined by choosing random points with certain restrictions in 
a circle. For example. No. 11,153 is to find the ayera^e area 
of the dodecagon formed by joining twelye points taKen ut 
random in a circle, three in each quadrant. The expression 
found for this area is the quotient of two multiple integrals 
of twelve variables each. This is finally reduced to 

2'V fyrl _ 704 \ / _409\ 2V' /5^ _ 29\ 
Ux' \16 1575/ \ 105/ "*" ;r' V 64 45/ 

■^ Stt* \3'Z 315/ \2 105/ 

Problem 11,037 is as follows : — '* Two points are taken at 
random in the surface of a given circle. An ellipse is 
described on the distance between the two points as major 
axis. If a point be taken at random in the left-hand half of 
this major axis, and with this point as a centre a circle is 
described at random, but so as to lie wholly within the ellipse, 
find the average area of the ellipse described on that portion 
of the major axis between the ri^ht-hand extremity and the 
circumference of the random circle. '^ The result obtained is 

Trr* / 2205;r + 2012 \ 
1280 \ 15;r + 17 / 

This solution involves the assumption that the major axis a 
of an ellipse being given all possible ellipses should be in- 
cluded by taking the unknown minor axis as an independent 
variable with the limits and a. All possible ellipses might 
with equal propriety be included in other ways ; as, by taking 
the eccentricity as the independent variable with the limits 
and 1. The result would be altered by such a change. 
Problem 11,130 implies an assumption of the same nature. 



f 



124 NOTES. 

'^ A chord is drawn at random across a circle, and two points 

are taken at ran^dom within the circle ; find the chance that 

both points lie on the same side of the random chord/' The 

128 
result 1 ~ j^:— J, is obtained by treating the distance of tKe 

chord from the centre as the independent variable. Why 
would it not be e<][ually proper to take the arc subtended by 
the chord as the independent variable ? 

These problems, as stated, are indeterminate. The modes 
of including all possible ellipses and of choosing random 
chords must be fixed before the problems become definite. 

It seems strange that an incorrect construction should be 

S'yen for so elementary and easy a geometrical problem as 
o. 10,512. ^* Oiven four lines (in magnitude), construct * 
two similar triangles each of which shall have two of the given 
lines as sides.'' 

Edwabd L. Stabler. 

New Tobk, December 10, 1891. 



NOTES. 



The annual meeting of the New Yobk Mathematical 
Society was held Wednesday afternoon, December 30, at four 
o'clock. Professor Van Amringe presiding. The following 
persons having been duly nominated, and being recommended 
by the council, were elected to membership : Mr. Edwin 
Mortimer Blake, Columbia College ; Professor Mary E. Byrd, 
Smith College ; Professor Susan J. Cunningham, Swarthmore 
College ; Mr. A. E. Kennely, Edison Laboratory ; Mr. Alex- 
ander Kinseley, Lafayette, Ind.; Professor Anthony T. 
McKissick, Alabama Polytechnic Institute ; Professor George 
D. Olds, Amherst College ; Professor M. L. Pence, State Col- 
lege of Kentucky ; Miss Amy Bayson, New York, N. Y. ; 
Professor Benjamin Sloan, South Carolina College. The 
secretary reported that the membership of the Society was 
210, of whom 37 lived in New York city and the immediate 
vicinity and were able to attend the meetings regularly. The 
treasurer's report having been read, an auditing committee 
was appointed to examine his accounts. 

The nominating committee reported the following ticket 
for the oflBcers and council of the Society for the ensuing 
year : — Pl^sident, Dr. Emory McClintock ; Vice-President, 
Professor Henry B. Fine ; Treasurer, Mr. Harold Jacob^ ; 
Secretary, Dr. Thomas S. Piske ; other Members of Council, 
Professor J. E. Bees, Processor W. Woolsey Johnson, Professor 



NOTES. 



m 



J. H Oliyer, Professor J. H. Van Amringe, Professor Thomas 
Craig. A ballot being taken this ticket was unanimonsly 
elected. At the invitation of the chair, Mr. B. S. Woodward 
briefly addressed the Society, referring to .its work and aims, 
and expressing his hopes for its success and prosperity. 

Condensed Report or the Teeasueeb fob the Tear 1891. 



Beeeipts. 

Balance from 1890 $20.80 

Net receipts from members 
and snucribers 974.24 



$996.04 



Est^enditures, 

Printing Constitntion $41.52 

Bulletin 868.19 

Glrcnlars, stationery, etc — 195.55 
Postage and miscellaneous. . 118.78 
Balance 271.00 



$995.04 

Harold Jacobt, Treasurer. 

We have examined the treasurer's acconnts, and found the same 
correct 

G. L. Wiley,) j„j.v..«^ 
T. E. Snooe, y ^^^^^^ .^ 
Jas. Maclay,) Committee. 



A BEGULAB meeting of the New Yobk Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afternoon, January 2, at half-past 
three o'clock, the president in the chair, rrofessor D. S. 
Jacobus, of the Stevens Institute of Technology, haying been 
duly nominated, and being recommended by the council, was 
elected a member. The following original papers were read : 
'^ Application of least squares to the development of func- 
tions,'' by Mr. Frank Oilman; "On the computation of co- 
yariants oy transvection," by Dr. Emory McChntock. In Mr. 
Oilman's paper a method was given for finding a rational 
entire algebraic function of the n-i\i degree witn numerical 
coefficients, which should approximately represent the value 
of a given function between certain limits of the variable, 
and which should furnish, in general between these limits, 
more accurate results than the first n + 1 terms of its ordinary 
expression as a power-series. The numerical coefficients of 
the approximation were determined from the true values of 
the function calculated for values of the variable uniformly 
distributed between the limits, by the principle that the sum 
of the squares of its residuals should be a minimum. Dr. 
McOlintock's paper contained an account of the general 
method for the computation of covariants of which a simple 
example, illustrating a special case, was riven at the end of 
his article " On lists of covariants," publisned in No. 4 of the 
Bulletin, pp. 85-91. t. s. f. 



126 N0TB8. 

Ik coDnection with Professor A. S. Hathaway's article 
" Early history of the potential " in No. 3, pp. 66-74, it may 
be remarked that the mistake of ascribing the discoyerjr of 
the fundamental property of the force-function, or potential, 
to Laplace instead of Lagrange is a common one. In addition 
to the places mentioned by Professor Hathaway it is retained 
in the second edition of Maxwell's Electricity and Magnetism, 
vol. I. (1881), p. 14, and in the new edition of Thomson and 
Tait's Natural Philosophy, vol. I., part IL (1883), p. 28. Atten- 
tion was called to this mistake by B. JBaltzer in his note 
" Zur Oeschichte des Potentials/' in Crelle-Borchardfs Jour- 
nal, vol. 86 (1879), p. 216. The matter is also discussed 
in E. Heine's Kugelfunctionen, second edition, vol. 11. (1881), 
p. 342, and in M. Bacharach's Geschichie der Potentxalthearie 
(1883), pp. 4-6. 

None of these authors, however, mention the memoirs of 
Lagrange preceding that of October 2, 1777 ; ao that it is of 
no little interest to see the first idea of the property of tke 
force-function traced back in his writings to as early a date 
as 1763. Professor Hath away 's reference to Oayley's British 
Association Report for 1862 must be due to some oversight. 
The matter is not discussed there, nor is there any reference 
to Lagrange's memoir Sur Viquation sSculaire de la lune, of 
1773. A. z. 

In regard to the preceding note I have to state that Cayley's 
report on dynamics to which I intended to refer is in tne 
British Association Report for 1857, p. 3. Besides the refer- 
ence to Maxwell given by A. Z. there is another to page 74, 
where the error is repeated. A note just received from Profes- 
sor P. G. Tait with reference to nahla, which is the quaternion 

vector-operation p, and not — p' = ^^ + ^-j + ^, encloses 

a copy of his address " On the importance of quaternions in 
physics," Philosophical Magazine, January, 1890, p. 92. We 
quote: ''Hamilton did not, so far as I know, suggest any 
name. Clerk Maxwell was deterred by their vernacular sig- 
nification, usually ludicrous, from employing such otherwise 
appropriate terms as sloper or grader ; but adopted the word 
nahla, suggested by Eooertson Smith from the resemblance 
of p to an ancient Assyrian harp of that name." A. 8. H. 

John Wiley & Soks have in preparation " An elementary 
course in the theorj^ of equations '' by Dr. 0. H. Chapman of 
Johns Hopkins Univeraitv. 

Leach, Shewell & Sanborn have just published ''A trea- 
tise on plane and spherical trigonometry ^' by Professor E. 
Miller of the University of Elansas. T. 8. F. 



KBW PUBLIOATIOKS. 187 

NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANN A CO., NEW TORE. 

Alasxa (€.)• Elementi della Teoria generate delle Eqnazioni ed in par- 
ticolare delle Equuioni di 8. e £ grado e delle Equazioni indeter- 
minate. Napoli 1891. 8. 160 pg. M. 8.00 

BoGHKB TM.). IJeber die Reihenentwicklnngen der Potentialtheorie. 
GSttmgen 1891. 4. 66 pg.-GekrOnte Preissohri/t. M. 2.00 

Bbaikasd (F. C). The Sextant and other reflecting mathematical In- 
stniments. New York 1891. 12mo. 120 pp. cloth. M. 2.60 

BiussE (Ch.). Recaeil de Probldmes de Gtom^trie analjtique k Tusage 
des classes de Math^oatiques 8p6ciales. 2. ^ition. Faris 1892. 
8. 226 pg. ay. 62 figures. M. 4.30 

Chigoukas (F.). Etude sur la solution du probldme de la Quadrature da 
Cercle. Montpellier 1891. 8. 39 pg. M. 2.00 

Collet (A.). Nayigation astronomique simplifide. Paris 1891. 4to. 
83 pp. and 9 plates. M. 8.50 

Datis (J. W.). Theoretical Astronomy. Dynamics of the Sun. New 
Tork 1891. 4. w. illustrations. M. 16 00 

Demaktrks. Cours d'Analyse. Partie I. Fonctions de variables r6elles. 
Lille 1891. 4. 194 pg. lithographic. M. 9.00 

DiTiG (F.). Die sieben Bechnungsoperationen mit allgemeinen Zahlen. 
Wien 1891. gr. 8. 168 pg. m. 38 Holzschnitten. M. 3.60 

DuHEM (P.). Cours de Physique math^matique et de Cristallographie de 
la Faculty des Sciences de Lille. Le<;^on8 profess^ en 1890-91. 
Tome II. Paris 1891. 4. 4 et 810 pg. lithographides. M. 12.00 

Dtee (J. M.) and Whitoombe (R. H.). Elementary Trigonometry. Cr. 
8to. pp. 260. Bell and Sons. 48. 6d. 

Etkakd (J.). M^moire sur 1' Interpretation des Symboles dits imaginaires 
ou Th^orie des Acceptionsiextraitprincipalementdestrayaux in^its 
de feu l*abb^ George). Paris 1891. gr. in^ 22 et 289 pg. a?. 



B (H.). Lehrbuch der (Jeometrie. Mit einem Vorworte Ton W. 
Krumme. 2., rerbesserte u. yermehrte Auflage. Theil L Braun- 
schweig 1892. gr. 8. 8 u. 178 pg. m. Fignren. M« 2.00 

FiALKOWSKi rN.). Eurzgefasste praktiscbe Geometrie. 2. Anilage. 
Wien 1891. gr. 8. 8 u. 134 pg. m. 183 Holzschnitten. M. 2.40 




Obatiuci fH.). YiersteUige logarithmtsch-tri^ronoroetrische Tafeln fOr 



die Dwamalthcaliing des Qoadranten. Berlm 1891. gr. 8. 64 pg. 



128 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

HouEL (G. J.). FtLnfstclJi^ Logarithmentafeln der Zahlen und der 
triTOnometrischen Functionen, nebst den Gaussisohen Additions und 
Subtractions logaritlinien und verschiedenen HllUstafeln, Neue Aos- 
gabe. BerHn 1891. Hvo. pg. 46 + 118. M. 2.00 

Jacobi (C. G. J.). Gesammclte Werke. Heraosffeg. auf Veranlassung 
der Kgl. Preuss. Academie der Wissensohaiten. Bd. VII : Gtoo- 
metrie, Astronomie, Abhandlungen historischen Inhalts. Brief e an 
Bessell und Gauss. Verzeichniss s&mrotl. Abhandlungen Jacobi's. 
Hcrausgeg. von K. Weierstiass. Berlin 1891. 4to. 440 pp. 

M. 14.00 

Mansion (P.). Theorie der partiellen Diflerentialgleichnngen enter 
Ordnung. Vom Verfasser durchgesehene u. vermehrte deutsche 
Ausgabe, herausgegeben von H. Maser. Berlin 1892. gr. 8. 21 u. 
489 pg. M. 12.00 

M^RAT (C.V Tb^rie dcs radicaux fondle exclusiyement sur lea popri^ 
tes gen^rales des series cntidres. Dijon 1800. 8yo. 75 mt* 

M. 1.80 

MtfLLEB (E. R.). Lebrbuch der planimethscben Construotionsaufgaben, 
gel08t durch geometrischo Analysis. Nach System Kleyer beuv 
beitet. Theil 11. Stuttgart 1892. gr. 8. 6 u. 100 pg. m. 174 
Figuren. M. 4.00 

Peano (G.). Die Grundzilgo des geometrischen Calouls. Deutsche Aus- 
gabe von A. Schepp. Leipzig 1891. 8. 88 pg. M. 1.20 

ScHEFFLEB (H.). Beitr&gc zur Zahlentheorie, insbesondere zur Kreia- 
und Kugel-theilung. Leipzig 1891. gr. 8. 11 u. 286 pg. m. 8 
Tafeln. M. 6.00 



ScHiiSMiiiCH (0.). FQnfstolligo logarithmische und trigonometrisoho 
Tafeln. 4. Auflage. Braunschweig 1891. 8. 26 u. 171 pg. 

M. 2.00 

Schmidt (A.). Die Strahlonbrechung auf der Sonne. Ein geometrisi*her 
Beitrag zur Sonnenphysik. Stuttgart 1891. 8. m. Abbildungen. 

M. 1.00 

SouiLLAQUET (F.). Tables de point auxiliairo pour trouver rapidement la 
hauteur et razimuth estiin^s. Paris 1801. gr. in-8. M. 11.00 

Sterner (M. ). Principiellc DarstcUung des Rechenuntcrrichls auf his- 
torischer Grundlage. Theil I. Mttnchen 1891. 8. 12 u. 538 pg. 

M. 6.00 

Stourdza (le prince Grigori). Lcs Lois fondamentales de I'univers. 
Gr. in-8. Baudry. 8 tr. 

ViLLicus (F.). Die Gcschichte dor Ilechenkunst vom Alterthume bis 
zum 18. Jahrhundcrt niit besonderer RUcksicht auf Deutschland 
und Oesterreich. 2., vermehrte u. verbesserte Auflage. Wien 1891. 
Ijcx. 8. 112 pg. m. zahlreichen Abbildungen. M. 2.80 

VoNDERLiNN (J.). Lchrbuch des Projectionszeichnens. Nach System 
Kleyer bearbeitet. Theil III. 2. llfilfte. Stuttgart 1892. gr. 8. 
8 u. 235 pg. m. 210 Figuren. M. 6.00 

Walter (B.). Ucbor die lichtverzftgemde Kraft geloster Salzmolektlle 
und ein Verfahrcn zur gcnaueren Bestimmung Ton Brechungsexpo- 
nenten. Jena 1891. 8. 86 pg. M. 1.20 



MACMILLAN & CO'8 

MATHEMATICAL TEXT-BOOKS. 



I MACMILLAN A CO., Htihllari«r«, I (2 fuufH 



THE MECHANICAL AXIOMS OR LAWS OF MOTION. 129 

THE MECHANICAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF MOTION. 

BT FKOF. W. WOOLSBT JOHNSON. 

The three laws of motion were called by Newton Axio- 
mata, sive Leges Motus. Professors Thomson and Tait in 
their Natural Philosophy y section 243, say : " An axiom is a 
proposition, the truth of which mnst bo admitted as soon as 
the terms in which it is expressed are clearly understood. 
But, as wo shall show in our chapter on * Experience/ physi- 
cal axioms are axiomatic to those only who have sufficient 
knowledge of the action of physical causes to enable them to 
see their truth/' They then proceed to give Newton's three 
laws, remarking that '^ these laws must be considered as rest- 
ing on couTictions drawn from observation and experiment, 
not on intuitive f>crception." 

Whether this bo accepted as a proper definition of a physi- 
cal axiom or not, it is at least desirable to include among the 
axioms of mechanics the smallest basis of postulated princi- 
ples upon which it is possible to construct the science by 
ri^d mathematical reasoning. 

The laws of motion, in the classic form given them in the 
Princi'piay admirably express such a basis of [)ostulated princi- 
ples, although the charge of redundancy has been brought 
against the first and second laws ; but, in the case of the third 
law, the tendency has been, on the other hand, to make it 
include too much, and to assume, either under its authority or 
directly, as axiomatic, principles like the ^' impossibility of 
perpetual motion " which ought rather to be shown to follow 
directly from the three laws of motion. 

It is here proposed to discuss the question of the mechani- 
cal axioms, beginning with an examination of the laws as 
presented by Newton. 

The first law is that ** Every body keeps in its state of rest 
or of moving uniformly in a straight line, except to the 
extent in which it is compelled by forces acting on it to 
change its state."* 

Newton had already defined vis impressa as an action 
from witliout changing a body's state of rest or of moving 
uniformly in a straight line, f and in the scholium to the 
Definitioties had pointed out that our measure of time 
depends upon the assumption of the first law of motion ; so 

♦Corpus oinne perseveraro in statu suo guiescendi vel movendi unifor- 
miter in directum, nisi quatenus illud a viribus impressls cogitur statum 
BQum mutare. 

f Definitio IV. Vis impressa est actio in corpus exercita, ad mutan- 
dum ejus statum vc] quiesccndi vel movendi uniformitor in directum. 



130 THE MECHANICAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF HOTIOH'. 

that with respect to a single hody there is a logical '^ yicions 
circle." We define those luteryals of time as equal in which 
eqnal spaces are described when there is no action: we say 
there is no action when equal spaces are described in equal 
intervals of time. But the physical truth expressed is that 
aU bodies undisturbed by action from without describe equal 
spaces in the successive intervals in which any one such body 
describes equal spaces. We then define these intervals as 
equals and the action^ which in any other body causes a 
departure from this normal state, as a force. 

The second law is that ^* Change of motion is proportional 
to the moving force acting, and takes place in the direction 
of the straight line in which the force acts."* 

The simplest form of the physical truth involved is this : — 
A given force acting upon a given hody produces the same 
acceleration in its own direction, in equal intervals of time, no 
matter how the body may be moving, nor what other forces 
may be acting at the same time. The law as expressed by 
Newton involves the obvious deductions that the force is pro- 
portional to the acceleration produced in a given interval, and 
that to produce a given acceleration the force must be propor- 
tional to the mass ; for motion had been defined as propor- 
tional to mass and velocity conjointly. The vis motrix is the 
whole force acting on the body, and is defined as "propor- 
tional to the motion which it produces in a given time," f in 
distinction from vis acceleratrix which is defined as pro- 
portional to the velocity produced in a given time. These 
definitions imply the second law, just as those of vis insita 
and vis impressa imply the first law. But the essential 
point is the constancy and independence of the effects of 
force, which effects are therefore suitable to be taken as meas- 
ures of the force. 

It has been objected that the first law is unnecessary 
because it is included in the second which implies that no 
force produces no change of motion. It appears inevitable 
that the expression of the second law should thus include the 
first ; but it is nevertheless fitting that the normal state of 
the body suffering no action from without, a departure from 
which constitutes the '* change of motion " when action takes 
place, should be stated in a separate axiom. The first law is, 
m fact, far more axiomatic than the second, or, in the lan- 

fuage of the definition quoted above, requires a much smaller 
nowledge of the action of physical causes to enable one 

♦ Mutationem motus proportionalera esse vi motrici irapressae, & fieri 
secundum lineam rectam qua vis ilia imprimitur. 

f Definitio VIII. Vis centripetse quantitas motrix est ipsius mensora 
proportionalis motui, quern dato tempore general. 



THK HECHAinCAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF MOTION. 131 

to see its trath. It is only necessary to get a clear notion 
of the absence of force to be in the mental state to admit the 
truth of the first law : but it requires a considerable famil- 
iarity with geometrical notions eyen to apprehend the man* 
ner in which the efFect of a force upon a moving body is to be 
compared with its efFect when the body is at rest, and the 
manner in which the effects of forces acting at an angle with 
one another are to be separated. Yet clear conceptions in 
these matters must be obtained before an intelligent assent 
can be given to the second law of motion. 

The most axiomatic proposition involved in the second law 
is that two opposite equal forces acting upon a body at rest do 
not produce motion, which in some old treatises is taken as 
the first proposition in statics, and in others as the definition 
of the equality of forces. 

The tnird law is that *' There is always a reaction opposite 
and equal to an action : or the actions of two bodies npon one 
another are always equal and oppositely directed."* 

The physical truth expressed is that every force acting upon 
a body is the action upon it of another body which in turn 
is acted upon equally bjf the first body, the action taking place 
in the straight line which joins tlie two bodies. In other words, 
the law asserts that no forces exist which consist simply of 
tendencies in certain directions, as the ancients supposed in 
the case of the " gravity" of certain bodies and the ** levity " 
of others. This granted, the equality of the two phases of 
the action follows readily, by the aid of the notion of tne trans- 
missibility of force which is intimately connected with this 
law. Compare Newton's remarks on attraction, quoted below. 
But the language of some writers concerning the " numerous 
applications of this law" indicates the view that something 
more than the equality of pressures is implied in it. 

Of the illustrations whicn in the Principia immediately fol- 
low the third law, the first is that of a stone pressed by the finger, 
when in turn the finger is pressed by the stone. \ Here there 
is no intervening body between the two bodies in question. 
The resistance of the stone to the finger is, by the second law, 
equal to the force communicated to the finger tip by the mus- 
cles because it prevents its motion. By the third law, this is 
the same as the force communicated by the finger to the 
stone. If we go a step further and consider the etjuilibrium 
of the stone, the resistance of the support upon which it rests 
is equal to the last named force, and is the reaction of the 

•■ .- MIIIIBIII BII^M ■ M ■ II ^ 

* Actioni oontrariam semper & lequalem esse reactionem : sive oor- 
pomm daoram actiones in se mutuo semper esse cequales & in partes con- 
trarias dirifii. 

t Si qois lapidem digito premit, premitur & hujus digitus a lapide. 



132 THE MECHANICAL AXIOMS OR LAWS OF MOTION. 

same force regarded as the action of the stone upon the sup- 
port. Thus toe force is transmitted through the substance 
of the stone. 

In the next illustration, that of a horse drawing a stone 
attached to a rope, there is a body through which the force is 
transmitted. ** The rope stretched both ways will by the same 
endeavour to relax itself urge the horse toward the stone and 
the stone toward the horse ; and will impede the progress of 
the one as much as it promotes the progress of the other.*' * 

The next illustration is from impact. "If any body im- 
pinging upon another body, by its own force in any manner 
changes the motion of that body, it will also in turn suffer in 
its own motion (on account of the equality of mutual pressure) 
the same change in the contrary direction. *' f Here the third 
law is cited in the clause in parenthesis, and the equality of 
the actions is indicated by the effects which are produced in 
accordance with the second law. Newton proceeds in fact to 
^Jf "By these actions equal changes are made not of veloci- 
ties but of motions." These comments on the third law close 
with the words : " This law holds also in attractions, as will 
be proved in the next scholium." 

The passage in the scholium here alluded to is as follows : — 
''In attractions I thus briefly show the matter. Any two 
bodies A and B mutually attractinff each other, conceive 
some obstacle to be interposed, by which their approach is pre- 
vented. If either one of the bodies A is drawn more toward 
the other body B than the other B toward the first A, the 
obstacle will be urged more by the pressure of the body A 
than by the pressure of the body B, and hence will not re- 
main in equilibrium. The stronger pressure will prevail, 
and will cause the system of the two bodies and the obstacle 
to move in a straight line in the direction toward By and by 
an ever accelerated motion in free space to pass to infinity. 
Which is absurd and contrary to the first law. J 

♦ Funis utrinque distentus eodem relaxandi se conatu urgebit equum 
versus lapidem, ac lapidem versus equum ; tantumque impediet pro- 
gressum unius quantum promo vet progressum alterius. 

f Si corpus aliquod in corpus aliud irapingens, motum ejus vi sua 
quomodocuuque rautaverit, idem quoque vicissim in motu proprio eandem 
mutationem in partem contrariam vi alterius (ob fequalitatem pressionis 
mutuaj) subibit. 

X In attractionibus rem sic bre\iter ostendo. Corporibus duobus qui- 
busvis A, B se mutuo trahentibus, concipe obstaculum quodvis inter- 
poni, quo congressus eonim impediatur. Si corpus alterutrum A magis 
trahitur versus corpus alteram B, quam illud alterum B in prius A, ob- 
staculum magis urgebitur pressione corporis A auam pressione corporis B; 
proindeque non manebit in aequibrio. PraevaleDit pressio fortior, faciei- 
que ut systema corporum duorum & obstaculi moveatur in directum in 

Sartes versus B, motuque in spatiis liberis semper accelerate abeat in in- 
nitum. Quod est absurdum & legi primas contrarium. 



THS KSCHAKICAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF KOTIOK. 133 

In this passage Newton, so far from making the third law 
imply anything more than equality of pressures, shows that 
this equality of the two phases of an action follows from the 
simple assumption that in a system of bodies preserving their 
relative positions the mutual actions of any two cannot result 
in a tenaency to motion. The axiomatic portion of the law 
consists in this assumption. A tendency to motion is in New- 
ton's system always the action of an external body. 

We find, however, in Thomson and Tait the following pas- 
sage : '' Of late there has been a tendency to split the second 
law into two, called respectively the second and third, and to 
ignore the third entirely, though using it directly in every 
dynamical problem ; but all who have done so have been 
forced indirectly to acknowledge the completeness of New- 
ton's system, by introducing as an axiom what is called 
D'Alemoert's principle, which is really Newton's rejected 
third law in another form. Newton's own interpretation of 
his third law directly points out not only D'Alembert's prin- 
ciple, but also the modern principles of work and energy."* 

In support of this the authors remark farther on,f after 
commenting upon the third law, ''In the scholium appended, 
he makes the following remarkable statement, introdacing 
another description of actions and reactions subject to his third 
law, the full meaning of which seems to have escaped the 
notice of commentators :" — [Here follows the passage from 
the scholium, of which the authors give the following trans- 
lation, in which "activity" and ''counter-activity" are put 
for actio and reactio,] 

" If the activity of an agent be measured by its amount . 
and its velocity conjointly; and if, similarly y the counter- 
activity of ike resistance he measured by the velocities of its 
several j^arts arid their several amounts conjointly, whether 
these arise from friction, cohesion, weight, or acceleration; — 
activity and counter-activity, in all combinations of ma- 
chines, will be equal and opposite/^ J 

Again Professor Tait in the article Mechanics in the 
Encyclopaedia Britannica, 9th edition, quotes the passage and 
remarks : "This may be looked upon as a fourth law. But, 
in strict logic, the first law is superfluous. . . . Hence 
there are virtually only three laws, so far as Newton's system 
is concerned." 

The "scholium to law III." is afterward referred to as 

♦ NcUurai PhUosopJiy, Section 242. \ Section 268. 

X Nam si festimetur agentis actio ex ejos vi & velocitate conjunct! m ; 
& similiter resistentis reactio sestimetur conjunctim ex ejus partium 
singularum velocitatibus k viribus resistendi ab earum attntione, coh»- 
sione, pondere, k acceleratione oriundis ; erunt actio & reactio, in omni 
instrumentorum usu, sibi invicem semper aequales. 



134 THE MECHANICAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF MOTIOK. 

giving us the principle of the " transference of energy from 
one body or system to another." 

We shall be better prepared to estimate the import of the 
passage last qnoted if we briefly consider the connection in 
which it stands in the Princtpia. The comments on the 
third law, quoted nearly in fall above, are followed by six 
corollaries and a scholium, which complete the chapter en- 
titled Axiomafa sive Leges JUotus, and immediately pre- 
cede the treatise De Motu Corparum. Cor. I. ffives the 
parallelogram of forces as dedaced from laws II. and I. 
Cor. II. states the composition and resolation of forces. 
** Which composition and resolution is abundantly confirmed 
by the theory of machines."* The resolation of forces is 
then applied to prove that the efficiency of a force to turn a 
wheel is the product of the force and its arm — *'the well 
known property of the balance, the lever, and the wheel '* — 
and so on for tne other simple machines, which are thus cited 
to confirm the truth of the laws of motion. Cor. III. proves 
by laws III. and II. that the quantity of motion ^'directed 
toward the same parts" is not altered by internal actions 
between the bodies of a system. Cor. IV. derives the con- 
servation of the motion of the center of gravity. Cor. V. 
shows that the relative motions of a system oi bodies en- 
closed in a given space are the same, whether the space be 
at rest or moving uniformly in a straight line, and cor. VI. 
extends this to the case in which the bodies are also acted 
upon by equal accelerating forces in the direction of parallel 
lines. 

The scholium which follows is not a scholium to the third 
law exclusively, but is occupied with the experimental verifi- 
cations of thelaws ; beginning with the discovery by Galileo, 
by means of the first two laws, that ** the descent of heavy 
bodies is in the duplicate ratio of the time, and that the 
motion of projectiles takes place in a parabola, experiment 
confirming, except so far as these motions are somewhat 
retarded by the resistance of the air." f Then follows an 
account of experiments on the impact of bodies, showing that 
experience agrees with deductions drawn from the three laws, 
which ends with the words, ''And this being established, the 
third law so far as impacts and reflexions are concerned is 
confirmed by a theoiy which plainly agrees with experience." X 

* Qu© quidein compositio & resolutio abuiide coDfirmatur ex mechan- 
ica. 

f DesccDsum gravium esse in duplicsta ratione temporis, & motuin 
project ilium fieri in parabola; conspirante experientia, nisi quatenus 
motus illi per aeris resistentiam aliquantulum retardantur. 

I Atque boo pacto lex tertia quoad ictus & reflexiones per theoiiam com- 
probata est, que cum experientia plane congruit. 



) 



THE MSCHANICAL AXIOMS OR LAWS OF MOTION. 135 

The paragraph concerning attractions, quoted above, comes 
nelty and is lollowed by a statement of Newton's own experi- 
ments with magnetic attraction, directly confirming the tnird 
law. 

The paragraphs concerning attraction are followed in the 
scholium by one opening with these words : ^^ As, in impacts 
and reflexions, those bodies have the same efficiency of which 
the velocities are reciprocally as the innate forces: so in 
mechanical instruments for producing motion, those agents 
have the same efficiency, and by opposite endeavours sustain 
one another, of which tne velocities estimated in the direction 
of the forces are reciprocally as the forces.'^* The vires 
insitm or vires inertia are' proportional to the masses, as 
explained in Definitio III., so that the meaning is this : — Just 
as bodies having equal momenta are of equal efficiencv in the 
case of impact, so, in machines, agents are of equal power 
(and if opposed produce equilibrium) when the products of 
the force and the velocity of the point of application in the 
direction of the force are the same for each. 

This is nothing more nor less than the " principle of virtual 
velocities," — a succinct statement of "the whole theory of 
machines diversely demonstrated by various authors," already 
cited in the second corollary as a confirmation of the laws of 
motion, because on the one hand deduciblo from them, and, 
on the other hand, in agreement with experience. 

After applying this principle of virtual velocities in detail 
to the several simple machines, Newton continues : ** But to 
treat of mechanism does not belong to the pi-esent design. I 
wished only to show by these things how widely extends and 
how certain is the third law of motion." f Then follows 
the passage quoted by Thomson and Tait (see above) in which 
the only new idea involved is the inclusion of the resistance 
to acceleration among the " reactions." 

The scholium shows indeed that Newton had a clear con- 
ception of what we now know as *' D'Alembert's principle" J 
as well as the "principle of virtual velocities," but does not, 
as it seems to me, indicate any intention to postulate a new 
axiom. 

*Ut corpora in concursu & reflexione idem pollent, quorum velocitates 
sant reciproce ut vires insitse : sic in movendis instrumentis mechanicis 
agentia iaem pollent & conatibus contrariis se mutuo sustinent, quorum 
velocitates secundum determinationem virium sBstimatse, sunt reciproce 
ut vires. 

f Gseterum mechanicam tractare non est hujus instituti. Hisce volui 
tantum ost^ndere, quam late pateat quamque certa sit lex tertia motus. 

}It must be remembered, however, that we call such propositions 
"principles,*' not when they are presented simply as demonstrated the- 
orems, but when thev are made the basis of a systematic method of 
applying analysis to the solution of problems. 



186 THB ICXOHASIOAL AXI01C8 OB LAWS OF MOnOlT. 

Professor Tait * lesards the first words of the scholiam-* 
'^ Up to this^ I have bid down principles receiyed by mathe- 
maticians and confirmed by experiments in great nnmoer ** f — 
as claiming for Newton the discovery of what, as stated aboye, 
he regards as a f onrth law : as if Newton were about to proceed 
to some new axiom not yet known to the men of science of 
the day. Yet we have seen that the scholium treats <rf a 
variety of topics at great length, before comiug to what is 
alleged to be the new axiom. The context rather shows that 
the matter new to mathematicians, to which Newton impli- 
citly refers in the words quoted, is the body of the treatise 
Db Motu Corporum, which immediately follows the introduo- 
torj chapters — ^the Deflnitiones, and the Axiomata and Oorol- 
lanes. 

At the close of the article Meehanies Professor Tait sum- 
marizes the third law proper thus — '' Every action between 
two bodies is a stress. '' He subsequently pointe out in the 
simple instance of a falling stone bow force may be regarded 
either as '^ the apace^ate ai which energy is transformed/* or 
<< the time-rate at which momentum is generaiedy** and says 
(§ 294) that these are '' merely particular cases of Newton's 
two interpretations of action in the third law.'' He then 
proceeds to connect them analytically as follows: — ''if s be the 
space described, v the speed of a particle, 

••— *-.^_^^__ ^^ 
"" " dt" ds' dt" ds* 

Hence the equation of motion (formed by the second law) 

•• • 

ms = mv=f, 

which gives /as the time-rate of increase of momentum, may 
be written in the new form 

dv d .. ,. ^ 

giving/ as the space-rate of increase of kinetic energy." 

Is It not equally true in the (general case that the so-called 
two interpretations of action, so far from being the subjects of 
separate axioms, are demonstrably equivalent by virtue of the 
equality of the two phases of a stress and the second law of 
motion ? 



* Article Mechanics, Enc^clopaddia Britannica, §12. 
f Hactenus principia tradidi a mathematicis recepta & experientia mol- 
tiplici coDfirmata. 



THB KEOHAKIOAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF MOTION. 137 

Another instance of the unnecessair assamption of ph^i- 
cal axioms ocoars in the Natural Phimovhy, The principle 
that '^ the perpetual motion is impossible is introduced as an 
axiom to prove that ^' If the mutual forces between the parts of 
a material system are independent of their yelocities, whether 
relative to one another, or relative to any external matter, the 
system must be dynamically conservative. For if more work 
is done by the mutual forces on the different parts of the 
system in passing from one particular configuration to 
another^ by one set of paths than by another set of paths, let 
the system be directed, by frictionless constraint, to pass from 
the first configuration to' the second by one set of paths and 
return by the other, over and over agam forever. It will be 
a continual source of enerCT without any consumption of 
materials, which is impossible/'* 

Again in Williamson and Tarleton's Dynamics (p. 397J, 
the same demonstration is given, closing with the words 
"This process may be repeated forever, and thus an inex- 
haustible supply of work can be obtained from permanent 
natural causes without any consumption of materials. The 
whole of experience teaches us that this is impossible/' 

Thus we find these authors appealing to the general prin- 
ciple of the conservation of energy in proof of what is really 
but its simplest form, namely the equivalent transference of 
energy from body to body of a material system, and from 
the kinetic to the potential form, a proposition which is 
easily shown to be a consequence of Newton s laws of motion. 
The appeal to experience is in fact only necessary to estab- 
lish the hypothesis laid down in the above quotation from 
Thomson and Tait, namely, that the forces do not in any 
way depend upon velocities, or, let us say, that the stress 
between two bodies depends only upon the distance between 
them. 

We conclude this examination of the physical axioms with 
a brief sketch of the steps by which the conservation of 
energy, in its mechanical forms of kinetic and potential 
energy of masses, may be established directly from the axioms 
of 'the independent accelerative action of force,' *the duality 
of stress,' and * the dependence of its intensity solely upon 
distance.' The steps 4 and 5, which establish the nght to 
deal with the kinetic energy o* relative motion, are developed 
more in detail, because the point does not seem to be suf- 
ficiently developed in the usual text-books. 

1. Ijet the conservation of the motion of the centre of 
gravity be deduced, as in the Principia, from the second and 
third laws of motion. 

• Natural PhUo$ophy, Art 272. 



138 THE MECHAKICAL AXIOMS OB LAWS OF MOTION. 

2. The kinetic energy of a body may be decomposed into 
parts corresponding respectively to its component velocities in 
two rectangular directions. 

3. A moving body acted upon by a force, directed to or 
from a fixed point and in magnitude a function of the dis- 
tance of the body from that pointy experiences a gain or loss 
of kinetic energy equal to the loss or gain of potential energy 
relative to the fixed point. 

4. Although fixed centres of force do not exist, yet when a 
stress exists between two bodies (in magnitude a innction of 
the distance), the centre of gravity being fixed, and dividing 
the distance between them in a fixed ratio, the actual chanse 
of potential energy is equal to the sum of the changes in the 
potential energy of the two bodies, each with reference to the 
centre of gravity as if it were a centre of force. Hence 
the sum of the potential energy and the kinetic energies of 
the two bodies is constant. 

5. The total kinetic energy of a system of bodies may be 
decomposed as follows : — First, decompose the energy of each 
body into parts corresponding to the velocities perpendicular 
to and along the lino m which the centre of gravity is mov- 
ing. Put u for the first of these components, v for the 
second taken relatively to the centre of gravity, and V for 
the velocity of the centre of gravity. Then the total kinetic 
energy is 

From the property of the centre of gravity 2 mv = : there- 
fore the total kinetic energy is 

The first term is the sum of the kinetic energies correspond- 
ing to the motions relative to the centre of gravity, and the 
second is the kinetic energy corresponding to the total mass 
as if situated at and moving with the centre of gravity. Thus, 
the total kinetic energy is equal to the internal kinetic energy 
of the system relative to the centre of gravity as a fixed point, 
and the external energy of the system due to the motion of 
the centre of gravity. 

6. When a stress exists between two bodies whose centre of 
gravity is in motion, the stress causes at every instant the 
same gain of kinetic energy in one as loss in the other, if the 
distance is unchanged. But, when the distance is changing, 
we find by considering the external and internal energy of the 
system, tliat the former is unchanged by 1, and that the change 
in the latter is, by 4, compensated for by that in the potential 
energy connected with the stress, so that in either case the sum 



BIOHT-FIGUBB LOOABITHM TABLES. 139 

of the two kinetic energies and the mntnal potential energy is 
nnchanged. 

7. Hence in any sjrstem of bodies, between pairs of which 
stresses exist whose intensities depend solely upon the dis- 
tances, the sum of the kinetic energies and the potential 
energy due to their relatiye positions is constant. 



EIGHT-FIGUBE LOGARITHM TABLES. 

Tables des Loaarithmes a huit decimales des nombres entiers 
deld 120000, ei des ainua et tangentea de dix aecondes en dix aeeondes 
d'arc dans k aysthme de la divUion cenUaimale du piadrant. Pub- 
ii^s par ordre da MinJstro de la guerre. Paris, Imprixnerie Nationals, 
18»1. 4to., pp. iv. + 628. 

Advocates of the decimal subdivision of the quadrant will 
be much pleased by the appearance of the above work, which 
contains the most extensive set of tables of the kind as yet 
issued. It is not intended in the present notice to enter upon 
the respective merits of the several systems of dividing the 
circle, but to consider the volume as a table of logarithms 
simply. As such itpresents marked points of difference from 
the usual types. These differences are found almost exclu- 
sively in the trigonometric portion of the tables, that contain- 
ing the logarithms of numbers being similar to the customary 
form. The logarithms of the four trigonometric functions 
appear on each double page in four separate tables, instead of 
the usual arrangement in parallel vertical columns. The 
interval of the argument is the same throughout the entire 
quadrant, no dimmution being found near the beginning of 
tne table. The auxiliary quantities for obtaining sines and 
tangents of small angles by means of the table of number 
logarithms are given ; but they are placed upon the pages 
devoted to the trigonometric functions. It would probably bo 
more convenient to find them as usual at the bottom of the 
pages containing the number logarithms. 

The decimal progression of the argument allows the trigono- 
metric tables to bo arranged in the form usually adopted for 
the logarithms of numbers. But instead of ten columns 
headed with the digits to 9, we find eleven columns, of which 
the first ten are headed to 9. The eleventh, which has no 
heading, contains a repetition of the column headed 0. This 
makes it unnecessary to look back along the horizontal line, 
when we wish the difference between column 9 and the next 
one. Yet the size of the volume is somewhat increased by 
this system, and the tables containing the number logarithms 



140 



8PHBRI0AL AHB PSAOTICAL ASTBOKOMT. 



are rather widely spaced in oonseqnenoe. In fact the Tolnme 
18 more ponderous than might be expected in comparison with 
other logarithm books, notwithstanding that the adopted 
interral of ten decimal seconds is mnch smaller than that of 
ten ordinary seconds of arc. This is made plain if we com- 
pare the dimensions and weights of the following well-known 
logarithmic tables {bound): 



XAXS. 


LEHOTH. 


BBBAOTH. 


Tmcunm. 


wmnmr* 


GauBs 5-fig. 
fimhiis 7-fig. 
Franch 8-fig. 
Vega 10-flg. 


mm. 
241 
257 
870 
841 


mm. 
150 
175 
298 
288 


mm. 
14 
80 
48 
86 


grams. 

895 

1189 

8818 

9080 



Negative characteristics are given thronghont for the log- 
arithms of the trigonometric functions^ when the oorrespona- 
ing numbers are less than unity. This departure from the 
usual custom of increasing the logarithms by 10 can hardly be 
regarded as an improvement. The greatest possible care has 
been taken to secure the accuracy of the tables ; and in this 
respect thev may be greatly commended. The actual num- 
bers have been copied from the great manuscript tables of 
Ftotlj, which are preserved in the archives of the Paris ob- 
servatory. The typographical work, which is excellent, was 
executed at the Imprimerie NationcUe, 

Habold Jaooby. 



SPHERICAL AND PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY. 

An Introduction to Spherical and Practical Astronomy. 
By Dascom Greene, Professor in the Rensselaer Polyteohnio Insa- 
tuto, Troy. Boston, Ginn & Co., 1891. 8vo, pp. viii. 4- 158. 

Pbofessoe Gbeene has written this work to supply the 
needs of those students who wish to begin the stady of 
spherical and practical astronomy, and have but very little 
time to give to such study. The work is a stepping stone to 
Doolittle's and Chanvenet's books. The anthor deals only 
with ** those practical methods which can be carried out by 
the use of poi-table instruments/' and in describing those 
methods he is very brief, frequently altogether too brief. 

The order of subjects is as follows : definitions ; spherical 
problems; conversion of time ; hour angles; the transit instni- 



BPHEBIGAL AND PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY. 141 

meat ; the sextant ; finding time by obserrationy which 
includes time by transit obseryations^ by equal altitudes and 
by single altitudes ; finding differences of longitude, which 
includes the methods by the electric telegraph, by transpor- 
tation of chronometers and by moon culminations ; finding the 
latitude of a place by a circumpolar star, by a meridian alti- 
tude, by a zenith instrument, by a prime vertical instrument, 
by a single altitude and the corresponding time, and by cir- 
cummeridian altitudes ; finding the azimuth of a ^iven line, 
by the elongation of a circumpolar star, by observing a bodj 
{sic) at a given instant, by observing a body at a given alti- 
tude, and by observing a body at equal altitudes. 

These suojects are discussed in the first 95 pages. Then 
follows a very short (20 pages) treatment of the figure and 
dimensions of the earth, in which the author gives some of 
the fundamental formulsB of the spheroid, the elements of the 
spheroid as determined by measurement, the polyconic pro- 
jection, spherical excess of triangles on the earth's surface, 
and geodetic determinations of latitudes, longitudes, and 
azimuths. The book has an appendix (pp. 115-150) on the 
method of least squares — and three tables on (I.) the correc- 
tion for refraction, (II.) equation of equal altitudes of the 
sun, and (III.) for computing the reduction to the meridian. 
The simple mention of the contents will show how inad- 
equate the treatment must be. It seems to the writer that it 
is far better to use always a book that encourages the student 
to study thoroughly a given subject rather than one that 
tempts him to be satisfied with very brief statements. In a 
worfc of this kind the discussion of the method of least squares 
is hardly appropriate. 

The equations are not numbered consecutively throughout 
the book but the numbering begins anew with each chapter. 
lu the discussion of equatorial interval no account is taken of 
the formula used when the declinations are 80° and over. 
On page 48 in the third paragraph there is a confusion of 
index correction with index error. In (1) on page 147 the 
rule should show that both the measured sum and each of the 
measured magnitudes should be adjusted. 

For a work on practical astronomy it seems to me that the 
examples given are too few and insufficient, as in the chapter 
on the transit instrument. However, the author's idea seems 
to be that the instructor should supply such details. To 
colleges and technical schools where spherical and practical 
astronomy are given but little time, this work may prove 
quite acceptable as a basis of study. 

J. E. Bees. 



142 NOTES. 



NOTES. 



A BEGULAB meeting of the New Yobk Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afteraoon, February 6, at half- 
past three o'clock^ the president in the chair. The following 
pei'sons having been duly nominated, and being recommended 
by the council, were elected to membership : Mr. Ernest 
William Brown, Haverford College ; Dr. William S. Dennett, 
New York ; Mr. Armin 0. Leuschner, University of Califor- 
nia ; Professor Oscar Schmiedel, Bethany College ; Professor 
Laenas Gifford Weld, State University of Iowa. Notice was 
given by the council that it was proposed to amend Article III. 
of the Constitution so as to read : The officers of the Society 
shall be a President^ a Vice-President, a Secretary, a Treas- 
urer, a Librarian, and a Committee of Publication, which 
shall consist of two members, either or both of whom may at the 
same time hold any other office or offices. An original paper 
on the ** Transformation of a system of independent variaoles,'* 
by Professor J. C. Fields, was read. This paper has been 
transmitted to the Amsrican Journal of Mathematics for 
publication. 

We have to record the deaths of Leopold Kroneckerat Ber- 
lin, December 29, in his sixty-eighth year ; of George Biddle 
Airy at Greenwich, January 2, in his ninety-first year, and of 
John Couch Adams at Cambridge, January 21, in his seventy- 
second year. 

The paper '* On a peculiar family of complex harmonics,** 
read by Dr. Pupin before the New Yohk Mathematical 
Society, December 5, 1891, has been published in full in the 
Transactions of the American Institute of Electrical Engi- 
neers for December, 1891, in connection with another paper, 
*' On polyphasal generators," by the same author. 

T. 8. F. 

The suggestion made in the article " On lists of covari- 
ants" (Btdletin, No. 3, last paragraph of p. 89), has been 
superseded in the best possible way. Professor Cayley writes 
that he has all but five or six of the forms of the sextic 
complete, and adds: "I think of giving these tables in my 
volume V." e. m. 

Dr. Artemas Martin desires to call attention to two errors 
in Degen^s Canon PeUianus. 
On page 88 of Degen's Tables, in the line of denominators 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 143 

of partial fractions for square root of 853, for '* 15 ^' read 14 ; 
80 that the line will be 

29, 4, 1, 5, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1, 14, 19, (2, 2) 
instead of 

29, 4, 1, 5, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1, 15, 19, (2, 2). 

Page 98, sqaare root of 929, for 

**30, 2,11, 1, 2, 3, 1, 5, 2, 1, 6, 1,14, 2, 1, (2, 2) 
1, 29, 5, 40, 19, 16, 40, 10, 20, 38, 8, 50, 4, 22, 32,(20, 20)^' 

read 

30, 2, 11, 1, 2, 3, 2, 7, 5, (2, 2) 
1, 29, 5, 40, 19, 16, 25, 8, 11, (23, 23) 

Degen's values of x and y in both cases are correct. H. j. 

Maokillak & Co. have in press a treatise on the '* Appli- 
cations of elliptic functions" by A. G. Greenhill. They have 
in preparation a work on '* Hydrostatics " by the same author, 
ana one on the " Theory of heat '' by Thomas Preston. 

T. 8. F. 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANK A CO., NEW YORK. 

AcKL^ND & Habdt. Graduated Exercises and Examples, with Solutions, 
for the "Institute of Actuaries* Text Book." tiondon 189i. 8vo. 
cloth. M. 11 

Cantor (M.). Vorlesungen tlber Geschichte der Mathematik. II. i. 
1891. 8vo, 499 pp. M. 14 

Caylby (A.). The Collected Mathematical Papers. Vol. 4. 4to. Cam- 
bridge University Press. 258. 

Chappuis & Barget. Le<?on8 de physique ^n^rale. Tome III. Acous- 
tique, Optique and Electro-optique. 1802. 8vo. 10 fr. 

DnxMANK (C). Astronomische Briefe. Die Planeten. 1892. 8vo, 228 
pp. M. 8 

DuHEM (P.). Hydrodvnamique, Elasticity. Acoustique. Cours profess^ 
& la faculty des sciences de Lille 1890-91. Tome II. 1891. 4to. 
810 pp. 14 f r. 

DtJBEic (P.). Legons sur I'dlectricit^ et le magnetisme. Tome II. Les 
aimants et les corps di^lectriques. 1891. 8vo, 484 pp. 14 fr. 

DuNis (N. C). Recherohes sur la rotation du soleil. 1891. 4to, 78 pp. 



iP 



144 KEW PUBUCATIOKS. 

GiiKTSCHB (R.). Zur Integration der Differentialgleichungen 
dy 
^ = ^0 + pxy + jpay* + pjy*. Jena 1891. 4. 25 pg. M. IM 

HuTGENs (Ch.). CEuvres completes. Tome IV. 1891. 4to, 587 pp. 

M. 25 

Kbohs (G.). Die Scrret*schen Curven sind die ciiizigen alffebraischen 
vom Geschlecht Nail, df reD coordinaten eindeutige doppelperiodische 
Functionen dcs Bogcns der Curve siDd. 1891. 8vo, 74 pp. M. 1.80 

Laidlaw (S.). The power which propels and guides the planets; with 
comments. 1891. 8vo, 104 pp. cloth. M. 8.80 

LocKTER (J. N.). On the causes which produce the phenomena of new 
stars. 1891. 4to, 52 pp. M. 4.20 

McClelland (W. J.). A Treatise on the Geometry of the Circle, and 
some Extensions to Conic Sections. By the Method of Reciprocation. 
12mo, pp. 816. Macmillan. $1.00 

Neumayeb (G.). Linien gleichcr magnetischer Declination fOr 1890. 
1891. M. 3 

Peddik (W.). Manual of Physics. 1891. 8vo, 612 pp. cloth. M. 7.80 

Flouchon (J.). Theorio des mcsures. Introduction £ Totude des sys- 
tcmes de mesures usites en physique. 1891. 8vo, 256 pp. 8.50 fr. 

Point ab£ (H.). Ijcs methodes nouTcllcs do la mdcanique c61dste. Tome 
1. 1892. 8vo. 12 fr. 

PoiNCAR^ (IT.). Thcrmodynamique. 1891. Svo, 4:]3 pp. 16 fr. 

Prado (F. de) y Sersix (A.). Tdiculo de los numcros aproximados y 
operacioiK\s abreviiulos. 1892. 4to, 83 pp. M. 4 

Raschig (M.). Zur Eulcrschen Theorie der Polyedrometric. 1891. 4to, 
pp. M. 1 

Richardson (A. T.). Profi^ssivc Mathematical Exercises for Home 
Work. 1st sor. 12mo, pp. 232. Macmillan. $0.60 

SniEKFERS (G. ). Zurllck f Qhrung coraplcxcr Zahlcnsysteme auf typische 
Foriuen. 1891. 8vo, 90 pp. M. 1.80 

Umi^vuf (K. a.). UoIkt die Zusammonsetzung der endlichen con- 
tinuirlichcn Transforraaiioiisgrui>pen, insbcsondere der Gruppcn 
vom Range Null. 1891. 8vo, 79 pp. M. l.ttO 

Veronese (G.). Fondamonti di peomctria a piti dimensionc ed a pid 
specie di unitA rettilinee esjwsti in forma elemeutare. 1891. 8vo, 
pp. 030. M. 17 

Weiss (E.). Bildcr-Atlas der Sterncnwelt. Esslingcn 1891. 41 Tafeln 
in fol. nebst erkiarendem Texte. — Lieferung 1 u. 2 : 4 Tafeln m. 
Text pg. 1-8. Jede Lie^g. M. 0.50 

WiMMER (B.). Ueber cine allgcmcine Classc von ein-zweideutigen 
Raumtransformationen. Erlaugen 1891. 8. 19 pg. M. 1.00 




NEW YOEK 



IMATHEMATICAL SOCIETY. 



>UL. L -NO 



h-fJi. 



MACMILLAN & CO'S 

MATHEMATICAL TEXT-BOOKS. 



KNICIMT. «.A. 



MACM)L,LAN A CO., PUtifttshurs, I 12 FOurltr Av«v. 14.. 



SOlfE RECENT ELEMENTARY WORKS ON MECHANICS. 145 

SOME RECENT ELEMENTARY WORKS OX 

MECHANICS. I. 

TTie Laws of Motion, an elementary treatise on dynamics. 
By W. If; Laverty, late fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. Lon- 
don, Rivingtons. 18b9. 8vo, pp. 212. 

In a recent number of the Bulletin (No. 2, pp. 48-50) 
Professor T. W. Wright complains of the confusion existing 
in the nomenclature of elementary mechanics. It would be 
easy to answer his questions from a purely theoretical point 
of view ; indeed, in theoretical mechanics no diflBculty is 
encountered in this respect. But it must be admitted that in 
elementary works, particularly in those of a more ** applied " 
character, the confusion is great, both as to the use of terms 
and the way of presenting tlie fundamental laws. 

By reviewing somewhat at length a few of the better recent 
works on elementary moclmnics it may perhaps be possible to 
** fix the ideas " and arrive at some conclusions, at least as to 
what is the best modern usage in treating the subject. 

Mr. Laverty's little work is rather different from the ordi- 
nary English text-book. There is no reference in the preface 
to tne " examinations of the Science and Art Dep.irtment for 
the elementary stage," nor any gentle hint to the reader that 
*^ most of the examples are taken from actual recent examina- 
tion papers." 

" The object of this treatise," says the author (p. v.), " is to 
put the subject of dynamics on* a thoroughly sound basis, 
avoiding unsatisfactory illustrations and definitions which do 
nothing towards defining, and to endeavour to give the stu- 
dent such an accurate idea of the subject that he may be able 
e.g. to give explanations and illustrations of the laws without 
just merely copjring these from the book." 

The author's objections to definitions that do not dc6ne, to 
inadequate illustrations of the fundamental laws, and to the 
loose and confused ways of stating these laws found so often 
in elementary works are certainly well taken. The book is 
evidently the result of careful independent thinking and treats 
a well-worn subject in a fresh and original way. Newton's 
laws are given in good English and in modern scientific lan- 
guage ; the discussion of their meaning and interdependence 
18 noteworthy in many respects. 

The outward appearance of the book is pleasing ; the little 
volume is neatly printed and furnished with an alphabetical 
index in addition to an ample table of contents. The matter 
is well arranged and distributed into sections of convenient 
size ; every subject is illustrated by a few *' worked " examples 



146 SOME BEOENT ELEXB17TABT W0BK8 OV KBOHAHICe. 

followed by a large number of exercises for which the answers 
are given at the end of the volume. 

Before discussing the points of principal importance a few 
minor matters might be mentioned which could readily be cor- 
rected in a second edition. 

In art. 9, the terms '' standard " and ''unit'' are used as if 
they meant the same thing. It is preferable to make a dis- 
tinction. Thusy the standard of mass in the 0. O. S. system 
is the kilogramme, that is a certain bar of platinum preserved 
in Paris, while the unit of mass is a gramme, that is any 
mass equal to a one thousandth part of that kilogramme* — 
The statement of art 267 that ''the laws of friction between 
bodies, as found by experiment, are surprisingly simple/' giyes 
a surprisingly optimistic view of the case. — ^The factor 2 in 
the first expression for n—n' on p. 170 is a misprint; it 
shonld be dropped. — ^In example E, pp. 110-111, the factor ff 
should be inserted in the expression for the work, or rather in 
the problem itself "42400000 ergs" should read "42400000^ 
ergs.'' — 

The numerical data in the exercises are usually so selected 
as to lead to answers expressible in round numbers. This 
method has obvious advantages for class work and examina- 
tions ; it saves time and allows a certain display of ingenuity 
in arranging the numerical work conveniently for cancelling. 
But it accustoms the student to methods that are far from 
being the best in examples as they occur in actual practice. 
If the working of numerical examples is to be of any value it 
should lead the student to understand the bearing tnat every 
quantity involved in the formula has on the final result. The 
beginner should in particular loam to select for any constant 
the proper number of decimal places necessary in order to 
obtain the required accuracy of the result ; he shonld also de- 
termine from the data the accuracy obtainable with the data 
of the problem. Thus, on p. 7 we find the problem : "How 
many metres are there in a mile, if there is .305 of a metre in 
a foot ? " The answer is correctly given as 1610.4. But actu- 
ally there arc 1609.3 metres in a mile ; the ^ven constant .305 
is not suflficiently exact to give the result correct within a 
decimetre. Would it not be better to refer the student to 
the more exact value of the constant given on a previous page 
(p. 5) and require him to select the proper number of decimal 
places ? 

It must be said, in general, that the author has an excessive 
fondness for such merely speculative problems as the follow- 
ing : ''If the unit of area and time be 10 acres and 10 
seconds ; what is the unit of velocity expressed in miles per 
hour?" (p. 27.) Such meanindess problems occur in great 
number throughout the book. With this exception the cxer- 



SOME BECENT ELEHBNTABY WORKS ON MECHANICS. 147 

cises are yery well selected and constitute a valuable feature 
of the book. 

lu the matter of symbols and names for the units Mr. 
Laverty is unusually radical. He manufactures them with- 
out the slightest compunction. The British unit of velocity 
(foot a second) is called /as, the C. G. S. unit (centimetre a 
second) cas ; similarly the unit of acceleration are sfas, seas ; 
those of momentum (a/as in a pound) if asp and casgram ; of 
kinetic energy : f aspen and casgrammen ; of impulse : bim and 
cim ; of force : sfasp and scasgram. This new notation is as 
ingenious as it is simple ; bim for impulse strikes one as partic- 
ularly happy. But will it be possible to bring this brilliant 
new coinage into circulation ? And before this is accom- 

Slished, what is the poor student to do tis soon as he leaves 
[r. Laverty's class-room ? Nobody will understand him when 
he begins to talk of casgrammen and sfasp, and he will have 
difiScmty in understanding the old-fasnioned rest of the 
world. 

A new notation of this kind is entirely out of place in an 
elementary text-book. Originality is no doubt a good thing ; 
but in a work for beginners it is to be used with moderation ; 
an over-dose may become fatal. It is another question whether 
the uotation is in itself good and its acceptation desirable. 

It may be seriously questioned whether there is any actual 
need for special names and symbols for all these units. The 
British Association Committee on Units suggests the name 
Jcine for **a speed of 1 cm. per sec.;" J. B. Lock uses vel 
and eel for the units of velocity and acceleration ; the term 
** quickening'* has been proposed for unit acceleration. Mr. 
Laverty's scheme has the advantage over these separate efforts 
of being methodical and comprehensive; it also lends itself 
readily to farther extension. A "mile an hour" might be 
called a mahy a ''yard a minute" a yamy etc. But the fact 
of the matter is tnat these numerous symbols and names can 
be of use almost exclusively in the elementary text-book. Later 
on we can get along without them. In most cases the unit 
can be understood from the context, as when the phjsicist 
says that the acceleration of gravity at a certain nlace is 981, 
meaning '* centimetres per second," or when the engineer 
gives the angular velocity of his fly-wheel as 25, meaning 
"revolutions per minute." It is mere pedantry to require the 
unit to be stated explicitly under such circumstances. In 
other cases it is best to state the unit completely. 

Mr. Laverty says, in regard to his notation (preface, p. x.) : 
"These words should be looked upon simply as abbreviations 
(perhaps in some cases as aids to the memory) ; I have no 
diesire to add new words to the language." But if they are 
not to become new words of the language, what is their use ? 



148 SOKE BECEirr ELEXBHTABY WORKS OV ICBOHAVIOa. 

Are they to be learned only to be forgotten as soon as possible ? 
And does not Mr. Layerty himself use them thronghont as if 
they were new words oi the language ? Let ns are the 
student in the elementary text-book nothing but the most 
approved notation of the soience and the less perfect equiva- 
lents used in the applications ; he will have enough to do in 
mastering these. 

All these slight strictures, however, do not detract materi- 
ally from the value of Mr. Laverty's work, which gives an 
admirable presentation of Newton's three laws of motion. 
After explaming the ideas of velocity and acceleration in the 
simplest cases, the idea of mass is introduced ; the funda- 
mental equations v^af, fv* = cnr are multiplied by m 
and the quantities mVy ^mv', ma are given the names 
momenium, kin$iic eneray, and massHtoceknUian, respeo- 
tiyely. There is no good reason why the term f(Mrc$ should 
not be used here instead of mass-acceleration, if force were 
thus defined, the fundamental relations 

mv = ma.ty ^mv = ma^x 

would at once show that force is the rate of change of mo- 
mentum with the time, or the rate of change of kinetic 
energy with the distance. 

The author prefers to call force that which produces change 
ofmomentum. At the same time he objects to calling this 
a definition offeree. If this be not what the logicians call a 
definitio realis, it certainly is a definitio nominalis: we 
observe in nature a change of momentum, and to the cause 
of this change we giyQ the name force. 

Newton's first law is stated very clearly in the following 
terms (p. 46) : *^Tho momentum in a mass (or system of 
masses) cannot be increased or diminished except by the 
action of external force.'* This becomes a self-evident truth 
with the above definition of force as the cause of change of 
momentum ; for when there is no cause there can be no effect. 
But unfortunately Mr. Laverty neglects to give a definition 
of force. And yet what concept needs definition more than 
force ? In ordinary language the term is used in a variety 
of meanings ; and on the other hand, force itself cannot bio 
directly observed in nature (excepting the case of muscular 
force with which we are not concerned here), it is only its 
effects, i.e. changes of momentum, that can be directly meas- 
ured. In all other respects Mr. Lavertjr's explanations and 
illustrations of the first law can only be commended. 

The second law is given in this form (p. 68) : ''When mo- 
mentum is produced, it is by the action of force ; and the 



SOKE BECENT ELEMEKTABT W0BK8 ON MECHANICS. 149 

amount of momentum produced in a given time is propor- 
tional to and in the direction of the force." 

It will be noticed that the first clause is but a re-statement 
of the first law ; and the author very justly remarks (preface, 
p. VII., foot-note) that the first law might be dropped and 
the science of mechanics be based on only two laws, ** the law 
of force (or momentum), and the law of work (or energy).*' 

While the first law merely states that we shall give the 
name force to the cause of any observed change of momen- 
tum, the second law defines force more accurately by saying 
that this cause is proportional to the effect produced and that 
the direction of the force shall mean the direction of the mo- 
mentum produced. It also implies the independence of the 
action of two or more forces applied at the same point. Thus 
it follows that the parallelogram law applies to forces just as 
it applies to velocities and accelerations. 

The third law is expressed as follows (p. 86) : *^The work 
done by a force (or any agent) on any mass {ox system of 
masses) has its equivalent in the kinetic energy exhibited, and 
in the work done against molecular forces, gravity, and Ifric- 
tion." The usual short form *^ action and reaction are equal 
and opposite " is rejected as meaningless as long as action and 
reaction are not carefnlly defined. " The fact is," says the 
author, p. viii., *'that, if by * action' and M'eaction' are 
meant force and resistance, the third law is but an easy deduc- 
tion from the second ; while if d'Alembert's principle is really 
to be ultimately deduced from the law, it is better to enunci- 
ate it at once in proper form, and not in the usual indefinite 
and undefined terms/' Thus, the third law in the simplest 
ease is expressed by the equation 

max = ^mv^, 

while in the most general case it leads to d'Alembert's prin- 
ciple (p. 92) : " The internal pressures of any system of rigid 
bodies are in equilibrium amongst themselves." 

After discussing each law for itself the author devotes 
several sections to illustrations and applications of the laws ; 
these embrace the theory of the pendulum, Atwood's machine, 
the inclined plane, collision, projectiles, and circular motion. 
Only the most elementary mathematics are used throughout 
the Dook. 

As a point not usually touched upon in elementary text- 
books it may be mentioned that Mr. Laverty calls special atten- 
tion to the lact that the parallelogram law would not hold for 
forces if they were not defined as they are by the second law, 
viz. as the time-rate of momentum, but e.g. as the time- 
rate of kinetic energy. It is well known that on this point 



150 GENERAL COMPLEX KUMBEB8. 

turned the long controversy on the nature of force and energy 
between Descartes, Leibnitz, and their followers.* 

The closing section contains some interesting general re- 
marks on the nature of the three laws and the ways of testing 
their truth. 

Alexakdeb Ziwet. 

Asjx Arbor, Michigan, January 1, 1892. 



WEIERSTRASS AND DEDEKIND ON GENERAL 

COMPLEX NUMBERS. 



Wbierstrass f — Zur Theorie der aus n HaupteinheUen gebUdeien 

plexen Ordssen. Gdttingen NacJvriclden^ 1884. 
Dedekixd — Zfjtr Theorie der aua n Haupteinheiten geb&deten complextn 

Grds8en. . Gdttingen Naehrirhien, 1885. 
Dedekind — Eriduterungen zwr Theorie der aogenannten aUgemeinen eonim 

plexen Ch-dssen, Odttingen Nachrichten, 1887. 

Ik closing his second memoir on biquadratic residues | Oanag 
makes this remark : ^^ Our general arithmetic, which goes so 
far beyond the limits of the geometry of the ancients, is entirely 
the creation of recent times. Starting with the notion of whole 
numbers its field has widened little by little. To whole num* 
bers came fractions, to rational numbers the irrational ones; 
to the positive camo the negative and to the real came the 
imaginary." 

Once convinced thiit y^^^ was properly an algebraical 
quantity and that it had a meaning, mathematicians began to 
look for other quantities of a similar nature. *'Why,' they 
asked themselves, ** should algebra yield an imaginary unit 
which makes it possible to represent two dimensions of space 
analytically ; and fail to yield a second imaginary unit which 
can be used to represent the third dimension?^' The thing 
needed only to be sought for apparently, and at first they 
looked amongst the functions of y'^H^. Unfortunately it 
turned out that even the most promisingly irrational of these 
could all be broken up into a real part and ^^\ times a 
second real quantity ; algebra had done her best ; if mathe- 
maticians wanted more imaginaries they must invent them. 
From the time of Gauss, then, until the present day the 
architects and the masterbuilders have turned occasionally 

* See for instance E. Mach, Die Mcchanik in ihrer Enttviekelung, Leip- 
zig, Brockhaus. 1889, pp. 254-259. 
I Extract from a letter to Schwarz. 
i Wcrke, II., p. 175. 



GBKEBAL COMPLEX KUHBEBS. 151 

from their labors upon the theory of functions, that monu- 
ment which of all tnat human hands have built will rise the 
highest and stand the longest, to try their skill in construct- 
ing systems of imaginary, or complex, numbers. 

Gauss himself was of the opinion that no complex numbers 
except those of type x 4- \/^^ y would be found admissible 
into arithmetic,* but does not state his reason for the opinion. 
The occasion of the articles cited above was an inquiry into his 
most probable reason, an inquiry which involved a funda- 
mental investigation into the properties of the hyper-complex 
[Uber-complex] numbers, as Dedekind calls them. After full 
and interesting researches, of which this paper aims to give a 
sketch, these great mathematicians came to opposite conclu- 
sions. The fact that in the field of complex numbers the 
product xy may vanish when neither x nor y is zero, a fact 
made public by Peirce long before,! seemed to Weierstrass so 
unlike anything in ordinary mathematics that he concluded 
this must have been Gauss's reason for excluding hyper-com- 
plex quantities from arithmetic. On the other hand Dedekind 
asserts that it is quite a common thing in ordinary arithmetic 
for such a product to vanish, and concludes that Gauss's rea- 
son for excluding quantities of a nature different from x -\- itfl 
was the fact that such quantities, conditioned as they must be, 
do not exist. 

To construct a complex number Weierstrass writes down a 
system of n units ^„ e„ . . . e^ and multiplies each by an 
ordinary real number Sr ; then the expression x = S^e, + . . . 
4- Sn^n 18 a number of the kind considered. His first under- 
taking is so to define the fundamental operations of arithmetic 
for quantities of this kind that x -^ y, x — y, xy, x/y may all 
be linear expressions of the same form as x ; and that the com- 
mutative, associative and distributive laws of addition and 
multiplication may hold good for them. It appears that the 
multiplication table for the units maybe constructed in an 
infinite number of ways so as to satisfy all these requirements. 
Of course the fundamental condition is the first one, which 
comes to the same thing as this, that every rational function 
of the units shall be expressible in the form 

Division is defined by the equation 

I = r.^i 4- . . . + Xne, = y. 

* Werke, II., p. 178. 

\Am. Journ. Math'., vol. IV. (1881), p. 97. 

X X and y real ; % = \^- 1. 



163 GBITEBAL COXPLBX XTUMBBBS. 

Mnltiplying both members by b and equating the ooeflSoients 
of 0jy • . . Bn on both sides, a set of n equations is obtained* 
linear in y^, . . . y^. If their determinant yanishes identi* 
cally, it is impjossible to determine y^, . . . y^, and therefore 
all multiplication tables are exclud^ which would bring this 
to pass. But even then there will be certain values of b for 
which this determinant will vanish. Suppose such a value 
chosen ; we can then find a value of y such that by shidl 
vanish, both b and y being different from zero ; for by = 
leads to a system of n equations linear and homogeneous in 
Vif ' • ' X* ^^^^^ determinant vanishes. The quantities b 
having this unique and wonderful property are called by 
Weierstrass *' divisors of zero'* [Theikr aer ifuUL 

It turns out that when } is a divisor of zero there are an 
infinite number of quantities y such that by = 0, and thence 
it is an easy inference that the equation 

ka + kbx + Jkcjf + . . . + khr = 

has an infinite number of roots if ib is a divisor of zero. We 
have, in fact, only to make 

a -h bx -h . . . +far = ^ 

where ff is any one of the infinite number of quantities satis- 
fying the relation kg = 0. 

'^The existence of these divisors of zero which are not 
themselves zero, seems/^ says Weierstrass, ''to make a real 
distinction between ordinary arithmetic and the arithmetic of 
hyper-complex * numbers " ; but ordinary algebraic eauations 
exist which have an infinite number of roots, namely those 
whose coefficients are all zero. As to this point then there is 
a good enough correspondence between the numbers of our 
common arithmetic and hyper-complex numbers. 

The author now obtains a multiplication table of beautiful 
simplicity by the following process. He expresses the first, 
second, . . . , (w + l)-th powers of x, where 

linearly in terms of e , . . . e^; then, excluding the case when 
the determinant of the right members of the first n equations 
vanishes, we can express e„ . . . e^ in terms of the first n 
powers of x ; and substituting these values in the last equation, 
obtain a relation among the powers of x of the form 

where ^^ is the determinant just mentioned. 



* Weierstrass does not use this term. 



GENEBAL COMPLEX KdHBEBS. 153 

^ Dividing by A^x this becomes, if we replace x by the par- 
ticular value gy 

Here e^ is a quantity which satisfies the conditions 

for any number of the system. Its value is in factg/g ; which 
is determinate so long as ^r is not a divisor of zero. We are 
now in a position to put every number a in the form 

a = a,e^ + a^g -\- a^ -h . . . + a,g*-^ = « (fl^) * 

and the product of any two numbers takes the same form. 

Consider now the algebraic equation f{S) = formed by 
replacing g in f{g) by S ; form also the function a{S) by 
replacing ^ by ^ in a (g). There is no diflSculty in seeing 
that the product a (S) . d (S) will vanish if it contains the 
factory (5^). If /(f) = has a root of multiplicity A, it cau 
be indicated by writing 

and the arbitrary function g>(S) =f^ {S) . F{S) . (p^ {S) will 
be of such a nature that (p^ {S) is divisible hjf(S) and there- 
fore vanishes ; but if S be replaced bv ^ in <p {^) we obtain a 
hyper-complex q^uantity x whose A-th power is obtained by 
replacing S byg m <p^ ^). The A-th power of x will therefore 
vanish. Hence, if /(^) has a multiple root, the equation 

0^ = 

can be satisfied in as many ways as there are different choices 
of the function tp (S) ; but this number is infinite. It is our 
intention, however, to allow an algebraic equation an infinite 
number of roots only when each of its coefficients is a multiple 
of the same divisor of zero f ; matters must consequently be so 
arranged that f{S) = shall have no multiple roots. To 
effect this, the original multiplication table must be so con- 
stituted that the discriminant oif(S) shall not vanish. This 
imposes another restriction upon the freedom of choice of the 
coefficients e^* in the equations 

ei€j = ^i' e^^Cu . (i, y = 1, 2, . . . n). 

1 

The simplified multiplication table is now in sight. Take 
any function tp {S) of degree n — 1 and with real coefficients 

* This is a departure from the notation of Weierstrass. 
t Weierstrass, he. eit.y p. 899. 



154 GEX£BAL COMPLEX XUMBEBS. 

and break up into partial fractions the quotient of ^ (£) by 
f(S) . This yields the ec] nation 

f{s) i-b, ^-b,'^ • • • "^ e^ufi^kj • • •' 

the quadratic denominators corresponding to pairs of conjn- 
gate imaginary roots of/ (5) = 0.* The quantity y__i ^® 

a polynomial in ^ of degree n — 1 and may be changed into a 
hyper-complex quantity, c^, by replacing ^ by ^ as aboTC. In 

the same way >r ^,' leads to another quantity c,. The prod- 

' f(S)AS) 

uct c^c^ is obtained by replacing ^ by ^ in A^A^ .^_2, (/^ \ \ ; 

but this product vanishes and, in consequence, c^c^ = 0. If 
then/(^) = has the m real roots 6^, . . . ft,, we may con- 
struct m hyper-comp!ex quantities c„ c,, . . . c^ such that the 
product of any two of them Tanishes. MoreoYer we can 
obtain 

where B, is a constant. This reduces to B, ' L^ \ and we infer 

that <r,' is equal to r, times a real quantity. Moreover this 
real multiplier cannot be 0. 

Again the product -^~- — ^fl^^il ^'i^l> when S is replaced 

by g, yield two hvper-complex quantities, c«+i, c^^x since 
6', and i>, are both arbitary. These quantities form the 
doubly extended manifoldness ^,r,„.i 4- Z'/'m+i ; and each pair 
of conjugate iniaginary roots oif[B) = enables us to form a 
similar manifoldness. Repeating the reasoning already given 
we find that the product of any two quantities belonging to 
different manifoldncsscs vanishes ; thus 

(r:c„.,,-f DrC',,,,:) {C\c,„+, + A^'.+O = 

whether A and D, be different from zero or not ; and that the 
product of two quantities belonging to the same manifoldness 
also belongs to that manifoldness. Suppose the whole num- 
ber of ))artial fractions to be r; each fraction yields a simple 
or com])lex quantity a^, . . . a^ and any hyper-complex quan- 
tity whatever can be expressed in the form 






^/'l 4- . . . + CtrCLf. 



* Tho notation of Wciorstrass is here altered for simplicity. 



GENERAL COMPLEX KUMBEBS. 155 

K y be any other quantity 

then the rule for multiplication is 

If now in x the coefficients ^j, 5,, . . . ^* all vanish, and in 
y the coefficients z;*, 7;*+i, . . . y/r all vanish, then ary will 
vanish while neither x nor y is zero. 
An equation of the form 

a -\- px -k- yx^ 4- . . . + o^^ = 

breaks up into ;• equations of the form 

{B) a^ 4- /i^a:^ + . . . + ci^x^,^ = 

where o'^, /?^, . . . , ir^ are ordinary quantities. Equation (-5) 
can have an infinite number of roots — only in case a/*, /S^, 
. . . G7^ all vanish. Suppose they do vanish : then 

Taking any quantity 

k = k^a^ + . . . 4- ^V-i ^^-1 + ^V+i «^+i + • • . 4- kr^r, 
we can put a in the form 

a = ka where a ,e. = -r—^ = -P e. or a, = -,- ; 

' • ^•,aJ ){;, • ' k/ 

similarly" for a\, and so on. But a'^ = 0/0 ; that is it may 
be anything we ])lea8e.' Proceeding in this way, the equation 
can be put in the form 

ka 4- k^'x 4- . . . + koj'x^ — 

where k, having one coefficient zero, is a divisor of zero. 
Equation (B) having an infinite number of roots, of course x, 
of which each root of (B) forms a part, has an infinite num- 
ber of values. We thus see why it is that in this system an 
equation must have an infinite number of roots when each co- 
efficient is a multiple of the same divisor of zero. 

Closing this section of his letter the distinguished author 
remarks that very likely Gauss's only reason for excluding 
from arithmetic these hyper-complex quantities was that he 
regarded the vanishing of xy when nefther x nor y is zero as 
an insurmountable difficulty ; otherwise " it could hardly have 
escaped him that an arithmetic of these quantities can be con- 
structed in which all the theorems are identical with those 



156 EMILE MATHIEU^ HIS LIFE AND WOBES. 

concerning ordinary complex quantities, or at least analogous 
to them. **In lact/^ he continues, ^' the arithmetic of 
hyper-complcx quantities can lead to no result which could 
not be reached by processes known in the theory of ordinary 
complex quantities." 

The views of Dedekind upon this last point quite coincide 
with those of Weierstrass ; but for an account of his beau- 
tiful method of generating systems of complex quantities, the 
reader is for the present referred to the memoirs cited above. 

C. H. Chapman. 

Johns Hopkins Univkhsity, February 8, 1892. 



EMILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND WORKS.* 

If it were asked what tyranny in this world has least foun- 
dation in reason and is at the same time most overbearing and 
capricious, none could be found to answer better to this de- 
scription than fashion ; that fashion which makes us admire 
to-day what but yesterday would have excited astonishment, 
and which may provoke ridicule to-morrow. We all know 
that this sovereign whose iron rule is so much more keenly 
felt on account of its injustice governs the thousand and one 
details of cvery-dav life ; that it is supremo in literature and 
in the arts, mit tiiose who have not watched closely the life 
of the scientific world may perhaps be surprised to hear that 
even there if you would please you must bend the knee to 
fashion. What ? might exclaim the stranger to the world of 
science, can it bo true that the mathematician knows other 
laws than the inflexible rules of logic ? Does he care to obey 
other orders than the invariable commands of reason ? — Well, 
yes. Of course, to have a mathematical production accepted 
as correct^ it is sufficient that it conform to the precepts of 
logic ; but to have it admired as beautiful, as interesting, as 
of importance, to gain honor and success by it, more is re- 
fj^uired : it must then satisfy the manifold and varying exac- 
tions imposed by the prevailing taste of the day, by the prefer- 
ences of prominent men, by the preoccupations of the public. 

Thus it comes to pass that, in mathematics as elsewhere, 
fashion will sometimes award the laurels to those who have 
not deserved the triumph and make victims of men whose 
lack of success is an injustice. In every country there are 
such victors and such victims ; but nowhere perhaps are they 

* Translated from tho MS. of the author by Professor Alexakdeb 

ZlWET. 



EHILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND WORKS. 157 

more numerous than in France. In this country where cen- 
tralization is carried to an extreme, nothing is accepted unless 
it receive the sanction of Paris, or rather of certain constituted 
bodies, of certain official peraons residing in Paris. Those 
who have been so fortunate as to have their work noticed by 
these persons and approved b^ these bodies, who have been 
granted admission to the chairs of the capital, form in the 
opinion of the French public the only men of science worthy 
01 honor. The others, relegated to the provinces, are left to 
oblivion, almost like those seigneurs in the age of Louis XIV.. 
whom a caprice of the monarch relegated to their country 
estates. Such are the reflections suggested to my mind by the 
contemplation of the life and works of Emile Mathieu. An 
indefatigable and productive worker he leaves behind him 
the results of a lifework, partly as newly acquired possessions 
of science, partly as suggestions that will open new paths to 
the seeker after truth. After a life full of disappointments, 
he died at a time when the official men of science hardly bad 
begun to suspect that somewhere in the provinces, far away 
from the capital, there lived a mathematician whose works 
were an honor to his country. These works had one defect : 
the subjects they treated, the methods they employed, were 
not in fashion I 

Emile Mathieu was bom at Metz, on the 15th of May, 1835.* 
From early youth he showed a taste for study. While attend- 
ing the hjc6e at Metz he was year after year awarded, by the 
consent of his fellow-pupils, tne prize for scholarship and con- 
duct. His uncle Aubertin, colonel of artillery and director 
of the gun foundries at Metz, was there to point him the 
way to the Ecole Polytechnique, But at this period it was 
not in mathematics he excelled, but in the study of the clas- 
sics ; the prizes he took again and again in those early years at 
the lycie were for Latin and Greek compositions. However, 
his special aptitude for the abstract sciences 6oon developed 
itself. From the time he reached the higher grades at the 
lyc6e, he continued to rank first in mathematics. He entered 
the Polytechnic School at an early age. There he devoted him- 
self exclusively to mathematical studies ; and a few months 
after leaving this institution he resigned his commission in 
the army to give himself entirely to scientific work. While 
yet at the Polytechnic School he had published an interesting 
paper f in which he extended to finite differences the algebra- 

* The biographical data contained in this article are for the most part 
taken from the Notice stir E, Mathieu, sa vie et ses travaux, prepared by 
his coUeague G. Floquet for the Bulletin de la SocUii dee sciences ae 
Nancy* 

t ** Nowoeaux thioremes sur les Squationa algibriqtiee" in Now>, Aim* 
de math., vol. 15 (1856), pp. 409-430. 



158 XKILB MATHIEU, HIS IJFB AKD W0BK8. 

ioal theorems of Descartes and Badan regarding deriirafciTeB 
and differentials. This pai>er preyed of some senioe to 
Mathieu when he presented himself for the decree of Bachelor 
of Science, which lie had neglected to do before. As Dnhfr- 
mel began examining him in algebra the candidate presented 
to him a copy of his pamphlet, and the professor after glano- 
inff through its pages declared the examination finished. 

scarcely eighteen months had elapsed since this filst examinar 
tion when Mathieu, who had not yet reached the a^ of twenty- 
four, took the d^rce of Doctor of the Hathematic»l Sciences. 
On the 28th of March, 1859, he defended before the Sorbonno 
his thesis On the number of values a function eanasmrne^ 
and on the formation of certain muUip^ transitive fum^ians. 
This thesis was very favorably received oy the Facolty. The 
theory of snbstitations which formed the snbjeot of this thesis 
furnished the yonn^ mathematician material for two otherim- 

Krtant papers,'* which were published in LiouviUe's Journal 
tween the years 1859 and 1862. In these papers Matbiea 
investigates more fully the idea of multiply transitive f anc- 
tions. He studies in particular the various classes, of mul- 
tiply transitive functions whose degree is a power of a primo 
number or such a power increased l)y one. In the course of 
this study he discovered the curious fivefold transitive func- 
tion of 12 elements. This function and the fourfold transitive 
function of 11 elements which he also investigated form two 
entirely isolated cases in the domain of transitive functions 
as was shown by C. Jordan.! 

In another memoir^ published in 18G2 in the Annali di 
Matematica, Mathieu undertakes to apply to the solution of 
equations whose deffree is a power of a prime a resolvent 
function which stands in the same relation to these equations 
as does Lagrange's resolvent to the equations whose degree is 
a prime- number. These important researches concerning 
the most difficult parts of algebra and appearing within so 
brief a period coula not fail to attract the attention of the 
scientific world to the young mathematician; and this atten- 
tion soon manifested itself in the most flattering manner. In 
April, 1862, the Paris Academy of Sciences had to elect a 

• ' * M^moire siir le nombre de valeurs que peut aequirir une fincOon 
quand on y permute ses variables de touteslea mani^rea po98ijble8*^ in Liou* 
villous Joum. de math., 2 series, vol. 5 (1860). pp. 0-43 ; and ** JUmaire 
sur Vitudc dee foncHon* de plusienre qttantitis, eur la manure de Us 
former et sur kesubstUutiofte qui lee laisserU invariablee,** ib., voL 6 (1801), 
pp. 241-323. 

t ** liee/ierches sur les subetituiions,'* in Liouville's Joum,, 2 ser., toL 
17, p. 851. 

X ** Mimoire sur la resolution dea iqucUions dont le degri est une pttis- 
sanee d'un nombre premier,** in Tortolini's Ann. di mat,, voL 4, pp. 
118-182. 



JSMILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND W0KK8. 169 

member in the section of geometry. LamS who at the time 
was dean of the section asked that the name of E. Mathieu 
be placed on the list of candidates. Nor was Lame alone 
with his opinion in the Academy ; Liouville fully approved it. 
This lienor conferred upon a young man of not yet twenty-seven 
years of age who had not taken any steps to solicit such dis- 
tinction was indeed a brilliant promise for the future. Who 
would then have predicted that he who so early received this 
promise was to die at the ago of fifty-five, after a life wholly 
consecrated to the advance of science without being admitted 
bv the Academy even among the number of its correspondents ? 
Mathieu at that time held no oflScial appointment. While en- 
gaged in the profound researches which gained him the favor 
of Lame he was compelled to make a living by devoting him- 
self to the exhausting and thankless work of a private tutor. 
Prouhet who was examiner (rSpetiteur) at the Polytechnic 
School procured him employment as assistant, or "quiz- 
master,^ in the li/cee St. Louis, the lycie Charlemagne, and 
various private schools. These unremitting labors brought on 
a serious illness from which he at length recovered thanks to 
the care of his devoted mother. 

In 1863 Mathieu first entered upon the study of mathemati- 
cal physics. In a note On the flow of liquids through tubes of 
very small diameter, published in the Comptes rendus of the 
Academy of Sciences,* he shows that the adhesion of a very 
thin layer of liquid to the walls of the tube is suflScient to ac- 
count for the results of Poiseuille's experiments. A few years 
later, in 1866, he published an important paper On the dis- 
persion of light. \ In the same year Lame, whom ill-health 
prevented from continuing his course at the Sorbonne on 
mathematical physics and the theory of probability, presented 
him as his substitute to Duruy, then minister of public in- 
struction, lie was however not appointed as the minister 
had already made his selection. This chair of mathematical 
. physics at the Sorbonne was to remain for Mathieu the never- 
attained goal of his ambition. In 1867, at the Congress of 
the Scientific Societies, a gold medal was awarded him for his 
fruitful researches. At the same time J. Bertrand published 
his well-known Report on the progress of mathematical anal- 
ysis. The following passage is found in this report : 
• " M. E. Mathieu "has studied far more fully than had been 
done before, the idea of transitive functions, first introduced 
by Cauchy, and his memoir deserves quite special mention, 

* '^Bwr le fnouvement dea liquides dans Us tubes de trh-peiit diamHre,*^ 
in Comptes rendus, vol 57 (1868). pp. 820-324. 

t ** Mimoire sur la dispersion de la lumilre" in Liouville's Joum.y 8 
fler., vol. 1 1 (1866), pp. 49-103. 



160 EMILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND W0BK8. 

on account both of the importance of the new results it con- 
tains and of the ingenious form of the proofs. Other memoirs 
by M. Mathieu, relating to mathematical physics, give evi- 
dence, like his algebraical researches, of acute penetration and 
broad learning. An account of these memoirs will be given 
in another report, whose author, I trust, will heartily join me 
in calling attention to a young man who tinily possesses the 
gifts of a mathematician, but has so far, in spite of the esti- 
mation in which he is held by all, remained outside the sphere 
to which his remarkable investigations ought to gain him ready 
access. " 

Toward the end of the year 1867, M. Duruy, influenced 
no doubt by the high reputation attained by the name of E. 
Mathieu, offered him the complementary course in mathe- 
matical physics just then created at the Sorbonne. This was 
an entrance to public instruction : the young mathematician 
accepted with eagerness. He published later, in 1872, the 
substance of this complementary course in a work to which 
we shall have to return. This work shows him thoroughly 
imbued with the teachings of the great masters, Fourier, 
Laplace, Poisson, Lame. Ho proves himself fully conversant 
with their methods of integration and knows how to use them 
for the treatment of questions as yet unapproached, such as the 
difficult problem of the cooling of a planetary ellipsoid. Ma- 
thieu had already turned his attention to mathematical phys- 
ics, having published a memoir on the theory of light, when 
this appointment determined him to devote his main efforts 
to the applications of analysis to mechanics and physics. He 
did not, however, completely abandon the pursuit of pure 
matliematics. Tims, in 1807, he published an important 
paper On the theory of biquadratic remainders.* Gauss had 
found by induction that the biquadratic character of a prime 
number depends on its decomposition into the sum of two 
squares ; but he did not succeed in discovering the law of 
this dependence of which he says : '^At lex hujus distrihu- 
tionis absfrusior videtur, ctiamsi qucedam generalia prompte 
animadvertantxir. *^ Mathieu in his memoir actually dis- 
covers and proves this law. Later, in 1873, we see him return 
to the theory of substitutions and investigate the relations of 
his fourfold transitive function of 11 elements to Kroneckers 
function of 11 elements. f 

But those investigations in pure analysis must henceforth 
be regarded as constituting only an incidental part of Ma- 



* ^' Memoir e sur la Morie dcs rSsidns inqiiadratiques,^^ in LiouvUlo's 
Joum.. 2 scr., vol. 12 (1807), pp. 377-438. 

f •* Sur la fonction cinq fins transitive de 24 qiuintites" in LiouviUe's 
Joum,, 2 ser., vol. 18 (1873), pp. 25-40. 




EMILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND WORKS. 161 

thien's work. Sesearchcs in analytical mechanics, in celestial 
mechanics, in mathematical physics become the constant ob- 
ject of his meditations. In spite of the importance of the 
results obtained by him in the domain of the theory of sub- 
stitutions and the theory of numbers, it can therefore be said 
that what characterizes his scientific individuality is his work 
in applied mathematics. " Not having found the encourage- 
ment I had expected for mv researches in pure mathematics, 
I gradually inclined toward applied mathematics, not for the 
sake of any gain that I might derive from them, but in the 
hope that the I'esults of my investigations would more engage 
the interest of scientific men.'' In this hope he was deceived. 
The death of Lam6 resulted in finally bringing mathematical 
physics into discredit in Prance. D Alembert, Clairaut, La- 
grange, Laplace, Legend re, Fourier, Poisson, Cauchy, Navier. 
Presnel, Ampere, Sadi Camot, Clapeyron, Lam6, accumulated 
in the course of a century the discoveries that had grown out 
of the fruitful union of mathematical speculation and the ob- 
servation of nature. Reactions are abrupt and extreme in 
the country that had brought forth this succession of men 
of genius. Suddenly, the path they had laid open was for- 
gotten ; the results of their researches were no more known 
to their successors ; the problems that had occupied their 
minds were regarded as futile and childish; and while the 
higher minds took refuge in the realm of mathematical com- 
binations devoid of all reality, the great mass of students 
turned to the ascertainment of facts, to experimentation with- 
out theory, without idea. 

It is this forgotten, despised, and scorned tradition of the 
great mathematical physicists that E. Mathieu had the am- 
bition and the honor to follow, in the face of the indifference 
of his time. All these great authors he studies with passion, 
he expounds and compares them, he corrects their errors, he 
elucidates and complements the most rigorous propositions 
they had obtained. He is imbued with their spirit ; he fully 
appreciates whatever in their ideas is imperishable, and once 
in a while, as in the preface to his Course of mathemntical 
physics y he has a smile of pity for those who pretend to de- 
spise that with which they are unacquainted. There is one 
among these masters to whom he has a particular affinity ; it 
is Poisson, — Poisson who is too fertile in resource, too power- 
ful in genius, to be appreciated at his full value by those, so 
numerous to-day, who dread long memoirs and difficult ana- 
lytical processes. Mathieu had studied him thoroughly ; he 
might be said to be his successor. Such tendencies were not 
calculated to secure Mathieu in the good graces of his con- 
temporaries. His researches might require great intellectual 
qualities ; they might be fraught with beautiful resalts \ 



162 EMILB XATHIEU, HIS UFE AND WORKS. 

what of it ? He was the champion of a science that was out 
of fashion. 

The complementary course to which he had been appointed 
did not promise him a yery stable position. The future 
seemed so little assured that when the chair of pure mathe- 
matics at Besangon became yacanty Matiiieu did not hesitate 
to apply for it. The scientific men who constituted the 
Oonncil for the Improyement of the Pol;^technic School unani- 
mously recommended him for the position, and he receiyed it 
without difSculty. Four years later, in 1873, he was trans- 
ferred in the same capacity to Nancy. From this time on he 
finds himself relented to profound and undeseryed obliyion. 
Seyeral times chairs become yacant at the Sorbonne, at the 
ColUge de France; by his memoirs and his books, he is just 
the man to fill the place ; and yet nobody thinks of serioasly 
considering his candidacy. The Academy of Sciences forgets 
that, somewhere in France, there liyes a man who through 
the whole of his scientific work, throngh the adyance pro- 
duced by it in physics, is fully entitled to its rewards and 
honors. And only a few months before his death is he 
at last allowed to adorn his button-hole with that decoration 
which is so stingily bestowed upon those who honor their 
country, and so profusely on those who reap honor and profit 
from their fatherland. 

It had been Poisson's desire to giye, in a series of works, a 
connected yiew of all that is rigorously known of mathematics 
as applied to the study of nature ; but he had not time to 
publish more than four yolumes of this gigantic undertaking : 
nis Treatise on mechanics, his Theory of neat, and his Theory 
of capillary action. Mathieu coneeiyed this same idea whose 
execution, owing to the broad adyances made in all branches 
of mathematical physics since Poisson's time had assumed far 
wider dimensions though, on the other hand, the task had 
perhaps become more sim])le and easier to accomplish on 
account of tho comprehensiyeness and generality of modem 
analytical methods. More fortunate than Poisson, he was 
able to carry the work much farther than his predecessors ; 
but he, too, died before accomplishing his purpose. Eight of 
the eleven volumes that this work was to comprise have been 

Eublished. Tho first of these volumes appeared in 1873. It 
ears the title Course of mathematical physics ; * but as the 
author himself remarked later on, it should have been called : 
On the methods of integration in mathematical physics. It 
represents the final form of the analytical introduction to the 

Physical sciences that Mathieu had given his students at the 
orbonne in 1867-1868. In 1878 appeared the Analytical 

* Gouts de physique mathimatique, Paris, Oautbler-Villars, 1874. 4to. 



EMILE MATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND WOBES. 163 

dynamics,* a kind of introdnction to celestial mechanics. In 
1883, Messrs. Gauthier-Villars published the Theory of capil- 
larity, \ in sumptnoQS typographical execution. This was 
followed, in 1885-1886, by the two Tolumes on the Theory of 
the potential and its applications to electrostatics and mag- 
netism I ; in 1888, by a volume on the Theory of electro- 
dynamics § ; finallj, in 1890, by two volumes on the Theory 
of elasticity of solid bodies. || 

At the time of his death Mathieu was actively engaged on 
the theory of the elasticity of the ether, that is on optics. 
We have examined with painstaking care the papers left by 
the indefatigable worker when the chain of his meditations 
was broken forever. But the hope of obtaining at least some 
fragments of the work he had planned was not realized ; the 
notes we had in onr hands did not bear the stamp of the 
author's ffenius. We could only trace out from them the 
general plan of this treatise which was intended to give an 
exposition of the traditional science of optics as elaborated, 
after Fresnel, by Green, MacCullagh, Newman, Lamg, and G. 
Kirchhoff. Within the narrow limits of this article it would 
be impossible to give a full account of the numerous new 
results dispersed throughout the memoirs and books published 
by Mathieu. We shaU only try to sketch the general ten- 
dencies which mark his character and individuality as distinct 
from that of the army of mathematical physicists. 

Like Poisson and Lam6, Mathieu is skilful in treating 
particular problems of mathematical physics, in integrating 
the partial differential equations in certain special cases. Let 
us here mention for illustration a few of the more difficult 
among the questions of this nature that he succeeded in solv- 
ing. As early as in 1868 we find him engaged on a problem 
presenting great difficulties ; it is the theory of the oscillatory 
motions of a homogeneous elliptic membrane subjected to an 
equal tension in all directions.! He succeeded in determining 
completely the sounds it produces and the shape of its nodal 
lines. The only cases whose solution was known before this 

* Dynamiqus arudytique, Gauthier-Villars, 1878. 4to. 

4 TMorie de la eapiUaritS, ib., 1888. 4to. 

X TMorie du poUrUiel et ses applications d VileetrosUUique et au ma- 
gnititme. I^partie: Thioris du poterUiel,ib.,l&S5. II* partie: Elec- 
trostatique et nutanSHsms, ib., 1886. 4to. 

finiorie de VUectrodynamique, lb.. 1888. 4to. 
TMorie de VUctstieiii de$ corps solidea, J^ partie : Considiraiions 
girUrcUes 8ur rSktaticite ; emploi des eoordonnSes cumilignes; probUmes 
retaltfs d ViquUibre de VHiastidU; plaquee mbrantee; ib., 1890. IL 
partis: Mouvemente vibrcUoiree des corps eolidee ; ifuilibre de ViUuUciU 
duprisme rectangle ; ib., 1890. 4to. 

if " MSmoire sur le mouvement vibratoire d^une membrane de forme eUip- 
tique," in Liouville's Jaurn., 2ser., vol. 18 (1868), pp. 187-208. 



1C4 EHILE MATHIEUy HIS LIFE AND WORKS. 

are the Tibrations of rectan^lar'and triaogular membranes 
whose theory was shown by Lam6 to be intimately connected 
with certain delicate qnestions in the theory of numbers, and 
the yibrations of circiuar membranes whose properties depend 
on BesseFs fanctions. In his Course of mathematical physics 
Mathieu treats another difficnlt problem which had 'been 
pointed out to him by Lam6 and which is somewhat allied to 
the precedinj2[ question, viz. the cooling of a planetary ellip- 
soid. There is a problem to which Lam6 attached great im- 
portance ; it is the theory of the deformations of a rectangular 
parallelopipedon whose six faces are subjected to forces dis- 
tributed m any waj whatever. After a long and unsuccessful 
study of the question he made it repeatedly the subject of one 
of the prizes of the Academy of Sciences, but without result. 
Mathieu succeeded in solying, if not the general problem, at 
least a rather comprehensive special case : the extremities of 
the prism pressing against two fixed walls and the external 
force being the same along a generating line of the prism. 

We may also mention amon^ the special problems solved 
by Mathieu the diCBcult question of the distribution of the 
electric currents in a rectangular prism or a rectangular lam- 
ina. But in spite of the analytical power displayed in the 
solution of such particular cases, they do not constitute the 
most important and characteristic "paxt of Mathieu's work, the 
part that distinguishes his work from that of Fourier, of 
Poisson, of Cauchy. In the first place it must be said that, 
while full of respect for the tradition of these men of genius, 
Mathieu does not allow this reverence to become a supersti- 
tion ; he knows where to depart from their views. In the 
theory of elasticity he does not hesitate to abandon Poisson^s 
favonte theory of molecular attraction to follow the more 
rigorous ideas of Lam6. In optics he shows that the calcula- 
tions by which Cauchy thought to have unfolded the nature 
of the ether and its relations to ponderable matter lead to in- 
admissible conclusions; and he Doldly modifies the differen- 
tial equations by which the great master had represented the 
motion of light in an absorbing medium. In the second place, 
Mathieu is far more mindful of the generality of the methods 
he uses than was the custom with the great mathematicians 
of the beginning of the century. In the very preface to his 
Course of mathematical physics we see him proclaim his ideas 
on this point with perfect distinctness : "As the domain of 
science broadens and expands it becomes more and more 
necessary to expound its principles with clearness and concise- 
ness and to substitute for artificial processes, however skilful, 
the transformations that can be accounted for by the nature 
of the subject. This is clearly illustrated in comparing the 
Micanique analytique of Lagrange with the VorUsungen of 



XMILE MATHIEU^ HIS LIFE AND WOBKS. 165 

Jacobi on the same subject. Exaroinin^ the treatment of 
certain problems in each of these works the results obtained 
will often be found to be the same ; the difference consists in 
the fact that in the latter work the calculations are performed 
according to rules laid down in advance/' 

The ideas expressed in this passage are everywhere kept in 
view in Mathieu's treatises, in his Analytical dynamics he 
introduces at the very beginning the general methods due to 
Hamilton and Jacobi. In his Theory ofcapillarity he lays aside 
the direct consideration of the capillary forces employed by 
Poisson^ and follows Gauss in establishing the equations for 
the various problems by seeking to determine the minimum 
of the potential of the active forces. In the Theory of the 
elasticity of solid bodies he invariably uses the principle of 
virtual velocities to throw the problems of equilibrium into 
equations. This care for generality is also Mathieu's guide in 
the solution of problems requiring the use of hypotheses that 
are uncertain or only approximately true. Following a method 
which in our opinion could not be too much recommended, he 
always begins by establishing the equations of the problem and 
treating them as long as possible without making use of those 
hypotheses so as to introduce them only at the end. In this 
way ho has treated the motion of a projectile in the air and 
the equilibrium of rods. General methods have the advantage 
of bringing into clear perspective the principles that serve to 
solve the problems, and in this way thev will frequently lead 
one to recognize the possibility of attacking a problem which 
might seem to escape the treatment by more special processes. 
Mathieu has thus succeeded in throwing a clear light on cer- 
tain theories not hitherto approached. We may mention two 
examples. 

The oscillatory motion of a plane lamina had been treated 
before ; but not that of a curved lamina. Without solving the 

Sroblem of the vibrations of an absolutelv general curved plate, 
lathieu prepared at least the way for the solution of the gen- 
eral problem, reconnoitring, so to speak, the ground in two im- 
portant directions, by studying the vibrations of a cylindrical 
plate of any cross-section, or curved lamina^ and those of a 

Elate of revolution, or hell. Let us briefly examine the results of 
is memoir On the oscillatory motion of bells,* The thickness 
of ordinary bells is not generally the same throughout. Hence, 
to obtain a theory applicable to ordinary bells, the thickness 
must be assumed to vary in passing along any meridian from 
the top of the bell to the base. There is an essential distinc- 
tion between the vibratory motion of a bell and that of a plane 

* "Mimoire sur le mouvement mbrataire des cloches,^* Id Joum, de 
l^£cole PolyUchn., Oah. 51, pp. 177-247. 



166 EXILE XATHIEU, HIS UPE AKD W0SK8. 

lamina. In the latter, as is well known, the longitudinal or 
tangential motion and the transyersal or normal motion are 
giyen by different equations. In a bell, the normal and tan- 
^ntial yibrations are given by three equations which are not 
independent of each other. Another distinction from the 
ease of a plane lamina lies in the fact that the pitch of a bell 
does not change if its thickness be varied throughout in the 
same ratio, since the terms depending on the square of the 
thickness in the differential equations are ffenerallyyer^ small 
and may be neglected. This, at least, will be the case if only 
the deepest sounds produced by the bell are taken into consid- 
eration. When a bell yibrates under the strokes of the clapper 
the tangential yibrations are generally of the same order of 
magnitude as the normal yibrations. The author has exam- 
ined whether it be possible to so select the meridian of a bell 
as to give it a purely tangential yibratory motion ; and he has 
shown that this is only possible in a spherical bell of constant 
thickness. Although the differential equations of the most 
general yibratory motion of a spherical bell present them- 
selves under a rather complicated form, Mathieu has sue-, 
ceeded in integrating them by means of formula of remarka- 
ble simplicity. 

In connection with this theory of the yibrations of a bell 
which Mathieu owes to the g^enerality of his methods we may 
mention another result which, though of a more special 
nature, deserves to remain classic on account of its intrinsic 
importance as well as of the elegance of the demonstration. 
This is the complete determination of the action produced by 
the capillary forces on a solid body partly immersed in a 
liquid. Poisson had only succeeded, by very complicated 
though skilful processes^ m determining the vertical upward 
pressure produced on a solid of revolution whoso axis is ver- 
tical. 

But we must now speak of what is perhaps the most note- 
worthy part of Mathieu's work. Most problems of mathemati- 
cal physics depend not only on one or more partial differential 
equations but also on so-called boundary conditions adapted 
to determine the arbitrary functions introduced by the inte- 
gration of the equations. This science requires therefore the 
investigation of partial differential equations^ not taken by 
themselves, but in connection with such boundary conditions 
and taking into account the form of any such conditions 
that may be given. This method has proved a remarkably 
fruitful source of beautiful results in analysis. It will bie 
sufScient to mention the theory of the potential and the 
numerous theories connected with the principle of Dirichlet. 
If investigations of this kind have for some time been neg- 
lected by pure mathematicians, they have always called forth 



SMILE KATHIEU, HIS LIFE AND WOBKS. 167 

the efforts of the physicists. Poisson, Helmholtz^ Kirchhoff 
have accnmulated the results in the study of the equations 
that occur in the theories of sound and light. They haTe 
thus prepared the way for the resumption of those researches 
which, owing to the labors of H. A. Schwarz and E. Picard, 
are at the present day again coming into j^eneral favor. And 
in the work of maintaining this now triumphant tradition 
only gross injustice could refuse to recognize the important 
part taken by E. Mathieu. Ho has devoted a large number 
of memoirs to researches of this nature concerning the equa- 
tions of sound, of elasticity, and of heat. 

As early as in 1868, in his memoir on the vibrations of an 
elliptic membrane, he indicates or foresees a part of the 
results established later on by H. A. Schwarz and E. Picard 
in their beautiful researches on the equation 

At a later period he rediscovers and systematizes the results 
obtained by Helmholtz in studying the equation 

^tt + * V = 0. 

Similar considerations he extends to the equation 



Au = h 



6t 



But his most noteworthy researches in this field are those on 
the partial differential equation of the fourth order 

AAu = 0, 

which governs the components of the pressures and the com- 

Eoneuts of the displacements at the interior of an isotropic 
ody in the state of elastic equilibrium.* Designating aa first 
potential the function usually denoted simply as potential, the 
author considers under the name of second potential another 
analytical expression differing from the former in having the 
distance of two points substituted for the inverse of the dis- 
tance ; and he develops the entirely new theory of this second 
potential. Concerning the partial differential equation of the 
fourth order which expresses the equilibrium of elasticity he 
proves the following theorem : Every function that satisfies 
this equation at the interior of a surface and is there continu- 
ous itself as well as its derivatives of the first three orders is 

♦ **Mimoire sur Viquation aux difirences partiellea du gtiatrthne ordre 
AAv, = 0, ei 8ur Viquilibre d'Uasttciti d^un carps solide," in Liouville's 
Journ,, 28er., vol. 14 (1869), pp. 378-421. 



168 EXILE XATHIEU, BIS LIFE AND WORKS. 

the sum of the first potential of a layer coyering the bounding' 
sorface and of the second potential of another layer spread 
over the same surface. 

I here conclnde this exposition of Mathien's work, not for 
want of material, for I have said nothing of his researches in 
the theory of perturbations and regaraing the problem of 
three bodies, but in order not to exceed the limits of this 
article. Besides, whoever desii'es to obtain accarate informa- 
tion on the state in which his predecessors had left the science 
of mathematical physics aYid on the adyances made in it by 
himself can do better than read me by reading him. I haye 
known E. Mathieu only as a man of science ; and I have 
spoken of him only as sach. To describe the man I mnst 
borrow the testimony of one of those who haye best known 
him, one of his colleagues at the Faculty of Sciences of 
Nancy * : ^^ Of an essentially straightforward, sincere, and 
generous nature, he was kindness itself. He possessed the 
devotion that seeks to be ignored. In July, 1890, when the 
&ta] disease had already attacked him, he succeeded in con- 
cealing his ill-health from his colleagues, being unwilling to 
leave to them the burden of his examinations. In Septem- 
ber, on his deathbed the same anxiety agitated his mind with 
respect to the October examinations. His loyal and trust- 
worthy character made him esteemed and beloved by all ; in 
the Faculty at Nancy he had none but friends. Sensitive to 
any kindness, touched by the slightest mark of sympathy, he 
belonged to those who ai*e most easily satisfied. " He lived in 
simple style dividing bis time between his lectures and his 
mathematical researches.^' 

P. DUHEM, 

Lecturer in Maihemaiicai Physics 
and CrystaUography at the Faculty 
of Scimces of L%Ue, 



♦ G. Floquet, loc. dt. 



NOTES. 169 



NOTES. 



A REGULAR meeting of the New York Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afternoon, March 5, at half-past 
three o'clock, the president in the chair. The following per- 
sons having been duly nominated, and being recommended 
bv the council, were elected to membership: Professor Arthur 
Cayley, Cambridge University, England; Professor J. de 
Mendiz4bal Tamborrel, Military College, Mexico ; Professor 
Truman Henry Safford, Williams College; Professor Ed- 
mund A. Engler, Washington University. The secretary 
read letters from Professor Cayley and Professor Sylvester 
expressing interest in the work of the Society. — The follow- 
ing original papers were read : '* On exact analysis as the basis 
of language, '' by Professor Alexander Macfarlane ; ** A geo- 
metrical construction for finding the foci of the sections of a 
cone of revolution, '' by Professor Edmund A. Engler. Mr. 
Maclay made some remarks upon the locus of the centers of 
curvature of parallel sections of a ruled surface at i)oint8 upon 
the same generatrix. 

Professor J. J. Sylvester has been compelled to apply 
for leave of absence from Oxford on account of ill health. 
Mr. J. Griffiths of Jesus College, Oxford, will lecture on the 
" Recent geometry of the circle and triangle " for the pro- 
fessor. 

We learn from Nature that a memorial is to be presented 
to the University of Oxford by the council of the Association 
for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching in regard to 
the Pass Examination papers in geometry. These generally 
consist entirely of propositions onunciatea without any varia- 
tion from the ordinary text of Euclid, and scarcely any 
attempt is made to discover whether a student's answers are 
other than the outcome of a mere effort of memory. The 
Association is of the opinion that such papers have the effect 
of a direct incentive to unintelligent teaching, and respect- 
fully asks for the introduction of simple exercises and of simple 
questions suited to promote the rational study of geometry. 

The Register Publishing Co., Ann Arbor, announces that 
it has completed the publication of Professor Cole's transla- 
tion of the " Theory of substitutions and its applications to 
algebra,*' by Professor E. Netto. 

NaturcB Novitates announces the death of Dr. H. B. 



170- NOTES. 

Sohroeter, Professor of Mathematics at the University of 
Breslan, on January 3, in his sixty-third year. x. s. f. 

Sib Bobebt Stawell Ball, Astronomer Boyal for Ireland, 
and Professor of Astronomy at Trinity College, Dublin, has 
been elected Lowndean Professor of Astronomy at Cambridge 
XTnirersity, to succeed the late Professor John Couch Adams. 

H. J. 



KEW PUBLICATIONS. 171 

NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANN- ft CO., NEW YORK. 

Ahanzio(D.). Trattato di Algebra elementare. Napoli 1892. 12. 613 
pg. M. 4.20 

Ball (W. W. R.). Mathematical Recreations and Problems of past 
and present times. London and New York, Macmillan, 1§92. 
12mo, pp. 252. $2.25 

Bourdon (J.). Tables pour le trac^ des Courbes de raccordement par 
Angles successifs. Issoudun 1891. 12. 82 pg. av. figures. M. 1.^ 

Cel8 (J.). Sur les Equations Diff^rentielles lin^ires ordinaires. Paris 
1891. 4. 80 pg. M. 4 

Enoel (Q,). Die Bedeutung der Zahlenyerhfiltnisse fllr die Tonempfind- 
ung. Dresden 1892. gr. 8. 59 pg. M. 1.50 

FiscHEE (A.). Uebcr die Invarianten der linearen homogenen Differen- 
tialgleichungen sechster Ordnung. Halle 1891. 8. 82 pg. M. 120 

Gaertveb (K.). Theiluugen. Halle 1891. 8. 48 pg. M. 1.20 

Gray (John). Les Machines ^lectriques k influence. Expose oomplet de 
Icur histoire et de leur thdorie, suivi d'instructions pratiques sur la 
mani^re de les construire. Traduit de Tanglais et annot^ par Gorges 
Pellissier. In-8 avec figures. Gauthier- villars. 5 fr. 

GuYou. Note sur les Approximations num^riques. 2. ^ition. Paris 
1891. 8. 51 pg. M. 0.80 

KoNio (A.). Ueber den Helligkeitswerth der Spectralfarben bei verschie- 
dener absolutcr Intensitftt. Hamburg 1892. gr. 8. 80 pg. m. 4 
Tafeln. M. 4 

LoiiSE (O.). Beobachtungen des Planeten Mars. Leipzig 1891. 4. 42 
pg. m. 4 Tafeln. M. 5 

Mexzel (H.). Ueber die Bewegung einer starren Geraden, welche mit 
mehreren von ihren Punkten in festen Ebenen oder auf festen Gera- 
den gleitet. Mfinster 1891. 8. 64 pg. M. 1.80 

New Departure in Astronomy : The Revolution of the Solar System. By 
E. H. Cr. 8yo, sd. Chapman and Hall. 2s. 

NouYEAU SystIme de Galcul Integral et Diff^rentiel naturel direct, ex- 
pos^ a Taide de Talg^bre ^16mentaire seulement. De la mesure des 
courbes qui en resulte. Par. S. G. P. 2. Edition. Paris 1892. gr. 
in.8. M. 1.50 



Petersen (G.). Teqria delle Equazioni algebriche. Versione italiana da 

!80 



G. RozzoUno e G. Sforza. volume II. Napoli 1891. 8. 182 pg. 

M. 4.( 



PouLAiN (Aug.). Principes de la nouvelle g^om^trie du triangle. Gr. 
in*8. Croville-Morant. 2 fr. 50 



4 
.■-fc 



172 NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

Pbeter (W.). Ueber den Ursprang des Zahlbe|rriffs aus dem ToDsxnn 
und Qber das Weseu dcr Primzuhlen. Hamburg 1^2. gr. 8. SMS 
pg. M. 1.50 

Richard. Notice sur les Coordonnecs rectAnguIiures. Regies pratiquesv 
examples d'application. Bray-sur-Seine 1891. 8. 43i pg. ar. 
figures. M. 2 

Simon (M.). Zu deu Grundlagen der nicht-eukJidischen G^metrie. 
Strassburg 1891. 4. 82 pg. m. 1 Tafel. M. 1.50 

Stieder (Ij.). Ueber die Anwendung der Wahrschcinlichkeitsreohnung 
in der nnthropologischen Statistik. 2. Auflagc. Braunsweiff 1892. 
gr. 8. u. 2G pg. M. 1.20 

TuMLiRZ (0.). Th^orie electromnffnetique de la lumiore. Traduit par G. 
van der Mensbrugghe. Enrichi dadditions faites par Tauteiir. 
Paris 1S9'2. gr. m-8. 12 et 157 pg. avec figures. M. 7 

ViOLLE ^J.). ("ours de Physique. Tome II : Acoustique et Optique. 
Partie 2 : Optique geom^trique. Paris 1892. gr. in-8. 856 pg. 
avec 27($ figures. M. 9 

Walter (B.). Uebcr die lichtvorzdgemde Kraft geI5ster SalKroolckUle 
und cin Vcrfahren zur gonaucren Bestimmung von Brochungsezpo- 
nenten. Hamburg 1891. l^x. 8. 86 pg. M. 1.50 

Weber (R). Problemos sur I '[Electricity. Rccucil gradu6 contcnant 
toutcs les parties de la science electrique. 2. edition considerable- 
mont augmentee. Paris 1892. 12. avec figures. M. 5 

WiNKKLMAXN (A.). Haudbuch der Physik. Herausgegeben unter Mit- 
wirkunj? von F. Auerbach, F. Braun, S. Czapeki, K. Exner n. A. 
(3 Bftiide in ca. 20 Lieferungen.). Breslau 1892. gr. 8. ra. Holzsoh- 
nitten.— Liefg. 11 : pg. 257—884 (v. l^nd 8). Jede Liefg. M. 8.60 

WoRTHiNOTON (A. M.). Dynamics of Rotation : An Elementary Intro, 
duclion to Rigid Dynamics. Cr. 8vo, pp. 102. Longmans. 38. 6d. 



^^pump 


^^^^^mn^K 


^^^^H 


■ 


CONTENTS. 


i^^^^H 


^B' 


^Wri'M y|i' ll«. tiiiiili'i, 


fl 


^^^^K I T i0P<lHkt«lT 


"II iTniu-inl C/iinpl«» MnininS^^I 


^^m ' ' 




.. '-^H 


^^^V JOtnilt' 


■ tire LdiiHitil^Viirks. Mr)l> 


V 


^^H 




A 


^^H^Mtv fiil^llnll' 


>iii., 


i 


^■^ 




<hI 


^^H Aimu lu < 


■MT'lon *«»M 1»i wMrM..!! 1.. •|>i> 


jH^^^^I 


^^^B On.cwn or rvl tfN* Yori U\tniM*tU'A). 


awnvM^^H 


^^ 


n n« -wUi aii^.7i.« V"« cit^ 


J 


^L 


^^ 


j| 



niTLI.ETI>- 

NEW YORK 
MATHEaiATICAL SOCIETY. 






" AL Hivvirw 



VOL. I. No. 8. 



n'UIJ>ilLKl> BV 1»UE JiiHilRTV, 



i 



MACMILLAN H. CD'S 

IMATHEIVIATICAL TEXT-BOOKS. 



i 



LOCK AND 3COTT-S ABlTHMETIC. 



R, KNIQMT. B-A. 






-ot lo csomeTBv. 



Warttsby J. B. LOCK. M.A.. 
•I IfiDltrMalv.. r.., < ' 
;m i>M»». As far u- ■■ 

J'l, ' 1. 1'IIV. I'oq WiUIUI • '' ' 

«H-.1IM II.- (-■■-llil.FIIr-1 HRllOflt lb•UM)uIlILBI>llv^-r^ti-■ 
| maltBbTillno.ilOMKTUV. Fur blaWr rv(iM.is nil )«■>>■ -* -« 



■" fi.p". r 

■ •( Ifta l-'MltriJ 






.-u.'Ui Ave., N.' 



THE ALGBBEAIO EQUATION. 173 

KEONECKER AND HIS ARITHMETICAL THEORY 
OF THE ALGEBRAIC EQUATION. 

Leopold Kronecker, one of the most illustrious of con- 
temporary mathematicians, died at Berlin on the 29th of last 
December in his 68th year. 

For many years he had been one of the famous mathe- 
maticians of uermany and at the time of his death was senior 
active professor of the mathematical faculty of the University 
of Berlin and editor in chief of the Journal fur reine una 
angewandte Mathematik (Crelle). 

He was the last of the great triumvirate — Kummer, Weier- 
strass, Kronecker — to be lost to the university. Kummer 
retired nearly ten years ago because of sickness and old age^ 
and recently "Weieratrass followed him ; but vounger than 
the other two, Kronecker was overtaken by deatn in the midst 
of the work to which his life had been devoted. Despite his 
years he was much too early lost to science. The genius 
which had enriched mathematical literature with so many 
profound and beautiful researches showed no signs of weak- 
ness or weariness. 

Kronecker was born at Liegnitz near Breslau in 1823. 
While yet a boy at the Gymnasium of his native town his fine 
mathematical talents attracted the notice of his master, 
Kummer, whose distinguished career was then iust beginning. 
Kummer's persuasions rescued him from the business career 
for which he was preparing and brought him to the univer- 
sity.* 

He studied at Breslau, whither in the meantime Kummer 
had been called, Bonn, and Berlin, making his degree at 
Berlin in 1845 with a dissertation of great value : De unitati- 
iu8 complexly. 

Of his instructors besides Kummer he was most influenced 
by Dirichlet, owing in part to Dirichlet's commanding 
abilities, in part to the strong arithmetical bent of Kronecker 
himself. As long as Diricnlet lived Kronecker^s relations 
with him, as with Kummer, were those of the closest personal 
intimacy. * 

From the university Kronecker returned for a number of 
years to business and the management of his estates. But 

* Kronecker makes this graceful acknowledgment of his debt to Kam- 
mer in the dedication of tne Festsehrift with which he honored Eum- 
mer's Doctor Jubeldum (OrundzUge einer arithmetigehen Theorie der 
alffebraisehen Grdssen) : *' In Wahrheit verdanke ich Dir mein mathe- 
matisches Dasein ; icn verdanke Dir in der Wissenschaft die Du mich 
frQh zugewendet wie in der Freundschaft die Da mir frUh entgegenge- 
bracht must, einen wesentlichen Theii des Gldcks meines Lebens." 



174 EBOKECKBB AND HIS ARITHirETICAL THEOHY 

his mathematical actiyity was continuous and his fame grew 
apace. In 1853 he communicated to the Berlin Academy the 
solution of the problem : to determine all abelian equations 
belonging to any assigned " domain of rationality," and in 
1857 the first of nis famous memoirs on the complex multipli- 
cation of the elliptic functions. His letter to Hermite : sur 
la rSsolution de Vequation du bme degri in which his solution 
of the equation is indicated appeared in 1858. 

In 1861 ho was made a member of the Berlin Academy of 
Sciences and in 1867 corresponding member of the Paris 
Academy. 

His election to the Berlin Academy was an eyent of the first 
importance for his subsequent career, inasmuch as it was the 
occasion of his resuming the academic life. As member of 
the Academy he had the right to lecture at the University, and 
of this right — following the example of such men as the 
brothers Grimm, Kiepert, Jacob! and Borchardt — he forth- 
with availed himself, beginninff in the winter of 1861-62 
those lectures on Algebra which naye for many years been one 
of the chief glories of Berlin. In 1883 his relations with the 
University were made closer still through the appointment 
^'Professor ordinarius" and director — with Kummer and 
Weierstrass — of the mathematical Seminar. 

The range of Kron^cker's productiye activity was very 
^eat. Besides distinguished work in the theory of definite 
mtegrals, he did work of the first importance in no less than 
three great departments of mathematics : the theory of num- 
bers, algebra, and elliptic functions. As an aritnmetician 
his name is associated with the great names of Gauss, Dirich- 
let, and Eisenstein ; as an algebraist with those of Abel and 
Galois. 

Some idea of the scope of Kronecker's contributions to 
mathematical literature may be convejed by the following in- 
complete list of his more important memoirs : Dissertatio de 
unitatibus complexis (1845) ; Zwei Sdtze Uber Oleichungen 
mil ganzzahligen Coefficienten (1857) ; Ueber die algebraisch 
aufldsbaren Gleichungen (1853, 1856) ; Sur les facteurs irrS- 
ductibles de V expression a;* — 1 (1854: ) ; Ueher elUptische 
Functioncn fur welche complexe MultiplicaUon stattfindet 
(1857, 1802); Ueher complexe Einheilen (1857); Sur hi 
resolution de V equal ion du bme degri (1858) ; TJeber lineare 
Transformalionen ( 1858 ) ; Ueber die Theorie der algebra- 
ischen Functionen (1861) ; Ueber die verschiedenen Factor en 
der Discriminant en von Eliminationsgleichiingen (1865) ; 
Ueber den Affect der Modular gleichungen (18G5) ; Ueher 
bilinearc Formen (1868) ; Ueber Systeme von Functionen 
mehrer Variabeln (1869, 1878) ; Ueber die verschiedenen 
Sturmschen Reihen und ihre gegenseitigen Beziehungen 



OF THE AXGEBBAIO EQUATION. 175 

(1873) ; Zur Theorie der Elimination einer Variabeln aus 
ztaei algebraischen Gleichungen (1881) ; Zur Theorie der 
Abelschen Oleichungen (1882) ; Zur aritkmetischen Theorie 
der (Hgehraischen Eormen (^1882) ; Ueber die BernouilWschen 
Zahlen (1883) ; Ueber bihneare Forrnen mit vier Variabeln 
(1883) ; GrundzOge einer arithmetischen Tlieorie der alge- 
oraischen Orossen (Kummer Jubcldum 1882) ; Zur Theorie 
der elliptischen Functionen (1883-1891) ; Ueber den Zahlbe* 
ariff (Zeller Jubeldum 1887). Most of his writings were pnb- 
lisned in the Berichte der jBerliner Akademie or in the Jour" 
nalfUr reine und angewandte Mathematik. 

Among the finest of Kronecker's achievements were the 
connections which he established among the various disciplines 
in which he worked : notably that between the theory of q^uad- 
ratic forms of ne&;ative determinant and elliptic functions, 
through the singular moduli which give rise to the complex 
multiplication of the elliptic functions, and that between the 
theorv of numbers and algebra, by his arithmetical theory of 
the algebraic equation. 

He discovered * that to each class of quadratic forms corre- 
sponds a singular modulus which allows of complex multipli- 
cation ; to the aggregate of classes of the same determinant, 
an algebraic equation with rational coefficients which he 
showed to be irreducible; and, in fine, that the theory of 
quadratic forms was an anticipation of the theory of elliptic 
functions, the two theories being so closely related that one 
could have derived the notions of class and order and other 
fundamental properties of the quadmtic forms by investiga- 
tion of the properties of the elliptic function. 

He was above all things the great arithmetician and no- 
where does this appear more clearly than in his algebraic 
writings. It is not merely that the purely arithmetical prob- 
lems growing out of algebra were attractive to him — ^he " arith- 
metized'* algebra itself. In the Zeller Festschrift , after 
declaring his allegiance in the words of Gauss : " Die Math- 
ematik sei die Konigin der Wissenschaften und die Arith- 
metik die Konigin aer Mathematik," he writes "Und ich 

flaube auch, dass es dareinst gelingen wird den gesammten 
nhalt aller dieser mathematischen Disciplinen (Algebra and 
Analysis) zu * arithmetisen ', d. h. einzig und allein auf den 
im engsten Sinne genommeuen Zahlbegriff zu grunden, also 
die Modificationen und Erweiterungen dieses Begriffs wieder 
abzustreifen, welche zumeist durch die Anwendungen auf die 
Oeometrie und Mechanik veranlasst worden sind.*' 

Kronecker arrived at the conception of an arithmetical 
theory of the algebraic numbers and functions very early. 

* Cf. Hermite: Note sur M. Kronecker, Comptee JBendus, Jan. 4, 1802. 



176 KBOKECKEB AKD HIS ABITHMEnCAL THEOBY 

There are indications of it even in a letter to Dirichlet written 
in 1856. As its yarious salient concepts and theorems were 
discovered they were announced in the BericMe of the Acad- 
emy or deyeloped in his lectures. But he did not arrange the 
whole into a consecatiye and complete body of doctrine until 
1882 in his Orund»iige einw ariihmeiischen Theorie der 
' aigebraischen OrdMMn. Within the limits of this brief sketch 
it would be impossible to convey any adequate notion of this 
monumental work. I can attempt only to indicate the salient 
points of the first and more elementary of the two parts into 
which it is divided. 

The ''domain of rationaltv'' (R R\ •) of any system of 
quantities R B!' embraces aU rational functions of the R% 
with integral coefficients. 

These ^s may be quantities of any sort whatsoever, algebraic 
or transcendental constants or variables. In particular all 
the R% may equal 1 when the domain is that of rational num- 
bers in the ordinary sense, or all the R^ may be independent 
variables. In either of these cases the domain is said to be 
bounded naturally. 

An integral function of one or several variables is irreduci^ 
lie in the domain (R R\.) when it contains no factor having 
coefficients which belong to this domain. 

Every root of an irrraucible algebraic equation of the n^ 
degree with coefficients which belong to the domain {RR'. . ) 
is called an algebraic function of the n^ order of the R*%y the 
n roots of the same equation bein^ called conjugate functions. 

If a single such root be '^adjoined'' to the J^'s the domain 
{G,RyR' . .) is the domain of the " genus '^ (Gattung) (?, the 
genus itself embracing those functions of the domain which 
are, like 0, functions of the w** order. 

If O and 0' be algebraic functions of different genera, but 
such that all functions of the genus belong to the domain 
of 0', the genus is said to be contained in the genus O'; 
and the order of 6^ is a divisor of tliat of 0'. 

More than one may of course be adjoined to the R% but 
it is shown that any number of G's may be replaced by a single 
such function which indeed is but a linear function of the ^iven 
G% with integral coefficients. In terms of this Q and the 
B's all functions of the domain {G', G" .. : R^ R" ..) can be 
expressed rationally: or the domain {G', G" ,.: R\ R'..) is 
equivalent to a domain (G, R', R'y . .). This is a theorem of 
fundamental importance. For from it follows that in the 
discussion of all algebraic questions there may be selected as 
** elements " Ry B," ,. of any domain of rationality whatsoever, 
a number of variables or inaeterminates and a single algebraic 
function of them. 

A quantity x is called an integral algebraic function of the 



OF THE ALGEBRAIC EQUATION. 177 

iPs when it satisfies an equation in which the coeflBcient of 
the highest power of 2: is 1 and the remaining coefficients are 
integral functions of the R'8 with integral coefficients. It is 
a fundamental theorem of the theory that for every genus 
there exists a finite number of such integral functions 
x', x", . .X (•+*^ in terms of which all other integral functions of 
the genus can be expressed linearly ; i.e. in the form 

where the ^'s are integral functions of the R's with integral 
coefficients. Such a system of functions x', x'\ . . . a?^"**"*^ 
is called 2k fundamental system of the genus. In special and 
important cases m can equal 0. 

The square of the determinant of any set of n of the func- 
tions x'y x", . . . a;^'"'""^ and their conjugate functions is 
called the discriminant of these n functions. The aggregate 
of the discriminants of every set of n of the functions a: , x' , . . 
2.(»+«) constitutes a system of rational functions of the R'^, 
snch that whatever properties are common to them all belong 
also to the discriminant of every set of n functions of the 
genus and are thus characteristic of the genus itself, forming 
a complex of 'invariants '^ of the genus in a higher sense 01 
that word. 

If there exist no algebraic relations among the i?'s, i.e* if 
the domain of rationality be the natural domain, there exists 
always an integral function of the R's with integral co- 
efficients which is a common divisor of all the discriminants 
of the fundamental system of the genus and may therefore be 
appropriately called the discriminant of the genus itself. If 
m equal the discriminant of the n elements x\ Qif\ . . . x^*^ 
is itself the discriminant of the genus. 

The discriminant of the eenus is a divisor of the discrimi- 
nant of every equation of the genus, i.e. of every equation a 
root of whicli is a function belonging to the genus, and the 
greatest common divisor of the discriminants of all these 
eq^iiations is a divisor of the ^n [n — l)th power of the dis- 
criminant of the genus. 

Again if the genus G' be contained in the genus its dis- 
criminant will be a factor of the discriminant of G. 

And finally the discriminant of the genus to which a set of 
functions belong which are defined by a system of equations 
-Fj = 0, i^^ = 0, . . . ^, = is identical with the discrimi- 
nant of this system of equations. 

The demonstration of this last theorem as well as the fur- 
ther development of the theory necessitates a general investi- 
gation of elimination, the principal outcome of which is that 
the complete *' resolvent'' of a system of m eauations in n 
quantities x\ x\ x"y , . . a;^"^ is an equation of tne form 



178 KSOKBOKBB AVD HIS AiOXHMBTIOAJi THEOBY 

FSx, of,. .. aK— »)) JP, (a?, ar', . . . «<—•>) . . . i^. (a?) = 

where x^u^x^ + n,a;, + . • . + ti» a;., the n's being indeter- 
minates. 

The system of equations or '^ partial resolvents'' F^ = 0, 
F, = 0, . • • F, = is the complete equivalent of the ^ven 
system. Each partial resolvent ^4 = represents a mamfold- 
ness of n — ik dimensions, so that speakmg geometrically a 
given system of equations in n quantities may define simul- 
taneously systems of points, lines, surfaces, eta 

Furthermore every divisor of the product F^. F^ . . . F^ 
set equal to constitutes the entire resolvent of a certain sys- 
tem of n + 1 equations Whence the important theorem : the 
total content of every divisor of the resolvent of a system of 
equations in n quantities can be represented by a system of 
only n + 1 equations, and therefore also a system of any 
number of eNquations can be replaced by one of only n + 1. 
Any algebraic curve of double curvature, for instance, can be 
represented by a system of four algebraic e^quations. 

Another most important result of this investigation of 
elimination is the demonstration that the concept of the 
algebraic function does not require any extension when 
systems of equations instead of single equations are brought 
under discussion. 

This doctrine of elimination brinjipi out the true significance 
of Galois' theory of algebraic equations. 

Let c,, c^ . . . c^uQ quantities belonging to the domain 
{B\ R'\ . . ) and 

{A) af — (?,ar-* + c,ar-»- . . . ±c. =0 

an irreducible equation with the roots 5„ f „ . . . 5». 

Further let / (a? , a;, . . . a:.), /, (a;,, a?„ . . . a:,), . . . 
f% (^19 ^,y • • - ^n) be the elementary symmetric functions 
defined oy the identical equation 

(x — a:,) (a; - a;,) ... (a: - a;,) 

= a:- -/»ar-» +/,a?— ~ . . . ±/,. 

Then the n quantities S^y £„ . . . Sn may as well be re- 
garded as determined by the system of n equations 

{B) /m (a:,, a;, ... a:,) = Cj, (* = 1, 2, . . . n) 

as by the single equation {A). 

If F (x) = be the resolvent of this system {E) or an ir- 
reducible part thereof, and, as above, 

a; = ttj a:, + w, a?, + . . . + w.a:,, 

the coefficients of F {x) are integral functions of the indeter- 



OF THB ALQEBBAIO EQUATION. 17d 

minates u and rational functions of the R'b. And since the 
equations (B) can be satisfied only by systems of values such as 



2J, — ^r|> fl'j — ^rty • • • ^n — ^i 



r» 



where r, r,. .r, is some permutation of the numbers 12 . . .«, 
F {x) is simply the product 

n {X — U^Sr^—U^Sr^ — ' - — UnSm) 

extended over certain of these permutations. 
If now 

be the ** Galois equation '' whose n 1 roots are the n ! functions 
u^Xi^ + u^Xi^ -\- . . .-\-UnXu gotten by forming the n 1 permu- 
tations t\ t, . . . t« of 1 2 . . . n, the coefficients of x, fy . .^, in 
^ (^> /i'Jf«' •••/•) ^^® integral functions of the w's with inte- 
gral coemcients, and one of the irreducible factors of (a?, c„ 
c„ . . c^) must be the same with F{x). Such a factor is there- 
fore an integral function of x and the indeterminates u„ u^y 
. . . ?^„ with coefficients belonging to the domain of rationality 
{R\ R" .,) and may be represented by g (a;, «„ w,. . w,). 

^ (a;, u,y «„ . . w,) = n {x—u^Sr^—u^Sr^—. . .-u.Srn) 

or, if the terms of each factor be arranged with reference 
to the ^'s instead of the u'b 

g {x, w„ tt„ . . w,) = n(x-Ur,S,—Ur^S^—. . .-ttr,5,) ; 

that is to say g {x^, w„ w„ . . m,), regarded as a function of the 
indeterminates u, is a function which remains unchanged for 
certain permutations of these u% those represented by r^, 

' j> • • ' «• 
In this manner^ starting with any special equation (A) one 

is led to general functions of indeterminates which are char- 
acteristic of the equation and have the property of maintain- 
ing their yalues unchanged for certain permutations of these 
indeterminates. 

The true significance of Galois* principle thus lies in the 
fact that it takes as basis for the iuTestigation of an equation 
the system of equations which define its conjugate roots 
simultaneously. 

The functions g to which it leads may themselyes be made 
the starting point of the discussion. The problem then is 
when one replaces the indeterminates w„ u^, . . i*, by x^, 
x^ . . x^\ the investigation of integral functions of n inde- 
terminates a;,, a:,, . . a;, with respect to the changes which 
they experience when the ar's are permuted in all possible 



180 KROKEOKEB AND HIS ABITHMBTIOAL THEOBY 

ways, the investigation taking its place in the general arith- 
metical theory when one regards the a^'s as algebraic functions 
of the n elementary symmetric functions /r. 

If the fs take the place of the R's so that the domain of 
rationality is (/j, /., . . /,) every rational function of the 
x's is an algebraic function of tnis domain and as such be- 
longs to a definite genus, called simply genus of functions 
oj a? , x^y , . Xf^, 

The order of the genus of any single one of the x's is n, 
that of w, a?j + w, a?, + . . . + i*, a;,, the " Galois gen us, ^^ n I 
This genus contains all others and therefore their orders are 

all divisors of w ! If p be the order of a genus g and — be r, 

r is the "number of permutations of the genus g,'^ i.e. the 
number of permutations of the x^a for which any function of 
the genus g remains unchanged. 

A genus g is said to be a genus ** proper " if after it is ad- 
joined to the domain of rationality tne equation 

remains irreducible. When such a genus g is adjoined, so 
that the domain of rationalitj[ becomes (/i, /i, . ./., g), the 
algebraic character of a function defined by a:* — /i a;"~^ + 
. . . ± /« = is changed, it falls into a special "class'' of 
algebraic functions. All algebraic equations belong to the 
same class which go over into each other by rational transfor- 
mation and for which the functions of the roots belonging to 
a definite genus g belong also to the given domain of ration- 
ality {R\ ir . .) 

This characteristic property of the class of an algebraic 
eqiiation and the function which it defines may be called its 
affect. An irreducible equation 

a:" — Cix"-^ 4- . . . ± c„ = 

whose coefficients belong to the domain (R', R", . . ) is said 
therefore to have a special affect where there exists a special 
function of its roots, which may be called the affect-genuB, 
which likewise belongs to the given domain. The group of 
permutations of this genus is called the Galois group of the 
equation. 

The affect-genus being g (xi, x,, . . xj), it is the system of 
w 4- 1 equations 

9 = ^0, fk = Cky (^ = 1,2,.. n) 

which by Galois' principle takes the place of the single given 
equation. This system is satisfied only by the r systems of 
values 



T 



OF THE ALGEBBAIC EQUATION. 181 

which correspond to the r permutations of the genus g. Its 
order is therefore r and it constitutes the irreducible part of 
the system A = Ct, (* = 1, 2, . . n) whose order is n I 
The n I functions 

afiix^ . . . a:J-^i (A^ = 0, 1, . . w — i ; * = 1, 2, . . n—1) 

are the elements of a "fundamental system" of the Galois 
genus ; but the number of elements can be reduced to p, the 
order of the genus, if fractional numerical coeflBciente be 
allowed. 
If the discriminant of the genus x^, t,e. 

n (rr< — X]^) {i, k = 1, 2, . . n ; i >< k), 

» 

be D, the discriminant of the Galois genus is />*•'. There- 
fore, since the discriminant of everjr other j?enus is a divisor 
of that of the Galois genus and D is irreducible, the discrim- 
inant of every ^enus is a power of D. Prom this fact it follows 
that for any given set of values of fi,ft, . . /n for which D 
does not vanish, an infinite number of special functions of 
each genus can be determined all of whose conjugates differ 
from one another, and in terms of which every other function 
of the same genus can be expressed rationally. Moreover 
this theorem leads to a remarkably simple demonstration of 
the "arithmetical existence ^^ of the roots of algebraic equa- 
tions. 

Upon the profound researches of the second part of the 
OrundzUge we cannot now enter, though this contains the 
heart of the arithmetical theory. Here, by aid of the ^^ Mo- 
dul'Systeme'' and the principle of "association " the distinc- 
tively "arithmeticar^ properties of the integral algebraic func- 
tions are developed, their properties, namely, when consid- 
ered with respect to their divisibility by other integral 
functions of the same genus ; and the nnal step is taken in 
the " reduction '^ of the domain of rationality, whereby the en- 
tire theory of tho algebraic functions is reduced to a theory of 
the integral functions of variables and indeterminates with 
integral coefiBcients. 

Thus Kronecker's theory completes that of Galois. For it 
carries the general theory of equations back to a theory of 
indeterminates, which, before Gfalois, it was always assumed 
to be in the superficial and false sense, that the coefficients, 
and therefore the roots, of any equation may be treated as 
indeterminates. 

The fine quality of Kronecker's work is even more notable 
than its range or the importance of its results. It possesses 
the rigor and elegance of the theory of numbers. 

Early in the w'undziige,when defining an irreducible func- 



182 KBOKEOKEB AKD HIS ABITHinnOAJi THBOBY 

tion, Kroneoker remarks : '' Die Definition der Irredaotdbili- 
tftt entbehrt so lange einer sicheren Gmndla^ als nicht eine 
Methode angegeben ist, mittels deren bei einer bestimmten 
Torgelegtcn Function entschieden werden kann, ob dieselbe der 
anteoBtellten Definition gem&ss irreductibel ist oder nicht,''* 
and proceeds therewith to supply the missing test 

This criterion, according to which no definition may be 
considered justified, no theorem established, until a method 
is supplied for determining in every given concrete case 
whether the definition or theorem actually applies or not, he 
everywhere insisted upon, scrupulously meeting its require- 
ments in his own work and sharply criticisin|B; lul failures to 
meet them in the works of others. A definition which did 
not stand this test he denominated the invention of a mere fic- 
tion, an artificial abstraction for which there should be no 
place in mathematics. 

This is the rigor of the ancient Greek geometry — ^in re- 
jecting hypothetical constructions Euclid reoogniied a sim- 
ilar criterion — and though far enough from oeiiijg alvroys 
realized in the modem analysis, must cbaractenxe every 
mathematical theory in its finite form. For until it has been 
attained, either the ultimate elements of the theory haye not 
been reached or the artificial concepts with which it has aided 
itself in its growth have not been set aside and the theory de- 
duced directly from these elements. 

Closely related to this fine conception of mathematical rigor 
are the other salient traits of Eronecker's work. 

It possesses that high artistic merit which consists in the 
perfect adaptation of means to ends. His methods are al- 
ways pure, fit, direct, and the simplest which the reauire- 
ments of absolute rigor will allow. Writing to Dirichlet in 
1856 he says of a method which he has discovered for deduc- 
ing the properties of solvable equations of prime degree that 
it meets all the proper requirements of simplicity and rigor, 
^^ denu die Methoae verlangt keinen irgend hoheren Stund- 
punkt mathematischen FossnngsvcrmoKens als das Problem 
selbst, welches dadurch erledigt wird.^f And again for his 
principle of *' association" he claims: **Sie gewahrt den 
^ einf achsten ' erf orderlichen und hinreichenden Apparat, um 
die arithmetischen Eigenschaften der allgemeinsten alge- 
braischen grossen ^ volls&ndig ' und ^ auf die einfachste Weise ' 
darzulegen,"! adopting the phrases which are Quoted from the 
first proposition of Eirchhoff^s Mechanics. Tnis ^' Einfach- 
heity to be sure, is of a kind which it oftentimes requires 

* OrundzUge, etc., p. 11. 

+ Qdttinger ^aehrichUn, 1885, p. 864. 

; OrundzUge, etc., p. 98. 



OF THE ALGEBBAIO EQUATION. 183 

mnch reflection to appreciate. He was a foe not only of arti- 
ficial concepts but of all artificial methods and of all artificial 
or purely formal tendencies in mathematics. He would have 
rid matnematics of the artificial numbers and of its '* sym- 
bolic " methods^ and the devising of new functions seemed 
to him a foolish waste of energy. " God created numbers and 
geometry/' I once heard him say, **but man the functions.'' 

It was bis boast that he was tne most practical of mathema- 
ticians. He said whimsically to me one day last summer : 
*' It is a pity that you, Americans, do not know me better. You 
would surely appreciate me, I am so practical." And in a 
somewhat transcendental sense of the word, to be sure, he was 
profoundly practical. Ho sought to ayoid all mere abstrac- 
tions and to ffiye his theories concrete form. Thus in the 
Galois theory he replaced the abstraction, a group of substi- 
tutions, by concrete functions which remain unchanged 
for the substitutions of the group. Neither definition, 
theorem, nor method had value in his eyes which could not 
be applied to concrete cases, which could not be made to yield 
concrete results. On this account he did not set great store 
by the services of the theory of substitutions to algebra. 
With all its beauty, he would urge, it is only formal, it does 
not show how to construct the group of a given equation. 

Kronecker influenced the mathematics thinking of Ger- 
many as much through his lectures as through his published 
writings. He was a very stimulating and interesting lecturer. 
To an unusual degree he took his hearers into his confidence 
and allowed them the privilege of watching the actual evolu- 
tion of his thoughts. His lectures were not overprepared, but 
the details of even important demonstrations were left to take 
their chances in the lecture room. Occasionally there would 
be a disastrous slip in the reckoning or argument, or the 
outcome would be tne discovery that the theorem sought to be 
established was false. But that only afforded opportunity to 
see the marvellous quickness with which he would run an 
error down and recover himself. 

His lectures were always fresh. The principal courses were 
on determinants, theory of numbers, algebra, and definite 
integrals, and one of these in its turn he delivered each se- 
mester. But he never merely repeated himself. If a lecture 
did not differ from all its predecessors in content, it surely 
did in point of view or method. It was always the most re- 
cent product of his mathematical thinking. 

In his lecturing, moreover, he avoided the excessive concise- 
ness, which is the chief cause of the difficulty of his published 
writings. 

Personally, Kronecker was most charming and amiable, a 
polished gentleman and man of the world. He was very gen- 



184 MULTIPLICATION OF SERIES. 

erons with his time and thoughts, loving to talk to an appre- 
ciative listener of some favorite doctrine, or of the famous 
mathematicians with whom he had been associated. 

He was a man of rare genius, a mathematician of the first 
rank in this century of great mathematicians. 

Henry B. Pine. 

PsiNCETON College, April 20, 1892. 



MULTIPLICATION OF SERIES. 

BY FBOF. FLORIAN CAJORI. 

The salient feature of the new era which analysis entered 
upon during the first quarter of this century is vividly illus- 
trated in the history of infinite series. Extending from that 
time back to Newton we have a formal period which gave 
rise to general theorems, the validity of which was not 
thoroughly tested. Thus, in series, there were put forth 
during that epoch the binomial theorem, the theorems of 
Taylor, Maclaurin, John Bernoulli, and Lagrange. Infinite 
series were used by Newton, Leibnitz, and Euler in the study 
of transcendental functions. As a rule, the convergency of 
expressions was not ascertained, and the confusion which 
prevailed in the theory of series gave rise to curious para- 
doxes. But with the advent of Gauss, Cauchy, and Abel, 
began the new era which combined dexterity in form with 
rigor of demonstration. 

In the multiplication of series, mathematicians of the ear- 
lier period considered simply the form of the products and 
hardly ever thoiight of inquiring further into the validity of 
the operation. Reliable tests for convergency were unknown. 
The product of any two infinite series was accepted with 
nearly the same degree of confidence as was the product of 
finite expressions. Thus, De Moivre * extended the binomial 
formula to infinite series and deduced the following formula : 
{az + bz^ + . . .)"» 

1 1 4i 

This was accepted as true without any limitations what- 
ever. 

* A method of mising an infinite multinomial to any given power, or 
extracting any given root of the same. PhUowphiccU Transactiondt 
No. 2JJ0, 1697. 



HULTIPLIOATION OF SERIES. 185 

The first to cry " halt ** to these reckless proceedings was 
Baron Cauchj. fie instituted for the first time a painstak- 
ing examination of the principles of series and strove to intro- 
duce absolute rigor. He is the founder of the theory of 
convergency and divergency. He pointed out that if two 
series are convergent, their product is not necessarily so. 

Thus, 

V2 a/3 V4 



is convergent, but its square 

1 ^ /*^ 1\/^ ^ \ 



= + 



is divergent. Not only did he discriminate between conver- 
gent and divergent series, but also between what we now call 
** absolutely convergent series " which are convergent even 
if all the terms are made positive, and *' semi-convergent 
series '' which cease to be convergent when the terms are all 
made to have like signs. In his Cours d^analyse algSbraique 
(1821) Cauchy proved rigorously the following celebrated 
theorem : If 2u^ and 2^v^ converge absolutely to values 
U and V respectively , then the series 2{uoV^ + ^x^n-, + 
. . . + UnVo) converges to the value TJY, So far as the 
researches of Cauchy went, two absolutely convergent series 
appeared to be the only ones which could be multiplied by 
one another with absolute safety. This same theorem was 
proved also by Abel in course of his demonstration of the 
binomial formula,* but in the same article he took a giant 
step in advance by establishing the following theorem : If the 
series 2u^ and ^v^ converge to the limits U and V respec' 
tively, then if the series 2(uoV^ + w,^«-i + . . . + w„Vo) be 
convergent, it will converge to the product UV. The beauty 
of this theorem lies in the fact that all three series in ques- 
tion may be semi-convergent. Strange to say, this result, so 
remarkable for its simplicity and generality and put forth by 
so prominent a mathematician as Abel, was for nearly half a 
century almost universally overlooked. Schlomilch's Cbm- 
pendium der hoheren A7iah/sis knows it not, nor does Ber- 
trand's Traite de calcul diffireyitiel, 

AbeFs theorem would dispose of the whole problem of 
multiplication of series, if we had a universal practical criterion 
of convergency for semi-convergent series. Since we do not 

* Crelle's JoumcUy Bd. 1, 1827 ; also CEuvret competes de N, H, Abel, 
Tome 1, p. 66 et eeq. 



186 uxrurrmcAxiov of SHEns. 

possess snoh a criterion, theorems have been established 
which remove in certain cases the necessity of applying tests 
of convemncy to the prodnct-series. Snch a l^heorem is 
that of Mortens * who in 1875 demonstrated that Oanchy's 
theorem still holds tme if, of the two conyergent series to 
be multiplied together, only one is absolately convergent. 
Thus, if the absomtely convergent series 

l + J + i+i+. . . 
is multiplied by the semi-convergent series 

the product will surely converge to the value 2 log 3. A still 
more comprehensive but more complex theorem was given by 

Mr. A. Pringsheim, in 1882 if If U =: 2ru^,r - Spv^ be 

convergent series of which one^ say U^ hoe the ^operiy that 
its terms, arranaed in certain groups containing always a 
finite number of terms, constitute an absolutely convergent 
series, i.e. thai- 

be absolutely convergent, then we have 

UV= JSy Wp ^ W, where Wp = 2x UxVp^xi 



provided that the series 2^ UyVy be absolutely convergent and 



remain so when any number of factors Uy, tv is replaced by 
other factors of higher indices. That is, in any number of 
terms, UyVy, the factors Vp (or Up) may be erased and any 
other factors v,, + „ (or Up + ») put in tneir places, with the 
single restriction that none of the indices be repeated in 
the series. Whenever applicable, the above theorem excels 
Gauchy's in this, that the often difficult determination of the 
convergency of the product-series is replaced by the easier 

determination of the absolute convergency of 2p v^v,. In 

illustration of this theorem I give the following example. 
Let 

- (_j^ 1_ 1 ^ 1 ) 

(4K + 1 4v + 2"^V4v + 3 V4»'+4) 

* Crelle's Journal, Bd. 79. Proofs of this theorem and of AbeVs theo- 
rem will be found in Chrystal's Algebra, Part II., p. 127 and p. ISIS. 
f Matlhematische Annalen, Bd. 21, p. 827. 



MULTIPLICATION OF SERIES, 187 

This semi-convergent series becomes absolntely convergent 
when its terms are grouped thus, 

jj^^ j_i _j_) , ^^\ i J I 

The series 

. (__1 1 1 1 ) 

^=f''j(4v + l)l (4.' + 2)1 + 4FT3 ~ i7T4j 

is semi-convergent. Each fraction in the first series stands for 
a term Uy and each fraction in the second for a term Vp. Hence 



7 7 ( (4r + l)f ^ (4v + 2)« ' (4v + 3)» 

"^(4v + 4)1 j' 

which is absolutely convergent and remains so if any number 
of terms, Up or v^, be replaced by others occurring later in 
the series. Hence the product, W, of the two series con- 
verges toward UV. 

The importance of inquiring whether ^^WrVi* remains ab- 



solutely convergent after the substitution of higher terms in 

f)lace of the lower, is brought out by Pringsheim in the f cl- 
ewing example. Take the series U, given above, and 

r-~_vJ ^ - ^ .^> l_l 

\ V4v 4-1 v'4r + 24v + 3 4r-h4)' 
In this case 

2^ UyVp = 2v 



- -■"" - („ + 1) I 

which is absolutely convergent, while 

" * ( 1 1 

-f '"'"'*' = . i(4v + l)(4v + 3) + (4k + 2) (4k + 4) 

^ , „! 



V(4v + 3) (4v + 6) ^ \/74^ 



+ 4) (4k + 6)) 



is divergent I It is indeed found that in this case the prod- 
uct UV^ cannot be represented by the series W. 

In proving his theorem, Pringsheim shows in the first place 
that an obviously necessary condition for the convergency of 

If, namely ^'ifi, Wv = 0, is satisfied. His theorem, like that 
of Oauchy and of Mertens, offers sufficient conditions for the 



188 MITLTIPLICATION OP SEEIB8. 

applicability of the rule of multiplication, but they are not at 
the same time necessary conditions. He shows that Cauchy's 
and Mertens' theorems are included in his own. 

Pringsheim then considers the multiplication and con- 
yergency of sp^ecial classeB of semi-conver^nt series, of which 
we shall mention one. He shows that if U and V are conyer- 
gent series and one of them, say U^ is so constituted that 



is absolutely convergent (as is the case when the terms Uw 
never increase and have alternating signs), then 

/f"„ «;. = 

is a necessary and sufficient condition for the convergency of 
W. Mr. A. Voss* has treated similarly the more general 
case when the series U, expressed in the form 

Cr= (tto + Wi) + (t*, + «,) + •• • 

is absolutely conver^nt and has shown that in this case the 
necessary and sufficient condition for the convergency of W 
lies in the two following relations : 

n =*"« (WoVi- + UtVt^i + . . . + W„Vo) = ; 
n^^^(UiVt^^ + UtV^^ + . . . 4- W,»_,V,) = 0. 

Mr. Pringsheim reaches the following interesting conclu- 
sions : The product of two semi-convergent series can never 
converge absolutely, but a semi-convergent series, or even a 
divergent series, multiplied by an absolutely convergent 
series may yield an absolutely convergent product. Thus, the 
product of the ubsolutely convergent series 

and the serai -convergent series 

log 2 = ^ — J + I — . . .is 

2 (log 2)' = 1 + 4)(-^)^- (. + 2)V + 3) frT^[> 

which series converges absolutely. Again, the absolutely con- 
vergent series 

-1 4- -1- -i — 
■^ 1.2 "^ 2.3 "^ 3.4 + 



• • • 



* Math. Annalen, Bd. 24, p. 42. 



OK EXACT AKALYSIS AS THE BASIS OF LAKOUAGE. 189 

mnltiplied by the divergent series 

1 + J + i -h . . . 

gives an absolntelj convergent product. The strangeness of 
this last conclusion is removea when we consider that the 
series 

-1-11- 

1*2 2^ • 

= - 1 + (1 - i) + a - i) + . . . = 0. 

Since one of the factor-series is zero, we may well have a 
product-series with a definite limiting value. This value in 
this case is itself zero^ as is seen from the following expression 
for the productHseries 

- "1 

W= — Cx -¥ 2y (cy — Ck+i), where c •= 2x —. — — ; r. 

I 1 a? (v 4- 1 — a:) 

Colorado Colleos, March 28, 1892. 



ON EXACT ANALYSIS AS THE BASIS OF LAN- 
GUAGE.* 



BT A. MACFAHLANG, 80. D., LL.D. 



Abstract. 

A SCHEME for an artificial langnage was published in the 
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society for 1668 by 
Bishop Wilkins. Since, however, it presupposes a complete 
enumeration of all that is or can be known, it would bo over- 
thrown by every considerable advance in knowledge. The 
mathematician and philosopher Leibnitz devoted much 
thought to what he called a specieuse gSnSrale, which he 
hoped would be an aid in reasoning and invention ; but he 
died without publishing even an outline of his system. The 
new universal language Volapuk, invented by J. M. Schleyer 
of Constance, is built upon a purely linguistic basis, bemg 
derived from a comparative study of the chief natural lan- 
guages. In this paper it is proposed to show that the proper 
and necessary basis for an artificial language is scientific 
analysis and classification, and two specimens of language 

* Abstract of a paper preseDted to the Society at the meetiDe of 
March 5, 1892. 



190 car xxAci akaltbib as thb babd ov uurairAeB. 

80 oonstnicted will exhibit the gmt eomjifeiBtj «f the 
pfobleni. 

In the notation for nnmben in Volapilk we obaerre aeriooB 
defects. As regards the d^ts there u no word to expreoB 0. 
Ab rupurds the expreasiona for the denominationii, an tfbitraiy 
nae of the nfRx tor the plnnd denotes the denomination <0f» : 
thus we have id, two ; Ms, twenty ; and the other names for 
the denominations are no more systematio than the En^^ish 
words. There is the nsnal jamp from thousand to million ; 
we are not told whether telion means thousand million or 
million million ; and no words are provided to express frso- 
tional denominations. In physical works we meet with the 
highest development of the notation for nnmher ; it consists 
of a series of significant figores, and of a positive or nq;ative 
power of ten. To vocalize this notation we reqoire an ele- 
mentary word for each of the elementaiy numbers, 0, 1, 2, 8, 
^ 6, a, 7, 8, 9 ; and a series of words for t^ integer powers 
of ten, and for the fractional powers of ten. As there are 
five elementary vowels, ten woras for the digits may be ob- 
tained by prefixing the consonants b and Z. 

Thus 0, 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 
ba, be, bi, bo, bu, la, h, U, lo, lu. 

The word for a higher number is formed by taking the 
appropriate monosyllables in succession ; for example : 11, 
beoe; 23, bibo; 105, bebiUa, The integer denominations 
may be expressed by affixing p to the number for the place or 
power of ten, while the fractional denominations may be 
expressed by adding n instead of p, thus : — 

10, 10', lOS 10*, 10*, 10', 10% 10', etc. 
bep, hip, bop, bup, lap, lep, lip, lop, etc. and 

1 1 1 1 1 J_ i. 
10' 10" 10'^ 10*' 10*' 10«' 10^' 

betiy bin, bon, bun, Ian, len, lin, etc 

For example, one hundred and twenty- three thousand 
would be Yocalized by bebipo bop, and forty-five hundredths 
by bula bin. 

Some years ago in a series of papers on '^ An analysis of 
the relationships of consanguinity and affinity,'' * the author 
devised a system of notation both literal and graphical, and 
indicated u corresponding nomenclature. On this analysis 
may be oonstructea another specimen of a scientific language, 
ana by the system of words it provides for such relationships 
the efficiency of Volapiik may be tested. 

♦ Proc, Eov. Soe. Edinb.,Yol X., p. 224; Vol. XI., pp. 5 and 162; PhiL 
Mag. June 1^1 ; and Journal of the Anthrop. lost, of London for 1883. 



ON EXACT ANALYSIS AS THE BASIS OF LANGUAGE. 191 

Let a denote the relationship of parent and e the reciprocal 
relationship of child ; by forming the different permutations 
of ^hese letters we get expressions for the several compound 
relationships. Those of the second order are : — 



NOTATION. 


GENERAL MEANINQ. 


IBREDUCIBLB MEANING. 


aa 
ae 
ea 
ee 


parent of parent, 
parent of child, 
child of parent, 
child of child. 


grandparent, 
consort. 

brother or sister, 
grandchild. 



The meaning given in the third column may not coincide 
exactly with that riven in second ; where a reduction of the 
expression is possible, that is, where a is followed by ^ or e by 
a ; the special or reduced meanm^ is excluded. Thus ae and 
ea each m its most general meaning includes self; when the 
special meaning of self is excluded, the parent of child be- 
comes consort, and the child of parent oecomes brother or 
sister. 

Similarly the relationships of the third order are : 



NOTATION. 


GENERAL MEANING. 


nUlEDUCIBLB MEANING. 


aaa 


• 

great grandparent. 


great grandparent. 


aae 


grandparent of child. 


parent-in-law. 


aea 
aee 


parent of child of parent, 
parent of grandchild. 


step-parent, 
chud-in-law. 


eaa 


child of grandparent, 
child of Darent of child, 
grandchild of parent, 
great grandchild. 


uncle or aunt. 


eae 


step-child. 


eea 


nephew or niece. 


eee 


great grandchild. 



In the case of all these relationships, excepting the first and 
the last, the general meaning includes a simpler relationship 
to which it may reduce ; for example, grandparent of child 
includes the simpler relationship of parent. In the same 
manner the relationships expressed by four, five or any num- 
ber of elements may be exhibited. 

To change this notation into a nomenclature, all that is 
necessary is to insert some consonant as d between the vow- 
els ; for then each combination can be easily pronounced. In 
the systematic language so derived ada means grandparent, 
ade consort, eda brother or sister, ede grandchild, adadd great 
grandparent, adade parent-in-law, adma step-parent, and so 
on. 



192 OK KXAOT AKALY8I8 AS THB BA8IB OV LAKOUAQB. 

Each genuB of relationship is divided into species by intro- 
ducing the distinction of sex. Let the consonants m and / 
denote mde and female respectiYely, then the species of the 
first order are ma father, /a mother, me son, /a aaaghter. If 
we introduce the distinction of sex after the yowel we obtain 
such relationships as mam father of man, maf father of 
woman, mef son. of woman. The species of the second order, 
obtained by introducing the distinction of sex before the first 
Yowel only, are, e.a. ; mada grandfather, feda sister, fede 
granddaughter. If the distinction of sex is introduced 
before the second Towel also, we may obtain : mama paternal 

SEindfather, mame father of son, fema sister-german, fe/e 
ughter of daughter, etc. Thirty-two species may be formed 
by introducing the distinction of sex after the last yowel, but 
four of these species reduce necessarily to the relationshin of 
self; for example mamem. The double relationship inYoiyed 
in full brother may be denoted by mem/a, that of full sister 
hj fern fa, and that of full brother or sister by em/a. If, on 
tne otner hand, we wish to express that the brotherBhip is 
only half, we may replace d hj t; thus meia, half-brother ; 
feta, half -sister ; and eta^ half brother or sister. These prin- 
ciples suffice to supply a word for every possible relationship 
of consanguinity or affinity. The nomenclature is based on 
a notation which serves as the basis for a calculus,* and it 
seems to me that this is a developed specimen of the kind of 
language which Leibnitz had in nis thoughts. 

If wo test Volapuk by the vocabulary which it provides for 
these relationships wo find that the words supplied are not 
founded on a scieutilic analysis, and indeed are far inferior to 
the terms supplied by the English language. Almost all the 
stem words, as son, son. Mod brother, involve the masculine 
gender, the corresponding feminines being formed by prefix- 
ing ji. Thus daughter is expressed by ji-son and sister by 
ji'btod. There are no words to express the relationships 
which are independent of sex. The confusion on the subject 
of the more involved relationships is very great, no distinction 
being made for example, between step-brother and half- 
brother, both of which are denoted by lafa-hlod. The derived 
relationships are not expressed by general rules for combining 
the elementary relationships, but on the contrary a few words 
are obtained in an arbitrary manner by attaching to the stems 
comparatively meaningless prefixes and affixes. It has been 
pointed out by several scholars,! that the inventor of Vola- 



♦ Problems in Relationship. Proe, Roy. Sac. Edinh., 1888. 

fDr. D. Q. Brinton— " Aims and Traits of a World-language ; " Dr. 
Horatio Hale— '* An International Language," Proc. A. X A. 8., VoL 
XXXVII. 



KOTES. 193 

puk makes a fundamental error in proceeding synthetically 
instead of analytically^ and in this matter of terms for rela- 
tionship we have an example of that fundamental mistake. 



NOTES. 



A REOULAB meeting of the New Yobk Mathehatioal 
Society was held Saturday afternoon^ '^Ef^' ^^ ^^ half-past 
three o'clock, the president in the chair. The following per- 
sons having been only nominated, and being recommended by 
the council, were elected to membership : Mr. B. S. Annis, 
Johns Hopkins University ; Professor Samuel Marx Barton, 
Emory and Henry College ; Dr. Maxime B6cber, Harvard 
Universitv ; Mr. William H.Butts, Pontiac, Michigan ; Dr.T. 
Proctor flail, Clark University; Professor S, W. Hunton, Mount 
Allison University; Mr. W. F. King, Ottawa, Canada; Mr. B. M. 
Boszel, Johns Hopkins University ; Dr. Arthur Schultze, New 
York. The proposed amendment to the Constitution (Bulletin, 
No. 6, p. 142.) was unanimously adopted, and the By-Laws were 
amended by striking out section 2 of bv-law ix., and altering 
the number of the fcllowing section, i^he following origin^ 
papers were read : ''The cubic-projection and rotation of a 
tessaract," by Dr. T. Proctor Hall ; " On final formulas for 
the algebraic solution of quartic equations,^' by Professor 
Mansfield Merriman. 

A tessaract is a geometrical figure generated by the mo- 
tion of a cube in the direction of the common perpendicular 
to its edges and faces, bearing exactly the same relation to a 
cube that a cube bears to a square. It is bounded by ei^ht 
cubes, and has twenty-four faces, thirty-two edges, and six- 
teen vertices. Dr. Mall presented the Society with a wire 
model representing the projection of a tessaract into space of 
three dimensions. 

The Cambridge University Press has in preparation "A 
treatise on the mathematical theory of elasticity,^ by A. E. H. 
Love, fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. The first 
volume of the work, which is to be in two volumes, is in 
press. 

Maohillak & Co. have nearly ready a work on the *' The- 
ory of f auctions,'' by Professor Morley of Haverford College, 
Pa., and Professor Harkness of Bryn Mawr College, Pa. 

At the meeting of the Acadimie dee Sciences at Paris on 
18 



194 KOTES. . 

March 7, committees were appointed to award the mathe- 
. matical prizes of the cnrrent year. For the Orandprix de» 
sciences mathimeUiques, The aetermination of the nnmber 
of primes inferior to a given limits the committee is composed 
of MM. Jordan, Poincar6, Hermite, Darboux, Picard. For 
the Prix Bordin, The application of the general theory of 
abelian functions to geometry, the committee consists of 
MM. Hermite, Poincarl, Darboux, Jordan, Picard. For the 
Prix Bordin of 1890, To study the surfaces whose linear ele- 
ment can be reduced to the form 

de' = [/ {u) - cp (v)] {du* + dv% 

the time of competition for which was extended until 1892, 
the committee is MM. Poincarl, Darboux, Picard, Hermite, 
Jordan. 

The memoir of M. PainleT6, which won for its author the 
Grand prix of 1890, To perfect in an important respect 
the theory of the differential equation of the first order and 
first degree, has just been published in full in the AnnaUs de 
V£cole Normale, while that of his competitor, M. Autonne, 
which was awarded an honorable mention, is in course of pub- 
lication in the Journal de VJScole Polytechnique, 

We learn from Naturae Novitates that Professor H. A. 
Schwartz, of Gottingen, has been called to Berlin as the suc- 
cessor of the late Professor Kronecker, and that Professor 
Rudolph Sturm has been invited to the professorship of 
mathematics at the University of Breslau. 

The second number of the current volume of the American 
Journal of Mathematics was delayed through the occurrence 
of a fire in the printing oflSce. In future the new volumes 
will begin in January instead of in October. T. s. F. 

At Johns Hopkins University during the academic year 
1892-93, the following graduate courses in mathematics will 
be given : by Professor Craig, (1) Theory of functions of one 
and two variables, (2) Mathematical seminary, (3) Partial dif- 
ferential equations, (4) Linear differential equations, (5) El- 
liptic and abelian functions ; by Dr. Franklin, (6) A general 
course for graduate students on the elements of modern math- 
ematics, (7l Theory of invariants, (8) Metrical theory of sur- 
faces ; by Dr. Chapman, (9) Mechanics and hydrodynamics, 
(10) Projective geometry, (11) History of mathematics. 

T. C. 



KEW PUBLIOATIOKS. 195 

During the coming year at Clark UniTersity, Professor 
Story will lecture on the following subjects : (1) History of 
algebra during the Benaissance> (2) Aavanced course on the 
geometry of surfaces and twisted curves^ (3) Applications of 

?uaternions, (4) Hyperspace and non-eucliaean geometry, (5) 
ntroductory courses on calculus of finite differences, proba- 
bility, and theory of errors. Dr. Webster will lecture on 
Theory of functions according to Gauchy, Biemann, and 
Weierstrass^ with applications lo functions defined by certain 
differential equations. Besides, introductory courses will be 
given in : Theory of numbers, Modem higher algebra, Higher 
plane curves. General theory of surfaces and twisted curves, 
Quarternions, and Modem synthetic geometry. 0. B. 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WESTERMANK ft CO., NEW YORK. 

Aib-Temperatubb. Harmonic analjrgis of hourly observations of Air 
Temperature and Pressure at British Observatories. London 1892. 
fol. 13s 

Caught (A.). Oenvres completes. PHibli^ sous la direction scientifique 
de TAcad^mie des Sciences. (29 volumes en 2 series.) S^rie 1. 
Tome YII : Notes et articles extraits des Comptes-rendus hebdoma- 
daires des s^nces de I'Acad^mie ded Sciences, suite. Paris 1893. 
gr. in-4. 446 pg. Prix de souscription, 2ef 

Deter (C. G. J.). Repertorium der Differential- und Integralrechnung. 
2. Auflage. Berlin 1892. 8. 118 pg. m. Figuren. M. 1.50 

Faraday. — Jerrold (W.). Michael Faraday, the man of science. New 
York 1892. 8. 100 pg. yloth. $0.75 

Flamharion (C). La Plurality des Mondes habits. £tude oh I'on 
expose les conditions d*habitabilit^ des terres celestes, discut^es an 
pomt de Tue de 1* Astronomie, de la Physiologic et de la Philoeophie 
naturelle. 84. mille. Paris 1892. 8. 6 et 483 pg. av. planches 
colorizes et noires. 

Gee (W. H.). Four-Place Logarithms and Tangent Tables. Manchester 
1892. 8. cloth. 9d 

Gbeeitwioh. Astronomical, Magnetical and Meteorological Observations 
made at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, in the year 1890, under 
the direction of W. H. M. Christie. London 1892. Imp. 4. cloth. 208 

Lange (G.). Ueber die linearen homoeenen Differentialgleichungen, 
denen die Periodicit&tsmodule Abelscher Integrale genQgen fUr den 
Fall, dass die IrrationaHt&t 8. Grades ist Halle 1892. 8. 45 pg. 

M. 1.20 



196 HXW FUBUOAnOVB. 



IiATn (K.). BdMge tor Bwitimiining mid VanrBrthiiitt dor Ikm^ 
gang der Erda urn den Sehwoponkt dm SyiteniB Brte-Mdnd. B&s 
Bn 1881. a 46 ftp. lLl.aO 

LiTBiT AXD Datdqv. The Btonmti of Flane Tiigoiioiiietiy. Itoo. 
pp. x?i— 080. Maemillaiu 9L¥^ 

Look (J. B). Tlie Ffnt Book of Bnoiid^ Blomeiito, inMiged iat begtau 
nen. Foap. 8to. pp. TiiL^ltfT. MaemtllaB, 10.09 

M^LLift (A.). Untemichiuseii Hber den Brocud'aeiMn Kicto uid dM 

Iroouf ache Brdeck. TllUnse&lOOl. 0. 70 ng 

U.1M 



TflralJgeiiiflineite Broou^sehe Brdeck. TftUngen 1801. 0. 70 



Ohm (a. S.). Tbe OalTtnic Cixoiiit Inf«gtig«ked lIsliieiiMftkaUj. 
TramlAlad bf W. Fiaiiois. Edited bf T. D. Lookwood. Nov 

Yoikioos. a 960pp. gioUl taoo 

Fad#(H.). Pvemldns Lemons d'AlgMne Ofoeoteiie. Komlnw poritUli 
ct n^gatili. Op6niticni8 ear 1m WLjuHtDM. Aree vne ptmoe da 
J. Tumerj. Paris 1898. a 28 et A pg. IL SJO 

BmcAni.— Brnkhaidt (HX Benhud Bimnaim. Yoctng, gehalteii nr 
" dee 20-jlhrig«ii Todeetegee. GOItlQgenlOOa 8. ILaOO 



Samnix (EX Ueber SduMuen nnter einender perneotifer Tetraeder. 
GieflMsn^. a 85pg. M. 1 JO 

Tait (P. G.). Heat. New ed. Cr. 8to. 868 pp. Maominan. Oi 

Uhbio (K.). Ueber trilineare mid tetraednle OoUineaftloiu Qiflan 
1801. a 40pg. m.lT^ileL M. IJSO 

Yaoquaxt (Or.). Gonre de Gtontoie. 4 editioii. Fteiel88i. a 

M. aoo 

WiNBKB (0.). Behandlmig einiger Aiif^;aben der Viaxiatfonsreohiimig, 
welche sich anf Baamcarren Ton oonstanter erster KrOmmang bfr* 
Ziehen. G($ttingen 1892. 8. 60 pg. M. 1.00 

Woo AN (P.). Bewegnng zweier materieller Pnnkte, welche dorch einen 
gewiohtfilosen E^en mit einander yeibonden sind, im Banme mid 
in der Ebene onter Einwirknng der Schwerkraft and beliebig gm- 
bener Anfangsgeechwindigkeiten. Memel 1891. 4. 28 pp. mit 3 
Taleln. M. 1.00 



i 
i 



COMEM' 



r Itir A rUlriiitihco ; 

Bfinilfiiii,. H> Priif. tlr»KT 11. I > 



If|)lU«t)on uf S.m<p>. \iy 



Oil tL>,m\ AuMyif ua (}«• l> < 



> Iftvr PablfMnoiu, 



AnWM fBr ilUWtilUI HlllWliI b* iHtdniiaHil III Hi^ 

BOLt-VTur at tnii Micw VauR ALAtUUUTmUj i 
II I^ll tlRll fliwet. Kon ]£oal| illlf 



■ 


MACMILLAN & C0^3 J^^^f 


L 


THEMATICAL TEXT-BOof^l 


J 


^tai 


^^■b "^^^^1 


1 


1 ■ 


^^^Mrm 1 


1 


^^ 


IK' "^1 


^M 




^^M 




^H 


K: ' -"^ 


E 


Swk«N .V CO., p> i ■? r.>uiti(^i|uK^^| 



TOPOLOGY OF ALGEBRAIC CURVES. 197 



TOPOLOGY OP ALGEBEAIC CUEVES. 

In the Mathematische Annalen, Vol. 38 (1891), Mr. David 
Hilbert of Konigsbcrg has a very interesting and suggestive 
article on the real branches of algebraic curves. The simplic- 
ity of the method which Mr. Hilbert employs, and the possi- 
bility of its being made to yield further important results 
seem sufficient reasons for presenting here, lu some detail, 
that portion of the article which treats of plane curves. It 
has seemed to the present writer advisable to amplify por- 
tions of Mr. Hilbert^s article, with the view of making his 
method more intelli^ble, and also to make some changes in 
the proof of the principal theorem, in order to avoid some 
slight inaccuracies that have crept into his demonstration. 

The first part of the article m question is devoted to the 
determination of the maximum number of nested branches 

Sossible to a plane algebraic curve of order n, and of maximum 
eficiency. By 7iested branches is meant a group) of even 
branches so arranged that the first lies entirely within the 
second, the second within the third, and so on, like a series 
of concentric circles.* It should be observed that some or all 
of the non-nested branches may, in perfect accord with this 
definition, lie within the ring-shaped regions formed by the 
nested branches. A single even branch, which neither en- 
closes another branch nor is enclosed by one, may be looked 
upon as a nested branch or not, according to the nature of the 
question under discussion. For reasons that will presently 
appear, Hilbert does not consider the even branches of the 
conic and cubic as nested. Hilbert bases some of his inves- 
tigations upon results previously obtained by A. narnack,f 
and his method is entirely analogous to that of the latter. 

Hamack had proved, in the article referred to, that a plane 
algebraic curve, without singularities, of order n and of defi- 
ciency p^ can not have more than p + 1, that is, J (n—\) 
(»— 2) + 1 real branches ; and, further, that, for every posi- 
tive integral value of n, a non-singular curve with J (n — 1) 
(n — 2) + 1 real branches actually exists. Setting out from 
this result of Hamack's, Hilbert shows first that a non- 
singular curve can have no more than ^ (w.— 2) or ^ (n— 3) 
nested branches, according as n is even or odd ; for, if it had 
more, a right line could be drawn meeting the curve in more 

♦ This definition is not scientific but it serves the present purpose. To 
make it rigorous Mr. Hilbert needs only to define accurately what is 
meant by inside and outside of a closed branch. Such a definition has 
virtually been given by von Staudt, Chowietrie der Lage, § 1, 16. 

f Maihematische AnnaUn, Bd. 10, Ueber die VieltheUigkeit der ebenen 
cdgebraischen Curvetk 



108 TOPOLOGY OF ALOEBSAIO OUBTBB. 

than n points.* He proyes fnrther the following theorein : 
Ibr every positive integral palue of n, a mm^ngwar ewrve of 
order n exvete, having the maximum number of real tranches, 
i (n— 1) (n— 18) + 1, and | («-2) or | (n— 8) nested brandkes, 
aceordiftg as n is even or odd. 

We shall, for sake of brevity, desijniate an even branch by 
the term **oval" It is evident that all nested branchea 
are oyals. Moreover^ we consider that case only where all the 
nested ovals are ffronped in a single nest. We first assame 
the theorem true for a curve of n^ order, O^, whose eqnation 
may be written/ = 0, and we assume further that an ellipse, 
E^, whose equation we write A = 0, can be constructed en- 
closing one or more of the nested ovals, and cutting a non- 
nested oval, b, in 2n points, whose order of succession shall be 
the same upon b as upon jSL. It is evident that B^ and 0» 
have no other common point. The ellipse E^ and the branch 
b form, by their intersections, in renons, each completely 
bounded by a single segment of JB^ and a single segment of b. 
Within one of these regions there exists one or more nested 
ovals. Whether this region, which we call R, contains the 
nested ovals interior to Ja^ or exterior to it,t depends upon the 
nature of b, and its position with respect to ^,. (When JB^ 
encloses all the nested ovals, it may occur that none of theae 
3n regions contains a nested oval ; in that case one of these 
regions will be all the plane exterior to E^ and b, and this we 
desi^ate by R.) Let s be any segment of J?, determined by 
the intersections of E^ and b, except that segment which forms 
a portion of the boundary of R, Upon s we choose 2(n + 2) 
points, none of them coincident witn the extremities oi s, ana 
join by right lines the first and second, the third and fourth, 

, and the (2n + 3)th and (2w + 4)th. Let the product 

of the equations of these n + 2 right lines be 7 = 0. Then 
for very small values of (J, 

F=fh ±61 = 

is the eqnation of a curve, C, + j, of order n + 2, lying very 
near the degenerate curve fh = 0. This (7,+, passes through 
the points common to C^ and the right lines, and through 
the points common to E^ and these lines, but not through the 
intersections of E^ with U^. 

♦ This theorem is not true for curves of order lower than the fourth. 
Moreover, it must be borne in mind that every non-singular curve with 
the maximum number of real branches has at least one non-nested oval, 
because i (n— 2) and i (n— 8) are each less than i (n— 1) (n— 2) + 1. 

f A nested oval exterior to JS,, since it encloses those interior to j^s, 
must also enclose E^ itself. Therefore, when, among a number of iso- 
lated ovals, we have to consider a single one as nested, we choose as such, 
one that lies in the interior of Et. 



TOPOLOGY OP ALGEBRAIC CURVES. 199 

We proceed now to prove : 

(1) that Cn+thasp' + 1 real branches, p' being the defi- 
ciency of (?,+, ; 

(2) that C,+a has the maximum nnmber of nested 
branches ; and 

(3) that the ellipse, E^, encloses one or more of the nested 
ovals of Gn+tf awd cuts one of its non -nested ovals in 2(w + 2) 
points, whose order of succession upon C.+t is the same as 
upon J?,. 

1. Ignoring the branch b for the moment, it appears, from 
the form of the equation -P = 0, that in the immediate vicin- 
itv of every other branch of C„, there exists a similur branch 
of Cn+u The (7, has by hypothesis i{n — l)(n — 2) real 
branches, exclusive of b. These give rise, tnerefore, to 
i{n — l)(n — 2) real branches of 0^ + %. Furthermore, under 
proper choice of the sign of d, there exists, in the vicinity of 
the complete boundary of each of the 2n regions formed by 
j^,and b, an oval of C,^.,. The latter curve has no real branch 
save those already enumerated. Therefore C^^., has ^{n — 1) 
(n — 2) -f 2n = \{n + l)n -h 1 = p' -h 1 real branches, 

2. Each of the nested ovals of (7, gives rise to a nested oval of 
Gn + fl. Moreover, the oval of 67, + , engendered by the boundary 
of R is itself a nested oval of O^ + ,. The latter has, therefore, 
one more nested oval than does C,. Since increasing n by 
2, increases the functions i(/i— 2) and i(n— 3) by 1, it follows 
that (7« + 1 has the maximum number of nested branches. 

3. In the vicinity of that region, a portion of whose boun- 
dary is 8y there exists an oval of C, + , which cuts the ellipse in 
the 2(w + 2) points already determined upon s, and the order 
of succession of these 2(n + 2) points is the same upon C, + , 
as upon s. 

Hence, if our assumptions concerning (7, and B^ are valid, 
the curve (7„ + , has the maximum number of real branches, and 
also the maximum number of nested branches. And further- 
more — and this is a very important point — the ellipse B^ has 
the same position with respect to C^ + , that it was assumed to 
have with respect to G^. It follows, then, that we may in like 
manner derive from the C^ + 1 a 0, + 4 having the same proper- 
ties, and so on. If, then, we can prove our assumption valid 
for one even value, and for one oda value of n, we may con- 
clude that our theorem is true for all values of n. 

That these assumptions are valid whenn = 4 can be demon- 
strated as follows : Let / = be the equation of a given ellipse 
G,, and h = that of the auxiliary ellipse B^. Let B^ intersect 
C, in 4 real points ; and upon any segment, s, of B^ deter- 
mined by two successive points of intersection, choose the 8 
successive points, 1, 2, 3, . . . 8. Join by right lines, 1 with 2, 
3 with 4, . • . , and 7 with 8. Let the product of the eqna- 



200 lOFOLOOT OF ALGEBRAIC OUBYXS. 

tions of these 4 right lines be Z = 0. Then, for very small Tal- 
lies of Sj 

fh±dl = 

represents a non-siDgakrqnartic, C^^ and, by proper choice of 
the sign of d, this qnartic has four ovals, one of which inter- 
sects B^ in the eight points npon 8. Horeover, within JB^ 
there lie one or two oTfus of C^ one if 8 is exterior to C^ and 
two if 8 is within (7,. Now a qnartic can haye no more than 
^(4 — 2) = 1 nested oval. We choose as snch, an oval in the 
interior of E^. We have then a C^ with the nuudmnm num- 
ber of real branches, viz., J(4 — 1^(4 — 2) + 1 = 4 ; with the 
maximum number of nested oyals, 1 ; and the ellipse jSL en- 
closes this nested branch, and cuts a non-nested oval in 2(2 + 
2) = 8 real points, whose order of succession upon C. is the 
some as upon E^. Hence our ti88umptian m vtilia wi^n 
« = 4. 

That this is true also when n = 5 is similarly proved. Let 
/= represent a straight line. Draw the ellipse, E^^ not cut- 
tinff / = in any real point. Upon J?, choose six points and, 
as before, join alternate pairs by right lines. Let the prod- 
uct of the equations of these three right lines be Z = 0. 
Then, when 6 is very small, 

fh± 61 = 

represents a non-singular cubic, C„ the oval of which inter* 
sects E^ in the six points whose order of succession upon E, 
and the oval is the same. Proceeding one step further, let 
the equation of C^ be/ = 0. Upon any segment of E^ choose 
2(3 + 2 ) = 10 points, and join alternate pairs by right lines, 
the proauct of whose five equations is Z = 0. Tien, for suffi- 
ciently small values of d, 

fh± 6l=z0 

represents a non-singular quintic, C^, and, upon proper choice 
of the sign of d, this C^ has six ovals, one of which intersects E^ 
in ten points. Within E, lie two ovals of C^, one of which we 
consider a nested oval. Moreover, C^hna an odd branch in 
the vicinity of the odd branch of C,. We have then a quintic 
with the maximum number of real branches, ^(5 — 1)(5 — 
2) + 1 = 7 ; with the maximum number of nested branches, 
i(5 — 3) = 1 ; and with a non-nested oval cut by E in 2(3 -f- 
2) = 10 real points ; E^ also encloses the nestea branch. 
Hence, our assumptions are valid when » = 5. The theorem 
is therefore true in general, 
Headers of Hilbert's article in the Annalen will notice some 



TOPOLOGY OF ALOEBBAIO GUBYES. 201 

minor errors in his proof. He states, for instance, that the 
auxiliary ellipse may lie wholly within the innermost nested 
oval ^see Annahn, vol. 38, p. 117). This is impossible, for 
the ellipse could not then be made to intersect a non-nested 
oval. Again, he allows the ellipse to cut any of the non- 
nested branches. If the ellipse be drawn to enclose all the 
nested branches and to intersect in 2n points an odd branch, 
the derived C« + , will have indeed the maximum number of 
real branches, but one fewer than the maximum number of 
nested branches. And, lastly, Hilbert chooses the 2{n + 2) 
points of B^y through which the lines / = are to pass, upon 
any segment of B^. If, however, these betaken upon that seg- 
ment of E^ which forms part of the boundary of A, the branch 
of C, ^. , wnich has these points in common with B^ will be a 
nested oval, and, though the C, ^. , will then have /? + 1 real 
branches, and the maximum number of nested ovals as re- 
quired, it will be impossible to carry the process further. 

It will be observed that Hilbert's results apply only to 
curves of maximum deficiency, and of the maximum number 
of real branches, n being given. It by no means follows that 
a curve of order n and of maximum deficiency, but with 
fewer than the maximum number of real branches, cannot 
have more than ^ (n — 2) or ^ f n — 3) nested branches. For 
instance, in the case of the cnoic discussed above, if <^ be 
given the opposite sign to the one there chosen, the equation 

fh ± 61 = 

will represent a non-singular quintic, having but three real 
branches, two of which are nested. 

And, in general, it is easily seen that a non-singular curve 
of even order, and possessing but ^n real branches, may have 
them all nested. Similarly, a curve of odd order having 
only ^{n + l) real branches, may have ^(»— 1) of them nested. 
Hilbert leaves untouched also the case of singular curves, 
and thus excludes from his investigations a large class of 
curves. It would be interesting to Know under what con- 
ditions^ and in what way, the branches of a singular curve 
can be nested. 

Lack of space prevents any discussion of the second part of 
Hilbert's article, in which the author determines some of the 
properties of curves in three-fold space. I give only the re- 
sult^ of these investigations. By a method entirely analogous 
to that presented above, Hilbert proves the theorem : An 
irreducible twisted curve of order », with the maximum num» 
ber of real branches [J {n — 1)' + 1 when n is even, and J 
(n — 1) (/J — 3) + 1 when n is odd] can have no more than 
iv — 2, 2v — I, 2v — 1 odd branches, according as n = 4k, 



202 FINAL FOBMULAS FOB THB 

4r +1, 4k 4- 3. When n = 4v + 2, no odd branch can 
exist. Exceptional are the cases when n = 3, ^, 5, the maxi" 
mum number of odd branches being 1, 2, 3, respectively. Then, 
by applying Abers theorem for elliptic functions, be proves, 
for every value of n, the existence of curves with the maximum 
number of real odd branches. 

L. S. HULBUBT. 
WoacESTER, Mass., AprU 6, 1892. 



FINAL FORMULAS FOE THE ALGEBRAIC 
SOLUTION OF QUARTIG EQUATIONS.* 

BT MANSFIELD MERBIMAN, PH.D. 

I. Final formulas for the algebraic solution of quadratic 
and cubic equations are well known. Such formulas exhibit 
the roots in their true typical forms, and lead to ready and 
exact numerical solutions whenever the given equations do 
not fall under the irreducible case. But for the quartic, or 
biquadratic, equation the books on algebra do not give similar 
final formulas. The solution of the quartic has been known 
since 1540, and numerous methods have been deduced for its 
algebraic resolution, yet in no caso does this appear to have 
been completed in final practical shape. It is the object of 
this paper to state the fiual solution in the form of definite 
formulas. 

II. The expression of the roots of the quartic is easily made 
in terms of the roots of a resolvent cubic, and the cubic itself 
is solved without difficulty. Yet great practical difficulty 
exists in treating a numerical equation on account of the 
presence of imaginaries in the roots of the resolvent. Wit- 
ness the following example which is generally given to illus- 
trate the method in connection with Euler's resolvent : 

*' Let it be required to determine the roots of the biquad- 
ratic equation, 

X* - 25a;' + 60a: - 36 = 0. 

By comparing this with the general form the cubic equation 
to be resolved is, 

y* - 50y3 ^ 729y - 3600 = 

* Abstract of a paper presented to the Society at the meeting of May 
7, 1892. 



ALGEBBAIO SOLUTIOK OF QUABTIO EQUATIONS. !^ 

the roots of which are founds by the rules for cubics, to be 9, 

r, = 4, an 
positive^ 



— _ _ — — _ — _ — ^ _^ 

16 and 25, so that V^i = 3, ^y% = 4, and y^y, = 5. There- 
fore, since the coemcient of a; is p 



jB, = J(-3 + 4 + 6)=+3 
ar,=i(+3-4 + 5)= +2 
a:, = i(+3 + 4-5)= + l 

which are the four roots of the proposed equation.'' 

m. Now all that can be said of this numerical work is that 
it is a Yerifying instance. It is not an algebraic solution in 
any sense of the word, for, as both the quartic and \i% cubic 
resolvent have real roots, this is the irreducible case where the 
numerical solution fails. In Euler's Algebra, 1774, where 
this example was first given, the roots of the cubic are ob- 
tained by the use of trigonometrical tables, but in subsequent 
quotations it is usually merely stated that they are found " by 
tne rules for cubics.'* This numerical example has certainly 
no place in the exemplification of the algebraic solution of the 
quartic equation, and yet it is so given m most mathematical 
aictionaries and it may also be seen in the article Algebra in 
the last edition of the Encyclopsedia Britannica. 

As this Bulletin is intended for historical and critical re- 
marks rather than for original investigations it will not be 
well to here set foi-th the method whereby I have brought the 
solution into such shape as to produce final practical formulas. 
But the results may perhaps be allowed place, as their state- 
ment is very brief. ' ^ ^ 

IV. The following are final formulas for the algebraic solu- 
tion of the quartic equation, 

aj* + 4aa;" + 6te' + 4ca; + c? = 0. 

First, let m and n be determined by 

m = a^d — %dbc + J* — &d + c' 
n = {V + irf - iac)\ 

Secondly, let s and t be found from 

; = J (m — V^* — w)*' 



204 FINAL FORMULAS FOB THE 

Thirdly, let w, v, and tv be derived by, 

v = 2 (a* - J) - (« + 
w=zv' +3 {s- i)\ 

Then the four roots of the given quartic are expressed by 
the formulas, 

ajj = — a 4- VH + y V + ^/Iv 
a;, = — a+Vw — V v -h V '^ 



a?, = — a — Vw + yv — V?^ 



x^= — a — Vu — y v — ^/ w 

in which the signs before the square roots are to be used as 
written provided 2a' — dab + c is negative, but if this is 

positive all radicals except V w blto to be reversed in sign. 

V. As a numerical example, let the equation to be solved 
be the complete quartic, 

z* - Sx' - 10a;' + 56a: + 192 = 0. 

Here, by comparing the coeflScients with the given form, 

a = - 2, h = - I, c = + 14, 6? = 4- 192. 

From these are first computed, 

^ _ 3 2 8 3 ^ — Rg2flgS6953 

27 ' 729 ' 

and next in order are found, 

5 = 5.983, ^ = 4.350. 

Accordingly 5 + ^ is 10.333, and s — t is 1.633, and then 

?^ = IG, V = 1, w = 9. 
Now as 2a' — Sab + c has a negative value, the formulas give 

:r, =2 + 4 4- a/T+T= + 8 



ALGEBRAIC SOLUTIOK OF QUABTIO EQUATIONS. 206 

a:, = 2 + 4 - V 1 + 3 = + 4 



a;, = 2— 4+Vl-i^=-2 + V-2 



ar, = 2-4-a/1-3=-2-v'-2- 

which are the simplest expressions for the four roots. 

As a second example let the proposed quartic equation be 
a* + 7a; 4- 6 = 0. Here a = 0, 6 = 0, c =}, and d = 6. 
Then m = H and n = S. Next in order, s = 0.8091 and 
^ = 0.6180, whence w = + 1.427, v= — 1.427 and «; = 2.146. 
Now, c being positiye, the roots are 

x^ = - 1.194 - V- 1.427 + 1.465 = - 1.388 
a:, = - 1.194 + V- 1.427 + 1.465 = - 1.000 
a;, = + 1.194 - V- 1.427 - 1.465 
a:, = + 1.194 + V- 1.427 - 1.466 

which closely satisfy the given equation. 

VI. The above formulas for the algebraic solution of the 
quartic equation are final in the sense that, like those so well 
known for the quadratic and cubic, they exhibit true symbolic 
representations of the roots in terms of the given coefficients, 
and that they are not capable of further essential simplifica- 
tion. They furnish the means of the discussion of all the 
circumstances concerning the occurrence of equal roots in the 
quartic, as well as of cases where the roots are connected by a 
known relation. They will be found to embrace the solution 
of all special and critical cases. For instance, applied to the 
binomial a;* — 1 = they giv e the roots ar, = -h 1, a:, = — 1, 

x^— 4- V— 1 and a:^ = — \/— 1. Again, if applied to the 
form X* 4- 6Ja;' -\- d = 0, they give the same solution as that by 
quadratics, for u becomes zero, v becomes — db and w reduces 
to 9F — d. Lastly, they furnish ready and exact numerical 
solutions whenever the proposed equation has two real and 
two imaginarv roots, or when two or more roots are equal. If 
there be eitter four unequal real roots or four unequal 
imaginary roots, the irreducible case arises where m" — n be- 
comes negative, and the formulas, although correctly repre- 
senting the roots, fail to furnish numerical solutions in as 
simple forms as desired. 

Lehigh Univebsitt, March, 1892. 



206 POIKGABi'S MifeOAKIQUE c£lE8TS. 



POINCAR^'S Ml^OANIQUE ClfiLESTE. 

Lbs Methodes nouvelles de la Mecanique Cileste, Par H. 
PoiNCABi. Tome I. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1892. 8vo. 

The publication of this new work on Celestial Mechanics, 
embodying some of the results of the labors of mathema- 
ticians in that direction during the last fifteen years, comes 
as a welcome addition to our knowledge of this subject. Until 
lately, nearly all treatises have been written with a special ob- 
ject, that of obtaining expressions which can be used by the 
i)ractical astronomer ; the mathematical aspects of the prob- 
ems solved have been almost entirely neglected. These latter 
have an interest of their own apart from any use which can 
be made of them, and it is to the study of such questions that 
M. Poincare largely devotes himself. At the same time he 
points out where they can be applied usefully in the case of 
the problem of three bodies. Bat this is not all. Most of 
the results obtained can be applied equally to the general 
problems of dynamics where there is a force function, and by 
the use of a dfssipation function could doubtless be applied 
to any natural problem whatever. 

The applications are, however, more particularly made to a 
satellite system, in the special case when the tnree bodies 
move in one plane, as well as in the general case. The limi- 
tation generally imposed consists in making the ratios of the 
masses of two of the bodies to that of the third a small 
quantity, an assumption which, nevertheless, does not limit 
greatly the usefulness of the results. M. Poinear6 says, 
*^ Le out final de la Mecanique celeste est de resoudre cette 
grande question de savoir si la loi de Newton explique ii elle 
seule tons les phenomfines astrouomiques," and for this end 
to be attained it is absolutely necessary to know whether 
the developments of the expressions for the position of any 
heavenly body do mathematically represent that position. In 
general, the series obtained must be convergent, and it is to 
the questions on the convergence of such series that M. 
Poincar6 has been able to give some definite answers. 

In his introduction, the author points out that the starting 
point of the present developments of the lunar theory, was 
the publication in Vol. I. of the American Journal of Mathe- 
matics of a paper by Dr. Hill entitled, '* Researches in the 
lunar theory.'' It is true that in this memoir, Dr. Hill has 
largely occupied himself in obtaining exact numerical and 
algebraical values for certain inequalities in the motion of the 
moon ; but the general considerations involved at the be- 
ginning and end of it are of a far-reaching nature. In par- 



POINCAIUfi'S MlklAKIQUE CELESTE. 207 

ticnlar, a superior limit to the radius vector of the moon is 
founds and a general study of the surfaces of equal velocity is 
made. His consideration in a particular case of the moons 
of different lunations with respect to the primary^ will be men- 
tioned below. 

M. Poincar6's book is principally based on his own memoir, 
^* Sur le problime dea trots corps et les iquations de la 
dynamique,'^* The arrangement is not quite the same. In 
the treatise, many of the demonstrations are more completelv 
explained, the a{)plication8 are more numerous^ and muca 
matter that is entirely new has been added. In what follows, 
I have not in anv sense attempted to give a complete account 
of the book. Much that is given there is outside the scope 
of an article such as this ; the results that are mentioned 
are chieiSy noticed either because they can be given in a few 
words, or because from their peculiar interest they merit a 
somewliat longer treatment. 

The first chapter deals with some general well-known the- 
orems with respect to differential equations. Two types are 
selected. The general form which it is necessary to consider 
is shown by the system 

^ = X (1 = 1,2, ...n). 

The X^ are analytic and single- valued functions of the x^ and 
may or may not contain the time explicitly. This type in- 
cludes the system of canonical equations 

dx^ __dF dy^ _ dF 

dt " dyi' dt '~ dXi ' 

which possess a set of properties special to themselves. Some 
space is devoted to the consideration of these properties, and 
special attention is directed to changes of variables for 
which the system still remains canonical. The proofs for 
these theorems are sketched very briefly in cases where they 
are well-known. 

In all the particular cases of the applications of canonical 
equations to the problem of three bodies, M. Poincare works 
out the results with some detail. The masses are taken to be 
m„ w„ wi, ; iw, is the mass of the primary while m,, w„ satisfy 

* Ada MathenuUica^Yol. XIII. 



808 ponroABi's MioAKianB cfLnn. 

Buoh that fA is small whQe fi^fi^ remain finite qnantitiea. Itii 
then possible to expand i^ in a series arranged in ascending 
powers of /i : 



In general F^ will be independent of one system of 
elements, say; the y, • 

The canonical conations giyen above (Sorreepond to n de- 
grees of liberty. Ii we know an integral of the ig^tem, this 
number can be lowered by one nnit in general, if we know 
q integrals, Poisson's conditions must w fnlfilled between 
these integrals taken two and two, in order that the number 
of degrees of liberty may be lowered by ; units. The amplica- 
tion of this to the general problem of three bodies is imme- 
diate. The three mtegrals for the motion of the centre of 
mass of the system beinff known and fulfilling the conditions, 
we can reduce the number of degrees of liberty from nine to 
six. The three known integrals of areas are also intqpds of 
the system thus reduced, and by using two combinations of 
these latter, it is possible to reduce the system toyimr decrees 
of liberty ; also in the case when the bodies move m one pume, 
the system can be reduced to three degrees of liberty. The 
'usual transformations are then effected so as to leave the 
equations still in the canonical form and to carry only 
the smallest number of degrees of liberty. 

The form of the disturbing function is also discussed, and 
it is considered under what circumstances we can develop it 
in ascending powers. 

The sceona chapter deals with the general conditions for 
integration in series, and in particular with the conditions that 
these scries ma^ be convergent. It is here that M. Poincar6's 
penetrative genius especially shows itself. The complicated 
forms which appear in the lunar problem render it an almost 
impossible task to attack directly the question of convergence 
of the scries obtained. But by going back to the differential 
equations themselves, and considering the disturbing function, 
he is able to obtain definite results, with respect to the prob- 
lem of three bodies, for the convergence of those series which 
may be taken to represent certain particular solutions. 

The notation introduced by M. Poincar6 a short time back 
for dealing with questions of convergence is an especiidly 
happy one. It is as follows : — If we have two functions <py ^, 
expanded in ascending powers of x, y, 

^ «: (arg. X, y) 

denotes that the coefficient of every term in ^ is greater in 
absolute value than the corresponding term in ^, the *^ argu- 



POINCAR^'S MBOAlSriQUE CELESTE. 209 

mentfl '^ in terms of which the expansion is made being written 
as above. This can of coarse be used for any number of 
arguments. An extension of this notation is given at the end 
of the chapter. The coefficients, instead of being constants, 
are supposed to be periodic functions of the time ; then, if 
every coefficient of ^ in its expansion according to powers of 
^> yy 6^^ i^ ^ga1> positive, and greater in absolute value than 
the corresponding coefficient in q?, 

Cauchy's general theorems on convergence are quoted and 
extendea to the case in which the function is expanded in 
terms of several variables. If we have a system of differential 
equations 

^=0{x, y, z, //), ^ = ^ (X, y, z, yu), ^ = ^ {x, y, z, //) 

where 0, (p, fp are expanded in powers of ar^, y^, z^y and //, /, 
there will exist three series expanded in powers of x^, y^, 
z^ and ^y t which will satisfy these equations and reduce re- 
spectively to .T^, y^, «o when ^ = 0. For these to be convergent 
it is necessary that |a;J, lyoU lfol> My V\ should be sufficiently 
small. The restriction ji| sufficiently small is evidently incon- 
venient, and Poincar6 is able to get rid of it and to say that 
the series are convergent if t lies between given limits pro- 
vided that |ju| be sufnciently small. 

In most cases, however, expansion is not made in powers of 
the time, but in trigonometncal functions of it, and it there- 
fore becomes necessary in the first instance to examine a system 
of differential equations, 

dx 

-^ = fPui^ + ^'.t^^t + . . • + (Pi.nX^ (* = 1, 2, . • . «) 

where the (p are all periodic functions of the time. The gen- 
eral solution found is, 

Xi = c, e««^ A,^, + c, «<^' A^, + . . . + <?,6V A^, 

the A being periodic functions of the time only, the a< depend- 
ent on the roots of a determinantal equation, and the <;< arbi- 
trary constants. 

These Ui are called the characteristic exponents {expomnts 
caractSristiques) of the solution. On them depends the 
whole nature of the various solutions. Thus if two of the ex- 
ponents are equal, the time appears as a factor ; if they are all 
14 



210 POINCAR^'S m£0AKIQUE CELESTE. 

pnre imaginaries, the general solntion contains periodic terms 
only, and so on. Also, on them depend the ^' asymptotic solu- 
tions/* Chapter IV. is devoted to the consideration of these 
exponents. 

Chapter III., which deals with [periodic solutions, is perhaps 
the most interesting from the point of view of its immediate 
application to some of the problems in the lunar theory. In 
this connection, a periodic solution is defined as being such 
that the system at the end of a finite time T comes into the 
same relative position as at the beginning of that time. The 
period is then T. Thus if <p{t) represent a periodic solution 
of period T 

also if 

^(^ + T) = q){t) + 2Jc7c {Jc = whole number) 

(p{t) is still said to be a periodic solution. These two types 
are analogous to linear and angular co5rdinates, respectiyely. 
In the canonical system of codrdinates as applied to dynamics 
problems, one set of elements belongs to the first type, and the 
conjugate set ia general to the second type. It is to be noted 
that by defining a periodic solution in this way, the system 
can, so to speak, be separated from its external relations. The 
motions both of rotation and translation of the system as a 
whole can be detached, and those of its various parts amongst 
themselves considered. 

The question which is put forward for examination is as 
follows : If for /^ = we nave a periodic solution, what are 
the conditions necessary in order that the solution shall still 
remain periodic when ^ is not zero but a small quantity ? It 
must be remembered that in this and in what follows, the 
term ** periodic " has the meaning which has just been given 
to it. In order to answer the question, M. Poincare considers 
the system 

dXi _ 

where the Xi are functions of the time periodic and of period 
2;r, as well as of the a:,. Space will not permit me to re- 
produce the argument, which finally reduces the answer 
to the consideration of the properties of a certain curve 
in the neighborhood of the origin. This curve is ex- 
amined in certain particular cases and notably in the case 
where there are an infinite number of periodic solutions for ^ 
zero, i.e, when the period is an arbitrary constant of the 
general solution. Generally, it is found that in these cases 
the equations do admit periodic solutions. In another partic- 



poincare's m^canique o£leste. 211 

nlar case^ the equations when /i = admit a solution of period 
27ry and when /i is small but not zero^ save in an exceptional 
case, the equations admit a solution of period 2k7t {k bein^ a 
whole number) which is different from the solution of period 
Zfty and is only not distinct from this latter when pi becomes 
zero. 

If the Xi are periodic with respect to the time, the solution 
in general if periodic must have the same period. When 
however the time does not enter into the -a, explicitly, the 
period of the solution can be 'anything whatever. Suppose 
that the period selected when /4 = be jT. The question 
resolves itself into finding under what circumstances a solu- 
tion of period 7' + r is possible when ^ is small. The argu- 
ment proceeds in a somewhat similar manner as in the first 
case and similar results follow. 

To apply these results to the problem of three bodies, sup- 
pose ^ = 6. Then two of the bodies describe ellipses about 
the third. At the end of a certain period measured by the 
difference of their mean motions, the system is found in the 
same relative position as at the beginning of the period. The 
solution tor pi = is then periodic. Wul periodic solutions 
be still possible when //, instead . of being zero, has a small 
positive value? From what has been proved above, we can 
say that such solutions are in general possible. M. Poincar6 
distinguishes three classes : — (1) when the inclinations and 
eccentricities are zero, (2) when the inclinations only are zero, 
(3) when the latter are not zero. He then examines these in 
detail. 

Under (1^ comes, as a particular case. Dr. Hill's now classic 
solution, wnere the mass of one body is supposed to be infi- 
nitely great and at an infinite distance, but to have a finite 
mean motion, and the mass of the other is infinitely small. The 
solutions are referred to axes moving with the infinitely dis- 
tant body which takes a circular orbit. The period is one of 
the arbitraries and can be anything whatever. When /i = 
the motion is circular, and when pi is small, the curve does not 
differ much from a circle, and is somewhat elliptical in shape 
with its shorter axis directed constantly towards the sun. [If 
the sun be not infinitelj distant, the only change in the curve 
is a loss of symmetry with regard to the line joining the earth 
and the sun.] Dr. Hill calculated the various shapes which 
the curve takes for different values of the arbitrary period, 
corresponding to gradually decreasing values of the constant 
of vis viva. As this latter constant diminishes, the ratio 
of the magnitude of the axes becomes greater, until for one 
particular value of it a cusp appears at each end of the 
greater axis. This gives what Dr. Hill calls, "the moon 
of maximum lunation.^' At the cusp and therefore in quad- 



212 roiNOABfi'8 MdOAXIQUB OiLESTS. 

tatiiie, the moon becomes for a momeiit stationary with 
reroect to the snn. 

He did not pnrsne the calcalations beyond this point It 
was stated however that any member of this chiss of satellites 
if jnroloDfl^ beyond the moon of maximum Innation would 
oscillate to and fro about a mean place in sjrzygy, never being 
in quadrature. M. Poincar6 points out an inaccuracy in this 
statement. The satellites which are never in quadrature, 
are indeed possible but belong to a diflerent class of solution, 
and are not the analytical continuation of those studied by 
Dr. Hill. He shows that if we prolonged them beyond the 
critical orbit, they would cross the line of quadratures six 
times, cutting their own orbits twice and forming a curve with 
three closed spaces. The class to which the moons without 
quadrature belong has, as a limiting case, a moon which is 
stationary with respect to the sun and which is always either 
in conjunction or opposition. 

M. roinoar6 next goes on to consider the canonical system 
when ^0 is supposed independent of the y^. This is the 

Soneral problem of dynamics where the forces depend on the 
istances only and where we {)roceed by successive approxi- 
mations. The first approximation is 

Xi = const = ai^ ^ = sansi = «|. 

at 

If the solution is to be periodic and of period T, all the 
riiT mast be multii)]es of 2;r. It is then shown that unless 
the Hessian of F^ with respect to the x^ vanish, we can have 
a periodic solution of period T or differing little from T 
when fx is small. If this Hessian vanish we can sometimes 
find a function of F^ whose Hessian does not vanish. If we 
cannot do this the case must be otherwise examined. Such 
an examination shows, that when the Hessian of jP vanishes, 
if the mean value R of F^, with respect to t, admits of a 
maximam or a minimum, periodic solutions are still possible. 

In the problem of three bodies, F^ corresponds to the dis- 
turbing function, and we are led to periodic solutions of the 
second and third kinds. Here R does admit of a maximum 
or a minimum^ and hence such periodic solutions are always 
possible. The periodic solutions of the first kind only cease 
to exist when n' is a multiple of n — n\ When, however, 
this ratio w' : w — n' is nearly a whole number, as happens in 
several cases in the solar system, a large inequality will exist 
and its principal part can be calculated suitably by the help 
of these periodic solutions. 

In the next chapter M. Poincar6 passes on to the considera- 
tion of the characteristic exponents, One solution of a 



poincare's mecanique celeste. 213 

system of differential equations being known, it is required 
to find a solution differing little from it. The equations of 
variations are formed in the usual way, and these brin^ in 
the equations given above, which involve the characteristic 
exponents. As an example of tho use of these equations. Dr. 
Hill's work on the motion of the lunar perigee is quoted, 
where he obtains the principal part of it accurately to a large 
number of places of decimals.* 

It is then considered under what circumstances one or more 
of the exponents become zero, and their effect on the ex- 
istence of a periodic solution. The argument and result 
depend chiefly on two things : first, the presence in, or ab- 
sence from, the Xi of the time explicitly, and, secondly, the 
existence or non-existence of single-valued integrals of the 
system. If canonical equations be used, the exponents arc 
equal and opposite in pairs. With the limitation that F^ 
does not depend on the f/< , two exponents will be zero, and 
unless certain conditions be fulfilled, two exponents only will 
be zero. In the periodic solutions of tho problem of three 
bodies, whether in one plane or not, two exponents and two 
only are zero. The solutions corresponding to these ex- 
ponents are called ^^ solutmis dSgSnerescentes/' and are of 
the form 

^i = Si'\ /;< = Ti"y 

g, = ^: + / sr, lu = t: + / t;\ 

in which the S, 7' are periodic. 

The canonical system given above has an integral which is 
known, namely tlie integral of vis viva. The author de- 
votes himself in Chapter V. principally to prove that, save in 
certain exceptional cases, there does not exist any single- 
valued algebraic or transcendental integral other than tliat 
of vis viva. For this a function ^ is supposed to be analytic 
and single-valued for all values of x, v, // within a certain 
region, and within this region to be developable according 
to powers of ju, thus : 

As long as 0^ is not a function of F^, it is proved that ^ = 
consL cannot be an integral of the system. If 0^ be a func- 
tion of F^, it is possible to find another integral which is 
distinct from F, and which does not reduce to F^ when // is 
zero. In case, however, the Hessian of F^ be zero, an excep- 
tional case arises, and it is in this exceptional case that the 

* Acta Mathematirn, Vol. VIII. See also a note by the writer in 
^fo. Not. R. A. .S., Vol. XVII. No. 6. 



214 POINOABi'S M^ANIQUE oiLBSTE. 

importance of the principle applied to problems in dynamics 
is seen. A general set of conditions is found, necessary bat 
not safiScient for the existence of another integral oi the 
equations. These conditions take the form of relations be- 
tween the co-efficients in the deyelopment of F. 

Applying these to the problem of three bodies, the author 
arrives at the conclasion, that there cannot exist any new trans^ 
cendental or algebraic single-valued integral of tne problem of 
three bodies other than the well-kfiown ones, whether we con- 
sider the particular cases of two, three, or the general case of 
four degrees of liberty mentioned above. This important 
result is of course applicable here to the case only when /t 
is small, a restriction which nevertheless occurs in most 
problems of celestial mechanics. It is pointed out, however, 
that M. Bruns has demonstrated that there cannot exist any 
other algebraic single-valued integral for any values of the 
masses. In actual application M. Poincar^'s theorem will be 
found the more useful, since he includes transcendental as 
well as algebraic forms in his demonstration. 

The most interesting example given to illustrate the general 
theorem is that of the motion of a solid suspended from a 
fixed point and acted on by gravity only. Tne distance of 
the centre of mass of the body from the point of suspension 
is supposed small. Two integrals are known : is it possible 
that a third can exist ?* When the conditions are applied it 
is found that there is nothing to prevent the existence of a 
third integral, but since the conditions are necessary and not 
sufficient nothing proves that it does exist ; such an integral 
however cannot be algebraic. 

Chapters VI. and VII. treat of the disturbing function and 
M. Poincar6's asymptotic solutions, respectively. In the con- 
sideration of the latter a series appears which is divergent in 
a manner aualogous to Sterling's series. 

Ernest W. Brown. 

Haverford Colleqe, Pa., April, 1892. 



* For an elementary discussion of this problem, see Routh's Rigid Dy- 
namics (4th cd.) Vol. II., Chaps. IV., V. 



NOTES. 216 



NOTES. 



A REGULAR meeting of the New York Mathematical 
Society was held Saturday afternoon. May 7, at half-past 
three o^clock, the president in the chair. The council an- 
nounced that Professor D. A. Murray had been appointed as 
librarian to hold office during the remainder of tne current 
year. The following persons having been duly nominated, 
and being recommended by the council, were elected to mem- 
bership : Professor Louis Duncan, Johns Hopkins Uuiversity ; 
Lieutenant George Owen Squier, TJ. S. A. and Johns Hop- 
kins University ; Mr. Joseph Moody Willard, Johns Hopkins 
University ; Miss Ella C. Williams, New York ; Professor 
Robert Woodworth Prentiss, Rutgers College, The following 
papers were read: *'The fundamental fonnulas of analysis 
generalized for space, ^* by Professor A. Macfarlane ; "A sim- 
ple and direct method of separating the roots of ordinary 
equations," by Professor J. W. Nicholson. 

The prize of one thousand marks offered bv the Prince 
Jablonowski Society in the department of mathematics and 
natural science for the year 1893, has for its subject : The de- 
termination of an extensive class of invariants of ordinary 
differential equations in accordance with the notation and 
methods of Lie. 

At the meeting of the London Mathematical Societv on 
April 14, the following six mathematicians were elected hon- 
orarv members : Messrs. Poincare, Hertz, Schwartz, Mittag- 
Lemer, Beltrami, and Willard Gibbs. 

Dr. Kurt 'Blei^qhl, jprivat-docent at the University of Ber- 
lin, has been appointed to a professorship of mathematics at 
that university. T. 8. f. 

Professor H. Weber of Marburg has accepted a call to 
Gottingen to fill the post vacated by Professor H. A. Schwartz. 
Professor Frobenius of Zurich has accepted a call to Berlin. 

M. Bd. 

A MEETING was held on Saturday, February 20, in the com- 
bination room of St John's College, for the purpose of taking 
steps to place a memorial of the late Professor Adams, in West- 
minster Abbey, in recognition of his brilliant discoveries in 
astronomical science. H. j. 



HJIW PUBtlOAXIONH, 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 



OOMPILED BT B. irKSTSBXAKN A CO., NBW YOBK. 



Carte pBOToexAPBiora do Cm. 

pennanent pour Vexfoatioa de __ ^ o— r- 

t'Obeerrfttaire de Puis en ISBl. gi. iii-4. 8 et IfH 



_._ .._ EOmite intemationiil 

ixfoatioa de U OMTle pbotogrBphiqus dn oiel 1 



Drai (U.). GmndlKen fOr ehie Theotta der Panctiooen einer Terlnder- 
UAen raeUao QrOan. Dantaoh baaibeit«t von J. LQroth n. A. 
Sobepp. I«lpng 1B02. 8. 18 a. 0B9 pg. M. IS 

nof d. J. 181)'3 zar Bestimmung v< 
tnabuen DurchiireD^iiistriii] 
lerlblSBl. ' " - 



Verticala dea PoluateniB. Bar] 



!.)■ Honccrapnie de 
ic Se planones gravfee. 



ipbie de I'Obwmtoire de Nioe, 



LifeofSrW. R, Hamilton. 




BULLETIN 

EW YORK 
tTHEMATICAI. SOCIETY. 



VUL. 1. No. III. 



EDWARDS' DIPPEEENTIAL CALCULUS. 217 



EDWARDS' DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 

An Elementary Treatise on the Differential Calculus, with 
appliccUions and numerous examples. By Joseph Edwards, M.A.. 
formerly Fellow of Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge. Second 
edition, revised and enlarged. London and New York, Macmillan 
& Co. 1892. 8vo, pp. xiii + 621. 

When a mathematical text book reaches a second edition, 
80 much enlarged as this, we know at once that the book has 
been received with some favour, and we are prepared to find 
that it has many merits. We are at once struck by Mr. 
Edwards* lucid and incisive style ; his expositions are smgu- 
larly clear, his words well chosen, his sentences well balanced. 
In the text of the book we meet with various useful results, 
notably in the chapter on ** some well known curves," and 
moreover the- arrangement is such that these results are easy 
to find ; and in addition to these, numbers of theorems are 
given among the examples, and, this being a feature for 
which we are specially grateful, in nearly every case the 
authority is cited. Recognizing these merits, however, we 
notice that the book has many defects, some proper to itself, 
some characteristic of its species ; and just oecause it is so 
attractive in appearance, it seems worth while examining it in 
detail, and pointing out certain specially vicious features. 

A book of this size may fairly be required to serve as a 
preparation for the function theory ; at all events, the influence 
of recent Continental researches should be evident to the eyes 
of the discerning. Mr. Edwards' preface strengthens this 
reasonable expectation, for he promises us ''as succinct an 
account as possible of the most important results and methods 
which are up to the present time known." But we soon find 
that the " important results and methods*' are those of the 
Mathematical Tripos ; and in our disappointment we utter a 
fervent wish that mstead of the 'Marge number of university 
and college examination papers, set in Oxford, Cambridge, 
London, and elsewhere,'* Mr, Edwards had consulted an 
equally large number of mathematical memoirs published, 
principally, elsewhere. The Mathematical Tripos for any 
given year is not intended for a Jahrbuch of the progress of 
mathematics during the past year ; and as long as so many 
will insist on regarding it m that light, text books of this type 
will continue to be published. 

Nothing in this book indicates that Mr. Edwards is familiar 
with such works as Stolz's Allgemeine Arithmetik, Dini's 
Fondamentiper la teorica delle funzioni di variabili reali, or 
Tannery's Thiorie des fonctions d'une variable. In support 
of our contention we may instance the definitions of function. 



S18 BDWABDS' D lFfJBMTlA L CAUOULXJB. 

m 

limit, continaitv, etc. On page %, Lejenne Diriohlefs 
definition of a function is adopted. Aocoidinff to this Teiy 

Kneral definition, there need be no analyticd connection 
tween y and z ; for y is a function of x even when the 
Talues of y are arbitrarily assi^ed, as in a table. That Mr. 
Edwards does not adhere to this definition is evident from his 
tacit assumption that every function q}{x) can be repvesented 
by a succession of continuous arcs of curves. Whatever 
definition is adopted for a continuous function y of x, it is 
evident that to small increments of x must oorrespond small 
increments of y ; but Weierstrass has proved that there exist 
functions which have this property, but which have nowhere 
differential coeflScients. Tue well known example of sucli a 
function is 

00 

f{x) =z 2 b^cos {arxir), 

I»s0. 

where a is an odd integer, b a positive constant less than 1, 
and db greater than 1 + d7r/2. According to the accepted 
definition, this function of x is continuous ; according to Mr. 
Edwards' definition, it is not continuous, inasmuch as it can- 
not be represented by a curve y =/(^) with a tangent at 
every point. 

We acknowledge that Mr. Edwards displays a considerable 
degree of consistency in his view of the meaning of a contin- 
uous function, but we insist that after the adoption of the 
curve definition he should have been at some pains to prove 



00 



that the numerous series of the type 2f^{x) scattered 

throughout the book Rive rise to curves with tangents, whereas 
he never even takes the trouble to prove that they are contin- 
uous functions of x in any sense of the term. No more dam- 
aging charge can be brought against any treatise laying claim 
to thoroughness than that of recklessness in the use of infinite 
series ; and yet Mr. Edwards has everywhere laid himself 
open to this charge. One of the most difficult things to teach 
the beginner in mathematics is to give proper attention to the 
convergency of the series dealt with. All the more need, 
then, that a text book of this nature should set an exa mpl e 
of consistent, even aggressive carefulness in this respect. We 
do, it is true, find an occasional mention of convergence (pp. 
9, 81, 454, etc.), but as a rule it is ignored. Mr. Edwaras 
rearranges the terms of infinite and doubly infinite series, 
applying the law of commutation without pointing out that 
his series are unconditionally convergent ; he differentiates 

f{x) = 2fJ{x) term by term, and gets f(x) = 2fJix\ im- 



BDWARDS' DIFFEEBNTIAL CALOTTLUB. 219 

plying that the process is nniversally valid {e.g. p. 84) ; or, at 
all events, giving no hint that there are cases in which the 
differential coefficient of the sum of a convergent series is 
different from the sum of the differential coemcients of the 
individual terms. We find no formal recognition of the im- 
portance of uniform convergence in modern analysis, nothing 
even to suggest that ho has ever heard of the distinction 
between uniform and non-uniform convergence. We begin 
to suspect that he has never looked into Chrystars Algebra. 

The unreasoning mechanical facility thus acquired in per- 
forming operations unhampered by any doubts as to tneir 
legitimacy, naturally leads Mr. Edwards to view with favour 
" the analytical house of cards, composed of complicated and 
curious formulae, which the academic tyro builds with such 
zest upon a slippery foundation,'^ * — and to build up many a 
one. A curious and interesting specimen is 






to be continued to infinity. This expression has been exam- 
ined by Seidel,f who points out that Eisenstein's paper in Crette, 
vol. 28, requires correction. Before such an expression can be 
differentiated, a definite meaning must be assigned to it ; but 
Seidel's conclusion is that, denoting xP^ by a?,, a:*» by aj„ x'^ by 
a?„ and so on, then as x varies from to 1/e*, L Xftn increases 



n = oo 



from to 1/e, while L x^ + i decreases from 1 to 1/e; 



« = 00 



beyond these limits for x, the case is different. In particular 
when X > eV«, the expression diverges. Our objection is not 
to the non-acceptance of Seidel's conclusions, but to the un- 
necessary use of a function of this doubtful character. Ex- 
amples can be found to illustrate every point that ought to 
be brought up in an elementary treatise on the differential 
calculus without ranging over examination papers in search of 
striking novelties. 

Feeling now somewhat familiar with Mr. Edwards' point 
of view, we examine his proofs of the ordinary expansions 
with a tolerably clear idea of what we are to expect. We 
find, of course, " the time-honoured short proof of the exist- 
ence of the exponential limit, which prooi is half the real 
proof plus a suggestio falsi''; we find in the chapter on 
expansions a general aisregard of convergency consider- 
ations ; we find throughout the book the assumption that 



* Professor Chrtbtal, in Ifature, Jane 25, 1891. 
f Abhandlungen der k. Ah. d, Wiss, Bd. zi^ 



S20 EDWABD6' DIFFBBBHTIAL OAUOUhXJB. 

<p(a) = L q^x), and that ^0, 0) = L q^x, y) • ; we 

find the nraal aflsamptions bb to expansibility in series proceed- 
ing by integral powers, with disastrous resolts further on. We 
find tne osnal dread of the complex Tariable, thoa^h Mr. Ed- 
wards has j^yen one or two examples inyolying it, without how- 
eyer explaining what is meant by f{x + iy). We can hardly 
TB^ad these examples, eyen with § 190, as a sufficient roo^- 
nition of the complex yariable in a treatise of this siae. We 
must notice also the thoroughly faulty treatment of the in- 
Terse functions. For exampk, no exptSuiation is giyen of the 

signs in -^ when y = cos -' a; or sin -^ op. Mr. Edwards' attitude 

towards many yalued functions is simple enough ; as a rule, 
he ignores the inoonyenient superfiuity of yalues. He does, 
it is true, giye in § 54 a note, clear and correct, on this point ; 
but he is yery careful to confine this within the limits of the 
single section, and to indicate, by choice of type, that it is 
quite unimportant. 

We pass on now to the second part, applications to plane 
cunres ; and here we must object emphmcally to the intro- 
duction of so many detached and disconnected propositions 
relating to the theory of higher plane curyes. From Mr. 
Bdwaras' point of yiew this is doubtless justified ; we are 
quite ready to acknowledge that we know of no book that 
would enaBle a candidate to answer more questions on sub- 
jects of whose theory he is totally ignorant. The deficiency 
of a curve, e./y., is a conception entirely independent of the 
differential calculus ; bat probably this single page will obtain 
many marks for candidates in the Mathematical Tripos ; these 
we should not grudge if we thought an equivalent would be 
lost by a reproduction of Mr. Edwards' treatment of cusps. 
Our spirits rose when we remarked the italicised phrase on p. 
224^ that there is " in general a cusp *^ when the tangents are 
coincident. But three pages further on we find that the 
exception here indicated is simply our old friend, the conju- 
gate point, whose special exclusion from the class in which it 
appears must be a perpetual puzzle to a thoughtful student 
with no better guidance than a book of this kind. Such a 
student, probably already familiar with projection, knows 
that the real can be projected into the imaginary, and the 
imaginary into the real. If then the acnode, appearing as a 
cusp, has to be specially excluded, why not the crunode ? 
But here Mr. Edwards reproduces the now well established 

* See e.g, p. 122 ; and on this page note also the assamption that the 
relation between A, k, while S0 4- A, y + A;, tend to the limits x, y exerts 
no influence on the result. 



BDWA&DS' DIFFBBBNTIAL CALCULUS. 221 

error, calling tacnodes, formed by the contacfc of real branches, 
doable cnsps of the first and second species, and excluding 
those formed by the contact of imaginary branches ; he even 
goes farther astray, introdacing Cramer's osculinflexion as a 
casp that changes its species. 

This matter of double cusps is a fundamentally serious one, 
and not a mere question of nomenclature. This persistent 
misnaming effectually dis^ises the essential characteristic of 
the cusp. It is not the coincidence of the tangents that makes 
a cusp. From the geometrical point of yiew it is the turning 
back of the (real) tracing point, expressed by the French and 
(German names, {point ae rebroussement, HUckhehrpunht] ; 
from the point of view of algebraical expansions (of y in 
terms of re, y = being the tangent) the essential character- 
istic of a single cusp is that at some stage in the expansion 
there shall be a fractional exponent with an even denominator, 
so that the branch changes from real to imaginary along its 
tangent ; from the point of view of the function theory, which 
is really equivalent to the last, the simple cusp is character^ 
ised by the presence of a Verzweigungspunkt combined with 
a double point. The simple cusp, that is, presents itself as 
an evanescent loop. A double cusp, then, in the sense in 
which Mr. Edwards uses the term, does not exist. There 
cannot bo two consecutive cusps, vertex to vertex ; for the 
branch if supposed continued through the cusp, changes from 
real to imaginary ; and two distinct cuBpB, brought together to 
give a point of this appearance, produce a quadruple point. 

While on this subject, we must mention Mr. Edwards' rule 
for finding the nature of a cusp. Find the two values of 

T-^ ; these by their signs determine the direction of convexity 

(§ 296). How does this apply e.g. to y* = x* ? 

This confusion regarding cnsps is made worse bj the 
assumption already noticed that when f(x, y) = is the 
equation of the curve, y can be expanded in a series of integral 
powers of x. This error is repeated on p. 258, where to obtain 
the branches at the origin, this being a double point, we are 

told to expand y by means of the assumption y =/?2; + Vr + 

etc. The whole exposition of this theory of expansion is 
most inadequate. In § 382 there is no hint that the terms 
obtained are the be^nning of an infinite series, giving the 
expansion of (say) y in powers, not necessarily integral, of x ; 
there is no hint what to do when the first terms of the expan- 
sion are found ; there is no suggestion of the interpretation 
of the result when two expansions begin with the same terms. 
A thoughtful student may by a happy comparison of scattered 



223 XDWABDCr' DUVmaMSTlAL OAJUIUWB. 

examples (p. 200, and ex. 3, p. 230) arriTe at the ooneot 
theory ; bat he siuely desenres better gaidaDoe. 

One or two more points must be noticed. The theory of 
asymptotes, when two directions to infinity coincide, cannot 
be satisfactorily dereloped without assuming a knowledge of 
doable points ; and the only way of giving the true geometrioal 
significance is to introduce the conception of the line infini^, 
and to consider the nature of the intersections of the cnrre by 
this line. A tangent lying entirely at infinity does not ''count 
as one of the n theoretical asymptotes'' ; if counted among 
the asymptotes at all, it has to be counted as the equivalent 
of two out of the n. This is one of the stron^pst arguments 
against iDcludin^ the line infinity in enumerating the asymp- 
totes. The vanons expressions for the radius of curvature 
involve an ambiguity in sign ; what is the meaning of this ? 
The omission of this explanation causes obscurity, notably in 

L830. The equation of a curve, referred to oblique axes, 
dng (p(x, y) = 0, what is the condition for an infiexion P 
As a matter of fact it is the same as in the case of rectangular 
axes, given on p. 2G4 ; but as this is obtained from a formula 
for the radius of curvature, the investigation is not applicable. 
Throughout Mr. Edwards displays an almost exclusive pref- 
erence for rectangular axes, and seems to regard the metrio 
properties so obtained as of equal importance with descriptive 
properties. For instance, in the case of an ordinary double 
point (p. 224) instead of the three cases usually distinguished, 
we have /(mr, the additional one being that of perpendicular 
tangents. 

In the third part we notice that in the chapter on *^ undeter- 
mined forms '' there is no discussion of the case of two variables, 
though it is on this that we have to rely for a rigorous proof 

of the theorem , . = , -[ . We recoe^nize an old friend, 

dxoy oydx ° 

the discussion of the limit of oo/oo, in which it is first as- 
sumed^ and then proved, that the limit exists. The state- 
ment of ex. 17, p. 457, is somewhat misleading ; the formula 
there given for the expansion of {x -h a)" is true when m is a 
positive integer ; but when m = —1, it is evidently not true 
for a;= —b, —2^, etc.* The treatment of maxima and 
minima of functions of two variables (§§ 497-601) is incom- 
plete and incorrect. The geometrical illustration, as given on 
p. 424, omits the case of a section with a cusp^ which is the 
simplest case that can occur when r^ = «' ; of the more com- 

S Heated cases Mr. Edwards attempts no discrimination ; he 
oes not even stat^ correctly the principles that must ^ide 
us in this discrimination. The inexactness of the ordinary 

* Laurent, TrcM d^Analyee, m., 886. 



NOTE ON BESULTANXS. '^2A 

criteria (given in § 498) appears at once from the example 
u=: {y* — 2px){y* — 2qz) [Peano]. The origin is a point 
satisfying the preliminary conditions ; taking then for x, y, 
small quantities h, k, the terms of the second degree are posi- 
tive for all values except A = ; when A = 0, the terms of 
the third degree vanish, and the terms of the fourth degree 
are positive ; nevertheless the point does notgive a minimum^ 
which it should do by the test of § 498. For we can travel 
away from in between the two parabolas, so coming to an 
adjacent point at which u has a small negative value, while 
for points inside or outside both parabolas the value of u is 
positive. The truth is, the nature of the value a of the func- 
tion w at a point {x^ yj at which ^ and ^ yanish, depends on 

the nature of the singularity of the curve t« = a at this point. 
If this curve has at (x^, y^ an isolated point of any degree of 
multiplicity, we have a true maximum or minimum of u ; but if 
through (a?,, yj pass any number of real non-repeated branches 
of the curve, we have not a maximum or minimum ; in 
Peano's example the branches coincide in the immediate 
neighbourhood of the origin, but then they separate, and there- 
fore we have not a minimum value for u. 

We object, then, to Mr. Edwards' treatise on the Dififer- 
ential Calculus because in it, notwithstanding a specious show 
of rigour, he repeats old errors and faulty methods of proof, 
and introduces new errors ; and because its tendency is to 
encourage the practice of cramming *' short proofs'' and 
detached propositions for examination purposes. 

Charlotte Anoas Soott. 

Bbtn Mawb, Pa , May 18, 1892. 



NOTE ON BESULTANTS. 

BT PROP. M. W. HASKELL. 

On page 151 of Prof. Gordan's lectures on determinants* 
is to be found the theorem 

where /?/, ^ denotes the resultant of two functions / and ^ of 
a single variable x of degree m and n respectively. This 

* Vorluungen Hber Invariantentheorie, herausgegeben von Kbbschbn- 
STBINEB. ErstQt Band. Leipzig, 1885. 



234 KOTB OK BESULTANT8. 

theorem is proved under the restriction that n is not greater 
than m and that the degree of the arbitrary function ^ shall 
not be greater that m — w. The author ffoes on to say : *'e8 
w&re eine sch&tzenswerthe Arbeit, anch den Fall zu unter- 
suchen, in welchem m < n ist, d. h. allgemein die Prage zu 
behandeln : Wie hangen die Resultanten -B^ + ^.^r,^ und Bf^^ 
zusammen, wenn wir uber den Orad der diesbezuglichen 
Functionen keinerlei Voraussetzung machen ? '' 

This statement is somewhat remarkable on account of the 
ease with which it may be shown that the theorem is true in 
general in exactly the form riven above. 

I. Let F=f'\-(l>,tp, Then, no matter what the degree of 
the functions involved may be, if the degrees of i^and ^ be m 
and n respectively, n is certainly not greater than m, and the 
degree of ^ cannot be greater than m — n. Hence, by Qor- 
dan's result as quoted, 

Rf,^ = -ff^-*.^,^ = -Br.*. 

That is, the theorem is true without restriction. 

II. Suppose the resultant i2^, ^ to be found in the usual way 
by the method of greatest common divisor. Two functions 
A and B of jc, of degree n — 1 and m — 1 respectively can be 
found to satisfy the relation : 

1 = A.f ■¥ B.^. 

The coefficients of A and B are rational, but not integral, 
functions of the coefficients of /and ^, whose least common 
denominator is the resultant -B/, ^. 
It follows that 

l^A{f^(j>,tp) + {B^Atp)(fi 

and the resultant Rf ^^.y^^^ is the least common denominator 
of the coefficients of A and {B — Afp). But the coefficients 
of jp will evidently not occur in the denominators at all, and 
the least common denominator is therefore identical with that 
of the coefficients of A and B, viz. i2/,^. 
Berkeley, Cal. , May 12, 1892. 



COLLIlJfEATIOK A8 A MODE OF MOTIOK. 225 

COLLINEATION AS A MODE OP MOTION.* 

BT HAXDfE BdCHEB, PH.D. 

In the following paper I have attempted togiye an account 
of some Tery simple matters, which, although familiar to 
many, appear to have attracted but little attention in this 
country. The subject, however, has never, as far as I know, 
been presented from precisely the point of view here adopted. 

Perhaps the most important difference between the old and 
the new geometry lies in the extended use made during the 
present century of geometric transformations.! The change 
which has come about in this direction is due in part to the 
influence of certain branches of applied mathematics in 
which one has to deal not merely with geometric configura- 
tions but also with certain changes which these configurations 
are forced to undergo. There are however two distinct 
ways of looking at a transformation. First we may consider 
the original and the transformed figure as standing side by 
side, or even as occupying portions of the same space, the 
latter being in a certain sense a picture of the former ; or 
secondly, we may consider the original figure to be gradually 
deformed accoraing to a given law into the tran^ormed fig- 
ure. Each of these points of view can be tmced to a physical 
origin. Perspective and allied subjects strikingly illustrate 
the first, while the second will most naturally be adopted in 
hydrodynamics, the theory of elasticity, etc. Now while the 
first of the above mentioned ways of looking at a transforma- 
tion has the advantage of introducing no unnecessary element 
into the consideration, the second in turn has the advantage 
of making the idea of a transformation lose much of its 
abstractness, for by its aid we are enabled to see the points of 
the original firare rearrange themselves by a gradual motion 
into the transformed figure. 

I wish to illustrate this way of looking at a transformation 
as a mode of motion by considering one of the simplest of 
transformations, the so-called linear transformation orcolline- 
ation,t and for the sake of simplicity I will confine myself to 
two dimensions. 

* Lecture deliyered June 4, 1892, before the New York Mathematical 
Society. 

f The following remarks should be understood to apply only to point 
transformations, t.d., to transformations which carry points oyer into 
points. 

X The word coUineation seems to be by far the best name for this trans- 
formation, not only because it is as applicable in synthetic as in analytic 
geometry, but also because the ambiguity which arises in speaking of a 

16 



226 COLLINEATIOK AS A HODB OF MOnOK. 

Using anj system of tri linear coordinates {x^y x^ 2;,), a ool- 
lineation will be expressed by the linear formols : 

pa;/ = a, a;, + a, a:, + a, a?„ (1) 

P< = ^,^. +^,2;, + c,a:„ 

(p being an undetermined factor of jproportionalitj). 

It is however well known that m general a collineation 
leaves three points of the plane fixed while all other points 
are carried over into new positions. If now these three fixed 
points be taken as the vertices of the triangle of reference, 
the collineation will evidently be expressed by the very simple 
formulsB : 

px^ = ax^, pa;,' = &r„ px^'=^cx^. (2) 

These formulae tell us into what position each point of the 
plane is earned over by the transformation ; they give us, 
nowever, no clue as to wnat path it is advisable to regard as 
traversed by each point in passing from its originsd to its 
final position. 

To determine this, let us first consider the case in which 
two of the fixed points are the circular points at infinity, the 
third (finite) fixed point being denoted by the letter 0. This 
collineation may be shown by a simple calculation, to consist 
of a rotation of the plane as a whole about the point 
combined with a uniform stretching of the plane away 
from (or contraction of the plane towards) this same point. 
Id the case of a rotation, however, each point will naturally 
be regarded as moving from its original to its final position 
along the arc of a circle whose centre is at ; in the case of 
expansion or contraction on the other hand, the lines of mo- 
tion will be the straight lines through 0, the motion taking 
place away from in the case of expansion and towards in 
the case of contraction ; the amount of the motion in any 
case being proportional to the distance from 0. If, then, we 
have a combination of rotation and expansion (or contraction) 
the lines of motion will evidently be equal logarithmic spirals 
with pole at 0. Taking as the origin of a system of polar 
coordinates, the equation of this family of logarithmic spirals 
will be : 

r = A^'^ , 

linear transformation without specifying what system of coordinates we 
use is a very real objection, as ttiere are other coordinates besides triiinear 
(for example, Darboux's tetracyclic coordinates) in which linear trans- 
formations are actually considered. The term '* homographic trans- 
formation," introduced by Chasles, is not as expressive as the term col- 
lineation used some years before by M5bius. It does not seem as though 
Chasles' ignorance of the German language could justify us in adopting 
his poorer names in place of the original oetter ones. 



OOLUKEATIOK AS A MODB OF HOTIOK. 227 

where ^ is a constant determining the shape of the spirals, 
while ^ is a parameter varying from one member of the fam- 
ily to another. We shall nnd it more convenient to write in 
place of k the quotient A,/A,. 

Let us now introduce a system of trilinear coordinates in 
which the vertices of the triangle of reference are the circular 
points at infinity and the point 0. We will denote these 
coordinates by the letters (5, v> 0» ^^^ ^^^ ^^^ referring to 
the imaginary sides of the triangle of reference through 0, 
while the last refers to the line at infinity. In this system 
of homogeneous "circular" coordinates the equation of the 
above mentioned family of logarithmic spirals is readily found 
to be : 

^*,+tt, ,^-tt, ^-«*,= ^8*1, 

or since k^, k^, A are any constants : 

provided that a + /^ + ;^ = 0. 

We can now write out at once the equations of the lines of 
motion in the general case where we have as fixed points any 
three points of the plane, for we have merely to project the 
point and the circular points at infinity in the special case 
wo have just considered into any other three points in order 
that the logarithmic spirals should go over into the lines of 
motion of a general collineation. The equation of the family 
of lines of motion^ referred to the triangle of reference whose 
vertices are the fixed points^ is then : 

X- x\^ xy = G, 

where G is the variable parameter of the family while the 
constants a, /3, y (which are connected by the relation 
« 4- /? 4- >^ = 0) depend upon the coeflBcients a, h, c of the 
linear transformation (2) above.* 

The fixed points of a collineation may be all real, or one 
of them may be real and the other two conjugate imaginary. 
The last of these two possibilities need not detain us long, as 
it may be obtained by a real projection from the special case 
considered above where two of the fixed points were the cir- 
cular points at infinity. In it we shall have in our triangle 
of reference one vertex and the side opposite real, while tne 
remaining vertices and sides are imaginarjr. The lines of 
motion will have a spiral form, each consisting of an infinite 

* It is easily found that a, fl, y axe proportiozial respeotively to 
log ?, log -, log -. 



228 OOLLTRBATIOK AS A MODB 09 MOTIOK. 

nnmber of coils about the real fixed point. As these coils 
become larger they will become more and more elongated 
in the direction farthest from the real side of the triangle of 
reference, until each coil finally assumes a hyperbolic lorm, 
running out on the side of the nzed point farthest from the 
real side of the triangle of reference through infinity, and 
completing itself on the other side of the real line in question. 
These hyperbolic coils ultimately approach the real side of the 
triangle of reference asymptotically. 

When all of the fixed points are real, however, the lines of 
motion will have completely lost their spiral character. Here 
again there are two cases to consider, according as the three 
coefficients a, i, c of the transformation have all the same 
sign, or one of them a different sign from the other two. 
The three indefinitely extended sides of the triangle of refer- 
ence divide the platie into four parts, one finite and the other 
three infinite. We may speak of each of these parts as *' tri- 
angles,'^ in spite of the fact that each of the three infinite 
triangles appears to be diyided into two distinct portions by 
the Ime at infinity. Using this terminology we may say that 
when all three coefficients a, b, c have the same sign, the 
interior of each of these four triangles is transform^ into 
itself ; but when one of the three coefficients has a different 
sign from tlic other two the triangles are interchanged in 
pairs. We will begin with the simpler of the two cases, in 
which each triangle is transformed into itself. The lines of 
motion in this case will be found to lie as follows : — * 

Within the finite triangle the lines of motion all start from 
the vortex corresponding to the smallest of the three coeffi- 
cients,! and run without singularity to the vertex correspond- 
ing to the largest of them ; at each of their extremities these 
curves are tangent to the side of the triangle joining that 
extremity with the vertex corresponding to the coefficient 
which lies in magnitude between tne other two. The side of 
the triangle joining the vertices which correspond to the 
greatest and the smallest coefficient is, of course, itself a line 
of motion, and the same is true of the broken line consisting 
of the other two sides of the triangle. 



* One way of seeing this is to consider first the special case in which 
the triangle of reference consists of two lines at ri^bt angles to one 
another and the line at infinity, and then to project this into the general 
case. In the special case just mentioned we nave t# deal with the same 
transformation which occurs in the theory of small irrotational strains 
(see for instance MrNCHiN, Uniplaner Kinematics, chap. v.). It is inter- 
esting to notice that this is a case in which the idea of lines of motion 
is naturally suggested by a physical application. 

f The coefficients a, h, c are said to correspond to the vertices opposite 
the sides Xx = 0, Xs = 0, a;t = respectively. 



GOLLIKEATIOK AS A MODS OF MOTIOK. 229 

The lines of motion wifchin each of the other three triangles 
will be precisely like those jast described, the difference in 
appearance being doe to the fact that these triangles them- 
selves extending through infinity, some of the lines of motion 
in one of these three triangles and all of the lines of motion 
in tlic other two will nin through infinity on their way from 
the vertex corresponding to the smallest of the coefficients to 
the one corresponding to the largest. 

It should be noticeo that while these curves are in ^neral 
transcendental and extend onlv between two fixed points of 
the collineation where they suddenly stop, we can find special 
cellineations for which the curves are algebraic and all of any 
degree we please. The family of curves will not look partic- 
ularly different in these cases from what it does when the 
curves are transcendental, but the curves themselves will have 
a different shape. They will now no longer stop at the two 
fixed points just mentioned, but will continue beyond them 
into another triangle, having singularities in these points 
when their degree is higher than the second (in the case of 
cubics, a cusp in one point, and a point of inflection in the 
other). The case where the lines of motion are conies all 
tangent at the extremities of one of the sides of the triangle 
of reference to the other two sides deserves special mention 
owing to its frequent occurrence in projective geometry.* 

Coming now to the case where one of the coefficfents of 
the transformation has a different sign from the other two, it 
is readily seen that the lines of motion are here imaginary 
although each contains an infinite number of real points. 
Every point of the plane is therefore carried over from its 
original to its final piosition through an imaginary path. We 
are therefore unable to follow the motion of the points of the 
plane. It is however possible to break up the transformation 
into two parts, one verv simple, the other more complicated 
but having real lines or motion. Thus for instance we can 
break up the collineation : 

pa;/=-2a;,, /ar,' = 3a;,, /ox,' = 6a?,, 

into the two collineations : 

A^, = — «, , /w,= z^, pi, = a:,; 
/ox/ = 2x„ px^' = 35„ pa?/ = 65,. 



* We may of course have oonioa aa lines of motion when two of the 
fixed points of the collineatioD are imaginary, rotation of the plane 
about a point being a special case of this. In fact, whenever the lines of 
motion are conies, whether the fixed points are real or imaginary, the 
collineation will be merely a non-euoUdian rotation if we take one of 
these conies as the absolute. 



230 OOLLIIOSATIOK A8 A MODE OF MOTIOK. 

The second of these has as its lines of motion the real tran- 
scendental curves discussed above, while I may perhaps be 
allowed to describe the first as a " projective reflection '' with 
regard to the side rr, = and the opposite vertex. The na- 
ture of the transformation brought about by this projective 
reflection is so simple that it need not be discussed nere, and 
that we do not need the assistance of lines of motion to get a 
perfectly clear idea of it.* It is of course merely the pro- 
jective generalization of ordinary reflection ; reflection with 
regard to the ^xis of X, for instance, in a system of rectan- 
gular coordinates, being mereljr a projective reflection with 
regard to this line and the infinitely distant point on the axis 
of V, 

It remains to mention some of the literature connected 
with this subject. The transcendental curves, which we have 
called the lines of motion of the colUneation, occur incident- 
ally in a paper by Clebsch and Gordan in the Matheniatische 
Annalen, vol. i. They were however first systematically con- 
sidered bv Klein and Lie in vol. iv. of the same journal 
(1871). The reader is referred to this paper for the modifica- 
tion of the lines of motion which occur in the various special 
cases (when the colli neation has two coincident fixed points, 
etc.). The very brief indications there given can readily be 
amplified as has been done in this paper for the general case. 
The reader will also find in this beautiful paper an account 
of some of the remarkable properties of these curves, which 
thus gain an interest far above that attaching as yet to most 
other transcendental curves, owing to the fact that their prop- 
erties form to some extent a systematic whole, not a mass of 
facts more or less ingeniously proved. More important still 
however is the connection of these lines of motion with Lie's 
now famous theorj of differential equations,! some of the 
very earliest of Lies investigations in this direction being 
contained in the paper just mentioned. By the introduction 
of intinitesimal transformations it is possible to obtain the 
lines of motion directly without first considering the special 
case in which the circular points at infinity are two of the 
fixed points. We thus find the equation of the lines of motion 
as the solution of a differential equation. 

In still another way must Klein's name be connected with 

* It should however be noticed that a projective reflection (and there- 
fore any ordinary reflection) may be regarded as having real lines of 
motion, viz., conies. This will bo most readily seen if we consider that 
the projective reflection with regard to the line at infinity and a finite 
point is equivalent to a rotation through an angle of 1^0^ about that 
point. 

f See Lie's recently published book on this subject edited by Scheffers. 



KOTE& 231 

this subject. A few preliminary remarks are necessary to ex- 
plain this. The linear transformation of a single straight line 
into itself may be studied from precisely the same point of 
view as wo adopted above in the case of two dimensions. 
Three cases would again present themselves : one in which the 
two fixed points are imaginary, and two in which they are 
real. In one of these last the transformation cannot be re- 
garded as a real motion, while in the other two it can. Now 
the extension of our theory which suggests itself to us here 
depends upon the fact that the complex points of a straight 
line can be conveniently represented in a plane of which 
the line is the axis of reals. The linear transformation of the 
line will then give us a corresponding transformation of 
the plane which of course should not be confounded with the 
collineation discussed above. The coeflScients here need no 
longer be real to give us a real transformation. This new 
transformation of the plane may also be regarded as a mode 
of motion and has been so treated by Klein in his lectures for 
a number of years (see an article by Prof. Cole in the Annals 
of Mathematics for June, 1890, and part ii. chap. i. of the 
recently published Modulfunctionen of Klein-Fricke). The 
idea cannot fail to suggest itself that the transformation of 
the plane which we have called collineation should be general- 
ized in a similar way by representing the complex as well as 
the real points of the plane. I do not know of this subject 
having been treated; it would of course lead us into four 
dimensional space. 

Harvard UwivBRBrrT, June, 1892, 



NOTES. 



A REGULAR meeting of the New York Mathehatioal 
SocxETY was held Saturday afternoon, June 4, at half past 
two o'clock, the president in the chair. The following per- 
sons having been duly nominated, and being recommended by 
the council, were elected to membership : Dr. James Whit- 
bread Lee Glaisher, Trinity College, Cambridge, England ; 
Mr. Ferdinand Shack, New York, N. Y. The following 
papers were read : " An expression for the total surface of an 
ellipsoid in terms of (T- and p- functions, inoluding an appli- 
cation to the surface of a prolate spheroid, '' by Professor J. 
H. Boyd ; *' On collineation as a mode of motion,*' by Dr. 
Maxime B6cher ; '* On Peters' formula for probable error,'' by 
Professor W. Woolsey Johnson. 



282 KOTES. 

The meeting of the Deutsche Mathematiker - Vereiniffung, 
which will be held this Bummer as qbuuI in conjunction with 
that of the OeseUsehaft deuUeher Kaiurfarecher und Aerzie, 
will take place at tTarenberg, September 12 to 18. Special 
interest attaches to the meeting this year on account of the 
organisation by the Union of an exhibition of medals, charts, 
apparatus and instruments used in pure and applied mathe- 
matics. The Bayarian ffOTernment will lend its aid to the 
enterprise, which has dready secured the co-operation of 
several eminent mathematicians, of the leading publishers, 
instrument makers etc., and of a large number of hiffh- 
schools and polytechnic institutes. The object of the euii- 
bition is *^ to extend the use of the various auxiliaries in the 
shape of models, apparatus and instruments, which are of 
advantage for instruction and invertigation in pure and ap- 
plied mathematics, and to forward the interests of this kind 
of scientific work.'' A recent prospectus contains a prelimi- 
nary classification of articles, giving as the main heaas : (1^ 
geometry and theory of functions, ^) arithmetic, algebra ana 
mtegral calculus, (3) mechanics and mathematicttl pnysics. 

Pbofbssob Pbano, the editor of the Bwista di Maiema^ 
tica^ has undertaken a veir interesting work, the parts of 
which will appear as supplements to his journal It is an 
extended collection of the formulas and results of mathe- 
matics, expressed throughout in the language or notation of 
symbolic logic. The first signature of the work accompanies 
the number of the Rivista for April, 1892 (vol. ii., No. 4). 

The publication of the collected works of the late Professor 
Weber has been undertaken by the Gottingen Academy of 
Sciences. The collection will probably fill six large octavo 
volumes, and it is to be completed by 1894. T. s. f. 

Dr. Arthur SchOnflibs, privatdocent at the University 
of Gottingen, has been appointed professor extraordinarius 
at the same university. 

Harvard University. Besides the more elementary 
courses, the class-room work in which will amount to twenty- 
three hours a week throughout the year, the following mathe- 
matical courses are offered for the year 1892-93 : 

By Professor J. M, Peirce ; Algebraic plane curves ; Qua- 
ternions (second course) ; Theory of functions (first course) ; 
Linear associative algebra, and tne algebra of logic. 

By Professor C. J. White ; Planetary theory. 

By Professor Byerly ; Trigonometric series, and spherical 



KBW PUBLICATIONS, 233 

harmonics ; Problems in the mechanics of rigid bodies (second 
course). 

By Professor B. 0. Peirce ; Potential function ; Wave mo- 
tion. 

By Dr. Osgood ; Higher al^bra ; Theory of functions (sec- 
ond course) ; Theory of substitutions ; Invariants. 

By Dr. Bdcher; Mathematical seminary on geometrical 
topics ; Functions defined by differential equations ; Curvi- 
linear co-ordinates and Lam6 s functions. 

Each of the above courses extends throughout the whole 
academic year, and in most of them the instructor lectures 
three hours a week. A number of courses largely mathemati- 
cal are also offered in the departments of Physics and Engi- 
neering, as for instance a course on the mathematical theory 
of electrostatics and electromagnetism by Professor B. 0. 
Peirce. m. b6. 



NEW PUBLICATIONS. 

COMPILED BY B. WE8TEBMANN 4 CO., KBW YORK. 

Ajlbeiten, Astionomische, des E. K. Gradmessungs-Buieau. Band 
III. LftDgenbestimmungen. Wien 1892. gr. 4. 180 pg. M. 16.00 

Bauer (C). Uebersiohtstafel zur Vergleichung der Tageslftnge und Son- 
nenstttnde nach mitteleuropftischer und Ortszeit fOr das Gebiet 
zwischen V" 80' a. 8" SO' Ostlicber Lftnge. Speier 1892. 1 Tafel in 
qu. fol. M 0.40 

Bbmtobal t Ureta (H.). Teoria elemental de las Superficies Regladas. 
Madrid 1892. 4. 28 pg. M. 1.50 

Brbusing (A.). Das Verebnen der Kageloberfli&cbe fCLr Gradnetzent- 
wlirfe. Leipzig 1892. gr. 8. 76 pg. m. 6 Tafebi u. 18 Figuren. 

M. 8.00 

Brodmann (C). Untersuchungen fiber den ReibongscoeflOicienten yon 
Flassigkeiten. Gattingen 1891. 8. 87 pg. M. 2.00 

BRttOKNBR (J. M.) Das Ottojanosohe Problem ; eine mathematisch- 
historische Studie. Leipzig 18^. gr. 4. 25 pg. m. 1 Tafel. 

M. 1.00 

Cell]£bibr (Ch.). Conrs de Mtehanique. Paris 1892. gr. in-8. ayeo 
nombreoses figures. 12 fr. 

Chamoussbt (F.). NouYelle Th6orie 6l^mentaire de la Rotation des Corps. 
Gyroscope, Toupie, etc. Paris 1892. 8. 22 pg. ay. 1 planche. 

2fr. 

Damee (J.). Beitrftge snr theoretischen und rochnerischen Behandlung 
der Ansgieiohong periodisoher Schrauben^ler. Berlin 1892. gr. 8. 
a u. 46 pg. M. 2.00 



SM ITBW PUBUOATIOKS. 

Dbdbkinb (B.). Stetigkeit mid imtioiuile Zahkn. 8. Anflage. 
Bnonschweig 1892. M. 1.00 

FoBBSTBE (W.). Ueber die Stallimg der AstronomiiB Inneriialb der 
Natarwisseiischaften und sa den GkdsteswiseenscluifteiL Berlin 
1891. 4. 21 pg. M. 1.50 

Galilei (G.). Dialog liber die beiden haiipMohliohsfceii Welttysteme, 
das Ptolemiische mid das Eopemikaniaehe. Aus dem ItaUeniKlieii 
tibersetKt a. erl&atert toq E. Stnraas. Ldpng 1898. gr. 8. 79 a. 
586 pg. M. 16.00 

GoRinEssiAT (F.). Beoherohee ear T^qwition peracmnelle dans te ob- 

' 16 

H. 



eervatloiM artronomiqaee de paange. Ljoa 1898. gr, iQ-8« 1^7 nr* 



GoTHABD (E.). SpekthUfocognflal tannlmtej ok [Stiidlen ana dam 
Gebiete der ^pektralphotographie]. Bodapeet 1891. gr. 8. 81 jpe. 

M. L50 

GouuKB (0. M.). Etadee th^oriquea et pratiques ear lee leTem topo- 
m^triqaes et en partioalier ear la taoh^metrie. Paris 1898. 8. 
ayeo 108 flgaree et portrait 8 fr. 

HABTincB (F.). Handb. d. niederen Geodlsie. In 7. AofL bearb. t. 
J. Wastler. Wien, Seidel & a $6.40 

Hausdobff (F.). Zur Theorie der astronomischen Strahlenbreohnong. 
Leipaig 1891. 8. 86pg. BLlJO 

HiUN(E.). Untersachangen fiber die Gkiass'sche Qnadratormethode. 
Berlin 1898. 4. M. 1.00 

Hetdbn (B.). Elementare EinfQhmng in die Lehre Ton den harmon- 
isohen Bewegungen. Berlin 1892. 4. M. 1.00 

HiLFiKER (J.). Catalogae d^Etoiles Innalres. (Observatoire de Neu- 
ch&tel.) Neuoh&tei 1891. 4. 68 pg. M. 8.00 

Kefebstein (H.). Die philosophischen Gmndlagen der Physik nach 
Kant*s '* Metaphysischon Anfangsgrtlnden der Naturwiasenschaft " 
und dem Manuscript " Uebergang von den metaphysiscben Anfangs- 
grQnden der Naturwissenschaift zur Physik." Hamburg 1892. gr. 4. 
42 pg. M. 2.50 

KnzBERGEB (J.). Entwioklun^ des 8. Kepplersohen Gesctzes. Ein 
Beitrag zum Brocardschen Winkel. Lanaskron 1891. 8. 12 pg. 

M. 1.00 

Kkothe (E. P.J. Bestimmung aller Untergruppen der projectiven 
Gruppe des Imearen complexes. Leipsig 1892. 8. 68 pg. 

M. 1.50 

KoBALD (E.). Ueber das Versicherungswesen der Bergwerks-Bmder- 
laden und fthnlicher Casseneinrichtungen. Theii I : Die Inyalidi- 
t&tsyersicherung. Neue Darstollung der Theorie und EinfQhrunff in 
dieselbe. Loeben 1892. gr. 8. M. 2.00 

EoENiGS (G.). Lemons de ragr^gation classique des Math^matiques. 
Paris 1892. 4. 8 et 208 pg. lithographies. M. 9.00 

Lerat (le P. A.). Complement de Tessai sur la synthte des forces phy- 
siques. In-8. Gauthier-Villars. 4 fr. 50 



KEW PUBLICATIOKB. 235 

LiNDMAN (C. F.). Om ntLgra, Integraler. I. (Stockholm, Ofy. Vet. Ak. 
F5rh. 189d.) 8. 15 pg. M. 1.00 

Madras. Resnlts of Observations of the Fixed Stars made with the 
Meridian Cirole at the Gbvemment Observatory, Madras, in the years 
1871, 1872, and 1878. Madras 1802. loy. 4. 

MoEGKE (E.) IJeber zweiachsig-symmetrische Gorven vierter Ordnang 
mit zwei Doppelpankten. Theil II. Qross-Strehlitz 1802. gr. 4 
16 pg. m. 1. Tafel. M. 1.20 

MoucHOT (A.). Les Nouyelles bases de la g6om6trie sup^rieure (Q^o- 
m^trie de position). In-8. Gauthier-Villars. 6 fr. 

Mi^ELLER-EazBACH (W.). Physikalische Anfgaben fQr den mathema- 
tischen Unterricht. Berlin 1802. gr. 8. 8 a. 147 pg. M. 2.00 

Nassiruddin-el-Tousst, Traits da Qaadrilatdre. Texte arabe aveo 
tradaction franQaise par Ai. Paoha Caratheodory. Constantinople 
1801. gr. in-8. 157 et 214 pg. M. 12.00 

NiBMf^LLER (F.). Anwendnnff der linealen Aasdehnangslehre von Grass- 
mann an die Theorie aer Determinanten. OsnabrUck 1892. 4. 
22 pg. M. l.SO 

Panzerbieter (W.). Ueber einige LSsungen des Triseotionsproblems. 
Berlin 189i. 4. M. 1.00 

Petersen (J.). M^thodes et theories poar la resolution des probldmes de 
construction gtometricjue, avec application k plus de 400 probldmes. 
Traduit par 0. Chcmm. 2 ^ition. Paris 1892. pet. in-8. aveo 
figures. 4 fr. 50 

PoiNCARi (H.). Lemons sur la theorie de I'^lastioit^, r^g^ par Emile 
Borel et Jules Drach. gr. in-8. G. Carr6. 6 fr. 60 

Coara de la Facalt^ dei eciencen de Paris. 

Rosenow (H.). Die Norroalformen fQr die 472 verscbiedenen Typen 
eigentlicher biiinearer Formen. Berlin 1892. 4. M. 1.00 

EouTH (E. J.). The Advanced Part of a Treatise on the Dynamics of a 
System of Rigid Bodies : Being Part 2 of a Treatise on the Whole 
Subject. 6th ed. , Revised and Enlarged. 8vo. pp. 482. MacmU- 
Ian. 14. 

ScHAPiRA (H.). Theorie allgemeiner Cofunctionen und einige ihrer 
Anwendungen. (In 3 Bftnden.) Band I. Theil 2. Heft L Leip- 
zig 1892. gr. 8. pg. 8 u. 1—224. M. 6.00 

Thaer (A.). Eennzeichen der Entartung einer Fl&che 2. ordnung. 
Leipzig 1892. gr. 4. 12 pg. M. 60 

Waoner (W.). Anleitun^ zur LSsung von Aufgaben mittelst geome- 
trischer Oorter. Hei(&lberg 1892. gr. 8. 8 u. 72 pg. m. Figuren. 

M. 1.00 

Washington. Observations made during the year 1887 at the U. S. 
Naval Observatorv, with three Appendices. Washington 1892. 4 
with 10 plates, cloth. 

Watts (W. M.). Index of Spectra. Appendix C (Spectrum of Iron. 
Telluric lines of the Solar Spectrum as observed by Becker. Hydro- 
gen Spectrum as observed by Ames). Manchester 1892. 8. 104 
pg. M. 6.60 



VamaBRO (J.). BoittSge *nr ErforechuDi? dor Molekularkrafte in chera- 
lach eintaoboa SubstaDzen auf Oiundlage der Tbermodjoatnik. 
Moaknu 18B3. 8. IM pg. 

Weissekborn (H,)- Zur Goachicbto der Einfilhrung der jetzigen Ziffem 
in. Biiropa durch Gerbert. Beclin 1893. gr. 8. 5 u. 123 pg. 

M. 3.00 

Wbltzibn (C.)- Hcber die Bcdingnn^n, iinter denen eine gAOte ratiou- 
ale Punction von mebreron Verfinderlichen die Tollstfcadige Potens 
eioer anderan datstellt. Berlin 1802. 4. M. 1.00 



ZOBAWSKi (K.), Uober Bicgiingsinvarianten. Eline Anwcndaag der 



Page line for read 

26 foot-note Rarm, Rahs. 

87 25 (5.), (6,). 

133 i Q. B. Zbkb, Q. B. M. Zbrb. 

" 17 twelve, twenty-four. 

163 1 9 Newman, NenmaDn. 



May 7, April 2. 

(a' _ S) _ (j + (), (a^- S) + (g + 0. 



INDEX. 



Acad^mie des Sciences, 198. 

Adams, John Couch, 143 ; Memorial of, 215. 

Airy, George Biddle, 142. 

Algebra, Fme*s Number System of, G. EnestrSm, 26. 

Algebraic Curves, Topology of, L. S. Hulburt, 197. 

Equation, KronecKer and his Arithmetical Theory of the, H. B. 

Pine, 173. 

Solution of Quartic Equations, M. Merriman, 202. 



Amendment to Constitution, 142, 198. 
American Association for the Advancement of Science, Washington 
Meeting, 80. 

Institute of Electrical Engineers, Transactions, 142. 

Journal of Mathematics, 55, 56, 142, 194. 

Analytical Geometry, A French, C. H. Chapman, 92. 
Annual Meeting of the German Mathematicians, A. Ziwet, 96. 

Meeting of the Society, 124. 

Association for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching, 169. 

for the Improvement of the Teaching of Mathematics and the 

Natural Sciences, 31. 
Astronomischo Gesellschaft, Catalo^e of the, T. H. Safford, 83. 
Astronomy, Greene's Spherical and Practical, J. K. Rees, 140. 
Authors of articles in tne Bulletin : 

B6cher, 225. Hulburt, 197. 

Brown, 206. Jacoby, 27, 28, 44, 189. 

Cajori, 184. Johnson, 1, 129. 

Chapman, 92, 150. Macfarlane, 189. 

Cole, 105. McClintock, 85. 

Davies, 75. Merriman, 89, 202. 

Davis, 16. Newcomb, 120. 

Duhem, 157. Rees, 140. 

Enestr5m, 26. Safford, 33. 

Fields, 48. Scott, 217. 

Fine, 173. Stabler, 123. 

Fiske. 12, 61. Wright, 46. 

Haskell, 228. Ziwet, 6, 42, 96, 145. 

Hathaway, 66. 
Ball, R. S., 170. 

Bertrand's Calcul des Probabilit^s, E. W. Davis, 16. 
Bibliographv. 57, 82, 103, 127, 143, 171, 195, 216, 283. 
Bibliotheca Mathematica, 26. 

Bdcher (M.): Collineation as a Mode of Motion, 225, 281. 
Boyd (J. H.): An Expression for the Total Surface of an Ellipsoid in 
Terms of d- and p- Functions, Including an Application to the Pro- 
late Spheroid, 231. 
Briot and Bouquet: Lemons de G^om^trie Analytique, 92. 
Brown (E. W.V, Poincar6's M6canique C61este, 206. 
Caiori (F.): Multiplication of Series, 184. 
Calcul des Probabilit^s, E. W. Davis, 16. 



838 IKDBX. 

Ounbridge University Press, 66, 108. 

Canon Pellianus, Di^n, 142. 

CaseT, John, 81. 

Catalogue of the Astronomische Qesellschaft, T. H. Salfoid, 88. 

Cajley (A.): On Lists of Coyariants, 142. 

Chapman (C. H.): A French Analytical Oeometry, 98 ; WeierstraBS and 
Dedekind on General Complex Numbers, 150. 

Clarendon Press, 58. 

Clark University, 102, 104. • 

Cole (F. K.): Klein's Modular Functions, 106. 

Collineation as a Mode of Motion, M. BScher, 225. 

Columbia Coll^;e, 80. 

Complex Numbers, Weierstrass and Dedekind on General, C. EL Chap- 
man, 150. 

Constitution. Amendment to, 142, 108. 

Covariants, Lists of, £. McClintock, 85, 142. 

Craig (TO: Treatise on Linear Differential Equations, 48. 

Dav^ (J. E.): Preston's Theory of Light, 75. 

Davis (£L W.): Bertrand's Caloul des Probabilit6s, 16. 

Dedekind and Weierstrass on Gtoeral Complex Numbers, C. H. Chap- 
man, 150. 

Degen's Canon Pellianus, 142. 

Deutsche Mathematiker- Yereinigung, 06, 282. 

Differential Calculus, by J. Edwards, C. A. Soott, 217. 

Equations, Craig*s Linear, J. C. Fields, 48. 

Equations, PicaM's Demonstration of the General Theorem upon 

the Ixistenoe of Integrals of Ordinary, T. S. Fiske, 12. 

Doubly Infinite Products, T. S. Fiske, 61. 

Duhem (P.), Emile Mathieu, his Life and Works, 157. 

Early History of the Potential, A. S. Hathaway, 66; Notes on, 126. 

Edward's Differential Calculus, C. A. Scott, 217.- 

Eight-figure Logarithm Tables, H. Jacoby, 188. 

Election of New Members of the Society, 54, 78, 124, 125, 142, 169, 108, 
215, 281. 

Enestrdm (6.) : Fine's Number System of Aleebra, 26. 

Engler (E. A.): Geometrical Construction for Finding Foci of Sections of 
a Cone of Revolution, 169. 

Errata, 236. 

Evans, Asher Benton, 56. 

Exact Analysis as the Basis of Language, A. Macfarlane, 189. 

Fargis (E. A.) and Uagen (J. G.): The Photochronograph, H. Jacoby, 
44. 

Ferrcl, William, 55. 

Fields (J. C): Craig*s Linear Differential Equations, 48; Transformation 
of a System of Independent Variables, 142. 

Final Formulas for the Algebraic Solution of Quartic Equations, M. 
Merrimau, 202. 

Fine(H. B.): Kronecker and his Arithmetical Theory of the Algebraic 
Equation, 178; Number System of Algebra, G. EnestrOm, 26, 

Fiske (T. S.): On the Doubly Infinite Products, 61 ; Picard's Demonstra- 
tion of the General Theorem upon the Existence of Integrals of 
Ordinary Differential Equations, 12. 

Fricke (R.): Felix Klein, Vorlesimgen Uber die Theorie der EllipUschen 
Modulfunctionen, 105. 

Frobenius, Professor, 215. 

Geometry, Oxford Examinations in, 169. 

German Mathematicians, Annual Meeting of, A. Ziwet. 96. 

Schools, Teaching of Elementary Geometry in, A. Ziwet, 6. 

Gescllschaft Deutscher Naturforscher und Aerzte, 64th Meeting, 79, 96. 



INDEX. 239 

Gilman (F.): Application of Least Squares to the Development of Func- 
tions, 125. 

Grand Prix des Sciences Math^matiques, 194. 

Qreene (D.): Introduction to Spherical and Practical Astronomy, 140. 

Hagen (J. U.) and Fargis (G. A.): The Photochronograph, H. Jacoby, 44. 

Hagen (J. G.): Synopsis der HSheren Mathematik, 31. 

HaU (T. P.): Cubic Projection and Elotation of a Tessaract, 193. 

Harvard University, 232. 

Haskell (M. W.): Note on Resultants, 223. 

Hathaway (A. S.): Early History of the Potential, 66; Notes on, 126. 

Hensel, Kurt, 215. 

Hilbert (D.): Algebraic Curves, 197. 

Hulburt (L. S.): Topology of Algebraic Curves, 197. 

Infinite Products, on the Doubly, T. S. Fiske, 61. 

Inhalt und Methode des Planimetrischen Unterrichts, H. Schotten, 6. 

Inland Press, 56, 169. 

Italian Mathematical Journal, A New, A. Ziwet, 42. 

Jacoby (H.) : Determination of Azimuth by Elongations of Polaris, 55; 
Eight-figure Logarithm Tables, 139; South American Longitudes, 
by J. A. Norris and Chas. Laird, 28; The Photochronograph, by 
J. G.iHagen, S. J. and E. A. Fargis, 44; West African Longitudes, 
by D. GiU, 27. 

Johnson (W. W.): Peters* Formula for Probable Error. 231; Octonary 
Numeration, 1 ; The Mechanical Axioms or Laws of Motion, 129. 

Johns Hopkins University, 81, 194. 

Klein's Modular Functions, F. N. Cole, 105. 

Kowalevski, Sophie, 31. 

Kronecker, Leopold, 142 ; 

His Aritnmetical Theory of the Algebraic Equation, H. B. Fine, 

173. 

Language, on Exact Analysis as the Basis of. A. Macfarlane, 189. 

Laverty (W. H.): The Laws of Motion, An Elementary Treatise on Dy- 
namics, A. Ziwet, 145. 

Laws of Motion, An Elementary Treatise on Dynamics, by W. H. 
Laverty, A. Ziwet, 145. 

Leach, She well and Sanborn, 126. 

Least Squares, a Problem in, M. Merriman, 39. 

Light, Preston's Theory of, J. E. Davies, 75. 

Lists of Covariants, E. McClintock, 85, 142. 

Logarithm Tables, Eight-figure, H. Jacoby, 139. 

London Mathematical Society, Honorary Members, 215. 

Longitudes, South American, by J. A. Norris and Ch. Laird, H. 
Jacoby, 28. 

West African, by D. Gill, H. Jacoby, 27. 

Lucas, Edouard, 81. 

Macfarlane (A.) : Fundamental Formulas of Analysis Generalized for 
Space, 215 ; On Exact Analysis as the Basis of Language, 189. 

Macmillan and Company, 143, 193. 

Marie, Maximilian, 31. 

Martin (A.) : Errors in Degen's Canon Pellianus, 142 ; On Powers of 
Numbers whose Sum is the Same Power of Some Number, 55. 

Mathematical Problems, E. L. Stabler, 123. 

Society of the University of Michigan, 80. 

Mathieu, Emile, His Life and Works, P. Duhem, 157. 

Matzka. Wilhelm, 31. 

McClintock (E.) : On the Computation of Covariants by Transvection, 
125 ; On Lists of Covariants, 85 ; Note, 142. 

M^ani(^ue Celeste, H. Poincar^, E. W. Brown, 206. 

Mechamcal Axioms or Laws of Motion, W. W. Johnson, 129. 




%inuL, m ^ >. lit. 2 

'. - V.-- 



iiTJl'C* 






X-L— TTT.I.T. rA 
> i'-li o IT. ill. 

/■'•^ ■--■"*." J .I.* if "jiy • :»Lr Ti-irtr r..!::**"*. "^. ^fw^.^nL?. 131. 
44 * ' _ -. 

/'■.•:ii"t*-«ri X-iJia^ t.-j*: f.Jt.j'r*!'*, Zl "ST. 3.- w-i. i5.»L 

?'."-■=--■»: • . J*- r- 1l 7. z — . *' Z. r»fc"j**. 75. 

{'-'■-^ '^ '■•-: ?J" "J <t ■ri.":u:o'"rs£L >-«:>*C;. il^. 

^•'''1-' '--',' V'*^^'''^ zi "-ijr* Tiff'rr "f- "-. 3. Jl ~ 
2>*r"n.-.i. * Tr-*.-.-* :r_ Z. '5'. Ih-a If. 



:jC£tXix «£ 



?r>ijwrt;.ip ;« -.jjft ^KOtfj. 54, ?5. lOl. 1*4. Iii5, Ifi. :«L !«. 



INDEX. 241* 

Publications, New, 57, 82, 108, 127, 148, 171, 195. 216, 238. 

Pupin (M. I.): On a Peculiar Family of Complex Harmonics, 101, 142. 

Ouartic Equations, Final Formulas for Solution of, M. Merriman, 202. 

Kecent Elementary Works on Mechanics, A. Ziwet, 145. 

Rees (J. K.): Greene's Spherical and Practical Astronomy, 140. 

Register Publishing Company, 58, 169. 

Resultants, Note on, M. W. Haskell, 228. 

Rivista di Matematica, 42, 282. 

Royal Astronomical Society of London, 55. 

Sanord (T. H.): Catalogue of the Astronomische Gesellschaft, 88. 

Sch5nfLies, Arthur, 232. 

Schotten (IL): Inhalt und Methode des Planimetrischen IJnterrichts, 6. 

Scbroeter, H. E., 169. 

Schwarz H. A. 194. 

Scott (C' A.'): Edward's Differential Calculus, 217. 

Series, Multiplication of, F. Cajori, 184. 

South American Longitudes, by J. A. Norris and Ch. Laird, H. Jacoby, 
28. 

Spherical and Practical Astronomy, Greene's Introduction to, J. K. Rees, 
140. 

Stabler (E. L.): Mathematical Problems, 128. 

Steinmetz(C. P.): On the Curves which are Self-Reciprocal in a Linear 
Nul-System, and Their Confi^ration in Space, 78. 

Stringham (1.): Classification of Logarithmic Systems, 55. 

Sturm, Rudolph, 194. 

Synopsis der H5heren Mathematik, J. G. Hagen, 81. 

Tait (P. G.): Note on Early History of the Potential, 126. 

Taylor (A. B.): Octonarv Numeration, 2. 

Teaching, Association for the Improvement of Geometrical, 169. 

Oi Elementary Geometry in German Schools, A. Ziwet, 6. 

Of Mathematics and the I^atural Sciences, Association for ImproY- 

ingthe, 31. 

Topology of Algebraic Curves, L. S. Hulburt, 197. 

Treasurer's Report, New York Mathematical Society, 125. 

University of Michigan Mathematical Society, 80. 

Weber, Wilhelm Eduard, 81, 232. 

Weber, H., 215. 

Weierstrass and Dedekind on General Complex Numbers, C. H. Chap- 
man, 150. 

West African Longitudes, by D. Gill, H. Jacoby, 27. 

Wiley (John) and Sons, 56. 81, 126. 

Wright (T. W.) : Nomenclature of Mechanics, 46. 

Zeitschrift fur den Math, und Naturwiss. Unterricht, 81. 

Zerr (G. B. M.): Solutions of Questions in the Theory of Probability and 
Averages, 123. 

Ziwet (A.): A new Italian Mathematical Journal, 42; Some Recent Ele- 
mentary Works on Mechanics, 145; The Annual Meeting of the 
German Mathematicians, 96; The Teaching of Elementary Geometry 
in German Schools, 6. 



16 



CONTENTS. 



\ 



'.->•••':■*•• 






^frV 






• .V* *